Basics of Fluid Mechanics

Genick Bar–Meir, Ph. D. 7449 North Washtenaw Ave Chicago, IL 60645 email:genick at potto.org

Copyright © 2011, 2010, 2009, 2008, 2007, and 2006 by Genick Bar-Meir See the file copying.fdl or copyright.tex for copying conditions. Version (0.3.1.1 December 21, 2011)

‘We are like dwarfs sitting on the shoulders of giants”

from The Metalogicon by John in 1159

CONTENTS

Nomenclature GNU Free Documentation License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . 2. VERBATIM COPYING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. COPYING IN QUANTITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. MODIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . 7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS . . . 8. TRANSLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. TERMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE . . . . . . . ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents How to contribute to this book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Credits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steven from artofproblemsolving.com . . . . . . . . . . . Dan H. Olson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Richard Hackbarth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . John Herbolenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eliezer Bar-Meir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Henry Schoumertate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your name here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typo corrections and other ”minor” contributions . . . . . Version 0.3.0.5 March 1, 2011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 400 size 3.5M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version 0.1.8 August 6, 2008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xvii xxv xxvi xxvii xxvii xxviii xxx xxx xxxi xxxi xxxi xxxi xxxii xxxiii xxxiii xxxiii xxxiv xxxiv xxxiv xxxiv xxxiv xxxiv xxxv xlv xlv xlv

iii

iv pages 189 size 2.6M . Version 0.1 April 22, 2008 . pages 151 size 1.3M . Properties . . . . . . Open Channel Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xlv . xlvi . xlvi . liii . liii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 3 5 6 9 9 10 11 12 22 22 24 33 37 47 47 55 55 57 57 58 58 58 59 61 65 66 67 67 68 71 71 71 73 73

1 Introduction to Fluid Mechanics 1.1 What is Fluid Mechanics? . . . . . 1.2 Brief History . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Kinds of Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 Shear Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.2 Non–Newtonian Fluids . . 1.5.3 Kinematic Viscosity . . . . 1.5.4 Estimation of The Viscosity 1.6 Fluid Properties . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.1 Fluid Density . . . . . . . 1.6.2 Bulk Modulus . . . . . . . 1.7 Surface Tension . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.1 Wetting of Surfaces . . . .

2 Review of Thermodynamics 2.1 Basic Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Review of Mechanics 3.1 Kinematics of of Point Body . . . . . 3.2 Center of Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1 Actual Center of Mass . . . . 3.2.2 Aproximate Center of Area . . 3.3 Moment of Inertia . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1 Moment of Inertia for Mass . . 3.3.2 Moment of Inertia for Area . . 3.3.3 Examples of Moment of Inertia 3.3.4 Product of Inertia . . . . . . . 3.3.5 Principal Axes of Inertia . . . . 3.4 Newton’s Laws of Motion . . . . . . . 3.5 Angular Momentum and Torque . . . 3.5.1 Tables of geometries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 Fluids Statics 4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 The Hydrostatic Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Pressure and Density in a Gravitational Field . . 4.3.1 Constant Density in Gravitational Field .

CONTENTS 4.3.2 Pressure Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.3 Varying Density in a Gravity Field . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.4 The Pressure Effects Due To Temperature Variations 4.3.5 Gravity Variations Effects on Pressure and Density . 4.3.6 Liquid Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluid in a Accelerated System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1 Fluid in a Linearly Accelerated System . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 Angular Acceleration Systems: Constant Density . . 4.4.3 Fluid Statics in Geological System . . . . . . . . . . Fluid Forces on Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 Fluid Forces on Straight Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 Forces on Curved Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Buoyancy and Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1 Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.2 Surface Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rayleigh–Taylor Instability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Qualetive questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

v 77 81 85 89 91 92 92 94 96 99 99 108 115 124 136 137 142

4.4

4.5

4.6

4.7 4.8

I

Integral Analysis
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

145
147 147 148 149 151 151 158 160 166 169 175 175 175 176 177 177 178 182 185 186 193 194 197

5 Mass Conservation 5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Control Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 Continuity Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.1 Non Deformable Control Volume . . . . . 5.3.2 Constant Density Fluids . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 Reynolds Transport Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 Examples For Mass Conservation . . . . . . . . . 5.6 The Details Picture – Velocity Area Relationship 5.7 More Examples for Mass Conservation . . . . . .

6 Momentum Conservation 6.1 Momentum Governing Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1 Introduction to Continuous . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.2 External Forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.3 Momentum Governing Equation . . . . . . . . . 6.1.4 Momentum Equation in Acceleration System . . 6.1.5 Momentum For Steady State and Uniform Flow . 6.2 Momentum Equation Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.1 Momentum for Unsteady State and Uniform Flow 6.2.2 Momentum Application to Unsteady State . . . . 6.3 Conservation Moment Of Momentum . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 More Examples on Momentum Conservation . . . . . . . 6.4.1 Qualitative Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

vi 7 Energy Conservation 7.1 The First Law of Thermodynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 Limitation of Integral Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Approximation of Energy Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.1 Energy Equation in Steady State . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.2 Energy Equation in Frictionless Flow and Steady State 7.4 Energy Equation in Accelerated System . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.1 Energy in Linear Acceleration Coordinate . . . . . . . 7.4.2 Linear Accelerated System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.3 Energy Equation in Rotating Coordinate System . . . . 7.4.4 Simplified Energy Equation in Accelerated Coordinate . 7.4.5 Energy Losses in Incompressible Flow . . . . . . . . . 7.5 Examples of Integral Energy Conservation . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 201 214 215 215 216 217 217 218 219 220 221 222

II

Differential Analysis
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

229
231 231 232 236 237 242 242 243 245 249 260 260 264 273 279 279 280 281 283 284 286 287 288 291 300 304 314

8 Differential Analysis 8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 Mass Conservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.1 Mass Conservation Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.2 Simplified Continuity Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 Conservation of General Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.1 Generalization of Mathematical Approach for Derivations 8.3.2 Examples of Several Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 Momentum Conservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 Derivations of the Momentum Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6 Boundary Conditions and Driving Forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.1 Boundary Conditions Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 Examples for Differential Equation (Navier-Stokes) . . . . . . . 8.7.1 Interfacial Instability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 Dimensional Analysis 9.1 Introductory Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.1 Brief History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.2 Theory Behind Dimensional Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.3 Dimensional Parameters Application for Experimental Study 9.1.4 The Pendulum Class Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 Buckingham–π–Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.1 Construction of the Dimensionless Parameters . . . . . . . . 9.2.2 Basic Units Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.3 Implementation of Construction of Dimensionless Parameters 9.2.4 Similarity and Similitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 Nusselt’s Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4 Summary of Dimensionless Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTENTS 9.4.1 The Significance of these Dimensionless Numbers . . . . . . . 9.4.2 Relationship Between Dimensionless Numbers . . . . . . . . . 9.4.3 Examples for Dimensional Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix summary of Dimensionless Form of Navier–Stokes Equations . . . . .

vii 318 321 322 325 325 331 331 331 332 333 334 335 339 340 343 344 346 347 348 350 351 353 354 361 363 363 364 366 368 374 374 375 377 380 382 385 387 389 389 390 391

9.5 9.6

10 Multi–Phase Flow 10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 What to Expect From This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4 Kind of Multi-Phase Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5 Classification of Liquid-Liquid Flow Regimes . . . . . . . . . 10.5.1 Co–Current Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6 Multi–Phase Flow Variables Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6.1 Multi–Phase Averaged Variables Definitions . . . . . 10.7 Homogeneous Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7.1 Pressure Loss Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7.2 Lockhart Martinelli Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8 Solid–Liquid Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8.1 Solid Particles with Heavier Density ρS > ρL . . . . 10.8.2 Solid With Lighter Density ρS < ρ and With Gravity 10.9 Counter–Current Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9.1 Horizontal Counter–Current Flow . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9.2 Flooding and Reversal Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10Multi–Phase Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A Mathematics For Fluid Mechanics A.1 Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.1 Vector Algebra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.2 Differential Operators of Vectors . . . . . . . . A.1.3 Differentiation of the Vector Operations . . . . A.2 Ordinary Differential Equations (ODE) . . . . . . . . . A.2.1 First Order Differential Equations . . . . . . . . A.2.2 Variables Separation or Segregation . . . . . . A.2.3 Non–Linear Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.4 Second Order Differential Equations . . . . . . A.2.5 Non–Linear Second Order Equations . . . . . . A.2.6 Third Order Differential Equation . . . . . . . A.2.7 Forth and Higher Order ODE . . . . . . . . . . A.2.8 A general Form of the Homogeneous Equation A.3 Partial Differential Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3.1 First-order equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.4 Trigonometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

viii

CONTENTS

Index 393 Subjects Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Authors Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

LIST OF FIGURES

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.14 1.15 1.16 1.17 1.18 1.19 1.20 1.21 1.22 1.23 1.24 3.1 3.2

Diagram to explain fluid mechanics branches . . . . . . . Density as a function of the size of sample. . . . . . . . Schematics to describe the shear stress in fluid mechanics The deformation of fluid due to shear stress . . . . . . . The difference of power fluids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nitrogen and Argon viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The shear stress as a function of the shear rate. . . . . . Air viscosity as a function of the temperature. . . . . . . Water viscosity as a function temperature. . . . . . . . . Liquid metals viscosity as a function of the temperature . Reduced viscosity as function of the reduced temperature Reduced viscosity as function of the reduced temperature Concentrating cylinders with the rotating inner cylinder . Rotating disc in a steady state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Water density as a function of temperature . . . . . . . Two liquid layers under pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surface tension control volume analysis . . . . . . . . . Glass tube inserted into mercury . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capillary rise between two plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forces in Contact angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of wetting and non–wetting fluids. . . . . . . Description of the liquid surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . The raising height as a function of the radii . . . . . . . The raising height as a function of the radius . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 6 6 7 9 10 10 11 12 14 17 18 20 21 22 27 33 35 36 37 38 40 42 43 56 57

Description of the extinguish nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of how the center of mass is calculated . . . . . . . . . . .

ix

. . Description of parabola . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 59 60 61 61 62 62 63 63 64 66 71 74 74 75 76 78 79 80 81 84 87 89 92 93 94 94 95 96 99 100 101 103 104 107 108 109 110 110 111 112 113 114 . . . .9 4. . . . . . . . Description of a fluid element in accelerated system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product of inertia for triangle . .13 4. . . . . . . . . . . . .8 4. .11 4. . .30 4. . . Moment of inertia for rectangular . . . . . . . .10 3. . .23 4. . . Moment on arc element around Point “O” . . . The varying gravity effects on density and pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triangle for example 3. . . . . . . . . . The general forces acting on non symmetrical straight area . . . The general forces acting on submerged area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polynomial shape dam description . . . . . . .1 4. . . . . . Rectangular area under pressure . . . . . . . .29 4. . . . . . . . . .10 4. . . .9 . . . . . . . .6 4. . . . . . . . . . . Schematic to explain the angular angle . . . . . . . . .14 4.2 4. . . . . . . The effective gravity is for accelerated cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth layers not to scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . The ratio of the moment of inertia 2D to 3D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 4. .27 4. . . .4 3. Two adjoin layers for stability analysis . . . .7 3.9 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A cart slide on inclined plane . . . . . . . . .24 4. . . . . . . Forces diagram of cart sliding on inclined plane . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 3. . . . . . . Hydrostatic pressure under a compressible liquid phase . . . . Inverted manometer . . Schematic of sensitive measurement device . . . . . .31 4. . . . The schematic to explain the summation of moment of inertia. . . .20 4. . . . . . . . . . .8 3. . . .21 4. .26 4. . . . . . . Circular shape Dam . Pressure lines in a static constant density fluid . . . . The effects of multi layers density on static forces . . . .6 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The general forces acting on a non symmetrical straight area . . .3 4. . . . . Area above the dam arc calculation for the center . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 4. . . . Schematic angular angle to explain example 4. . . . . . The difference between the slop and the direction angle . . . . . . . . . .3 3. . . .moment of inertia and center of area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Area above the dam arc subtract triangle . .19 4. . . The forces on curved area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 4. . . . .15 4. . . . . .7 4.5 4. . . . . . .x 3. . . . . . . .11 3. . . .32 LIST OF FIGURES Thin body center of mass/area schematic. Inclined manometer . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of rectangular in x–y plane. . . . The schematic that explains the summation of moment of inertia. . . . . .12 3. . . . . . . . . . .18 4. . . Schematic of gas measurement utilizing the “U” tube . .7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cylinder with an element for calculation moment of inertia . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic of Net Force on floating body . . . . . . . . . . . A schematic to explain the atmospheric pressure measurement The effective gravity is for accelerated cart . . . . . A square element for the calculations of inertia. . . . . . . . . . .12 4. . .25 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 4. . . . . . . . . . Tank and the effects different liquids . . . . . . . Schematic of submerged area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . Control volume and system in motion . Stability of cubic body infinity long . . . . . Schematics of velocities at the interface . . . . Flow out of un symmetrical tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circular cross section for finding Ux . .47 4. . . . . . . . . . . The maximum height reverse as a function of density ratio . . . . Nozzle schematic for forces calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 5. . Toy Sled pushed by the liquid jet . . . .41 4. . Schematics of flow in a pipe with varying density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 6. . . . . The explaination for the direction relative to surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 4. . . .39 4. .12 6.48 4. . . . . . . . .4 6. . . . . . . Height of the liquid for example 5.10 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic of a tank seating on wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 5.33 4. .36 4. . .2 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 4. . . Schematic of a thin wall floating body . . .44 4. . . . Three liquids layers under rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 6. . . . .12 Schematic of Immersed Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of depression to explain the Rayleigh–Taylor instability Description of depression to explain the instability . . . . . . Schematic of floating bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculations of GM for abrupt shape body . . . . . . .42 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematics of area impinged by a jet .34 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 5. . . . . . . . . . .3 5. . . . . . . Propeller schematic to explain the change of momentum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 6. . . Control volume usage to calculate local averaged velocity Control volume and system in the motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boat for example 5. .LIST OF FIGURES 4. . . . . .37 4. . . . . . . . Piston control volume . A heavy needle is floating on a liquid. .11 5.14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 4. . Stability of two triangles put tougher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cubic body dimensions for stability analysis . . . . . Measurement of GM of floating body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . A new control volume to find the velocity in discharge tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 5. . . The impeller of the centrifugal pump and the velocities diagram Nozzle schematics water rocket . . . . . . The effects of liquid movement on the GM . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic of floating cubic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 6. . . . . . . .8 5. . . . . . . . .6 6. . . . . . Filling of the bucket and choices of the control volumes . . . . . . . . . . . Velocity for a circular shape . . . The floating forces on Immersed Cylinder . . . .40 4. . . . . . . . . . . .49 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 4. . . . .50 5. . . . . . . .11 6. . A rocket with a moving control volume . . Stability analysis of floating body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary Layer control mass . The cross section of the interface for max liquid. . . . . . xi 115 116 117 125 125 126 129 129 130 131 132 134 135 137 138 139 140 142 147 148 149 150 153 156 161 166 167 168 169 170 176 179 181 183 184 185 188 189 193 194 198 198 The explaination for the direction relative to surface . .8 6. . . . .2 5. . . .9 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . Flow between two plates when the top moving . Flow in an oscillating manometer . .3 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linear strain of the element . . .20 8. . .3 8. . . Different fields of multi phase flow. . One dimensional flow with shear between plates . . . . . . . . . . .2 8. . . . . 202 204 206 214 214 214 214 214 222 225 225 232 234 236 238 246 247 248 249 251 252 254 254 254 255 260 263 263 264 265 266 268 271 273 284 285 291 318 333 335 336 336 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stress diagram on a tetrahedron shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kinetic Energy and Averaged Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pendulum for dimensional analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oscillating Von Karman Vortex Street . . .04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 7. .1 9. . . Resistance of infinite cylinder . . .5 . Mass flow due to temperature difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (a) Deformations of the isosceles triangular . . . . . Different rectangles deformations . . . . . . . Stratified flow in horizontal tubes when the liquids flow is very slow. . . .8 8. . . . . . . . . . . Flow driven by surface tension . . . . . . .4 8. . . . . .19 8. . . .18 8. . . . . . . . . . . . Fitting rod into a hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical resistance for selected outlet configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 10.xii 7. . . . . Control volume at t and t + dt under continuous angle deformation Shear stress at two coordinates in 45◦ orientations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 9. . . . (c) Rounded inlet pipe K=0. . . . The control volume of liquid element in “short cut” . Flow of Liquid between concentric cylinders . . . The shear stress at different surfaces . . . . . . . . . (b) Deformations of the straight angle triangle . . . . . . . . .16 8. . . .1 7. . . . . . . . . . . The shear stress creating torque . . Plug flow in horizontal tubes with the liquids flow is faster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 The work on the control volume . A long pipe exposed to a sudden pressure difference Liquid exiting a large tank trough a long tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tank control volume for Example 7. . . . . . . . . . .3 9. . . . . . Mass flow in coating process . .1 8. . . .2 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 8. . . . . . . . . . LIST OF FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 7. . . . . .2 . . . .6 7. .13 8. .5 8. . . .4 The mass balance on the infinitesimal control volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass flow due to temperature difference . . .17 8. . . . . . . . . . 1–Dimensional free surface . . .15 8. . . . Diagram to analysis the shear stress tensor . . . . . . (b) Sharp edge pipe connection K=0. .9 8. . . . . . . . .5 7. (a) Projecting pipe K= 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 8. . . .14 8. . . . . . . . The mass conservation in cylindrical coordinates . . . . . Discharge from a Large Container . . . . . . . .10 8. . . . . . Kind of Stratified flow in horizontal tubes. . . .4 10. . .21 9. .1 10.7 8. . .6 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . Liquid flow due to gravity . . Flow in kerosene lamp . . . .

. . . A. . . . 10. . . . .LIST OF FIGURES 10. . . . . . . . . .11Counter–current flow in a can. . 10. .5 A. 10. . . . . . . . . . . .6 Gas and liquid in Flow in verstical tube against the gravity. . . . . . . . .16General forces diagram to calculated the in a two dimension geometry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10Counter–flow in vertical tubes map. . . .3 A. . . . . . .15A diagram to explain the flood in a two dimension geometry. . . . . . . .8 The terminal velocity that left the solid particles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 A. . . . . . . . 10. 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 A. . . . . . . . . . . 10. . . . Cylindrical Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 A. . . . xiii 337 338 339 349 350 351 352 352 353 354 354 360 363 364 370 371 372 373 391 . . . . . . . .5 Modified Mandhane map for flow regime in horizontal tubes. . 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The general Orthogonal with unit vectors . . . . .13Flood in vertical pipe. .9 The flow patterns in solid-liquid flow. . . . . . . .7 A dimensional vertical flow map low gravity against gravity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. . . . . .7 Vector in Cartesian coordinates system . . . . . . . . . . . . Parabolic coordinates by user WillowW using Blender The tringle angles sides .6 A.14A flow map to explain the horizontal counter–current flow. . . Spherical Coordinate System . .12Image of counter-current flow in liquid–gas/solid–gas configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. . The right hand rule . . . . . . 10. . 10. . . . . . . .

xiv LIST OF FIGURES .

. .6 Books Under Potto Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gold grain dimensional matrix . . Properties at the critical stage . . .2 9. .7 1. .1 3. . . Units of the Pendulum . .2 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The contact angle for air/water with selected materials. . . . . . . . . . . . .6 1. . . . . . . . . . . .3 9. . . . . continue . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 1.7 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 1. . . . . . . . . Viscosity of selected liquids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . continue . . . . .5 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 1. . . . Dimensional matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 9. . xv . . . .5 1. . . continue . . . .7 1. . . . . . . . . . . xlii Sutherland’s equation coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Units of Two Common Systems . . . . . . . . . The surface tension for selected materials. . . . . . . . . . . continue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continue . . . . . . . 13 13 14 15 24 25 38 39 44 45 46 52 69 70 281 282 285 289 290 291 293 299 300 Properties of Various Ideal Gases [300K] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . continue . . . . .3 9. . . . Moments of Inertia full shape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .LIST OF TABLES 1 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Units for Two Common Systems continue . . . . . . . . . .1 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 9.3 1. . . . . . . Units of the Pendulum . . . . . .4 9. . . Viscosity of selected gases . . . Moment of inertia for various plane surfaces . . . . . . . . . Bulk modulus for selected materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Orthogonal coordinates systems (under construction please ignore) . . . . . . . . . . .xvi 9. . . . . . . . . continue . . . . . the Field . . . . . . . . . 304 315 316 317 A. . . . . . . . . . .8 Units of the Pendulum . . . . . . .8 9. . . . . . . . . . 374 . . . . . . . . . . . .7 9. . . . . . . LIST OF TABLES . .8 9. Common Dimensionless Parameters of Thermo–Fluid in continue . . . . . .

see equation (4. see equation (5. page 347 The area of surface.17).9). see equation (10. page 71 Body force. see equation (1. page 51 Specific volume heat.v.1). page 51 Internal energy. page 175 Martinelli parameter. see equation (4.NOMENCLATURE ¯ R τ Universal gas constant. page 177 The velocity taken with the direction. page 49 subscribe for control volume. see equation (1. Cp Cv EU bulk viscosity. see equation (2.11). page 148 Specific pressure heat..0).7).101).136). see equation (6. page 12 reference viscosity at reference temperature.0). page 48 xvii .3).38).22). page 193 viscosity at input temperature T. see equation (6. see equation (8.43). page 258 Angular Momentum. see equation (6. see equation (2. page 12 External forces by non–fluids means. page 108 The acceleration of object or system.17).1).26). page 47 λ M µ µ0 F ext U Ξ A a Bf c. see equation (2. see equation (2. page 51 The shear stress Tenser. page 176 Units length.23). Ti0 . see equation (2. see equation (6. see equation (2.

see equation (2.42). see equation (3. see equation (2.67). page 202 Angular momentum. page 48 Specific gas constant. page 90 general Body force.6). see equation (2.1. see equation (1.14). see equation (5. see equation (2.18). page 148 . see equation (2. page 12 input temperature in degrees Kelvin.17).0). see equation (2.13).104). page 12 velocity .4). page 51 Fluid thermal conductivity. page 52 Entropy of the system.27).2). page 48 The gravitation constant.24). see equation (1. see equation (2. see equation (2. page 48 System energy at state i.2). page 73 Subscribe says.3). page 48 Work per unit mass. see equation (2. see equation (2.6).xviii Eu Ei G gG H h k kT L Internal Energy per unit mass. page 101 q Q12 R S Suth Tτ Ti0 Tin U w W12 z says Energy per unit mass. see equation (4.2). see equation (7. see equation (1. see equation (2. see equation (4.0).40). page 50 Specific enthalpy. see equation (2.17). page 68 reference temperature in degrees Kelvin. page 50 Suth is Sutherland’s constant and it is presented in the Table 1. page 67 LIST OF TABLES Patmos Atmospheric Pressure. page 48 The energy transfered to the system between state 1 and state 2. see equation (4. page 48 The work done by the system between state 1 and state 2. see equation (4.18).17). page 71 Enthalpy. page 12 Torque. see equation (3. page 48 the coordinate in z direction.6). page 50 the ratio of the specific heats.

The Book Change Log Version 0.3.4 Feb 23.6 M 446 pages) ˆ Addition of the Dimensional Analysis chapter skeleton.1.5 M 392 pages) ˆ Insert discussion about Pushka equation and bulk modulus.3.1 Dec 21. ˆ English and minor corrections in various chapters. Version 0.1. xix .6 M 452 pages) ˆ Minor additions to the Dimensional Analysis chapter. 2011 (3. 2011 (3. 2011 (3.0.3. ˆ English and addition of other minor exampls in various chapters.0 Dec 13. ˆ English and minor corrections in various chapters. Version 0. ˆ Addition of several examples integral Energy chapter.

Version 0.3.3 M 378 pages) ˆ Add additional discussion about bulk modulus of geological system. ˆ Improvement of properties chapter. Version 0.artofproblemsolving.0. ˆ Improve English in several chapters. 2010 (3.0. ˆ Addition of several examples.xx LIST OF TABLES Version 0. This addition was to go the compressible book and will migrate to there when the book will brought up to code. ˆ Add several examples on surface tension. 2010 (3.0.3 M 358 pages) ˆ Add discussion change of density on buck modulus calculations as example as integral equation. ˆ Brought the mass conservation chapter to code. ˆ Build the chapter log file for latex (macro) process Steven from www.3. ˆ Addition of several examples with respect speed of sound with variation density under bulk modulus.3.3. 2010 (3. 2010 (3. ˆ Improve English in several chapters. ˆ Add discussion about inclined manometer . Version 0.3 Dec 5.3 M 354 pages) ˆ Change the emphasis equations to new style in Static chapter.0 Oct 24.1 Nov 12. ˆ additional examples in mass conservation chapter.3 M 362 pages) ˆ Further improved the script for the chapter log file for latex (macro) process.2 Nov 19.0.com. ˆ Minimal discussion of converting integral equation to differential equations. ˆ Add discussion change of bulk modulus of mixture.

ˆ Additions to the mathematical appendix on vector algebra.2. ˆ Minor correction to to the wording in page 11 viscosity density issue (thanks to Prashant Balan). ˆ Improve the emphasis macro for the important equation and useful equation. 2010 (3.9 Sep 20. ˆ Improve English in static and mostly in differential analysis chapter. 2010 (2. 2010 (3. Version 0.9 M 280 pages) ˆ The energy conservation chapter was released.2. . ˆ Add to the appendix the differentiation of vector operations. ˆ Add example to dif chap on concentric cylinders poiseuille flow.6 March 10. Version 0.9 M 280 pages) ˆ add example to Mechanical Chapter and some spelling corrected.LIST OF TABLES ˆ Improve many figures and equations in Static chapter. ˆ Add example.2. xxi ˆ Add example of falling liquid gravity as driving force in presence of shear stress.3 M 344 pages) ˆ Change the emphasis equations to new style in Thermo chapter. ˆ Some additions to mass conservation chapter on averaged velocity.1 Oct 11. ˆ Some additions to momentum conservation chapter.3 M 338 pages) ˆ Initial release of the differential equations chapter.4 March 01.2. ˆ Correct the ideal gas relationship typo thanks to Michal Zadrozny. change to the new empheq format and improve cylinder figure. Version 0. 2010 (2. Version 0.9.

ˆ Add the macro protect to insert figure in lower right corner thanks to Steven from www.1. ˆ Add Reynold’s Transform explanation. ˆ Add the first draft of the temperature-velocity diagram to the Therm’s chapter.2. . 2010 (2. ˆ Improve the dwarfing macro to allow flexibility with sub title. Thanks to Eliezer Bar-Meir Version 0.artofproblemsolving ˆ Add example about the the third component of the velocity.6 M 219 pages) ˆ The mass conservation chapter was released.1. ˆ Corrections to Static Chapter. Thanks to Eliezer Bar-Meir Version 0.com.3 Jan 01.5 M 203 pages) ˆ First true draft for the mass conservation.xxii LIST OF TABLES ˆ Additions to the mathematical appendix on variables separation in second order ode equations. ˆ English corrections.artofproblemsolving. ˆ Add the open question concept.artofproblemsolving. 2009 (2. ˆ Add the macro ekes to equations in examples thanks to Steven from www. ˆ English corrections.9 Dec 01. ˆ English corrections.8. Two open questions were released. Thanks to Eliezer Bar-Meir Version 0.8 M 241 pages) ˆ The momentum conservation chapter was released.5 Nov 01. ˆ Add the macro to improve emphases equation thanks to Steven from www. ˆ Add example on angular rotation to statics chapter. 2009 (2.

1. ˆ Correcting the gas properties tables (thanks to Heru and Micheal) ˆ Move the gas tables to common area to all the books.1 Sep 17.8a July 5. ˆ Add an example to mechanics chapter.1.5a Jun 11.3 M 151 pages) ˆ Fix the English in the introduction chapter. ˆ Improve the doChap scrip to break up the book to chapters. ˆ Add some examples to static chapter.4 M 155 pages) ˆ Add the constant table list for the introduction chapter.1. 2008 (1. .4 M 189 pages) ˆ Add the chapter on introduction to muli–phase flow ˆ Again additional improvement to the index (thanks to Irene).5 M 197 pages) ˆ Continue fixing the long titles issues. 2008 (2. ˆ Add the Rayleigh–Taylor instability.8 Aug 6.LIST OF TABLES xxiii Version 0. 2009 (2.6 M 183 pages) ˆ Fixing some long titles issues.1. ˆ Improve the Index (thanks to Irene).6 Jun 30. Version 0. 2008 (1. ˆ Fix minor issues (English) in the introduction chapter.1. Version 0. 2009 (2. ˆ Remove the multiphase chapter (it is not for public consumption yet). Version 0. (thanks to Tousher).8. Version 0.

2008 ˆ The Thermodynamics chapter was released.1.1a April 23. ˆ The mechanics chapter was released. ˆ Minor corrections for all three chapters.5 Jun 5.4 M 149 pages) ˆ Add the introduction.1a April 23. Version 0.1.1 M 111 pages) ˆ Major English corrections for the three chapters. ˆ Add the product of inertia to mechanics chapter. 2008 (1. 2008 (1. ˆ Fix very minor issues (English) in the static chapter. . Version 0. ˆ The static chapter was released (the most extensive and detailed chapter). viscosity and other properties of fluid.1 May 8. 2008 Version 0.xxiv LIST OF TABLES Version 0.

Boston. The change of the license is to prevent from situations that the author has to buy his own book. this License preserves for the author and xxv . you are required to furnish the author with two (2) copies of the printed book. textbook. but changing it is not allowed.Notice of Copyright For This Document: This document is published under modified FDL. or other functional and useful document ”free” in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it. Fifth Floor. MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document.” Version 1. The Potto Project License doesn’t long apply to this document and associated docoments. Inc. Secondarily. ”If you print more than 200 copies. with or without modifying it.2002 Free Software Foundation. either commercially or noncommercially. GNU Free Documentation License The modification is that under section 3 “copying in quantity” should be add in the end. November 2002 Copyright ©2000. 51 Franklin St.2001. Preamble The purpose of this License is to make a manual.2.

in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. philosophical. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS This License applies to any manual or other work. to use that work under the conditions stated herein. You accept the license if you copy. Such a notice grants a world-wide. or of legal. If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none. A ”Secondary Section” is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document’s overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. It complements the GNU General Public License. A ”Modified Version” of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it. either copied verbatim. unlimited in duration. in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. which is a copyleft license designed for free software. regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. below. A ”Transparent” copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy. (Thus. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference. royalty-free license. while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others. it can be used for any textual work. The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections. represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public. refers to any such manual or work. This License is a kind of ”copyleft”.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters. ethical or political position regarding them. The ”Document”. But this License is not limited to software manuals. and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words. or with modifications and/or translated into another language. commercial. Any member of the public is a licensee. We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software. The ”Invariant Sections” are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated. as being those of Invariant Sections. A Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words. If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant. 1. a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics. that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for . as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts. if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics.xxvi LIST OF TABLES publisher a way to get credit for their work. The ”Cover Texts” are certain short passages of text that are listed. modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law. that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. and is addressed as ”you”. because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. in any medium.

A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup. SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD. such as ”Acknowledgements”. the title page itself. A section ”Entitled XYZ” means a named subunit of the Document whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following text that translates XYZ in another language. preceding the beginning of the body of the text. 3. These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this License. Examples of transparent image formats include PNG. provided that this License. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3. either commercially or noncommercially. Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup. and the machine-generated HTML. and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. and standard-conforming simple HTML. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such. COPYING IN QUANTITY . The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which states that this License applies to the Document. However. under the same conditions stated above. LaTeX input format.GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE xxvii images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor. the copyright notices. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute.) To ”Preserve the Title” of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a section ”Entitled XYZ” according to this definition. 2. and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies. PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only. and you may publicly display copies. (Here XYZ stands for a specific section name mentioned below. or ”History”. An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text. ”Title Page” means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work’s title. ”Endorsements”. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors. ”Dedications”. Texinfo input format. the material this License requires to appear in the title page. SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available. The ”Title Page” means. VERBATIM COPYING You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium. You may also lend copies. XCF and JPG. but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no effect on the meaning of this License. for a printed book. A copy that is not ”Transparent” is called ”Opaque”. has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. plus such following pages as are needed to hold. legibly. or absence of markup. PostScript or PDF designed for human modification.

as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions. to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document. you must do these things in the Modified Version: A. or state in or with each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general network-using public has access to download using public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. B. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. and from those of previous versions (which should. to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.xxviii LIST OF TABLES If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have printed covers) of the Document. when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity. In addition. and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Copying with changes limited to the covers. as the publisher. if it has fewer than five). you must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy. free of added material. You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission. numbering more than 100. you must enclose the copies in covers that carry. you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover. and the Document’s license notice requires Cover Texts. and continue the rest onto adjacent pages. MODIFICATIONS You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above. C. provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License. 4. that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies. You may add other material on the covers in addition. but not required. with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document. thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. if any) a title distinct from that of the Document. as authors. List on the Title Page. If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly. . together with at least five of the principal authors of the Document (all of its principal authors. you must take reasonably prudent steps. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the Modified Version. be listed in the History section of the Document). can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects. clearly and legibly. one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version. If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100. If you use the latter option. It is requested. all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover. if there were any. unless they release you from this requirement.

unaltered in their text and in their titles. or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission. in the form shown in the Addendum below. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers. given in the Document for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document. new authors. and add to it an item stating at least the title. add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version’s license notice.GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE D. a license notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the terms of this License. Preserve the section Entitled ”History”. Preserve the network location. For any section Entitled ”Acknowledgements” or ”Dedications”. If there is no section Entitled ”History” in the Document. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document’s license notice. K. then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence. To do this. If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document. year. and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. N. Preserve the Title of the section. . H. Preserve its Title. you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document. year. J. and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page. if any. authors. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles. O. M. Such a section may not be included in the Modified Version. create one stating the title. F. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles. Include. G. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled ”Endorsements” or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section. Delete any section Entitled ”Endorsements”. These may be placed in the ”History” section. L. and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. immediately after the copyright notices. xxix E. I. Include an unaltered copy of this License. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices. and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein. You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself.

6. unmodified. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents. to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects. If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover. and distribute it individually under this License. on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one. and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection. 5. The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version. In the combination. in parentheses. . and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document. You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text. You must delete all sections Entitled ”Endorsements”. or else a unique number. You may extract a single document from such a collection. and any sections Entitled ”Dedications”. and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers. you must combine any sections Entitled ”History” in the various original documents. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work. previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of. you may not add another. provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents. provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties–for example. and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it. COMBINING DOCUMENTS You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License. and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice. under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions. the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. but you may replace the old one. provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document.xxx LIST OF TABLES You may add a section Entitled ”Endorsements”. forming one section Entitled ”History”. statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard. and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text. The combined work need only contain one copy of this License. likewise combine any sections Entitled ”Acknowledgements”.

Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate. the requirement (section 4) to Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual title. or rights. You may include a translation of this License. TERMINATION You may not copy. and all the license notices in the Document.org/copyleft/. See http://www. revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. 10. 9. in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium. modify. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE The Free Software Foundation may publish new. is called an ”aggregate” if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original version of this License or a notice or disclaimer. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version. parties who have received copies.GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE xxxi 7. However. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works. or distribute the Document except as expressly provided for under this License. modify.gnu. but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. Any other attempt to copy. When the Document is included in an aggregate. so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. sublicense or distribute the Document is void. this License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the Document. TRANSLATION Translation is considered a kind of modification. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License ”or any later . Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders. and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. and any Warranty Disclaimers. If a section in the Document is Entitled ”Acknowledgements”. or ”History”. then if the Document is less than one half of the entire aggregate. sublicense. provided that you also include the original English version of this License and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers. 8. or the electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. ”Dedications”. Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. the Document’s Cover Texts may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate. If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document. the original version will prevail.

or some other combination of the three. Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ”GNU Free Documentation License”. and no BackCover Texts. If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts. to permit their use in free software. and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.. ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents To use this License in a document you have written. with no Invariant Sections. such as the GNU General Public License. Permission is granted to copy. If you have Invariant Sections. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License. distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License. . no Front-Cover Texts. you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.. you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. merge those two alternatives to suit the situation. replace the ”with. If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code.2 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. with the FrontCover Texts being LIST. we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license.Texts. include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page: Copyright ©YEAR YOUR NAME.xxxii LIST OF TABLES version” applies to it. Version 1.” line with this: with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES.

this book is open to revisions and expansions by any interested parties. date. Minor contributions (typo corrections.CONTRIBUTOR LIST How to contribute to this book As a copylefted work. 2009 xxxiii . you must follow the same guidelines as for any other GDL copyrighted work. Credits All entries have been arranged in alphabetical order of surname (hopefully. Any and all contributions are gratefully accepted. etc. etc. Dec.) are listed by name only for reasons of brevity. Please understand that when I classify a contribution as ”minor. Major contributions are listed by individual name with some detail on the nature of the contribution(s).com Steven from artofproblemsolving. This is a copyrighted work: it is not in the public domain! If you wish to cite portions of this book in a work of your own. ˆ Contact at: barmeir at gmail. just smaller in the sense of less text changed. contact info. The only ”catch” is that credit must be given where credit is due.” it is in no way inferior to the effort or value of a ”major” contribution. and resources to make this a better book! ˆ Date(s) of contribution(s): 1999 to present ˆ Nature of contribution: Original author.com ˆ Date(s) of contribution(s): June 2005. time. I am indebted to all those who have given freely of their own knowledge.

Henry Schoumertate ˆ Date(s) of contribution(s): Nov 2009 ˆ Nature of contribution: Discussion on the mathematics of Reynolds Transforms. ˆ Nature of contribution: In 2009 creating the exEq macro to have different counter for example. help on building the useful equation and important equation macros. Olson ˆ Date(s) of contribution(s): April 2008 ˆ Nature of contribution: Some discussions about chapter on mechanics and correction of English. John Herbolenes ˆ Date(s) of contribution(s): August 2009 ˆ Nature of contribution: Provide some example for the static chapter.xxxiv LIST OF TABLES ˆ Nature of contribution: LaTeX formatting. Richard Hackbarth ˆ Date(s) of contribution(s): April 2008 ˆ Nature of contribution: Some discussions about chapter on mechanics and correction of English.net . describing how you contributed to the book. Eliezer Bar-Meir ˆ Date(s) of contribution(s): Nov 2009. ˆ Contact at: my email@provider. Dec 2009 ˆ Nature of contribution: Correct many English mistakes Mass. Dan H. Your name here ˆ Date(s) of contribution(s): Month and year of contribution ˆ Nature of contribution: Insert text here. ˆ Nature of contribution: Correct many English mistakes Momentum.

ˆ Corretion to equation (2. January 2008. help with the original img macro and other ( LaTeX issues).38) by Michal Zadrozny. ˆ Tousher Yang April 2008. Gupta.CREDITS xxxv Typo corrections and other ”minor” contributions ˆ R. (Nov 2010) . (Nov 2010) Corretion to wording in viscosity density Prashant Balan. review of statics and thermo chapters.

xxxvi LIST OF TABLES .

the critical piston velocity in a partially filled chamber (related to hydraulic jump). and Canada. Moreover. Dr. Much of his time has been spend doing research in the field of heat and mass transfer (related to renewal energy issues) and this includes fluid mechanics related to manufacturing processes and design. Bar-Meir was mainly interested in elegant models whether they have or not a practical applicability. As the change in the view occurred. British industry. For example.G. These models have been extended by several research groups (needless to say with large research grants). Bar-Meir was the last student of the late Dr. These models are based on analytical solution to a family of equations1 . The author enjoys to encourage his students to understand the material beyond the basic requirements of exams. and the CICYT and the European Commission provides 1FD97-2333 grants for minor aspects of that models. In the area of compressible flow. books and software. He developed models for Mass Transfer in high concentration that became a building blocks for many other models. in GM.About This Author Genick Bar-Meir holds a Ph. R. All the models have practical applicability. In his early part of his professional life. this author’s views had changed and the virtue of the practical part of any model becomes the essential part of his ideas. the author’s models were used in numerical works. in Mechanical Engineering from University of Minnesota and a Master in Fluid Mechanics from Tel Aviv University. application of supply and demand to rapid change power system and etc. xxxvii . the Spanish Comision Interministerial provides grants TAP97-0489 and PB98-0007. it was commonly believed and taught that there is only weak and strong shock and it is continue by Prandtl–Meyer function.D. Bar-Meir developed models that explained several manufacturing processes such the rapid evacuation of gas from containers. he spends time writing books (there are already three very popular books) and softwares for the POTTO project (see Potto Prologue).E. Eckert. Now. Bar– 1 Where the mathematicians were able only to prove that the solution exists. Currently. Spain.

The common explanation to Prandtl–Meyer function shows that flow can turn in a sharp corner. He also build analytical solution to several moving shock cases.xxxviii LIST OF TABLES Meir discovered the analytical solution for oblique shock and showed that there is a quiet buffer between the oblique shock and Prandtl–Meyer. The author lives with his wife and three children. practically from scratch. he often feels clueless about computers and programing. Engineers have constructed design that based on this conclusion. While he is known to look like he knows about many things. The author’s explanations on missing diameter and other issues in fanno flow and ““naughty professor’s question”” are used in the industry. He described and categorized the filling and evacuating of chamber by compressible fluid in which he also found analytical solutions to cases where the working fluid was ideal gas. the author just know to learn quickly. He built a model to explain the flooding problem (two phase flow) based on the physics. A past project of his was building a four stories house. The author spent years working on the sea (ships) as a engine sea officer but now the author prefers to remain on solid ground. . All the previous models for the flooding phenomenon did not have a physical explanation to the dryness. In his book “Basics of Fluid Mechanics”. While he writes his programs and does other computer chores. Bar-Meir demonstrated that common Prandtl–Meyer explanation violates the conservation of mass and therefor the turn must be around a finite radius. Bar-Meir demonstrated that fluids must have wavy surface when the materials flow together. He also constructed and explained many new categories for two flow regimes.

when applied to “small” individuals who are not able to hire a large legal firm.org/wiki/Main Page). On one hand.law. Ashcroff (see http://cyber. said instead of whining about arrogance and incorrectness. There is always someone who can add to the book. xxxix . However.harvard. The wikipedia is an excellent collection of articles which are written by various individuals. It is apparent that writing textbooks especially for college students as a cooperation.Prologue For The POTTO Project This books series was born out of frustrations in two respects. Hence. The study of technical material isn’t only done by having to memorize the material. The first issue is the enormous price of college textbooks. Writing a book in the technical field is not the same as writing a novel. particularly the copyright law with the “infinite2 ” time with the copyright holders. judges simply manufacture facts to make the little guy lose and pay for the defense of his work. one should increase wisdom. As R. 3 In some sense one can view the encyclopedia Wikipedia as an open content project (see http://en. the corrupted court system defends the “big” guys and on the other hand. It has become very clear to the author and founder of the POTTO Project that this situation must be stopped. punishes the small “entrepreneur” who tries to defend his or her work. It is unacceptable that the price of the college books will be over $150 per book (over 10 hours of work for an average student in The United States). The writing of a technical book is really a collection of information and practice.edu/openlaw/eldredvashcroft for more information) copyrights practically remain indefinitely with the holder (not the creator).wikipedia. is a new idea3 . The Potto Project has far greater goals than simply correcting an abusive Judicial system or simply exposing abusive judges. one of this author’s sages. like an open source. the creation of the POTTO Project. As individuals we have to obey the law. This project is to increase wisdom and humility. Kook. The second issue that prompted the writing of this book is the fact that we as the public have to deal with a corrupted judicial system. but also by coming to understand and be able to solve 2 After the last decision of the Supreme Court in the case of Eldred v.

the popularity of the books should be one of the incentives for potential contributors. The secret of the ants’ power lies in their collective intelligence.uk/bugclub/raiders. The author has not found any technique that is more useful for this purpose than practicing the solving of problems and exercises. especially for family members or relatives and those students lacking funds. ”Army Ants: A Collective Intelligence. they now have an opportunity to put their notes to use for others. this method is expected to accelerate the creation of these high quality books. To reach this possibility the collective book idea was created/adapted.html) . While a single ant is not intelligent enough to attack and hunt large prey. For some contributors/authors. For others. For others the social part is as simple as a desire to reduce the price of college textbooks. the books on compressible flow and die casting became the most popular books in their respective area. but also students who happened to be doing their homework. If a contributor of a section in such a book can be easily identified. It is not just for experts to contribute.ex.” American Scientist. The student’s contributions can be done by adding a question and perhaps the solution. The social function can have at least two components. then that contributor will be the copyright holder of that specific section (even within question/answer sections). While one can be as creative as possible. there are always others who can see new aspects of or add to the material. Thus. The following example explains this point: The army ant is a kind of carnivorous ant that lives and hunts in the tropics. In these cases. the reason is the pure fun of writing and organizing educational material. For example. the undersigned believes that personal intentions are appropriate and are the author’s/organizer’s private affair. The answer varies from individual to individual. For some authors. The collective material is much richer than any single person can create by himself.. one also begins to better understand the material. 77:139. so can we in creating textbooks by this powerful tool.ac. The book’s contributor’s names could be written by their sections. Thus. Nigel R. These books are written in a similar manner to the open source software 4 see also in Franks. Why would someone volunteer to be an author or organizer of such a book? This is the first question the undersigned was asked. the collective power of their networking creates an extremely powerful intelligence to carry out this attack4 . One component is to come to know and socialize with many in the profession. It is hoped that because of the open nature of these books. One can be successful when one solves as many problems as possible. 1989 (see for information http://www. Whatever the reasons. the writing of or contributing to this kind of books will serve as a social function.xl LIST OF TABLES related problems. hunting animals that are even up to a hundred kilograms in weight. they will become the most popular books and the most read books in their respected field. Experience has shown that in explaining to others any given subject. In a way. in the course of their teaching they have found that the textbook they were using contains sections that can be improved or that are not as good as their own notes. The desire to be an author of a well–known book (at least in his/her profession) will convince some to put forth the effort. contributing to these books will help one to understand the material better. When an insect which is blind can be so powerful by networking.

CREDITS

xli

process. Someone has to write the skeleton and hopefully others will add “flesh and skin.” In this process, chapters or sections can be added after the skeleton has been written. It is also hoped that others will contribute to the question and answer sections in the book. But more than that, other books contain data5 which can be typeset in A LTEX. These data (tables, graphs and etc.) can be redone by anyone who has the time to do it. Thus, the contributions to books can be done by many who are not experts. Additionally, contributions can be made from any part of the world by those who wish to translate the book. It is hoped that the books will be error-free. Nevertheless, some errors are possible and expected. Even if not complete, better discussions or better explanations are all welcome to these books. These books are intended to be “continuous” in the sense that there will be someone who will maintain and improve the books with time (the organizer(s)). These books should be considered more as a project than to fit the traditional definition of “plain” books. Thus, the traditional role of author will be replaced by an organizer who will be the one to compile the book. The organizer of the book in some instances will be the main author of the work, while in other cases only the gate keeper. This may merely be the person who decides what will go into the book and what will not (gate keeper). Unlike a regular book, these works will have a version number because they are alive and continuously evolving. In the last 5 years three textbooks have been constructed which are available for download. These books contain innovative ideas which make some chapters the best in the world. For example, the chapters on Fanno flow and Oblique shock contain many original ideas such as the full analytical solution to the oblique shock, many algorithms for calculating Fanno flow parameters which are not found in any other book. In addition, Potto has auxiliary materials such as the gas dynamics tables (the largest compressible flow tables collection in the world), Gas Dynamics Calculator (Potto-GDC), etc. The combined number downloads of these books is over half a million (December 2009) or in a rate of 20,000 copies a month. Potto books on compressible flow and fluid mechanics are used as the main textbook or as a reference book in several universities around the world. The books are used in more than 165 different countries around the world. Every month people from about 110 different countries download these books. The book on compressible flow is also used by “young engineers and scientists” in NASA according to Dr. Farassat, NASA Langley Research Center. The undersigned of this document intends to be the organizer/author/coordinator of the projects in the following areas:

5

Data are not copyrighted.

xlii
Table -1. Books under development in Potto project.

LIST OF TABLES

Project Name Compressible Flow Die Casting Dynamics Fluid Mechanics Heat Transfer

Progress beta alpha NSY alpha NSY

Remarks

Version 0.4.8.2 0.0.3 0.0.0 0.1.1 0.0.0

Based on Eckert

Availability for Public Download     

Mechanics Open Channel Flow Statics Strength of Material Thermodynamics Two/Multi flow phases

NSY NSY early alpha NSY early alpha NSY

first chapter

0.0.0 0.0.0 0.0.1 0.0.0 0.0.01 

    

TelAviv’notes

0.0.0

NSY = Not Started Yet The meaning of the progress is as:
ˆ The Alpha Stage is when some of the chapters are already in a rough draft; ˆ in Beta Stage is when all or almost all of the chapters have been written and are at least in a draft stage; ˆ in Gamma Stage is when all the chapters are written and some of the chapters are in a mature form; and ˆ the Advanced Stage is when all of the basic material is written and all that is left are aspects that are active, advanced topics, and special cases.

The mature stage of a chapter is when all or nearly all the sections are in a mature stage and have a mature bibliography as well as numerous examples for every section. The mature stage of a section is when all of the topics in the section are written, and all of the examples and data (tables, figures, etc.) are already presented. While some terms are defined in a relatively clear fashion, other definitions give merely a hint on the status. But such a thing is hard to define and should be enough for this stage. The idea that a book can be created as a project has mushroomed from the open source software concept, but it has roots in the way science progresses. However, traditionally books have been improved by the same author(s), a process in which books

CREDITS

xliii

have a new version every a few years. There are book(s) that have continued after their author passed away, i.e., the Boundary Layer Theory originated6 by Hermann Schlichting but continues to this day. However, projects such as the Linux Documentation project demonstrated that books can be written as the cooperative effort of many individuals, many of whom volunteered to help. Writing a textbook is comprised of many aspects, which include the actual writing of the text, writing examples, creating diagrams and figures, and writing the A LTEX macros7 which will put the text into an attractive format. These chores can be done independently from each other and by more than one individual. Again, because of the open nature of this project, pieces of material and data can be used by different books.

6 Originally authored by Dr. Schlichting, who passed way some years ago. A new version is created every several years. 7 One can only expect that open source and readable format will be used for this project. But more A than that, only LTEX, and perhaps troff, have the ability to produce the quality that one expects for A these writings. The text processes, especially LTEX, are the only ones which have a cross platform ability to produce macros and a uniform feel and quality. Word processors, such as OpenOffice, Abiword, and Microsoft Word software, are not appropriate for these projects. Further, any text that is produced by Microsoft and kept in “Microsoft” format are against the spirit of this project In that they force spending money on Microsoft software.

xliv

LIST OF TABLES

Prologue For This Book

Version 0.3.0.5 March 1, 2011
pages 400 size 3.5M
A look on the progress which occur in the two and half years since the last time this page has been changed, shows that the book scientific part almost tripled. Three new chapters were added included that dealing with integral analysis and one chapter on differential analysis. Pushka equation (equation describing the density variation in great depth for slightly compressible material) was added yet not included in any other textbook. While the chapter on the fluid static is the best in the world (according to many including this auther8 ), some material has to be expanded. The potto style file has improved and including figures inside examples. Beside the Pushka equation, the book contains material that was not published in other books. Recently, many heavy duty examples were enhanced and thus the book quality. The meaning heavy duty example refers here to generalized cases. For example, showing the instability of the upside cone versus dealing with upside cone with spesific angle.

Version 0.1.8 August 6, 2008
pages 189 size 2.6M
When this author was an undergraduate student, he spend time to study the wave phenomenon at the interface of open channel flow. This issue is related to renewal energy of extracting energy from brine solution (think about the Dead Sea, so much energy). The common explanation to the wave existence was that there is always a disturbance which causes instability. This author was bothered by this explanation.
8 While this bragging is not appropiate in this kind of book it is to point the missing and aditional further improments needed.

xlv

xlvi

LIST OF TABLES

Now, in this version, it was proven that this wavy interface is created due to the need to satisfy the continuous velocity and shear stress at the interface and not a disturbance. Potto project books are characterized by high quality which marked by presentation of the new developments and clear explanations. This explanation (on the wavy interface) demonstrates this characteristic of Potto project books. The introduction to multi–phase is another example to this quality. While it is a hard work to discover and develop and bring this information to the students, it is very satisfying for the author. The number of downloads of this book results from this quality. Even in this early development stage, number of downloads per month is about 5000 copies.

Version 0.1 April 22, 2008
pages 151 size 1.3M
The topic of fluid mechanics is common to several disciplines: mechanical engineering, aerospace engineering, chemical engineering, and civil engineering. In fact, it is also related to disciplines like industrial engineering, and electrical engineering. While the emphasis is somewhat different in this book, the common material is presented and hopefully can be used by all. One can only admire the wonderful advances done by the previous geniuses who work in this field. In this book it is hoped to insert, what and when a certain model is suitable than other models. One of the difference in this book is the insertion of the introduction to multiphase flow. Clearly, multiphase is an advance topic. However, some minimal familiarity can be helpful for many engineers who have to deal with non pure single phase fluid. This book is the third book in the series of POTTO project books. POTTO project books are open content textbooks so everyone are welcome to joint in. The topic of fluid mechanics was chosen just to fill the introduction chapter to compressible flow. During the writing it became apparent that it should be a book in its own right. In writing the chapter on fluid statics, there was a realization that it is the best chapter written on this topic. It is hoped that the other chapters will be as good this one. This book is written in the spirit of my adviser and mentor E.R.G. Eckert. Eckert, aside from his research activity, wrote the book that brought a revolution in the education of the heat transfer. Up to Egret’s book, the study of heat transfer was without any dimensional analysis. He wrote his book because he realized that the dimensional analysis utilized by him and his adviser (for the post doc), Ernst Schmidt, and their colleagues, must be taught in engineering classes. His book met strong criticism in which some called to “burn” his book. Today, however, there is no known place in world that does not teach according to Eckert’s doctrine. It is assumed that the same kind of individual(s) who criticized Eckert’s work will criticize this work. Indeed, the previous book, on compressible flow, met its opposition. For example, anonymous Wikipedia user name EMBaero claimed that the material in the book is plagiarizing, he just doesn’t know from where and what. Maybe that was the reason that he felt that is okay to plagiarize the book on Wikipedia. These criticisms will not change the future or the success of the ideas in this work. As a wise person says “don’t tell me that it is

VERSION 0.1 APRIL 22, 2008

xlvii

wrong, show me what is wrong”; this is the only reply. With all the above, it must be emphasized that this book is not expected to revolutionize the field but change some of the way things are taught. The book is organized into several chapters which, as a traditional textbook, deals with a basic introduction to the fluid properties and concepts (under construction). The second chapter deals with Thermodynamics. The third book chapter is a review of mechanics. The next topic is statics. When the Static Chapter was written, this author did not realize that so many new ideas will be inserted into this topic. As traditional texts in this field, ideal flow will be presented with the issues of added mass and added forces (under construction). The classic issue of turbulence (and stability) will be presented. An introduction to multi–phase flow, not a traditional topic, will be presented next (again under construction). The next two chapters will deals with open channel flow and gas dynamics. At this stage, dimensional analysis will be present (again under construction).

xlviii

LIST OF TABLES

How This Book Was Written

This book started because I needed an introduction to the compressible flow book. After a while it seems that is easier to write a whole book than the two original planned chapters. In writing this book, it was assumed that introductory book on fluid mechanics should not contained many new ideas but should be modern in the material presentation. There are numerous books on fluid mechanics but none of which is open content. The approach adapted in this book is practical, and more hands–on approach. This statement really meant that the book is intent to be used by students to solve their exams and also used by practitioners when they search for solutions for practical problems. So, issue of proofs so and so are here only either to explain a point or have a solution of exams. Otherwise, this book avoids this kind of issues. The structure of Hansen, Streeter and Wylie, and Shames books were adapted and used as a scaffolding for this book. This author was influenced by Streeter and Wylie book which was his undergrad textbooks. The chapters are not written in order. The first 4 chapters were written first because they were supposed to be modified and used as fluid mechanics introduction in “Fundamentals of Compressible Flow.” Later, multi–phase flow chapter was written. The presentation of some of the chapters is slightly different from other books because the usability of the computers. The book does not provide the old style graphical solution methods yet provides the graphical explanation of things. Of course, this book was written on Linux (Micro$oftLess book). This book was written using the vim editor for editing (sorry never was able to be comfortable with emacs). The graphics were done by TGIF, the best graphic program that this author experienced so far. The figures were done by gle. The spell checking was done by ispell, and hope to find a way to use gaspell, a program that currently cannot be used on new Linux systems. The figure in cover page was created by Genick Bar-Meir, and is copyleft by him.

xlix

l LIST OF TABLES .

I believe professionals working in many engineering fields will benefit from the power and glory of the mighty God. say.Preface "In the beginning. For example. You have to remember that this book is a work in progress. due to the fact that English is my third language and time limitations. the POTTO project was and void. if you need information about. etc. I have tried to describe why the theories are the way they are. Basics of Fluid Mechanics. These explanations have been marked as such and can be skipped. there is a limit on how much effort I was able to put into the book and its organization. and there were words. and secondly a reference manual only as a lucky coincidence. statics’ equations. This book is only to explain his power. Many in the industry. This means that a lot of information is presented which is not necessary for everyone. Moreover. without form. and emptiness was upon the face and files." 9 . the present.10 Reading everything will. naturally. increase your understanding of the many aspects of fluid mechanics. have called and emailed this author with questions since this book is only source in the world of some information. Like all volunteer work. However. the explanations are not as good as if I had a few years to perfect them. And the Author there be words. 10 At 9 To li . Let This book. It is hoped that the book could be used as a reference book for people who have at least some basics knowledge of science areas such as calculus. you can read just chapter (4). of the bits moved upon said. Nevertheless. The structure of this book is such that many of the chapters could be usable independently. physics. This book is written and maintained on a volunteer basis. rather than just listing “seven easy steps” for each task. These questions have lead to more information and further explantion that is not found anywhre else. I hope this makes the book easier to use as a reference manual. And the Fingers of the Author the face of the keyboard. this manuscript is first and foremost a textbook. the book is not well organized. describes the fundamentals of fluid mechanics phenomena for engineers and others. This book is designed to replace all introductory textbook(s) or instructor’s notes for the fluid mechanics in undergraduate classes for engineering/science students but also for technical peoples.

You may contact me via Email at “barmeir@gmail. This material never went through a close content review. whose work was the inspiration for this book. ideas for new areas to cover. If you want to be involved in the editing. There are also notes in the margin. I would like to especially thank to my adviser. I hope that many others will participate of this project and will contribute to this book (even small contributions such as providing examples or editing mistakes are needed). Eckert. E. I am interested in it all. ignore them please.lii LIST OF TABLES this information. . Marshall wrote to this author that the author should review other people work before he write any thing new (well. Furthermore. and assistance. I also would like to thank to Jannie McRotien (Open Channel Flow chapter) and Tousher Yang for their advices. Dr. G. In practice. Over ten individuals wrote me about this letter. However.com”. I have tried to make this text of the highest quality possible and am interested in your comments and ideas on how to make it better.com”. I hope to improve or to add to these areas in the near future. other email that imply that someone will take care of this author aren’t appreciated. In fact. I am asking from everyone to assume that his reaction was innocent one. errors. The symbol META was added to provide typographical conventions to blurb as needed. editing. If you have Internet e-mail access. 11 Dr. They will be removed gradually as the version number advances. this book contains material that never was published before (sorry cannot avoid it). Even reaction/comments from individuals like David Marshall11 . This book contains many worked examples. I have left some issues which have unsatisfactory explanations in the book. A I encourage anyone with a penchant for writing. While close content peer review and publication in a professional publication is excellent idea in theory. more mathematics (or less mathematics). graphic ability. I am particularly interested in the best arrangement of the book. this process leaves a large room to blockage of novel ideas and plagiarism. Incorrect language. If you would like be “peer reviews” or critic to my new ideas please send me your comment(s). you can contact me at “barmeir@gmail. and material knowledge and a desire to provide open content textbooks and to improve them to join me in this project. directly or indirectly. this book contains material that was not published anywhere else. more fundamental material. R. please drop me a line. or proofreading. This is mostly for the author’s purposes and also for your amusement. isn’t it?). While his comment looks like unpleasant reaction. which can be very useful for many. Naturally. marked with a Mata mark. but those are solely for the author’s purposes. graphic design. LTEX knowledge. Several people have helped me with this book. it brought or cause the expansion of the explanation for the oblique shock. literature review is always good. ideas. rewritten sections.

There will always new problems to add or to polish the explanations or include more new materials. approach problems are sometime appears in the book under the Meta simple like this Meta sample this part. Open Channel Flow The chapter isn’t in the development stage yet. liii . Also issues that associated with the book like the software has to be improved. mistakes.To Do List and Road Map This book isn’t complete and probably never will be completed. Properties The chapter isn’t in development stage yet. Nevertheless. These omissions. Some parts were taken from Fundamentals of Die Casting Design book and are in a process of improvement. there are specific issues which are on the “table” and they are described herein. It is hoped the A changes in TEX and LTEX related to this book in future will be minimal and minor. It is hoped that the style file will be converged to the final form rapidly. many chapters are missing. Specific missing parts from every chapters are discussed below. At this stage. Additional material can be provided to give a different angle on the issue at hand. illustration or photo of experiment. question. Material can be further illuminate. Meta End You are always welcome to add a new material: problem.

liv LIST OF TABLES .

). fluid statics.CHAPTER 1 Introduction to Fluid Mechanics 1. glass appears as a solid material.1 for the complex relationships between the different branches which only part of it should be drawn in the same time. motions. and statical conditions in a continuous material. This study area deals with many and diversified problems such as surface tension. material particles that “behaves” as solid mixed with liquid creates a mixture that behaves as a complex2 liquid. It is known that these materials have the ability to drown people. flow in enclose bodies. In fact. flow stability. A proof of the glass “liquidity” is the change of the glass thickness in high windows in European Churches after hundred years. the boundary between the solid mechanics and fluid mechanics is some kind of gray shed and not a sharp distinction (see Figure 1. Materials like sand (some call it quick sand) and grains should be treated as liquids. most of the discussion in this book is limited to simple and (mostly) Newtonian (sometimes power fluids) fluids which will be defined later. After it was established that the boundaries of fluid mechanics aren’t sharp. almost any action a person is doing involves some kind of a fluid mechanics problem. but a closer look reveals that the glass is a liquid with a large viscosity. etc. Even material such as aluminum just below the mushy zone1 also behaves as a liquid similarly to butter.1 What is Fluid Mechanics? Fluid mechanics deals with the study of all fluids under static and dynamic situations. The fluid mechanics study involve many fields that have no clear boundaries between them. For example. Furthermore. or flow round bodies (solid or otherwise). Furthermore. can be viewed as liquid solid multiphase flow. Researchers distinguish between orderly flow and chaotic flow as the 1 Mushy 2 It zone zone refers to to aluminum alloy with partially solid and partially liquid phases. Fluid mechanics is a branch of continuous mechanics which deals with a relationship between forces. The bottom part of the glass is thicker than the top part. 1 .

the study must make arbitrary boundaries between fields. It is this author’s per- . when a general model is need because more parameters are effecting the situation.2 CHAPTER 1. -1. The last boundary (as all the boundaries in fluid mechanics) isn’t sharp because fluid can go through a phase change (condensation or evaporation) in the middle or during the flow and switch from a single phase flow to a multi phase flow. flow with two phases (or materials) can be treated as a single phase (for example. After it was made clear that the boundaries of fluid mechanics aren’t sharp.1. The fluid mechanics can also be distinguish between a single phase flow and multiphase flow (flow made more than one phase or single distinguishable material). Diagram to explain part of relationships of fluid mechanics branches. air with dust particle). Or. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS Continuous Mechanics Solid Mechanics something between Fluid Mechanics Fluid Statics Fluid Dynamics Boundaries problems Multi phase flow Internal Flow Laminar Flow Stability problems Turbulent Flow Fig. Then the dimensional analysis can be used explain why in certain cases one distinguish area/principle is more relevant than the other and some effects can be neglected. Moreover. laminar flow and the turbulent flow.

When cities increased to a larger size. one of the main goals of this book is to explain what model should be applied. This fact was acknowledged by D’Alembert who stated that.) on the principles of buoyancy. For example. Reviewing many books on fluid mechanics made it clear. chapters on open channel flow (as a sub class of the multiphase flow) and compressible flow (with the latest developments) are provided. turbulence. After his initial work. For example. etc. people realized that water can be used to move things and provide power.2 Brief History The need to have some understanding of fluid mechanics started with the need to obtain water supply. and continue with Empirical Analysis. This book attempts to find a hybrid approach in which the kinematic is presented first (aside to standard initial four chapters) follow by Integral analysis and continued by Differential analysis. The ideal flow (frictionless flow) should be expanded compared to the regular treatment. BRIEF HISTORY 3 sonal experience that the knowledge and ability to know in what area the situation lay is one of the main problems. Newton. There were no calculations even with the great need for water supply and transportation.C. Euler. He also made several attempts to study the flight (birds) and developed some concepts on the origin of the forces. engineers in software company (EKK Inc. almost all knowledge of the ancients can be summarized as application of instincts.” For example the concept of ideal liquid that leads to motion with no resistance. 1. The first approach introduces the fluid kinematic and then the basic governing equations. At that stage theory and experiments had some discrepancy. http://ekkinc. aqueducts were constructed. Such absurd analysis are common among engineers who do not know which model can be applied. These aqueducts reached their greatest size and grandeur in those of the City of Rome and China. “The theory of fluids must necessarily be based upon experiment. Thus. the knowledge of fluid mechanics (hydraulic) increasingly gained speed by the contributions of Galileo. For example. Bernoulli family. Torricelli. Naturally. the simplified private cases must be explained. These two approaches have justifications and positive points.2. Later. and D’Alembert. people realized that wells have to be dug and crude pumping devices need to be constructed. . Before dealing with the boundaries.com/HTML ) analyzed a flow of a complete still liquid assuming a complex turbulent flow model. At some point. to be followed by stability. there isn’t a clear winner.1. with the exception Archimedes (250 B. The second approach deals with the Integral Analysis to be followed with Differential Analysis. This book is unique in providing chapter on multiphase flow. larger tunnels built for a larger water supply. There are two main approaches of presenting an introduction of fluid mechanics materials. The first progress in fluid mechanics was made by Leonardo Da Vinci (1452-1519) who built the first chambered canal lock near Milan. a large population created a need to solve waste (sewage) and some basic understanding was created. These two approaches pose a dilemma to anyone who writes an introductory book for the fluid mechanics. conflicts with the reality. boundary layer and internal and external flow. Yet.

Chezy. Thus. creating a matching between the two school of thoughts: experimental and theoretical. and Froude’s idea of the use of models change the science of the fluid mechanics. Kirchhoff. von Karman. On the “experimental” side. and many others. Stanton. La Grange. and Blasius and several other individuals as Nikuradse. resistance by Darcy. On the theoretical side. Dubuat. after World War Two. and Kelvin. and the second believed that solution is the pure practical (experimental) aspect of fluid mechanics. as in thermodynamics. Therefore. first Navier in the molecular level and later Stokes from continuous point of view succeeded in creating governing equations for real fluid motion. The Navier-Stokes equations. Rose. Gas Dynamics. At the end of the twenty century. Weisbach. Hagen. Examples of such work are Hermann von Helmholtz’s concept of vortexes (1858). and Aeronautics. Lanchester’s concept of circulatory flow (1894). Helmhoitz. Taylor. Prandtl and his students Blasius. which describes the flow (or even Euler equations). The experimentalists. d’Aubisson. There are many open source programs that can analyze many fluid mechanics situations. Bossut. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS This discrepancy between theory and practice is called the “D’Alembert paradox” and serves to demonstrate the limitations of theory alone in solving fluid problems. people cannot relinquish control. the development of dimensional analysis by Rayleigh. mainly in pipes and open channels area. This demand coupled with new several novel concepts like the theoretical and experimental researches of Reynolds. As in thermodynamics. Perhaps the most radical concept that effects the fluid mechanics is of Prandtl’s idea of boundary layer which is a combination of the modeling and dimensional analysis that leads to modern fluid mechanics. considerable contribution were made by Euler. Coulomb. Theoreticians tried to simplify the equations and arrive at approximated solutions representing specific cases. the empirical formulas generated by fitting curves to experimental data (even sometime merely presenting the results in tabular form) resulting in formulas that the relationship between the physics and properties made very little sense. Fabre. two different of school of thoughts were created: the first believed that the solution will come from theoretical aspect alone. were Brahms. the way how it was calculated changed. As results it created today “strange” names: Hydrodynamics. Fanning. for example. and the Kutta-Joukowski circulation theory of lift (1906). In the middle of the nineteen century. This concept leads to mathematical basis for many approximations. and Poisseuille. Rankine. The obvious happened without theoretical guidance. were considered unsolvable during the mid nineteen century because of the high complexity. the demand for vigorous scientific knowledge that can be applied to various liquids as opposed to formula for every fluid was created by the expansion of many industries. While the understanding of the fundamentals did not change much. To- . at the same time proposed many correlations to many fluid mechanics problems. Rayleigh. Bhuckingham. and Manning. The introduction of the computers during the 60s and much more powerful personal computer has changed the field. Thus. Meyer. many call Prandtl as the father of modern fluid mechanics. Ganguillet. Hydraulics. transformed the fluid mechanics to today modern science. This problem led to two consequences. But.4 CHAPTER 1. Dupuit.

and it is referred to the direction of the area. These programs in many cases can capture all the appropriate parameters and adequately provide a reasonable description of the physics. Area of three–dimensional object has no single direction. these kinds of areas should be addressed infinitesimally and locally. The unit used to measure is [N]. EKK. The fluid is mainly divided into two categories: liquids and gases. under certain limits. The traditional quantity. Hence. if the change of pressure is significantly less than that. The gas fills the volume and liquid cannot. the change of water pressure by 1000% only change the volume by less than 1 percent. It is evident from this discussion that when a liquid is at rest. these programs are as good as the input provided. which is force per area has a new meaning. the pressure will not affect the volume. sharp even though in reality this difference isn’t sharp. no shear stress is applied. In gaseous phase. However. It is also said that liquid cannot return to their original state after the deformation. So. It must be remember that force is a vector. This differentiation leads to three groups of materials: solids and liquids. The main difference between the liquids and gases state is that gas will occupy the whole volume while liquids has an almost fix volume. The study of this kind of material called rheology and it will (almost) not be discussed in this book. For example. This test creates a new material group that shows dual behaviors. Thus.3 Kinds of Fluids Some differentiate fluid from solid by the reaction to shear stress. The second quantity discussed here is the area. e. The area is measured in [m2 ]. But below the critical point. assuming turbulent flow for still flow simply provides erroneous results (see for example. This quantity was discussed in physics class but here it has an additional meaning. there are many other cases that numerical analysis cannot provide any meaningful result (trends). no weather prediction program can produce good engineering quality results (where the snow will fall within 50 kilometers accuracy. any change in pressure directly affects the volume. This difference can be. it behaves like solid and under others it behaves like liquid (see Figure 1. In this book. Gas has no free interface/surface (since it does fill the entire volume). For example. This is a result of division of a vector by a vector and it is referred to as tensor. 1. The first is force which was reviewed in physics.1.3. then the change of volume is at best 5%. a change in the volume by more 5% will required tens of thousands percent change of the pressure.g it has a direction. In the best scenario. The direction of area is perpendicular to the area. Thus. There are several quantities that have to be addressed in this discussion. so at this stage the tensor will have to be broken . the emphasis is on the physics. KINDS OF FLUIDS 5 day many problems can be analyzed by using the numerical tools and provide reasonable results. The difference between a gas phase to a liquid phase above the critical point are practically minor.1). Building a car with this accuracy is a disaster). for most practical purposes considered. It is a known fact said that the fluid continuously and permanently deformed under shear stress while solid exhibits a finite deformation which does not change with time. Inc).

the velocity of the plate increases also. U0x F However. one in the area direction and two perpendicular to the area. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS into its components.stress in fluid mechanics. Density as a function of ρ= ∆V −→ε lim ∆m ∆V (1. -1. the density remains constant. It referred to the fact that density is independent of the sampling size. the shear stress is considered as the y ratio of the force acting on area in the direcx tion of the forces perpendicular to area.2 shows the density as log ℓ a function of the sample size. When this assumption is broken. that is. It must be noted that ε is chosen so that the continuous assumption is not broken.2 for point where the green lines converge to constant density).6 CHAPTER 1. then. . tance of two plates as shown in Figure (1. Thus. -1. it did not reach/reduced to the size where the atoms or molecular statistical calculations are significant (see Figure 1. It doesn’t mean that ǫ a sharp and abrupt change in the density cannot occur. the principles of statistical mechanics must be utilized. Experiments show that the increase of height will increase the velocity up to a certain range.3. Later. The pressure component in the area direction is called pressure (great way to confuse. From solid mechanics study. 1.1) the size of sample. The density is a property which requires that ρ liquid to be continuous. it will be treated as a separate issue. and many parts of the book. h) (1.4 Shear Stress ∆ℓ The shear stress is part of the pressure tensor. Figure 1. here. The other two components are referred as the shear stresses. After certain sample size. For the discussion here. isn’t it?). The density can be changed and it is a function of time and space (location) but must have a continues property.2) Where A is the area. Different from solid. the pressure has three components. the density is defined as Fig. Schematics to describe the shear undergoes a shear stress between a short dis. fluid cannot pull directly but through a solid surface.3). the F denotes the force.2. it was shown that when the force per area increases. the discussion on the mathematical meaning is presented (later version). h is the distance between the plates. Consider moving the plate with a zero lubricant (h ∼ 0) (results in large force) or a large amount of lubricant (smaller force). In solid h β mechanics. The upper plate velocity generally will be U = f (A. Consider liquid that Fig. F. The units used for the pressure components is [N/m2 ].

the distance the t0 < t1 < t2 < t3 upper plate moves after small amount of time. the aim is to develop differential equation.8) From equation (1.3) can be rearranged to be U F ∝ h A Shear stress was defined as τxy = F A (1.6) yields τxy = µ δβ δt (1. -1.8) it follows that U =h δβ δt (1. d = U δt = h δβ (1.3) The index x represent the “direction of the shear stress while the y represent the direction of the area(perpendicular to the area). δt is d = U δt (1. the regular = approximation provides Fig.4) and (1. For cases where the dependency is linear.4. the following can be written U∝ Equations (1.4. δβ ∼ sin β.5) (1. thus the small distance analysis is applicable.1.10) . The deformation of fluid due to shear geometry stress as progression of time. Hence. From equations (1.4) hF A (1.9) Combining equation (1.6) Where µ is called the absolute viscosity or dynamic viscosity which will be discussed later in this chapter in a great length. In steady state.5) it follows that ratio of the velocity to height is proportional to shear stress. SHEAR STRESS 7 In this discussion.7) From Figure 1.9) with equation (1. applying the coefficient to obtain a new equality as τxy = µ U h (1.4 it can be noticed that for a small angle.

1 [m].5 ∼ = 53. is due to the existence of cohesion and interaction between fluid molecules. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS If the velocity profile is linear between the plate (it will be shown later that it is consistent with derivations of velocity). It can be assumed that the plates remains in equidistant from each other and steady state is achieved instantly. then it can be written for small a angel that δβ dU = δt dy (1. water etc. The property of viscosity.1[m] diameters with height of 0. Assume steady state conditions. the following can be written (see equation (1. The units of shear stress are the same as flux per time as following F kg m 1 mU ˙ = A sec2 m2 A kg m 1 sec sec m2 Thus.01 End Solution Example 1. For this kind of substance dU τxy = µ (1.8 CHAPTER 1. Calculate the torque required to rotate the inner cylinder at 12 rpm. In fact.5 m/sec.45[N ] h 0.9) can be interpreted as momentum in the x direction transferred into the y direction. This approximation is appropriate for many other fluids but only within some ranges. Thus. the notation of τxy is easier to understand and visualize. which is exhibited by all fluids. Calculate the force that is required to drag a very thin plate of 1 [m2 ] at a speed of 0.2[m] and 0.6)) F = A µU 1 × 1. The units of absolute viscosity are [N sec/m2 ].1: A space of 1 [cm] width between two large plane surfaces is filled with glycerin. Many fluids fall into this category such as air. . Some referred to shear stress as viscous flux of x–momentum in the y–direction. Equation (1.10) referred to as Newtonian fluid. These cohesion and interactions hamper the flux in y–direction. Solution Assuming Newtonian flow.11) Materials which obey equation (1. when the outer cylinder remains stationary. Example 1. this interpretation is more suitable to explain the molecular mechanism of the viscosity.2: Castor oil at 25◦ C fills the space between two concentric cylinders of 0. the viscosity is the resistance to the flow (flux) or the movement.069 × 0.12) dy Newtonian fluids are fluids which the ratio is constant.

5 Viscosity 1. temperature variation has an opposite effect on the viscosities of liqτ0 uids and gases. the moment can be calculated as the force times the distance as ri 2 π ri h M =F In this case ro − ri = h thus.1 × 12/60 = 0. the viscosity of gases will increase with temperature. ic op molecules are sparse and cohetr o ix th sion is negligible. In gases. The different of power fluids families.5.1.5.1 h 0. -1.1 General S Bi imp ng le ha m Viscosity varies widely with temperature. The same way as in example (1.4 ¡ ∼ . the molecules are more dx compact and cohesion is more dominate. ri 2 3 = A µU ro − ri µ M= 2 π 0. while in the dU liquids. the viscosity is st ic op ne Ne ti c ps eu d ei op ec R re h wt on ia n r-P hi la lip po ff di la ta nt . the Fig.986 0.1). exchange of momentum between layers brought as a result of molecular movement normal to the general direction of flow.5. This reasoning is a result of the considerations of the kinetic theory. This theory indicates that gas viscosities vary directly with the square root of temperature. thus. in gases.0078[N m] h ¡ End Solution 1. The difference is due to their fundamentally different mechanism creating visτ cosity characteristics. In liquids. VISCOSITY Solution The velocity is rps 9 ˙ U = r θ = 2 π ri rps = 2 × π × 0.4 π ri Where rps is revolution per second. Thus. However. Thus. This molecular activity is known to increase with temperature. the momentum exchange due to molecular movement is small compared to the cohesive forces between the molecules. and it resists the flow.

This Fig. It must be stress that the viscosity in the dome is meaningless. liquid viscosities decrease as temperature increases. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS primarily dependent on the magnitude of these cohesive forces. the pressure has minor effect on the viscosity.5). 1. On the liquid side below the critical point. There is a large class of materials which shows a non-linear relationship with velocity for any shear stress.2 Non–Newtonian Fluids In equation (1. The shear stress as a function relationship is referred to as power relationship of the shear rate. Not all the materials obey this relationship. The lines in the above diagrams are only to show constant pressure lines. . There is no such a thing of viscosity at 30% liquid. Oils have the greatest increase of viscosity with pressure which is a good thing for many engineering purposes. Since these forces decrease rapidly with increases of temperature. -1. both materials are only a function of the temperature.6 demonstrates that viscosity increases slightly with pressure. Fig. the relationship between the velocity and the shear stress was assumed to be linear. This class of materials can be approximated by a single polynomial term that is a = bxn . Figure 1. Nitrogen (left) and Argon (right) viscosity as a function of the temperature and pressure after Lemmon and Jacobsen.7.5.10 CHAPTER 1. Well above the critical point. -1. It simply depends on the structure of the flow as will be discussed in the chapter on multi phase flow. but this variation is negligible for most engineering problems.6. From the physical point of view. the coefficient depends on the velocity gradient.

0012 0. The Newtonian part of the model has to be replaced by power liquid. for most practical purposes. eds.14) if |τyx | < τ0 (1. The liquids which satisfy equation (1. is above one.5.000015 0. However.0026 0. In the simple case.000025 0.e-06 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Temperature [◦ C ] May 1. These results also explained better using the new definition. the liquid is dilettante. This fact explains of the temperature. S. Fluids that show increase in the viscosity (with increase of the shear) referred to as thixotropic and those that show decrease are called reopectic fluids (see Figure 1.0028 0. which are acceleration units (a Fig. Many fluids satisfy the above equation. VISCOSITY and it can be written as viscosity 11 τ =K dU dx n−1 dU dx (1. according to Ferraris at el3 concrete behaves as shown in Figure 1.5).e-05 0. The above equation shows that the dimensions of ν to be square meter per second. Martys. When n is below one. The general relationship for simple Bingham flow is τxy = −µ ± τ0 dUx =0 dy if |τyx | > τ0 (1.13) The new coefficients (n.3 Kinematic Viscosity Air absolute & kinematic viscosity Atmospheric Pressure 0. For example.7. [m2 /sec].0006 0.15) There are materials that simple Bingham model does not provide dequate explanation and a more sophisticate model is required.0018 0.13) are referred to as purely viscous fluids. Materials Science of Concrete VI.0004 0.0024 0. this kind of figures isn’t used in regular engineering practice.13) are constant. Air viscosity as a function combination of kinematic terms). the “liquid side” is like Newtonian fluid for large shear stress. The reason for this new definition is that some experimental data are given in this form.0008 0. K) in equation (1.5.8.1.16) ρ 0. the fluid is pseudoplastic.001 sec µ[ Nm2 ] 1. Skalny.00002 The kinematic viscosity is another way to look at the viscosity. Materials which behave up to a certain shear stress as a solid and above it as a liquid are referred as Bingham liquids. -1.0016 0. 215-241 (2001) m ν[ sec ] 2 . The viscosity coefficient is always positive.0014 0. The kinematic viscosity embraces both the viscosity and density properties of a fluid. de Larrard and N. 2008 3 C.003 0.0022 0. When n = 1 equation represent Newtonian fluid and K becomes the familiar µ.. F. Mindess and J.0002 5. 1. the name “kinematic” viscosity. Ferraris. The kinematic viscosity is defined as µ ν= (1.002 0. When n.

T T0 3 2 (1.0015 m ν[ sec ] 2 µ[ N sec ] m2 0. the viscosity can be considered constant in many cases.001 0.0005 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Temperature [◦ C ] May 1. 4 This author is ambivalent about this statement. Water viscosity as a funchave expressions that provide an estimate. Solution Applying the constants from Suthelnd’s table provides 0. The increase of the absolute viscosity with the temperature is enough to overcome the increase of density and thus.12 CHAPTER 1.555 Ti0 + Suth µ = µ0 0. 1.17) Example 1. provides reasonable results4 for the range of −40◦ C to 1600◦ C 0.555 × 524.555 Tin + Suth Where .07 3 2 ∼ 2.710−5 End Solution . Some common materials (pure and mixture) Fig. -1. gases. 2008 0.002 The absolute viscosity of many fluids relatively doesn’t change with the pressure but very sensitive to temperature. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS The gas density decreases with the temperature. The observed viscosity is about ∼ 3. the kinematic viscosity also increase with the temperature for many materials. For isothermal flow.8 and 1. The variations of air and water as a function of the temperature at atmospheric pressure are plotted in Figures 1.4 Estimation of The Viscosity Water absolute and kinematic viscosity Atmospheric Pressure 0.3: Calculate the viscosity of air at 800K based on Sutherland’s equation.51 10−5 N sec m2 N sec m2 The viscosity increases almost by 40%. Use the data provide in Table 1. For many tion temperature.555 × 800 + 120 800 524. However. Sutherland’s equation is used and according to the literature.5.00001827 × × 0. .9.1.9.07 + 120 µ = 0.

67 528. Substance Chemical formula i − C4 H10 CH4 CO2 O2 Hg Temperature T [◦ C] 23 20 20 20 380 Viscosity [ N sec ] m2 0.0000654 oxygen mercury vapor Table -1.0002018 0.0000076 0.00001720 0.0000876 0.67 524.07 527. Viscosity of selected gases. .1.67 518.1.0001254 ammonia standard air carbon dioxide carbon monoxide hydrogen nitrogen oxygen sulfur dioxide Table -1.99 526. The list for Sutherland’s equation coefficients for selected materials.2. VISCOSITY 13 ––– ––– coefficients Chemical ––– ––– formula Material N H3 CO2 CO H2 N2 O2 SO2 Sutherland 370 120 240 118 72 111 127 416 TiO [K] 527.57 µ0 (N sec/m2 ) 0.0001781 0.0000109 0.05 528.00001827 0.00001480 0.5.0000146 0.00000982 0.0000203 0.93 540.

01915 0.0 0.084 0. 2008 The General Viscosity Graphs .5 1. Washington D. 258.069 Olive Oil Castor Oil Clucuse Corn Oil SAE 30 SAE 50 SAE 70 Ketchup Ketchup Benzene Firm glass Glycerol Liquid Metals sec µ[ Nm2 ] Liquid Metal viscosity 2. Liquid metals viscosity as a function of the temperature.001547 0.986 5-20 0.10 exhibits several liquid metals (from The Reactor Handbook.S.6 0.000647 0.14 CHAPTER 1.) 2. -1. many aluminum alloys are behaving as a Newtonian liquid until the first solidification appears (assuming steady state thermodynamics properties). Figure 1. Vol.10. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS Table -1.05 0.200 0.000652 ∼ 1 × 107 1.5 Liquid metal can be considered as a Newtonian fluid for many applications. Government Printing Office.C.000245 0. the metal behavior can Fig. Viscosity of selected liquids.15-0.001194 0.54 1. Atomic Energy Commission AECD-3646 U. Even when there is a solidification (mushy zone).000946 0. Furthermore.0 1. be estimated as a Newtonian material (further reading can be done in this author’s book “Fundamentals of Die Casting Design”). Chemical component Chemical formula (C2 H5 )O C6 H6 Br2 C2 H5 OH Hg H2 SO4 Temperature T [◦ C] 20 20 26 20 25 25 25 25 25 20 ∼ 25◦ C ∼ 25◦ C ∼ 20◦ C ∼ 25◦ C ∼ 20◦ C 20 Viscosity [ N sec ] m2 0.098 0. May 1995 p.3.072 0.5 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 Li Na K Hg Pb Temperature [◦ C ] May 1.

The lower pressure is.6 26.5.358525 48.7685 36.97 44. Example 1. Or ˜ √ µc = M Pc 2/3 Tc −1/6 (1.00 30.47 2. then the critical viscosity is obtained as given µc = µ µr figure 1.3 5. In case “ordinary” fluids where information is limit. if one point is well documented.18) The third way.5 151 289.016 4. 19. The critical pressure can be evaluated in the following three ways. VISCOSITY Chemical component H2 He Ne Ar Xe Air “mixed” CO2 O2 C 2 H6 CH4 Water Molecular Weight 2.7 647.3 28.003 20.4 49. The properties at the critical stage and their values of selected materials.289945 27.40685 22.4.0 18. ∼ 1[bar]. .3 19.8 132 304.1. Pr = P/Pc are drawn.83865 46.4 or similar information. Hougen et al suggested to use graph similar to compressibility chart. for practical purpose.0 21.256425 48. Furthermore. µc is the viscosity at critical condition and µ is the viscosity at any given condition.064 [MPa] µc [ N sec ] m2 3.26 44. O2 at 100◦ C and 20[Bar].9696 2.19) Where vc is the critical molecular volume and M is molecular weight.0 15. The simplest way is by obtaining the data from Table 1. this graph also shows the trends. if the information is available and is close enough to the critical point.636 58. when none is available.183 39. Tr .865925 50.54 15.4 190. The lines of constant relative pressure.07 16. In Figure 1. other points can be estimated. is by utilizing the following approximation µc = M Tc vc 2/3 ˜ (1.11 (1.04 Tc [K] 33.4: Estimate the viscosity of oxygen.096 K Pc [Bar] 12. In this graph.9 15 Table -1.2 154.20) Calculate the reduced pressure and the reduced temperature and from the Figure 1.8823 73.944 131.11 the relative viscosity µr = µ/µc is plotted as a function of relative temperature.11 obtain the reduced viscosity.01 32.4 305. The second way.

and µi is the viscosity of component i. The mixture viscosity is highly nonlinear function of the fractions of the components.4 µc = 18 value of the reduced temperature is Tr ∼ The value of the reduced pressure is Pr ∼ 20 ∼ 0.35 373.2 and the predicted viscosity is T able µ = µc µ µc = 18 × 1. the following Wilke’s correlation for gas at low density provides a result in a reasonable range. In this book.15 ∼ 2. xi is the mole fraction of component i. The subscript i should be used for the j index.35[Bar] Tc = 154.4 50.6[N sec/m2 ] The observed value is 24[N sec/m2 ]5 .22) Here.5: Calculate the viscosity of a mixture (air) made of 20% oxygen. 26 No.11 it can be obtained µr ∼ 1. Even for homogeneous mixture. there isn’t silver bullet to estimate the viscosity. 2 1956. O2 and 80% nitrogen N2 for the temperature of 20◦ C. n is the number of the chemical components in the mixture.2 = 21. . Rev. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS The critical condition of oxygen are Pc = 50.21) where Φi j is defined as 1 Φij = √ 8 Mi 1+ Mj 1+ µi µj 4 Mj Mi 2 (1. The dimensionless parameter Φij is equal to one when i = j. For most cases. n µmix = i=1 xi µi n j=1 xi Φij (1. Physical Chemistry Japan Vol. only the mixture of low density gases is discussed for analytical expression. 5 Kyama. Makita.41 154. Example 1.16 Solution CHAPTER 1. End Solution Viscosity of Mixtures In general the viscosity of liquid mixture has to be evaluated experimentally.4 N sec m2 The From Figure 1.

8 Viscosity. Solution The following table summarize the known details i 1 2 Component O2 N2 Molecular Weight.5. x 0.0000203 0. 2008 Fig. Mole Fraction.2 0.11. 28. VISCOSITY 17 Reduced Viscosity 2 10 liquid 5 dense gas Reduced Viscosity µ µc 2 two-phase region 1 critical point Pr=LD Pr=0.5 Pr=1 Pr=2 Pr=3 Pr=5 Pr=25 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 5 2 2 3 T Tc 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 Reduced Temperature May 27. Reduced viscosity as function of the reduced temperature.2 Pr=0.00001754 .1. M 32. µ 0. -1.

2 × 0.996 + 0.157 .0 1. Reduced viscosity as function of the reduced temperature.0024 0.2 Tr=1.0 1.12.0 µmix ∼ 0. 2008 Fig.8 Tr=1 Tr=1.00001754 N sec + ∼ 0.875 1.0 + 0.0000181 0.0024 0.8 × 1.143 0.0000182 .8 × 1.6 Tr=2 Tr=3 µ µ0 4 Reduced viscosity 3 2 1 -1 10 2 5 1 2 5 10 2 P Reduced Pressure [ Pc ] June 2. -1.996 1.0 µi /µj 1. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS 5 Tr=0. End Solution .86 1. i 1 2 j 1 2 1 2 Mi /Mj 1.18 6 CHAPTER 1.8 × 0.0 m2 N sec m2 The observed value is ∼ 0.0 1.2 × 0.4 Tr=1.0000203 0.0 Φij 1.1 Tr=1.2 × 1.

23)  τxy dy 1 + τs   Where the term µ∞ is the experimental value at high shear stress.5.26) Example 1. µ0 = 0. m2 Figure 1. An example for values for this formula.23) provides reasonable value only up to 2 m τ = 0.6: . The term µ0 is the experimental viscosity at shear stress approaching zero.00105 N sec .25) n µc mix = i=1 xi µc i (1. To estimate the viscosity of the mixture with n component Hougen and Watson’s method for pseudocritial properties is adapted. The higher viscosity is more dominate at low shear stress.0000073 kN . for Molten Sulfur at temperature 120◦ C are µ∞ = 0. Reiner and Phillippoff suggested the following formula   1 µ0 − µ∞  τ  xy dUx µ + 2  = ∞ (1. In this method the following are defined as mixed critical pressure as n Pc the mixed critical temperature is mix = i=1 xi Pc i (1. For some mixtures of two liquids it was observed that at a low shear stress.001 kN .24) n Tc and the mixed critical viscosity is mix = i=1 xi Tc i (1. m2 m2 and τs = 0. The term τs is the characteristic shear stress of the mixture. This equation (1. the viscosity is only a function of the temperature with a “simple” molecular structure. VISCOSITY 19 In very low pressure. the viscosity is dominated by a liquid with high viscosity and at high shear stress to be dominated by a liquid with the low viscosity liquid.12 can be used for a crude estimate of dense gases mixture. in theory.1. For gases with very long molecular structure or complexity structure these formulas cannot be applied.0215 N sec .

101 [m] radius and the cylinders h length is 0.1 The used moment is A τ M = 2 π ri h µ or the viscosity is µ= M dU 2 π ri 2 h dr = dU dr ri (1. The surface is covered with oil film. Control volume around the inner cylinder shows that moment is a function of the area and shear stress.a) .b) = 100sec−1 = dr 0. dU ∼ 0.7: A square block weighing 1.1 × 0. The oil creates a distance between the block and the inclined surface of 1 × 10−6 [m]. The velocity at the inner cylinders surface is Ui = r ω = 0.VI.4 revolution per second (these number represent only academic question not real value of actual Fig. Solution The moment or the torque is transmitted through the liquid to the outer cylinder. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS An inside cylinder with a radius of 0.a) The velocity at the outer cylinder surface is zero. i der. The velocity gradient may be assumed to be linear.VI. Solution The shear stress at the surface is estimated for steady state by τ =µ U dU = 3 × 10−5 × = 30 U dx 1 × 10−6 (1.20 CHAPTER 1.d) Example 1.VI. It is given that a moment of 1 [N × m] is required to maintain an angular velocity of 31.1 − 0 (1. The viscosity of the oil is 3 × 10−5 [m2 /sec].14[m/s] (1.2 × 100 2 End Solution (1. What is the speed of the block at steady state? Assuming a linear velocity profile in the oil and that the whole oil is under steady state.VII. -1.VI.1 [m2 ] slides down an incline surface with an angle of 20◦ C. Estimate the liquid viscosity used ders with the rotating inner cylinbetween the cylinders.2 [m]. hence.0 [kN] with a side surfaces area of 0.1 [m] U ro rotates concentrically within a fixed cylinri der of 0.13.1 × 31.4[rad/second] = 3. Concentrating cylinliquid).101 − 0.c) 1 = 2 × π × 0. The shear stress calculations can be estimated as a linear between the two concentric cylinders.

d) Example 1. the differential area also increases and is a function of r.8 × sin 20◦ 3 End Solution (1.8: Develop an expression to estimate of the torque required to rotate a disc in a narrow gap.VIII.b) The gravity force that acting against the friction is equal to the friction hence Fg = f = 3 U =⇒ U = Or the solution is U= m g sin 20◦ 3 (1.VII. r and an expression has to be developed. Solution δ R r Fig. -1.VIII. In this cases the shear stress is a function of the radius. The shear stress can be estimated as U ωr τ ∼µ =µ = δ δ This torque can be integrated for the entire area as τ R R (1.a) T = 0 r τ dA = 0 r ωr µ 2 π r dr δ dA (1. The gap is given and equal to δ and the rotation speed is ω.c) End Solution .5. The edge effects can be neglected. Rotating disc in a steady state.1.b) The results of the integration is T = π µ ω R4 2δ (1.VII. VISCOSITY The total fiction force is then f = τ A = 0. Additionally.14.VII.VIII.1 × 30 U = 3 U 21 (1. The shear stress can be assumed to be linear.c) 1 × 9.

E denotes the Young’s modulus6 . A discussion of viscosity and surface tension should be part of this section but because special importance these topics have separate sections.9 The density is a property that is simple to analyzed and understand. The definition of is the ratio length change to to total length ∆L/L.22 CHAPTER 1.0 75. The initial pressure can be assumed to atmospheric. Example 1.0 25. The rest of the properties lumped into this section.15 × 109 (N/m2 )7 . INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS 1. (strong steel structure) undergoes linear expansion of 8 × 10−6 per ◦ C.0 1010 1005 ∂P dρ ∂ρ ρ kg m3 1000 995 990 ∂P dT ∂T 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 985 T [◦C] March 15. Solution 6 The definition of Young’s modulus is E = σ where in this case σ can be estimated as the pressure change. Water density as a function of temperature for various pressure. .1 Fluid Density Water Density As A Function of Temperature and Pressure 0. -1.0 150. Calculate the pressure at the end of the process.15. This figure illustrates the typical situations like the one that appear in Example 1. State your assumptions.6 Fluid Properties The fluids have many properties which are similar to solid.0 175.0 50. Due to the change temperature the tank. The density is related to the other state properties such temperature and pressure through the equation of state or similar.0 100. 7 This value is actually of Bulk modulus.0 125.6.5 1. Assume that the Young modulus of the water is 2. 2011 Fig.9: A steel tank filled with water undergoes heating from 10◦ C to 50◦ C. Examples to describe the usage of property are provided. 1.

the density at end is also known mw ρ2 = (1. V2 3 = (1 + α∆T ) (1.g) T2 |tank The pressure is a function volume and the temperature P = P (v.e) P2 = P1 − E α ∆ T In this case.IX. FLUID PROPERTIES 23 The expansion of the steel tank will be due to two contributions: one due to the thermal expansion and one due to the pressure increase in the tank.d) (1. what happen when the value of P1 − E α ∆ T becomes negative or very very small? The basic assumption falls and the water evaporates. The water pressure at the end of the process is unknown but the volume is known. The tank volume was calculated earlier and since the claim of “strong” steel the volume of the tank is only effected by the temperature. L2 = L1 (1 − ∆P/E) . ρ2 ∝ 1 (L2 ) 3 =⇒ ρ2 ∼ = m L1 1 − ∆P E 3 (1.c) 1 + α∆ T = 1 − Thus the final pressure is ∆P E (1.IX. Thus.IX. T ) thus ∼βv ∼E dP = 8 This ∂P ∂v dv + ∂P ∂T dT (1. For this example.IX. As estimated 3 value of the density using Young’s modulus and V2 ∝ (L2 ) 8 .IX.b) It can be noticed that ρ1 ∼ m/L1 3 and thus = ρ1 3 = (1 + α∆ T ) The change is then ρ1 1− ∆P E 3 (1.6. The new density is ρ1 ρ2 = 3 (1 + α∆ T ) (1. it is assumed that the expansion due to pressure change is negligible.IX.h) leads E (L2 − L1 ) = ∆P L1 .a) thermal expansion The more accurate calculations require looking into the steam tables.f) V1 tank The volume of the water undergoes also a change and is a function of the temperature and pressure. The tank volume change under the assumptions state here but in the same time the tank walls remain straight.IX. Thus. If the expansion of the water is taken into account then the change (increase) of water volume has to be taken into account.IX.1.

The bulk modulus is a measure of the energy can be stored in the liquid.0002 + 2. Bulk modulus is usually obtained from experimental or theoretical or semi theoretical (theory with experimental work) to fit energy–volume data. liquids have a property that describes the volume change as results of pressure change for constant temperature.4 K Pc 57.IX. The bulk modulus is defined as BT = −v ∂P ∂v (1. Table -1. End Solution 1. The reason that liquid has different coefficient is because it is three dimensional verse one dimension that appear in regular spring.10 1.27) into BT = ρ ∂P ∂ρ (1.IX.i) Notice that density change.j) (1.5. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS As approximation it can written as ∆P = βv ∆v + E ∆T Substituting the values results for ∆P = 0.80 1.8 [Bar] 48 [Bar] 4.15 × 109 ∆T ∆ρ (1.5. This coefficient is analogous to the coefficient of spring. ∆ρ < 0. It can be noted that this property is not the result of the equation of state but related to it.24 CHAPTER 1.27) T Using the identity of v = 1/ρ transfers equation (1.28) T The bulk modulus for several selected liquids is presented in Table 1.74 [MPa] 4. Most (theoretical) studies are obtained by uniformly changing the unit cells in global energy variations especially for isotropic systems ( where the molecules has a structure with cubic symmetries).49 0. The bulk modulus for selected material with the critical temperature and pressure na −→ not available and nf −→ not found (exist but was not found in the literature).32 Tc 593K 508 K 562 K 556. Chemical component Acetic Acid Acetone Benzene Carbon Tetrachloride Bulk Modulus 109 N m 2.49 [MPa] .6.2 Bulk Modulus Similar to solids (hook’s law).

3 [Mpa] nf 7.03-4. Another definition is referred as coefficient of tension and it is defined as βv = 1 P ∂P ∂T (1.60 1.109 [MPa] na 22.79 K na 647.064 [MPa] In the literature. additional expansions for similar parameters are defined.52 26. dP = 0.5.3 4.29) P This parameter indicates the change of volume due to temperature change when the pressure is constant.174 Tc 514 K nf 850 K 1750 K Est 513 nf nf nf na na 591.00 [MPa] Est 78.34 1. This relationship is obtained by the observation that the pressure as a function of the temperature and specific volume as P = f (T.31) ∂P ∂v dv T (1.33) .20 1.15-2. and therefore equation (1.62 1. These definitions are related to each other.1. The thermal expansion is defined as βP = 1 v ∂v ∂T (1.5 0.5 [Bar] 172.32) On constant pressure lines.28 2.6. v) The full pressure derivative is dP = ∂P ∂T dT + v (1. Bulk modulus for selected materials (continue) 25 Chemical component Ethyl Alcohol Gasoline Glycerol Mercury Methyl Alcohol Nitrobenzene Olive Oil Paraffin Oil SAE 30 Oil Seawater Toluene Turpentine Water Bulk Modulus N 109 m 1.09 1.97 2.06 1.30) v This parameter indicates the change of the pressure due to the change of temperature (where v = constant).5 [Bar] nf nf nf na na 4. FLUID PROPERTIES Table -1.5 2.2-28.096 K Pc 6.32) reduces 0= ∂P ∂T dT + v ∂P ∂v dv T (1.

35) The last equation (1.11: Calculate the pressure needed to apply on water to reduce its volume by 1 per cent.10: Calculate the modulus of liquid elasticity that reduced 0.00035 End Solution 14285. Solution Using the definition for the bulk modulus βT = −v ∂P ∂v v 5 ∆P = ∆v 0.15 109 .01 = 2. Example 1.33) follows that dv dT ∂P ∂T ∂P ∂v =− P =const v (1.12: .26 CHAPTER 1. Solution Using the definition for the bulk modulus ∆P ∼ βT ∆v ∼ 2. Assume the temperature to be 20◦ C. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS From equation (1. the temperature increase results in reduction of the bulk of modulus because the molecular are further away.714[Bar] Example 1.35) sometimes is used in measurement of the bulk modulus.34) indicates that relationship for these three coefficients is βT = − βv βP (1.15 107 [N/m2 ] = 215[Bar] v End Solution Example 1. In contrast.34) T Equation (1.035 per cent of its volume by applying a pressure of 5[Bar] in a s slow process. The increase of the pressure increases the bulk modulus due to the molecules increase of the rejecting forces between each other when they are closer.

13: A In the Internet the following problem ( here with LTEX modification) was posted which related to Pushka equation.16. ∆h1+2 = ∆P h1 h2 + BT 1 BT 2 (1.31(1000)/(0.55 ∗ 10−7 BT Another user suggest that: We are supposed to use the bulk modulus from our textbook.2 × 101 0N/m2 . (1. A cylindrical steel pressure vessel with volume 1. a safety plug on the top bursts. Suddenly.31 m3 is to be tested. State your assumptions. FLUID PROPERTIES Two layers of two different liquids are contained in a very solid tank. then a piston at one end of the cylinder is pushed in until the pressure inside the vessel has increased by 1000 kPa.” −V ∆P = −1.XII. The liquids are compressed due to the pressure increases.2×1010 .c) End Solution Example 1.16.XII. ∆V = . P1 = −BT ∆V /V with the suggested solution of “I am assuming that I have to look for ∆V as that would be the water that comes out causing the change in volume.2 × 1010 )∆V = 6.6.1. Initially the pressure in the tank is P0 . P1 = P0 + ρ g h. Estimate the change of the heights of the liquids depicted in the Figure 1. Solution The volume change in a liquid is BT ∼ = Hence the change for the any liquid is ∆h = ∆P h ∆P = A BT /V BT ∆P ∆V /V 27 air (or gas) Oil (liquid 1) h1 Water (liquid 2) h2 Fig. The area of the tank is A and liquid A height is h1 and liquid B height is h2 . The vessel is entirely filled with water. -1. Two liquid layers under pressure.b) The total change when the hydrostatic pressure is ignored. and that one is 0. The new pressure is P1 . How many liters of water come out? Relevant equations and data suggested by the user were: BT = 0.XII.a) (1.

Since the pressure is related or a function of density and temperature it follows that P = P (ρ. the process is isentropic.XIII. Thus the characteristic time for the shock is S/c when S is a typical dimension of the tank and c is speed of sound of the water in the tank.c) ρ dP 1  ∂P ρ = P P  ∂ρ T  1 ∂P   dρ + ρ    P ∂T The definitions that were provided before can be used to write ρ dP 1 = BT dρ + ρ βv dT P P The infinitesimal change of density will be then 1 ρ dP BT dρ = − ρ βv dT P P or dρ = ρ dP ρ P βv dT − BT BT (1.XIII.XIII. What is a better way to solve this problem. 9 The . INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS Anything else would give a wrong answer in the system. The assumption of isentropic process is applicable after a shock wave that travel in the tank. So with this bulk modulus.28 CHAPTER 1.XIII. T ) (1. End Solution shock wave velocity is related to square of elasticity of the water.XIII.a) Hence the full differential is dP = ∂P ∂ρ dρ + T ∂P ∂T dT ρ (1.b) Equation (1.XIII. is 0. If the shock wave is ignored (too advance material for this book9 . Solution It is assumed that this process can be between two extremes: one isothermal and one isentropic. the calculation that were provide on line need to have corrections by subtracting the second terms.).e) (1.b) can be multiplied by ρ/P to be    BT βv    dT   ρ (1. The process involve some thermodynamics identities to be connected.XIII.f) Thus.655L right? In this post several assumptions were made.d) (1.

XIV.e) is an integral equation which is discussed in the appendix10 . For this example.d) =⇒ ρ(x) = ρ(x)dx ρ(x)dx 0 (1. In one method assume that the density is remain constant until the bottom. In some places the ocean depth is many kilometers (the deepest places is more than 10 kilometers).1.b) with equation (1.f) The integral equation (1.a) The density at the surface is ρ = m/V and the density at point x from the surface the density is m m ρ(x) = =⇒ ρ(x) = ∆P V − ∆V (1.b) V −V BT In the Chapter on static it will be shown that the change pressure is x ∆P = g 0 ρ(x)dx (1.12.XIV. It is convenient to change further equation (1.f) can be converted to differential equation when the two sides under differentiation g ρ0 d ρ(x) ρ(x) + =0 BT ρ(x)2 dx 10 Under (1.e) 0 Equation (1.XIV.XIV.g) construction . In the second method assume that the density is a function of the pressure.XIV.XIV.c) yields ρ(x) = g V −V Equation can be rearranged to be ρ(x) = V 1− m g BT x 0 m x ρ(x)dx BT ρ0 1− g BT x (1.6.XIV. calculate the density change in the bottom of 10 kilometers using two methods.XIV.c) Combining equation (1.14: The hydrostatic pressure was neglected in example 1. FLUID PROPERTIES 29 Example 1.XIV. .XIV.XIV.e) to 1− g BT x ρ(x)dx = 0 ρ0 ρ(x) (1.XIV. Solution For the the first method the density is BT ∼ = ∆P ∆P =⇒ ∆V = V ∆V /V BT (1.

XIV.k) Substituting the integration constant. the solution is ρ = ρ0 ρ0 BT 2 g ρ0 x + BT (1.m) BT − g ρ0 x 1− g ρ0 x BT End Solution Advance material can be skipped Example 1. the density at the bottom using equation (1.e) was ρ0 ρ0 B T ρ= =⇒ g (1.XIV. For the purpose of this exercise.XIV. Assume that no variation of the temperature.i) or rearranged as ρ= (1.a) Calculate the time it take for a sound wave to propagate perpendicularly to the surface to a depth D (perpendicular to the straight surface). For constant bulk modulus. Solution The equation for the sound speed is taken here as correct for very local point. However.l) In the “constant” density approach.XIV.XIV.XIV. the salinity can be completely ignored. . That is the density is function of the depth. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS g ρ(x)3 d ρ(x) + =0 B T ρ0 dx ρ0 BT =x+c 2 g ρ2 ρ0 BT 2 g (x + c) (1.30 or CHAPTER 1.XV.XIV.h) The solution is (1.15: Water in deep sea undergoes compression due to hydrostatic pressure. it was shown in “Fundamentals of Compressible Flow” by this author that the speed of sound is c= BT ρ (1.j) The integration constant can be found by the fact that the density at the x = 0 is ρ0 ρ0 = ρ0 B T BT =⇒ c = 2 g (c) 2 g ρ0 (1.

When more than one liquid are exposed to pressure the value of these two (or more liquids) can have to be added in special way.f) (1.d) is t= √ ρ0 2 BT − 2 BT − D (1.XV. The speed of sound at any depth point.1 Bulk Modulus of Mixtures In the discussion above it was assumed that the liquid is pure. In this short section a discussion about the bulk modulus averaged is presented.28) and can be written (where the partial derivative can looks as delta ∆ as ∂V = V ∂P ∼ V ∆P = BT BT (1.XV.XV.6.d) t=  BT − g ρ0 x      ρ0 - 0 The solution of equation (1.g) 1. FLUID PROPERTIES 31 the density is different for every point since the density varies and the density is a function of the depth.XV. dx is dτ = dx BT − g ρ 0 x ρ0 (1.XV.36) .XV.2. The definition of the bulk modulus is given by equation (1. is c= BT = ρ0 BT BT − g ρ0 x BT − g ρ 0 x ρ0 (1.b) The time the sound travel a small interval distance. x.e) The time to travel according to the standard procedure is √ D ρ0 D t= = √ BT BT ρ0 The ratio between the corrected estimated to the standard calculation is √ √ √ ρ0 2 B T − 2 B T − D √ correction ratio = D ρ0 √ BT End Solution (1.c) The time takes for the sound the travel the whole distance is the integration of infinitesimal time D    dx    (1.1.27) or (1.XV.6.

39) Where x1 . the total change is ∂V = ∂V1 + ∂V2 + · · · ∂Vi ∼ ∆V1 + ∆V2 + · · · ∆Vi = Substituting equation (1.32 CHAPTER 1.37) results in ∂V = V1 ∂P V2 ∂P Vi ∂P ∼ V1 ∆P V2 ∆P Vi ∆P + + ··· + + + ··· + = BT 1 BT 2 BT i BT 1 BT 2 BT i (1. in special mixture. x2 and xi are the fraction volume such as xi = Vi /V .40) Rearranging equation (1.36) into equation (1.38) (1. Thus.41) suggested an averaged new bulk modulus BT mix = 1 x1 x2 xi + + ··· + BT 1 BT 2 BT i (1.41) Equation (1. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS The total change is compromised by the change of individual liquids or phases if two materials are present. .43) be added in the future the effect of change of chemical composition on bulk modulus. Even in some cases of emulsion (a suspension of small globules of one liquid in a second liquid with which the first will not mix) the total change is the summation of the individuals change. another approach with taking into account the energy-volume is needed.42) In that case the equation for mixture can be written as v 11 End Advance material 11 To ∂P = BT mix ∂v (1.39) can be written as ∂V = V ∂P x1 x2 xi + + ··· + BT 1 BT 2 BT i ∼ V ∆P = x1 x2 xi + + ··· + BT 1 BT 2 BT i (1. In case the total change isn’t. using this identity and the fact that the pressure is change for all the phase uniformly equation (1.40) yields v ∂P ∼ ∆P = =v ∂v ∆v 1 x1 x2 xi + + ··· + BT 1 BT 2 BT i (1. Hence. V = x1 V + x1 V + · · · + xi V (1.37) Under the main assumption in this model the total volume is comprised of the individual volume hence.

deep ocean (on several occasions). This explanation is wrong since it is in conflict with Newton’s second law (see example ?). The relationship between the surface tension and the pressure on the two sides of the surface is based on geometry.7.17. Consider a small element of surface. the commercial hydraulic fluid can change due to friction by 50◦ C. the horizontal forces cancel each other because symmetry. The change of the bulk modulus by this amount can change the response time significantly. The x surface tension is force per length and is measured by [N/m] and is acting to stretch the surface.7 Surface Tension The surface tension manifested it2dβ1 self by a rise or depression of the y liquid at the free surface edge. the temperature and pressure varies during the operation.1. In many (physics. When the surface tension is constant.2 When the Bulk Modulus is Important? and Hydraulics System 33 There are only several situations in which the bulk modulus is important. The hydraulic system normally refers to system in which a liquid is used to transmit forces (pressure) for surface of moving object (normally piston) to another. There is a common misconception for the source of the surface tension.2. The bulk modulus for the same liquid change by more 60%. In the vertical . These situations include hydraulic systems.6. geology system like the Earth. Surface tension control volume analysis detween two adjoined phases or ma. This author is not aware of any special issues that involve in Cosmology as opposed to geological system. The Pushka equation normally can address the situations in deep ocean and geological system. The pressure on one side is Pi and the pressure on the other side is Po .Fig. terials. surface tension. For very accurate and rapid systems. Surface tension results from a sharp change in the density be. For theoretical or hypothetical liquids which moving one object (surface) results in movement of the other object under the condition that liquid volume is fix. and fluid mechanics) books explained that the surface tension is a result from unbalance molecular cohesive forces.scribing principles radii. In practical situations. 2dβ2 Surface tension is also responsidℓ2 ble for the creation of the drops and bubbles. It also responsible for the breakage of a liquid R1 jet into other medium/phase to R2 dℓ1 many drops (atomization). Cosmology. -1. 1. when the liquid volume or density is function of the pressure (and temperature due the friction) the movement of the other object is unpredictable. This erroneous explanation can be traced to Adam’s book but earlier source may be found. SURFACE TENSION 1. The only issue that was not address is the effect on hydraulic systems.

the pressure difference has to balance the surface tension. There are two extreme cases: one) radius of infinite and radius of finite size. The forces in the vertical direction reads (Pi − Po ) d 1 d 2 = ∆Pd 1 d 2 = 2 σd 1 sin β1 + 2 σd 2 sin β2 (1. the angles are very small and thus (sin β ∼ β).45) is reduced to ∆P = 2σ R (1.45) predicts that pressure difference increase with inverse of the radius. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS direction.47) Where R is the radius of the sphere. A soap bubble is made of two layers.45) is reduced to ∆P = σ 1 R (1. the surface tension forces are puling the surface upward. It was observed that contact angle between the glass and mercury is 55◦ C. thus the pressure inside the bubble is ∆P = 4σ R (1.45) Equation (1. The second with two equal radii. Furthermore. Thus.44) can be simplified as ∆P = σ 1 1 + R1 R2 (1.46) Other extreme is for a sphere for which the main radii are the same and equation (1. inner and outer. .44) For a very small area. Thus. The first case is for an infinite long cylinder for which the equation (1.34 CHAPTER 1. the equation (1.16: A glass tube is inserted into bath of mercury. it can be noticed that d i ∼ 2 Ri dβi .48) Example 1.

XVI.XVI. which contains n bubbles with equal radii.a) This force is upward and the horizontal force almost canceled.e) End Solution Example 1. F = σ2 π cos 55◦ C (Di + Do ) (1. Calculate the minimum work required to increase the pressure in tank by ∆P .b) The balance of the forces on the meniscus show under the magnified glass are A b & P π r2 = σ 2 π r + & W or ∼0 ∼0 (1.18). Estimate the force due to the surface tension (tube is depicted in Figure 1.1.025[m] 0.5 [N/m] Solution 35 55◦ P = ρhg h 0.7.17: A Tank filled with liquid.02[m] and the outer diameter is 0. Assume that the surface tension for this combination of material is 0. -1. r.49) . However.18. SURFACE TENSION The inner diameter is 0. Assume that the liquid bulk modulus is infinity.02[m] σ 55◦ Fig. Glass tube inserted into mercury.XVI. Solution The work is due to the change of the bubbles volume.XVI.c) b & W g ρ h π r2 = σ 2 π r + & Or after simplification h= 2σ gρr (1. The work is rf w= r0 ∆P (v)dv (1.XVI.021[m]. The mercury as free body that several forces act on it.d) (1. if the inside and the outside diameters are considerable different the results is F = σ2 π sin 55◦ C (Do − Do ) (1. It can be assume that the contact angle is the same for the inside and outside part of the tube. Estimate the depression size.

It can be noticed that the work is negative. The net forces in the vertical direction (positive upwards) per unit length are 2σ cos 0◦ = g h ρ =⇒ h = Inserting the values into equation (1. It is worth noting that for very slow process. Notice that previously a rise for circular tube was developed which different from simple one dimensional case.19 exhibits the liquid under the current study. Solution In Figure 1.50) Where. Capillary rise between two plates. the density 1000[kg/m3 ] and distance between the plates of 0.51) . INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS The minimum work will be for a reversible process. Compute the value for surface tension of 0. Thus. The distance between the two plates is and the and surface tension is σ. the pressure above and below and surface tension. ℓ h Fig. The work for n bubbles is then 4 π σ n rf 2 − r0 2 . Hence the work is ∆P rf dv w= r0 2σ 4 π r2 dr = 8 π σ r rf r0 rdr = 4 π σ rf 2 − r0 2 (1. The reversible process requires very slow compression.001[m].001 × 9.51) results in h= 2 × 0. the control volume is taken just above the liquid and the air part is neglected. End Solution Example 1.19. It can be noted that the pressure and above are the same with the exception of the curvature on the upper part. the temperature must remain constant due to heat transfer.18: Calculate the rise of liquid between two dimensional parallel plates shown in Figure 1. The question when the curvature should be answered in the Dimensional analysis and for simplification this effect is neglected. The vertical forces acting on the body are the gravity.36 CHAPTER 1. r0 is the radius at the initial stage and rf is the radius at the final stage.05[N/m]. Assume that the contact angle is 0circ (the maximum possible force). -1.47) for reversible process.52) 2σ ρg (1.05 = 0. The relationship between pressure difference and the radius is described by equation (1.19.8 × ×1000 (1. that is the work is done on the system.

7.1 Wetting of Surfaces To explain the source of the contact angle. liquid. -1. Solution The difference lie in the fact that “missing”cylinder add additional force and reduce the amount of liquid that has to raise.20. Forces in Contact angle. Thus. Regardless to the magnitude of the surface tensions (except to zero) the forces cannot be balanced for the description of straight lines. This contact point occurs due to free surface S L reaching a solid boundary. In Figure 1. The surface tension occurs between gas phase (G) to liquid phase (L) and also occurs between the solid (S) and the liquid phases as well as between the gas phase and Fig. and gas can be ignored.XIX.XIX.1.54) (1.b) can be simplified 2σ h= (1. the solid phase.c) ρ g (ro − ri ) End Solution 1.a) The maximum is obtained when cos θi = cos θo = 1.7. For example. forces diagram is shown when control volume is chosen so that the masses of the solid.53) . equation (1.b) (1. The balance between gravity and surface tension is σ 2 π (ri cos θi + ro cos θo ) = ρ g h π(ro )2 − π(ri )2 Which can be simplified as h= 2 σ (ri cos θi + ro cos θo ) ρ g ((ro )2 − (ri )2 ) (1.XIX.20. conG sider the point where three phases became in contact.19: Develop expression for rise of the liquid due to surface tension in concentric cylinders. forces balanced along the line of solid boundary is σgs − σls − σlg cos β = 0 and in the tangent direction to the solid line the forces balance is Fsolid = σlg sin β (1.XIX. SURFACE TENSION 37 End Solution Example 1.

structure of the surface and it provides the balance for these local structures. The connection of the three phases–materials–mediums creates two situations which are categorized as wetting or non–wetting. For example.7 Continued on next . The angle is determined by properties of the liquid. It must be noted that the solid boundary isn’t straight. And a small change on the solid surface can change the wetting condition to non–wetting.83 π/4.74 π/4.6.53).76 to π/3.53) yields σgs − σls = Fsolid tan β (1. So. when solid surface is made or cotted with certain materials. water is described in many books as a wetting fluid. Table -1. gas medium and the solid surface. The gas solid surface tension is different from the liquid solid surface tension and hence violating equation (1.7 π/4. -1. a contact angle is created to balance it. The surface tension is a molec.54) into equation (1.83 π/3. the wetness of fluids is a function of the solid as well.21. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS substituting equation (1. Thus.55) For β = π/2 =⇒ tan β = ∞.21). distilled water with selected materials to demonstrate the inconsistency. The surface tension forces must be balanced. This fact is the reason that no reliable data can be provided with the exception to pure substances and perfect geometries. On the other hand. In fact there are commercial sprays that are intent to change the surface from wetting to non wetting. however. thus depend on the locale non–wetting fluids. There is a common definition of wetting the surface. if the angle is below than 90◦ the material is wetting the surface (see Figure 1. thus. the water is changed to be wetting (for example 3M selling product to “change” water to non–wetting). The contact angle for air.Fig. This statement is correct in most cases. Chemical component Steel Steel.38 CHAPTER 1. the solid reaction force must be zero. If the angle of the contact between three materials is larger than 90◦ then it is non-wetting.Nickel Nickel Nickel Chrome-Nickel Steel Contact Angle Source [1] [2] [1] [3] [4] page π/3. Description of wetting and ular phenomenon. The contact angle is determined by NonWetting whether the surface tension between the gas Wetting fluid solid (gs) is larger or smaller then the surface fluid tension of liquid solid (ls) and the local geometry.74 to π/3.

M.” AIChE Journal Volume 10 Issue 4. and Dhir.I. Pages 509 .T. Warrier. International Journal of Heat and Mass Transfer. G.5 π/3. Ser.. distilled water with selected materials to demonstrate the inconsistency. F. 5 Labuntsov D. and Westwater. 1975 2 Bergles A..372. E. and Ostrovsky..7. 56. and Dhir.. 8 Wang. pages 1465-1470. vol 1 pp 365 . G.. and the contact angle consider simple “wetting” liquid contacting a solid material in two–dimensional shape as depicted in Figure 1. Heat Transfer. (1939) “Approximate theory of heat transfer by developed nucleate boiling” In Sussian Izvestiya An SSSR . K.. R. pp. Heat Transfer 115. the pressure difference between the two sides of free surface has to be balanced by the surface tension. E.1. K.6. (continue) Chemical component Silver Zink Bronze Copper Copper Copper Contact Angle mN m π/6 to π/4.22.22 describes the raising of the liquid as results of the surface tension. No 12. The contact angle for air. (1993). J.4 π/3. 4 Arefeva E.” Chem. V. Symp. Eng. N.” Injenerno Fizitcheskij Jurnal. A. 9. ASME. (1958) “wlijanii smatchivaemosti na teploobmen pri kipenii. 124. ”The determination of forced convection surface– boiling heat transfer. Vol. H. Siegel. (1966) “On the mechanism of boiling heat transfer”. (2002) “Onset of Nucleate Boiling and Active Nucleation Site Density during Subcooled Flow Boiling. I.. “Effect of Surface Wettability on Active Nucleation Site Density During Pool Boiling of Water on a Vertical Surface. The surface tension . Keshock (1975) “Effects of reduced gravity on nucleate boiling bubble dynamics in saturated water.. Prog...” J. V. 3 Tolubinsky. 7 Gaetner. J. 6 Basu. 11-17 1(7) In Russian.I. V. Aladev O. Energetika I transport.N. No 1.. Vol. (1960) “Population of Active Sites in Nucleate Boiling Heat Transfer.2 π/4 π/3 π/2 Source [5] [4] [4] [4] [7] [8] 1 R. Y. To solve the shape of the liquid surface. C. W. papes 717 -728. 659-669 To explain the contour of the surface.” ASME Journal of Heat Transfer. In Figure 1. SURFACE TENSION 39 Table -1. R. and Rohsenow W.517.

is ˙ 1 + h(x) R(x) = ¨ h(x) 2 3/2 (1.40 CHAPTER 1. An try) and the derivative at hx alternative presentation of equation (1. x+dx.56) The radius of any continuous function.59) ˙ With the boundary conditions that specify either the derivative h(x = r) = 0 (symme˙ = β or heights in two points or other combinations.57) ˙ Where h is the derivative of h with respect to x. on the gas side.58) is ghρ = ¨ σh ˙ 1 + h2 3/2 (1. h = h(x). The pressure. Description of the liquid surface. Substituting equation (1. -1. The pressure just below the surface is −g h(x) ρ (this pressure difference will be explained in more details in Chapter 4).22). This problem is a two dimensional problem and equation (1.46) is applicable to it. is the atmospheric pressure.22. g h(x). Appalling equation (1.56) yields g h(x) ρ = σ ˙ 1 + h(x) ¨ h(x) Equation (1.58) is non–linear differential equation for height and can be written as 1-D Surface Due to Surface Tension ghρ σ dh 1+ dx 2 3/2 2 3/2 (1.57) can be derived either by forcing a circle at three points at (x.46) and using the pressure difference yields h P0 P0 P0 Fig.60) . Equation (1.57) into equation (1. ρ = σ R(x) (1. and x+2dx) and thus finding the the diameter or by geometrical analysis of triangles build on points x and x+dx (perpendicular to the tangent at these points).58) − d2 h =0 dx2 (1. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS reduces the pressure in the liquid above the liquid line (the dotted line in the Figure 1.

Equation (1.62) becomes h2 + constant = − 2 Lp 1 ˙ 1 + h2 1/2 (1.66) The last stage of the separation is taking the square root of both sides to be dh ˙ h= = dx 12 This 1 2 1 − 2h Lp 2 −1 (1. SURFACE TENSION Integrating equation (1. this author doesn’t know how to show it in a two lines derivations.61) The constant Lp σ/ρ g is referred to as Laplace’s capillarity constant.7.67) p equation has an analytical solution which is x = Lp 4 − (h/Lp)2 − Lp acosh(2 Lp/h) + constant where Lp is the Laplace constant.65) Squaring both sides and moving the one to the right side yields ˙ h2 = 1 2 1 − 2h Lp 2 −1 (1.63) At infinity. h = ξ = dξ transforms equation (1. constant = −1 . Shamefully.64) Equation (1. The differential dh is h.1.62) After the integration equation (1.64) can be rearranged to be ˙ 1 + h2 1/2 = 1 2 1 − 2h Lp (1. 1− h2 = 2 Lp 1 ˙ 1 + h2 1/2 (1.60) transforms into gρ h dh = σ ¨ h ˙ 1 + h2 3/2 41 dh (1.64) is a first order differential equation that can be solved by variables separation12 . Using dummy variable and the ˙ ¨ ˙ identities h = ξ and hence. The units of this ˙ constant are meter squared. the height and the derivative of the height must by zero so constant + 0 = −1/1 and hence.61) into 1 h dh = Lp ξdξ (1 + ξ 2 ) 3/2 (1. .

It can be shown that the height that the liquid raised in a tube due to the surface tension is h= 2 σ cos β g ∆ρ r (1.1. there are information about the contact angle.69) The constant is determined by the boundary condition at x = 0.6. The maximum that the contact angle can be obtained in equation (1. This equation is studied extensively in classes on surface tension. 1. . in reality there is no readily information for contact actual angle13 and therefore this equation is useful to show 0 R the treads. This book is introductory.70) when β = 0 and thus cos β = 1. This angle is obtained when a perfect half a sphere shape exist of the liquid surface.68) can be integrated to yield   dh    = x + constant   2   1    −1 2   1 − 2h Lp - (1.71) 13 Actually. However.7. that case equation (1. that information conflict each other and no real information is available see Table 1.68) Equation (1. -1. The raising height as a function of the radii. h But this simplistic equation is unusable and useless unless the contact angle (assuming that the contact Theory angel is constant or a repressive average can be found or provided or can be measured) is given. otherwise it will not be there. this equation describes the dimensionless parameter that affects this phenomenon and this parameter will be studied in Chapter ?. For example if h(x − 0) = h0 then constant = h0 . In Fig.70) Where ∆ρ is the difference of liquid density to the gas density and r is the radius of tube. However.42 or CHAPTER 1. therefore this discussion on surface tension equation will be limited. Furthermore.23.1 Capillarity The capillary forces referred to the fact that surface tension causes liquid to rise or penetrate into area (volume). INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS dh 1 2 1 − 2h Lp 2 = dx −1 (1.70) becomes working range hmax = 2σ g ∆ρ r { (1.

1.7. SURFACE TENSION
1.2

43
Distilled water [23 C] Mercury [25 C] Equation

Capilary Height Figure 1.24 exhibits the height as a function of the radius of the tube. The height based on equation (1.71) is shown in Figure 1.23 as blue line. The actual height is shown in the red line. Equation (1.71) provides reasonable results only in a certain range. For a small tube radius, equation (1.59) proved better results because the curve approaches hemispherical sphere (small gravity effect). For large radii equation (1.59) approaches the strait line (the liquid line) Fig. -1.24. The raising height as a strong gravity effect. On the other hand, for exfunction of the radius. tremely small radii equation (1.71) indicates that the high height which indicates a negative pressure. The liquid at a certain pressure will be vaporized and will breakdown the model upon this equation was constructed. Furthermore, the small scale indicates that the simplistic and continuous approach is not appropriate and a different model is needed. The conclusion of this discussion are shown in Figure 1.23. The actual dimension for many liquids (even water) is about 1-5 [mm]. The discussion above was referred to “wetting” contact angle. The depression of the liquid occurs in a “negative” contact angle similarly to “wetting.” The depression height, h is similar to equation (1.71) with a minus sign. However, the gravity is working against the surface tension and reducing the range and quality of the predictions of equation (1.71). The measurements of the height of distilled water and mercury are presented in Figure 1.24. The experimental results of these materials are with agreement with the discussion above. The surface tension of a selected material is given in Table 1.7. In conclusion, the surface tension issue is important only in case where the radius is very small and gravity is negligible. The surface tension depends on the two materials or mediums that it separates.
1.0 0.8

Height [cm]

0.6

0.4

0.2

0.0

0.0

0.3

0.6

0.9

1.2

1.5

1.8

2.1

2.4

2.7

Radii [cm]

May 29, 2008

Example 1.20: Calculate the diameter of a water droplet to attain pressure difference of 1000[N/m2 ]. You can assume that temperature is 20◦ C. Solution The pressure inside the droplet is given by equation (1.47). D = 2R = 22σ 4 × 0.0728 = ∼ 2.912 10−4 [m] ∆P 1000
End Solution

Example 1.21: Calculate the pressure difference between a droplet of water at 20◦ C when the droplet has a diameter of 0.02 cm. Solution

44 using equation

CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS 2σ 2 × 0.0728 ∼ ∼ 728.0[N/m2 ] r 0.0002
End Solution

∆P =

Example 1.22: Calculate the maximum force necessary to lift a thin wire ring of 0.04[m] diameter from a water surface at 20◦ C. Neglect the weight of the ring. Solution F = 2(2 π r σ) cos β The actual force is unknown since the contact angle is unknown. However, the maximum Force is obtained when β = 0 and thus cos β = 1. Therefore, F = 4 π r σ = 4 × π × 0.04 × 0.0728 ∼ .0366[N ] In this value the gravity is not accounted for.
End Solution

Example 1.23: A small liquid drop is surrounded with the air and has a diameter of 0.001 [m]. the pressure difference between the inside and outside droplet is 1[kPa]. Estimate the surface tension? Solution To be continue
End Solution

Table -1.7. The surface tension for selected materials at temperature 20◦ C when not mentioned.

Chemical component Acetic Acid Acetone Aniline Benzene Benzylalcohol

Surface Tension
mN m

T

correction
mN mK

27.6 25.20 43.4 28.88 39.00

20◦ C n/a -0.1120 22◦ C -0.1085 -0.1291 -0.0920 Continued on next page

1.7. SURFACE TENSION
Table -1.7. The surface tension for selected materials (continue)

45

Chemical component Benzylbenzoate Bromobenzene Bromobenzene Bromoform Butyronitrile Carbon disulfid Quinoline Chloro benzene Chloroform Cyclohexane Cyclohexanol Cyclopentanol Carbon Tetrachloride Carbon disulfid Chlorobutane Ethyl Alcohol Ethanol Ethylbenzene Ethylbromide Ethylene glycol Formamide Gasoline Glycerol Helium Mercury Methanol Methyl naphthalene Methyl Alcohol Neon Nitrobenzene Olive Oil Perfluoroheptane Perfluorohexane Perfluorooctane Phenylisothiocyanate Propanol Pyridine

Surface Tension
mN m

T

correction
mN mK

45.95 36.50 36.50 41.50 28.10 32.30 43.12 33.60 27.50 24.95 34.40 32.70 26.8 32.30 23.10 22.3 22.10 29.20 24.20 47.70 58.20 ∼ 21 64.0 0.12 425-465.0 22.70 38.60 22.6 5.15 43.90 43.0-48.0 12.85 11.91 14.00 41.50 23.70 38.00

-0.1066 -0.1160 -0.1160 -0.1308 -0.1037 -0.1484 -0.1063 -0.1191 -0.1295 -0.1211 ◦ 25 C -0.0966 -0.1011 n/a -0.1484 -0.1117 n/a -0.0832 -0.1094 -0.1159 -0.0890 -0.0842 n/a -0.0598 −269◦ C n/a -0.2049 -0.0773 -0.1118 n/a −247◦ C n/a -0.1177 -0.067 -0.0972 -0.0935 -0.0902 -0.1172 25◦ C -0.0777 -0.1372 Continued on next page

46

CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS
Table -1.7. The surface tension for selected materials (continue)

Chemical component Pyrrol SAE 30 Oil Seawater Toluene Turpentine Water o-Xylene m-Xylene

Surface Tension
mN m

T -

correction
mN mK

36.60 n/a 54-69 28.4 27 72.80 30.10 28.90

-0.1100 n/a n/a -0.1189 n/a -0.1514 -0.1101 -0.1104

CHAPTER 2 Review of Thermodynamics
In this chapter, a review of several definitions of common thermodynamics terms is presented. This introduction is provided to bring the student back to current place with the material.

2.1 Basic Definitions
The following basic definitions are common to thermodynamics and will be used in this book. Work In mechanics, the work was defined as mechanical work = F•d = P dV (2.1)

This definition can be expanded to include two issues. The first issue that must be addressed, that work done on the surroundings by the system boundaries similarly is positive. Two, there is a transfer of energy so that its effect can cause work. It must be noted that electrical current is a work while heat transfer isn’t. System This term will be used in this book and it is defined as a continuous (at least partially) fixed quantity of matter. The dimensions of this material can be changed. In this definition, it is assumed that the system speed is significantly lower than that of the speed of light. So, the mass can be assumed constant even though the true conservation law applied to the combination of mass energy (see Einstein’s law). In fact for almost all engineering purpose this law is reduced to two separate laws of mass conservation and energy conservation.

47

48

CHAPTER 2. REVIEW OF THERMODYNAMICS

Our system can receive energy, work, etc as long the mass remain constant the definition is not broken. Thermodynamics First Law This law refers to conservation of energy in a non accelerating system. Since all the systems can be calculated in a non accelerating systems, the conservation is applied to all systems. The statement describing the law is the following. Q12 − W12 = E2 − E1 (2.2)

The system energy is a state property. From the first law it directly implies that for process without heat transfer (adiabatic process) the following is true W12 = E1 − E2 (2.3)

Interesting results of equation (2.3) is that the way the work is done and/or intermediate states are irrelevant to final results. There are several definitions/separations of the kind of works and they include kinetic energy, potential energy (gravity), chemical potential, and electrical energy, etc. The internal energy is the energy that depends on the other properties of the system. For example for pure/homogeneous and simple gases it depends on two properties like temperature and pressure. The internal energy is denoted in this book as EU and it will be treated as a state property. The potential energy of the system is depended on the body force. A common body force is the gravity. For such body force, the potential energy is mgz where g is the gravity force (acceleration), m is the mass and the z is the vertical height from a datum. The kinetic energy is K.E. = mU 2 2 (2.4)

Thus the energy equation can be written as Total Energy Equation mU1 mU2 2 + mgz1 + EU 1 + Q = + mgz2 + EU 2 + W 2 2 For the unit mass of the system equation (2.5) is transformed into Spesific Energy Equation U1 2 U2 2 + gz1 + Eu 1 + q = + gz2 + Eu 2 + w 2 2 (2.6)
2

(2.5)

where q is the energy per unit mass and w is the work per unit mass. The “new” internal energy, Eu , is the internal energy per unit mass.

2.1. BASIC DEFINITIONS

49

Since the above equations are true between arbitrary points, choosing any point in time will make it correct. Thus differentiating the energy equation with respect to time yields the rate of change energy equation. The rate of change of the energy transfer is DQ ˙ =Q Dt (2.7)

In the same manner, the work change rate transfered through the boundaries of the system is DW ˙ =W Dt Since the system is with a fixed mass, the rate energy equation is DU D Bf z D EU ˙ ˙ + mU +m Q−W = Dt Dt Dt (2.9) (2.8)

For the case were the body force, Bf , is constant with time like in the case of gravity equation (2.9) reduced to Time Dependent Energy Equation D EU DU Dz ˙ ˙ Q−W = + mU + mg Dt Dt Dt (2.10)

The time derivative operator, D/Dt is used instead of the common notation because it referred to system property derivative. Thermodynamics Second Law There are several definitions of the second law. No matter which definition is used to describe the second law it will end in a mathematical form. The most common mathematical form is Clausius inequality which state that δQ ≥0 T (2.11)

The integration symbol with the circle represent integral of cycle (therefor circle) in with system return to the same condition. If there is no lost, it is referred as a reversible process and the inequality change to equality. δQ =0 T (2.12)

The last integral can go though several states. These states are independent of the path the system goes through. Hence, the integral is independent of the path. This observation leads to the definition of entropy and designated as S and the derivative of entropy is ds ≡ δQ T rev (2.13)

50

CHAPTER 2. REVIEW OF THERMODYNAMICS

Performing integration between two states results in
2

S2 − S1 =
1

δQ = T rev

2

dS
1

(2.14)

One of the conclusions that can be drawn from this analysis is for reversible and adiabatic process dS = 0. Thus, the process in which it is reversible and adiabatic, the entropy remains constant and referred to as isentropic process. It can be noted that there is a possibility that a process can be irreversible and the right amount of heat transfer to have zero change entropy change. Thus, the reverse conclusion that zero change of entropy leads to reversible process, isn’t correct. For reversible process equation (2.12) can be written as δQ = T dS and the work that the system is doing on the surroundings is δW = P dV Substituting equations (2.15) (2.16) into (2.10) results in T dS = d EU + P dV (2.17) (2.16) (2.15)

Even though the derivation of the above equations were done assuming that there is no change of kinetic or potential energy, it still remail valid for all situations. Furthermore, it can be shown that it is valid for reversible and irreversible processes. Enthalpy It is a common practice to define a new property, which is the combination of already defined properties, the enthalpy of the system. H = EU + P V The specific enthalpy is enthalpy per unit mass and denoted as, h. Or in a differential form as dH = dEU + dP V + P dV Combining equations (2.18) the (2.17) yields (one form of) Gibbs Equation T dS = dH − V dP (2.20) (2.19) (2.18)

For isentropic process, equation (2.17) is reduced to dH = V dP . The equation (2.17) in mass unit is dP T ds = du + P dv = dh − (2.21) ρ

2.1. BASIC DEFINITIONS when the density enters through the relationship of ρ = 1/v.

51

Specific Heats The change of internal energy and enthalpy requires new definitions. The first change of the internal energy and it is defined as the following Spesific Volume Heat Cv ≡ ∂Eu ∂T (2.22)

And since the change of the enthalpy involve some kind of work is defined as Spesific Pressure Heat Cp ≡ ∂h ∂T (2.23)

The ratio between the specific pressure heat and the specific volume heat is called the ratio of the specific heat and it is denoted as, k. Spesific Heats Ratio Cp k≡ Cv

(2.24)

For solid, the ratio of the specific heats is almost 1 and therefore the difference between them is almost zero. Commonly the difference for solid is ignored and both are assumed to be the same and therefore referred as C. This approximation less strong for liquid but not by that much and in most cases it applied to the calculations. The ratio the specific heat of gases is larger than one. Equation of state Equation of state is a relation between state variables. Normally the relationship of temperature, pressure, and specific volume define the equation of state for gases. The simplest equation of state referred to as ideal gas. and it is defined as P = ρRT (2.25)

Application of Avogadro’s law, that ”all gases at the same pressures and temperatures have the same number of molecules per unit of volume,” allows the calculation of a “universal gas constant.” This constant to match the standard units results in ¯ R = 8.3145 kj kmol K (2.26)

7164 0.4897 1.29637 2.6179 0.3122 1.5734 0.667 1.970 39.948 58.7445 1.29683 0.25) of state for perfect gas it follows d(P v) = RdT For perfect gas dh = dEu + d(P v) = dEu + d(RT ) = f (T ) (only) (2.01 30.400 1.18892 0.18855 0. REVIEW OF THERMODYNAMICS Thus.07703 4.1156 10.6385 0.186 1.14304 0.0849 1.013 114.1926 14.48152 1.4909 1.299 1.29) (2. the specific gas can be calculate as R= ¯ R M (2.2518 3.667 1.6794 1.5482 5.7354 0.003 2.400 1.27) The specific constants for select gas at 300K is provided in table 2.04 20.6529 0.7165 0.044 1.5203 1.0416 1.409 1.1.52 CHAPTER 2.28) .12418 0. Table -2.28700 0.07279 0.999 44.7113 0.091 1.27650 0.25983 0. Properties of Various Ideal Gases [300K] Gas Chemical Formula Ar C4 H10 CO2 CO C 2 H6 C 2 H4 He H2 CH4 Ne N2 C8 H18 O2 C 3 H8 H2 O Molecular Weight 28.400 1.0035 0.8723 0.124 44.237 1.2091 2.41195 0.667 1.126 1.230 31.4108 1.20813 0.7662 1.015 R kj KgK CP kj KgK Cv kj KgK k Air Argon Butane Carbon Dioxide Carbon Monoxide Ethane Ethylene Helium Hydrogen Methane Neon Nitrogen Octane Oxygen Propane Steam 0.1.07 28.097 18.7448 1.393 1.8418 1.2537 1.327 From equation (2.01 28.289 1.0299 1.29680 0.054 4.51835 0.6618 1.183 28.016 16.9216 1.0413 1.

the following is obtained T2 ln = ln T1 P2 P1 k−1 k (2. The entropy for ideal gas can be simplified as the following 2 s2 − s1 = 1 dh dP − T ρT (2.32) (2.28) and subsisting into equation (2. These values depend on the molecular degrees of freedom (more explanation can be obtained in Van Wylen “F.” The values of several gases can be approximated as ideal gas and are provided in Table (2.37) as Ideal Gas Isontropic Relationships T2 = T1 P2 P1 k−1 k = V1 V2 k−1 (2.667.38) .1.1).36) (2. The ratio of the specific heats can be expressed in several forms as Cv to Spesific Heats Ratio Cv = R k−1 (2.30) Utilizing equation (2. of Classical thermodynamics.33) The specific heat ratio.37) There are several famous identities that results from equation (2.30) and dividing by dT yields Cp − Cv = R This relationship is valid only for ideal/perfect gases.2. k value ranges from unity to about 1.35) transformed into k T2 P2 s2 − s1 = ln − ln R k − 1 T1 P1 For isentropic process. BASIC DEFINITIONS From the definition of enthalpy it follows that d(P v) = dh − dEu 53 (2. ∆s = 0.35) Or using specific heat ratio equation (2.31) Cp to Spesific Heats Ratio Cp = kR k−1 (2.34) Using the identities developed so far one can find that 2 s2 − s1 = 1 Cp dT − T 2 1 R dP T2 P2 = Cp ln − R ln P T1 P1 (2.

The real gas has a correction factor to account for the deviations from the ideal gas model.54 CHAPTER 2.39) . This correction factor referred as the compressibility factor and defined as Z deviation from the Ideal Gas Model PV Z= RT (2. REVIEW OF THERMODYNAMICS The ideal gas model is a simplified version of the real behavior of real gas.

change in R direction change in perpendicular to R U = dR = dt dR dt + R ω ×R (3. The velocity is derivative of the change of the location and using the chain role (for the direction and one for the magnitude) results. It also can be noticed that this derivative is present derivation of any victory.1: A water jet is supposed be used to extinguish the fire in a building as depicted in Figure 55 . The acceleration is the derivative of the velocity “regular acceleration” angular acceleration centrifugal acceleration Coriolis acceleration a= dU = dt d2R dt2 + R× R dω dt +ω × R × ω +2 dR dt ×ω R (3. 3.1) Notice that ω can have three dimensional components. This chapter provides a review of important definitions and concepts from Mechanics (statics and dynamics).2) Example 3. R .CHAPTER 3 Review of Mechanics This author would like to express his gratitude to Dan Olsen (former Minneapolis city Engineer) and his friend Richard Hackbarth. These concepts and definitions will be used in this book and a review is needed. t in a location.1 Kinematics of of Point Body A point body is location at time.

a).I. Isolating t from (3.I.I. dow.a) becomes √ ag −g a 0= + U cos θ =⇒ U = U cos θ cos θ Substituting (3. -3. Calculate what is the veFig.c) b= and equation (3.I. U .1. The equation for the x coordinate is a = U cos θ t (3.I. Assume that gravity is g and the distance of the nozzle from the building is a and height of the window from the nozzle is b. it b proposed to calculate the velocity a of the point particle to toward the window.a) and substituting into equations (3.e) −g a2 + a tan θ 2 U 2 cos2 θ (3. For given velocity.I.d) results in tan θ = 1 b + a 2 (3.I.I.I. The velocity at x is Ux = U cos θ and the velocity in y direction is Uy = U sin θ.I.b) and (3. (3.d) End Solution 1 While the simple example does not provide exact use of the above equation it provides experience of going over the motions of kinematics.b) The velocity for the y coordinate at the window is zero u(t) = 0 = −g t + U sin θ (3. To simplify the calculations. There there are three unknowns.11 . U sin θ U cos θ θ Solution The initial velocity is unknown and denoted as U which two components.I.I.c) These nonlinear equations (3. Description of the extinguish locity so that the jet reach the winnozzle aimed at the building window. What is the angle that jet has to be aimed. θ.a) The distance for y equation for coordinate (zero is at the window) is 0=− g t2 + U sin θ t − b 2 (3. REVIEW OF MECHANICS 3.b) and (3.f) (3. t and three equations.I.I. and time.c) can be solved explicitly.I. . at what angle the jet has to be shot so that velocity will be horizontal at the window.56 CHAPTER 3.e) into (3.

1 Actual Center of Mass In many engineering problems.Fig. etc. The center of mass doesn’t depend on the coordinate system and on the way it is calculated. if a body will be held by one point it will be enough to hold the body in the direction of the center of mass. then a moment in additional to force is required (to prevent the body for rotating). Also. Here.2. 3. In x coordinate. In same is calculated. the body will not rotate. The physical meaning of the center of mass is that if a straight line force acts on the body in away through the center of gravity. rho) as a function of the location. It is convenient to use the Cartesian system to explain this concept. This concept is derived from the fact that a body has a center of mass/gravity which interacts with other bodies and that this force acts on the center (equivalent force). . fashion the center of mass can be defined in the other directions as following xi of Center Mass 1 xi = ¯ xi ρ(xi )dV m V (3. ρ(xi ) is the line density as function of xi . x. the dV element has finite dimendV sions in y–z plane and infinitesimal dimension in x direction see Figure 3.2 Center of Mass The center of mass is divided into two sections. The density “normally” defined as mass per volume. The density. It turns out that this concept is very useful in calculating rotations.3. Note. m is the total mass of the object. Description of how the center of mass tion in the y nor by z directions.3) z Here. center of area (two–dimensional body with equal distribution mass). first. Suppose that the body has a distribution of the mass (density. y or z. the center of mass is required to make the calculations. the the line density is referred to density mass per unit length in the x direction. center of the mass and two. even for solid and uniform density the line density is a function of the geometry. It can be noticed that center of mass in the x–direction isn’t affected by the distribu. -3. the center will be defined as 1 x= ¯ m dm y x ρ(x)dV V (3. the x mass. if the body isn’t be held through the center of mass.2. Thus. moment of inertia. CENTER OF MASS 57 3.2.2.4) where xi is the direction of either. In other words.

3.3. ρ and the thickness. Finding the centroid location should be done in the most convenient coordinate system since the location is coordinate independent. Thus.8) .7) If the density is constant then equation (3. t. Consider a uniform thin body with constant thickness shown in Figure 3.58 CHAPTER 3.6) when the integral now over only the area as oppose over the volume. Furthermore.2. ρ.5) Fig. the moment of inertia is divided into moment of inertia of mass and area. REVIEW OF MECHANICS 3. There are cases where the body can be approximated as a twodimensional shape because the body is with a thin with uniform density.2 Aproximate Center of Area t dA Y In the previous case. schematic. Moment of inertia of mass is defined as Moment of Inertia Irr m = ρr2 dm m (3. are constant and can be canceled.1 Moment of Inertia for Mass The moment of inertia turns out to be an essential part for the calculations of rotating bodies. 3. it turns out that the moment of inertia has much wider applicability.3 Moment of Inertia As it was divided for the body center of mass.5) can be transferred into Aproxiate xi of Center Mass xi = ¯ 1 A xi dA A (3. -3.3.3 which has density.3) can be transferred into 1 x= ¯ tA ρ V dm z x x ρ t dA V (3. Thus equation (3. the body was a three dimensional shape. equation (3.7) can be transformed into Irr m = ρ r2 dV V (3. Thin body center of mass/area The density.

9) The body has a different moment of inertia for every coordinate/axis and they are Ixx = Iyy = Izz = V V V rx 2 dm = ry 2 dm = rz 2 dm = (3. . t and uniform density the following can be written moment of inertia for area Ixx m = r2 dm = ρ t m A r2 dA (3.10) 3. Some people define the radius of gyration as an equivalent concepts for the center of mass concept and which means if all the mass were to locate in the one point/distance and to obtain the same of moment of inertia.4. Any point distance can be calculated from axis x as y (3.15) mation of moment of inertia.3.12) x= y2 + z2 (3. The schematic that explains the sum- (3.12) can be written as Ixx = A y +z 2 2 dA (3.14) ∆y x z’ ∆x x’ In the same fashion for other two coordinates as Iyy = A x2 + z 2 dA Fig.3.3. MOMENT OF INERTIA 59 The moment of inertia is independent of the coordinate system used for the calculation. -3.3.2 3. equation (3.13) y’ C z Thus. but dependent on the location of axis of rotation relative to the body.11) The moment of inertia about axis is x can be defined as Moment of Inertia Ixx m Ixx = r2 dA = ρt A where r is distance of dA from the axis x and t is the thickness.2. rk = Im m (y 2 + z 2 ) dm (x2 + z 2 ) dm V (x2 + y 2 ) dm V V (3.1 Moment of Inertia for Area General Discussion For body with thickness.

The knowledge about one axis can help calculating the moment of inertia for a parallel axis. Let Ixx the moment of inertia about axis xx which is at the center of mass/area.5.60 CHAPTER 3.17) can be expended as Ixx =0 Ix x = A y 2 + z 2 dA + 2 A (y ∆y + z ∆z) dA + A (∆y) + (∆z) 2 2 dA (3.3. REVIEW OF MECHANICS Izz = A x2 + y 2 dA (3.2 The Parallel Axis Theorem The moment of inertial can be calculated for any axis. Ixx = i=1 Ixxi = n Ixxi (3.19) Hence. The moment of inertia for axis x is Ix x = A r dA = A 2 y 2 +z 2 dA = A (y + ∆y) + (z + ∆z) 2 2 dA (3.20) The moment of inertia of several areas is the sum of moment inertia of each area see Figure 3.16) 3.5 and therefore.17) equation (3. The schematic to explain the summation of moment of inertia.21) x If the same areas are similar thus n Fig. -3. n 2 1 y Ixx = i=1 Ixx i (3.22) .18) The first term in equation (3. The second therm is zero because it integral of center about center thus is zero. The third term is a new term and can be written as constant r2 2 A 2 A 2 2 (∆y) + (∆z) A dA = (∆y) + (∆z) dA = r2 A (3. the relationship between the moment of inertia at xx and parallel axis x x is Parallel Axis Equation Ix x = Ixx + r2 A z (3.2.18) on the right hand side is the moment of inertia about axis x and the second them is zero.

as shown in Figure 3.6.14) as following   0 y z b dx a x Ixx = A  2 2  y +z  dA = 0 a dA z 2 bdz = a b 3 3 This value will be used in later examples. -3. -3. The material is with an uniform density and homogeneous.3 Examples of Moment of Inertia Example 3.6 as Irr = ρ V r dm = ρ 0 2 r0 dV r h 2 π r dr = ρ h 2 π 2 r0 4 1 1 = ρhπr0 4 = m r0 2 4 2 2 The radius of gyration is rk = 1 2 mr0 2 r0 =√ m 2 End Solution Example 3. r0 . Solution The moment of inertia is calculated utilizing equation (3. Fig.7.3. The moment of inertia can then move the center of area.7 around x coordinate. Solution The element can be calculated using cylindrical coordinate.6. the moment of inertial of half a circle is half of whole circle for axis a the center of circle. Here the convenient element is a shell of thickness dr which shown in Figure 3. End Solution Fig.3. .3: Calculate the moment of inertia of the rectangular shape shown in Figure 3.3. Description of rectangular in x–y plane for calculation of moment of inertia. MOMENT OF INERTIA h 61 Equation (3. For example.22) is very useful in the calculation of the moment of inertia utilizing the moment of inertia of known bodies.2: Calculate the moment of inertia for the mass of the cylinder about center axis which height of h and radius. dr r 3. Cylinder with an element for calculaof the tion moment of inertia.

Calculate the moment of inertia about the center of mass of a square shape with a thickness. I can be noticed that the error is significant very fast even for small values of t/a while the with of the box.Fig.9. -3.25) Comparison with the thin body results in Ixx ρ t b a3 1 (3. February 28. 2008 t a End Solution ratio is a dimensionless number that commonly has no special name.4: To study the assumption of zero thickness.24) The total moment of inertia can be obtained by integration of equation (3. REVIEW OF MECHANICS Example 3. 2 This .26) indicates that ratio approaches one when thickness ratio is approaches zero. Solution The moment of inertia of transverse slice about y (see Figure mech:fig:squareEll) is Ixx t dIxx m = ρ dy The transformation into from local axis x to center axis. Ixx m (t → 0) → 1. a2 /t2 is the only contributor to the error2 . This author suggests to call this ratio as the B number. consider a simple shape to see the effects of this assumption.8. x can be done as following   Ixx b a3 12 (3. b has no effect on the error.26) = 2 = 3 t2 Ixx m t ba + ba 1 + a2 Ixx Ixxm It can be noticed right away that equation (3. -3.24) to write as t/2 Fig. A square element for the calculations of inertia of two-dimensional to three– dimensional deviations.62 CHAPTER 3.23) dz dIx x m  b a3  = ρdy  + z2  12 2 r r A 2   ba   A a b (3. t compare the results to a square shape with zero thickness. The results are present in Figure 3. Ixx m = ρ −t/2 b a3 a b t 2 + a3 b + z 2 b a dz = ρ t 12 12 (3. Ad. The ratio of the moment of inertia of ditionally it can be noticed that the ratio two-dimensional to three–dimensional.9.

c) Example 3.3.V. Solution For y = b the value of x = Fig.a) The second integration ( no need to use (3. -3.V.10 is a r2 d Izz |dy = y 2 + x2 dy dx = −a 2 3 a y 2 + a3 dy 3 (3.6: Calculate the center of area and moment of inertia for the parabola. Parabola for calculations of moment of inertia.11. Using this method calculate the entire rectangular. Use this area to calculate moment of inertia. Rectangular Moment of inertia.V. why?) is b Izz = −b 2 3 a y 2 + a3 dy 3 4ab (3. b/α.20). MOMENT OF INERTIA Example 3.11.10. Solution dx dy y r x 63 2b 2a Fig. y = αx2 . -3. The moment of inertia for a long element with a distance y shown in Figure 3. construct a small element and build longer build out of the small one.5: Calculate the rectangular moment of Inertia for the rotation trough center in zz axis (axis of rotation is out of the page). Hint. depicted in Figure 3. First the area inside the parabola calculated as √ b/α dA/2 A=2 0 2(3 α − 1) (b − αξ )dξ = 3 2 b α 3 2 .3. There are several ways to approach the calculation (different infinitesimal area). calculate the area first.b) Results in Izz = Or a 2 a b3 + 2 a3 b = A 3 End Solution (2a)2 + (2b)2 12 (3. Hint.

Assume that base is a and the height is h.64 CHAPTER 3. What is the moment inertia when h −→ 0.27) The moment of inertia of the area about the center can be found using in equation (3. The center of every 2 element is at. α ξ 2 + b−αξ the element area is used before and therefore 2 √ 1 xc = A 0 xc b/α (b − αξ 2 ) αξ + 2 2 dA (b − αξ 2 )dξ = 3αb 15 α − 5 (3. What is the moment when a symmetrical triangle is attached on bottom. Utilizing equation (3.12. Triangle for example 3.14) and doing the integration from 0 to maximum y provides dA b Ix Utilizing equation (3. What is the moment when a symmetrical triangle is attached on left. Solution The right edge line equation can be calculated as x y = 1− h a Y h dy X a Fig. .7.27) can be done in two steps first calculate the moment of inertia in this coordinate system and then move the coordinate system to center. -3. What is the moment inertia when a −→ 0.6). REVIEW OF MECHANICS The center of area can be calculated utilizing equation (3.20) x =4 0 ξ2 ξ 2 b7/2 dξ = √ α 7 α Ix x A (∆x=xc )2 Ixx = Ix x − A ∆x2 = 4 b7/2 3 α − 1 √ − 3 7 α √ b α 3 2 3αb 15 α − 5 2 or after working the details results in Ixx = b 20 b3 − 14 b2 √ 35 α End Solution Example 3.7: Calculate the moment of inertia of strait angle triangle about its y axis as shown in the Figure on the right.

Transfer of Axis Theorem Same as for moment of inertia there is also similar theorem. the product of inertia is commonly used.4 Product of Inertia In addition to the moment of inertia. The product of inertia defined as Ix i x j = xi xj dA A (3. Ix y = A x y dA = A (x + ∆x) (y + ∆y)dA (3. Here only the product of the area is defined and discussed.3)) y 3 h a 1− dy a3 h h = 3 4 0 For two triangles attached to each other the moment of inertia will be sum as The rest is under construction.31) A .29) Product of inertia can be positive or negative value as oppose the moment of inertia.30) results in 0 0 Ixy ∆y A x dA x ∆ydA + ∆x A y dA ∆x ydA + ∆x ∆y A Ix y = A x ydA + A ∆x ∆ydA A (3.30) expanding equation (3. the product of inertia for x and y axises is Ixy = A x ydA (3.28) For example.3.3. The units of the product of inertia are the same as for moment of inertia. The calculation of the product of inertia isn’t different much for the calculation of the moment of inertia. End Solution a3 h 2 3. MOMENT OF INERTIA or x y = 1− a h 65 Now using the moment of inertia of rectangle on the side (y) coordinate (see example (3.3.

Solution The equation of the line is a y = x+a b The product of inertia at the center is zero. .66 The final form is Ix y CHAPTER 3.32) There are several relationships should be mentioned Ixy = Iyx (3.35) System which creates equation (3.34) In linear algebra it was shown that for some angle equation (3. The total product of inertia is ∆x ∆y A b ′ y y x a ′ x Ix y =0+ a 3 b 3 ab 2 = a2 b2 18 Fig.5 Principal Axes of Inertia The inertia matrix or inertia tensor is Ixx −Iyx −Izx −Ixy Iyy −Izy −Ixz −Iyz Izz (3. REVIEW OF MECHANICS = Ixy + ∆x ∆y A (3. End Solution 3.34) can be transform into Ix x 0 0 0 Iy y 0 0 0 Iz z (3.3.13.33) Symmetrical area has zero product of inertia because integration of odd function (asymmmertial function) left part cancel the right part.8: Calculate the product of inertia of straight edge triangle.35) referred as principle system. Example 3. Product of inertia for triangle. -3.

2 (Ur × ω).4 Newton’s Laws of Motion These laws can be summarized in two statements one. U is a derivative of the location with respect to time. r × ω. The surface forces are forces that act on the surface of the body (pressure. which can expressed in mathematical form as D (m U ) (3. These small “bodies” when became small enough equation (3. dm. This law apply to any body and any body can “broken” into many small bodies which connected to each other. Yet.3. The radial velocity is denoted as Ur . for every action by body A on Body B there is opposite reaction by body B on body A. thus.36) can be transformed to a continuous form as D (ρ U ) F= dV (3. F= ρ rdV V (3.38) The velocity.40) The angular momentum of the entire system is calculated by integration (summation) of all the particles in the system as Ls = m r × U dm (3. Coriolis.36) F= Dt It can be noted that D replaces the traditional d since the additional meaning which be added. stresses). Angular. ω×(r × ω). NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION 67 3.4. the system acceleration called the internal forces. The body forces are forces that act from a distance like magnetic field or gravity. the derivative can be taken out of the integral and the alternative form can be written as F= D Dt D2 Dt2 ρ U dV V (3. Since the derivative with respect to time is independent of the volume. The acceleration is divided into three categories: Centrifugal.5 Angular Momentum and Torque The angular momentum of body. it can be treated as the regular derivative. Two. The external forces are typically divided into two categories: body forces and surface forces. The same as in the dynamic class.37) Dt V The external forces are equal to internal forces the forces between the “small” bodies are cancel each other.39) where r is the location of the particles from the origin. is defined as L = r × Udm (3. Yet this examination provides a tool to study what happened in the fluid during operation of the forces. ˙ 3.41) .

5.46) Since the torque is a derivative with respect to the time of the angular momentum it is also can be written as xFx − yFy = D [(xv − yu) dm] Dt (3.42) to calculate the torque as   ˆ ˆ k i j ˆ ˆ Tτ = r × F =  x y 0  = (x Fx − y Fy )k Fx Fy 0 (3. A force is acting on the particle in the same plane (x–y) plane. in analogous to the momentum change of time which is the force. (3.44) To understand these equations a bit better. .43) m It can be noticed (well. The velocity can be written as U = uˆ + vˆ and the location from the origin can be written as r = xˆ + yˆ i j i j. consider a particle moving in x–y plane.40) provides   ˆ ˆ k i j ˆ ˆ L = r × U =  x y 0  = (x v − y u)k (3. in the same fashion. REVIEW OF MECHANICS The change with time of angular momentum is called torque. Tτ = DL D = (r × Udm) Dt Dt (3. The torque of entire system is Tτ s = D DL = Dt Dt (r × Udm) m (3. it can be proved utilizing vector mechanics) that Tτ = D D Dr D2 r (r × U) = (r × )= Dt Dt Dt Dt2 (3.68 CHAPTER 3. as F = Fxˆ + Fy ˆ Utilizing equation i j.42) where Tτ is the torque. 3. The force can be written.45) u v 0 Utilizing equation (3.48) In the same way the component in y and z can be obtained.1 Tables of geometries Th following tables present several moment of inertias of commonly used geometries.47) The torque is a vector and the various components can be represented as Tτ x = ˆ • i D Dt r × U dm m (3.

3. ANGULAR MOMENTUM AND TORQUE 69 Table -3. 2 2 ab ab3 12 XX Triangle b b/3 a a 3 ab 3 ab3 36 XX Circle a=b b b/2 b 2 π b2 4 πb4 64 a Ellipse XX a>b b b/2 b b 2 2 π ab 4 Ab2 64 a y = αx2 Parabola a XX b xc 3αb 15 α−5 6α−2 3 × 3 b 2 α √ b (20 b3 −14 b2 ) √ 35 α . yc A Ixx XX Rectangle b b/2 a b a .5. Moments of Inertia for various plane surfaces about their center of gravity (full shapes) Shape Name Picture description xc .1.

yc A Ixx Quadrant of Circle XX 4r 3π 4r 3π π r2 4 4 π r 4 ( 16 − 9π ) r Ellipsoidal Quadrant XX b 4b 3π 4b 3π πab 4 π 4 a b3 ( 16 − 9π ) a Half of Elliptic XX b 4b 3π 4b 3π πab 4 π 4 a b3 ( 16 − 9π ) a Circular Sector XX α α 0 2α r2 r4 4 (α− 1 sin 2α) 2 r XX Circular Sector α α 2 r sin α 3 α 2 r sin α 3 α Ix 2α r2 r4 4 x = r (α+ 1 sin 2α) 2 .70 CHAPTER 3. REVIEW OF MECHANICS Table -3. Moment of inertia for various plane surfaces about their center of gravity Shape Name Picture description r xc .2.

a = 0. with acceleration. The first assumption is that the change in the pressure is a continuous function.2 The Hydrostatic Equation A fluid element with dimensions of DC. and dz is motionless in the accelerated system. This topic was introduced to most students in previous study of rigid body. z). where n is the steepest 71 . a as shown in Figure 4.1) can be reduced and simplified for the case of no acceleration. Furthermore. Later. -4. Description of a fluid element in accel- Equation (4. In these derivations. There is no requirement that the pressure has to be a monotonous function e. However. The changes of the second derivative pressure are not significant compared to the first derivative (∂P/∂n × d >> ∂ 2 P/∂n2 ). The combination of an acceleration and the body force results in effective body force which is gG − a = geff y P     P+ ∂P  dy  dxdz  ∂y     P+ dy ∂P  dz  dxdy ∂z     P+ ∂P  dx dydz ∂x  dz dx z P x (4.1. the methods discussed here will be expanded to more complicated dynamics situations. the student will be exposed to stability analysis probably for the first time. The system is in a body force field. here this topic will be more vigorously examined.1) erated system under body forces. that pressure can increase and later decrease. Fig.1 Introduction The simplest situation that can occur in the study of fluid is when the fluid is at rest or quasi rest. 4. gG (x. dy.g. several assumptions must be made.CHAPTER 4 Fluids Statics 4.1. y.

2) In the same fashion. if the coordinates were to “rotate/transform” to a new system which has a different orientation. The net pressure force on the faces in the x direction results in dF = − ∂P ∂x dydx ˆ i (4. FLUIDS STATICS direction of the pressure derivative and d is the infinitesimal length. as a scalar function (there no reference to the shear stress in part of the pressure) the gradient is a vector.6) Hence. This mathematical operation has a geometrical interpretation. This mathematical statement simply requires that the pressure can deviate in such a way that the average on infinitesimal area can be found and expressed as only one direction. the effective gravity force is utilized in case where the gravity is the only body force and in an accelerated system. For example. now.7) . the calculations of the three directions result in the total net pressure force as F =− surface ∂P ˆ ∂P ˆ ∂P ˆ i+ j+ k ∂x ∂y ∂y (4. the dot product results in in · gradP = in · P = ∂P ∂n (4. was a two–dimensional height (that is only a function of x and y) then the gradient is the steepest ascent of the height (to the valley).8) (4.5) where in is the unit vector in the n direction and ∂/∂n is a derivative in that direction. As before. The body (element) is in rest and therefore the net force is zero F= total surface F+ body F (4.3) The term in the parentheses in equation (4. If the pressure.3) referred to in the literature as the pressure gradient (see for more explanation in the Mathematics Appendix).72 CHAPTER 4. P . the dot product of the following is i · gradP = i · P = ∂P ∂x (4. the utilizing the above derivations one can obtain −gradP dx dy dz + ρ geff dx dy dz = 0 or Pressure Gradient gradP = P = ρ geff (4. Even though. the pressure is treated.4) In general. it has a direction). The second point is that the gradient is a vector (that is.

11) (4.3 Pressure and Density in a Gravitational Field In this section.13) becomes P (z) − P0 = −ρg(z − z0 ) (4.3.3.13) The integration constant is determined from the initial conditions or another point. First. ρ. y. For example. z) = −ρgz + constant (4.1 Constant Density in Gravitational Field The simplest case is when the density.12) (4. However. a discussion on the pressure and the density in various conditions is presented. The effective body force is ˆ geff = −g k (4.8) as the Fluid Static Equation. T (in a way no function of the location) are constant. a discussion on a simple condition and will continue in more challenging situations.11) and therefore P (x. there are several physical implications to this equation which should be discussed and are presented here.4.10) can be integrated to yield P (x. . 4.9) Utilizing equation (4. There are fields where x or y are designed to the direction of the gravity and opposite direction. if at point z0 the pressure is P0 then the equation (4.14) 1 This situation were the tradition is appropriated. PRESSURE AND DENSITY IN A GRAVITATIONAL FIELD 73 Some refer to equation (4. This equation can be integrated and therefore solved. Traditionally. For this reason sometime there will be a deviation from the above statement.10) and constant in equation (4. it will be used. and temperature. y) = constant (4. P .12) can be absorbed by the integration of equation (4.9) and substituting it into equation (4.8) results into three simple partial differential equations. These equations are ∂P ∂P = =0 ∂x ∂y and Pressure Change ∂P = −ρ g ∂z Equations (4. the z coordinate is used as the (negative) direction of the gravity1 . pressure. 4.

14) becomes Pressure relationship P (h) − P0 = ρgh (4. -4.15) is defined as piezometric pressure. The reason that a a solid boundary doesn’t break the continuity of the pressure lines is because there is always a path to some of the planes.74 CHAPTER 4. A schematic to explain the measure to define h as the dependent of the fluid of the atmospheric pressure. If the air mass at chamber A is 1 Kg while the mass at chamber B is unknown. the right hand side of the equation (4. -4. Figure 4.2.2 describes the constant ρgh pressure lines in the container under the gravity body force. The difference in the .4 are in equilibration.13) that the pressure depends only on z and/or the constant pressure lines are in the plane of x and y. It is convenient to reverse the direction of z to get rid of the negative sign and Fig.3. that is h ≡ −(z − z0 ) so equation (4.1: Two chambers tank depicted in Figure 4. Pressure lines in a static fluid with a constant density. The pressure lines are continuous even in area where there is a discontinuous fluid. FLUIDS STATICS Constant Pressure Lines Fig.15) In the literature. Example 4. It is evident from equation (4.

I.I. The area of each chamber is h3 h2 1[m2 ]. (4. Solution The equation of state for the chamber A is RT PA VA The equation of state for the second chamber is mA = mB = The water volume is Vtotal = h1 A + (h1 + h2 )A = (2 h1 + h2 ) A (4.f) The following question is a very nice qualitative question of understanding this concept.a) (4.c) The pressure difference between the liquid interface is estimated negligible the air density as PA − PB = ∆P = h2 ρ g (4. Assume that for accelerated cart.a).2: .4.I.b)   h2 ρ g mA VA RT RT 1 = − = h2 ρ g =⇒ 1 −  mB VB  mA VA m B VB RT mA VA In equation the only unknown is the ratio of mB /mA since everything else is known.e) RT P B VB (4.I.I. Calculate the air mass in chamber B.3.b) results in   (4. the chamber are at the same temperature of 27◦ C. Example 4. The total Fig.4.I. The liquid in the two chambers is water. You can assume ideal gas for the air h1 and the water is incompressible substance with density of 1000[kg/m2 ].I.I. The effective gravity is height of the tank is 4[m]. Denoting X = mB /mA results in h 2 ρ g m A VA 1 =1− =⇒ X = X RT End Solution 1 h2 ρ g mA VA 1− RT (4. PRESSURE AND DENSITY IN A GRAVITATIONAL FIELD 75 liquid heights between the two chambers is 2[m]. -4.d) combining equations (4.

Calculate the error for a give ratio between the fuel density to the water. -4.76 A tank with opening at the top to the atmosphere contains two immiscible liquids one heavy and one light as depicted in Figure 4.16) End Solution Example 4. FLUIDS STATICS h1 hL h2 hH Fig. the lower tube will raise only to (notice that g is canceled) hL = ρ1 h1 + ρ2 h2 ρ2 (4.II. The pressure at the bottom is P = Patmos + g (ρ1 h1 + ρ2 h2 ) (4.a) Since ρ1 > ρ1 the mathematics dictate that the height of the second is lower. Which piezometric tube will be higher? why? and how much higher? What is the pressure at the bottom of the tank? Solution CHAPTER 4. The water also can change measurement of fuel gage. Tank and the effects different liquids.5 (the light liquid is on the top of the heavy liquid).II. Part of the tank height is filled with the water at the bottom (due to the larger density). hH − hL h1 + h2 = − h2 h2 or hH − hL = h1 1− ρ1 ρ2 (4. The common instinct is to find that the lower tube will contain the higher liquids.b) h2 h2 hr 21 ρ2 It can be noticed that hH = h1 + h − 2 hence. .II.c) The only way the hL to be higher of hH is if the heavy liquid is on the top if the stability allow it.II. the lighter liquid is on the top the heavier liquid the the top tube is the same as the surface.d) ρ1 h 1 + ρ2 h 2 h 2 ρ2 = h1 h2 1− ρ1 ρ2 (4. However. The difference is hH − hL hH ρ1 h 1 + ρ2 h 2 = − (4. The way the interpretation of an automobile fuel gage is proportional to the pressure at the bottom of the fuel tank. For the case.5.3: The effect of the water in the car tank is more than the possibility that water freeze in fuel lines.

1 Pressure Measurement Measuring the Atmospheric Pressure One of the application of this concept is the idea of measuring the atmospheric pressure.3. Equation (4.3. Assume that the mercury vapor pressure is 0. The description of the height is given in Figure 4. The high of the Mercury is 0.4. The atmospheric pressure at point a is the same as the pressure on the right hand side of the tube.82[m/sec].85[kg/m3 ]. Solution The pressure is uniform or constant plane perpendicular to the gravity. φ= ρf − x ρ w ρf End Solution (4. Hence.c) (4.III.4: Calculate the atmospheric pressure at 20◦ C.15) can be utilized and it can be noticed that pressure at point a is Pa = ρ g h + Pvapor (4. The mercury density is 13545.76 [m] and the gravity acceleration is 9.a) But when water is present the pressure will be the same at Pf ull = (ρw x + φ ρf ) g htotal and if the two are equal at $ $ ρf $$ g = (ρw x + φ ρf ) g $$ htotal ¡ ¡ htotal (4.b) where φ in this case the ratio of the full height (on the fake) to the total height. knowing any point on this plane provides the pressure anywhere on the plane. Hence.2. will result in a device that can measure the pressure without additional information (the temperature). Using liquid with a very low vapor pressure like mercury. PRESSURE AND DENSITY IN A GRAVITATIONAL FIELD Solution 77 The ratio of the fuel density to water density is ς = ρf /ρw and the ratio of the total height to the water height is x = hw /htotal Thus the pressure at the bottom when the tank is full with only fuel Pf ull = ρf htotal g (4. The pressure above the liquid on the right side is the vapor pressure.3.000179264[kPa].3. Example 4.2 4.III. Consider a situation described in Figure 4.III.3.d) 4.17) .III. The liquid is filling the tube and is brought into a steady state.

The ratio of the Fig. The partial pressure of mercury is in the range of the 0. Schematic of gas measurement liquid densities is α = ρ1 /ρ2 .6. The width of the utilizing the “U” tube.5: A liquid2 a in amount Ha and a liquid b in amount Hb in to an U tube.01[Bar] The vapor pressure is about 1 × 10−4 percent of the total results. When in this case h1 is equal to Hb . the ratio between two sides will be as ρ1 h1 = ρ2 h2 → h2 = α h1 The mass conservation results in Ha + Hb = L + h 1 + h 2 Thus two equations and two unknowns provide the solution which is h1 = Ha + Hb − L 1+α When Ha > L and ρa (Ha − L) ≥ ρb (or the opposite) the liquid a will be on the two sides of the U tube. FLUIDS STATICS The density of the mercury is given along with the gravity and therefore. h .000001793[Bar] which is insignificant compared to the total measurement as can be observed from the above example. Gas The pressure. Solution The question is to find the equilibrium point where two liquids balance each other. If the width of the U tube is equal or larger than total length of the two liquids then the whole liquid will be in bottom part. -4. For smaller width. The additional equation is the mass conservation as Ha = h 2 + L + h 3 2 This example was requested by several students who found their instructor solution unsatisfactory.85 × 9. End Solution The main reason the mercury is used because of its large density and the fact that it is in a liquid phase in most of the measurement range.39[P a] ∼ 1.78 CHAPTER 4.76 ∼ 101095. Pa = 13545. P valve 2 1 Example 4. U tube is L. Thus. L. Locate the liquids surfaces. The third reason is the low vapor (partial) pressure of the mercury.82 × 0. the balance is h1 ρb + h2 ρa = h3 ρa where h1 is the height of liquid b where h2 is the height of “extra” liquid a and same side as liquid b and where h3 is the height of liquid b on the other side.

4. engineers invented more sensitive measuring device. Figure 4.3 Magnified Pressure Measurement For situations where the pressure difference is very small. If the pressure differences between P1 and P2 is small this instrument can “magnified” height. The gas density is significantly lower than the liquid density and therefore can be neglected. The densities of the two sides are very close to each other.7 shows a typical and simple schematic of such an instrument. In steady state. h1 and provide “better” accuracy reading. This way. the pressure balance (only differences) is P1 + g ρ1 (h1 + h2 ) = P2 + g h2 ρ2 (4.3.3. -4.Fig. PRESSURE AND DENSITY IN A GRAVITATIONAL FIELD The solution is h2 = (Ha − L) ρa − Hb ρb 2 ρa End Solution 79 4.6). In the previous technique. This device is based on the following mathematical explanation. thus the height become large. the density of one side was neglected (the gas side) compared to other side (liquid).19) It can be noticed that the “missing height” is canceled between the two sides.18) Since the atmospheric pressure was measured previously (the technique was shown in the previous section) the pressure of the chamber can be measured.3. This device is build around the fact that the height is a function of the densities difference. The pressure at point “1” is P1 = Patmos + ρg h (4. One A2 h2 ρ2 technique is to attached “U” tube ρ2 to the chamber and measure the ρ2 pressure.4.7. This technique utilizes the opposite range.2. Schematic of sensitive measurement device.2 Pressure Measurement The idea describes the atmoh1 P1 P2 A1 A1 spheric measurement that can be ρ1 ρ1 extended to measure the pressure of the gas chambers. imal interference to the gas (some gas enters to the tube). Consider a chamber filled with gas needed to ρ1 be measured (see Figure 4.2. the gas is prevented from escaping and its pressure can be measured with a min. It can be noticed that h1 can be positive or negative or zero and it depends on the ratio that .

19) the gas density was neglected. FLUIDS STATICS two containers filled with the light density liquid. In this method.8. Inclined Manometer One of the old methods of pressure measurement is the inclined manometer. Additional parameter. Here. Additionally.20) If the light liquid volume in the two containers is known.21) A1 Liquid volumes do not necessarily have to be equal. This method is an attempt to increase the accuracy by “extending” length visible of the tube. in writing equation (4. Inclined manometer. ρ2 . will be introduced when the volumes ratio isn’t equal. a location can be calibrated on the inclined leg as zero3 . Thus.22) For the small value of the area ratio.80 CHAPTER 4. With the equation for height (4.24) Some refer to the density difference shown in equation (4. then equation (4.21). The pressure difference can be expressed as P1 − P2 = g [ρ2 h2 − ρ1 (h1 + h2 )] (4. (4. The densities of the liquids are chosen to be much heavier than the measured gas density.19) becomes −h1 A1 = h2 A2 −→ h1 = − P1 − P2 = g h2 ρ2 − ρ1 1 − or the height is h2 = P1 − P2 g (ρ2 − ρ1 ) + ρ1 A2 A1 P1 − P2 g (ρ2 − ρ1 ) (4. The calculations as results of this additional parameter does not cause a significant complications. the volume ratio. it can be observed that h1 is relatively small because A1 >> A2 .24) as “magnification factor” since it replace the regular density.18) is then Poutside P1 dy θ dℓ P1 − Poutside = ρ g d Fig.25) If there is a insignificant change in volume (the area ratio between tube and inclined leg is significant). The densities of the liquid are chosen so that they are close to each other but not equal. The equation (4. . 3 This author’s personal experience while working in a ship that use this manometer which is significantly inaccurate (first thing to be replaced on the ship). But this ratio can be inserted easily into the derivations. it provides the relationship between h1 and h2 . if the volumes in two containers are equal then h2 A2 (4.21) equation (4.23) becomes h2 = (4.23) A2 A1 (4. caused air entrapment especially in rapid change of the pressure or height. For example. the tube leg is inclined relatively to gravity (depicted in Figure 4. A2 /A1 << 1. -4. Due to surface tension.8). this ratio equals to one and it simplify the equation (4.

4. The equation of state for liquid can be approximated or replaced by utilizing the bulk modulus. These relationships will be used to find the functionality between pressure. Thus. the ideal gas model can be employed to describe the density.1 Gas Phase under Hydrostatic Pressure Ideal Gas under Hydrostatic Pressure The gas density vary gradually with the pressure. density and location. This idea is similar to “magnified” manometer but in reversed. liquids and other.29) Separating the variables and changing the partial derivatives to full derivative (just a notation for this case) results in g dz dP =− P RT (4. Schematic of inverted manometer.27) Fig.30) .9).26) leads to P2 − P1 = ρ2 (b + h) g − ρ1 a g − ρ h g (4. it can be written as the pressure on left is equal to pressure on the right legs (see Figure 4.3. For the similar density of ρ1 = ρ2 and for a = b equation (4. the equation of state is simply the ideal gas model or the ideal gas with the compressibility factor (sometime referred to as real gas). In the gas phase. PRESSURE AND DENSITY IN A GRAVITATIONAL FIELD Inverted U-tube manometer The difference in the pressure of two different liquids is measured by this manometer. The pressure line are the same for both legs on line ZZ. right leg left leg 81 Z Z h P2 − ρ2 (b + h) g = P1 − ρ1 a − ρ h) g Rearranging equation (4. -4.3 Varying Density in a Gravity Field There are several cases that will be discussed here which are categorized as gases.3.27) becomes P2 − P1 = (ρ1 − ρ) g h (4. Thus equation (4.26) 1 a b 2 (4.4.28) As in the previous “magnified” manometer if the density difference is very small the height become very sensitive to the change of pressure.11) becomes gP ∂P =− ∂z RT (4.3. 4. As first approximation.9.3.

30) can be integrated from point “0” to any point to yield ln P g =− (z − z0 ) P0 RT „ « (4. Z enter the equation as h/Z and not just h.82 CHAPTER 4.31) It is convenient to rearrange equation (4.34) Equation (4. However.31) to the following P = P0 e − g(z−zo ) RT (4.39). For a large range of P/Pc and T /Tc . the relationship is very complicated and in some ranges Z cannot be assumed constant. Z. Real Gas under Hydrostatic Pressure The mathematical derivations for ideal gas can be reused as a foundation for the real gas model (P = ZρRT ). FLUIDS STATICS Equation (4.35) (4. they are presented here for students who need to answer questions on this issue. can be assumed constant and therefore can be swallowed into equations (4. Equation (4.32) and (4.32) Here the pressure ratio is related to the height exponentially. a numerical integration must be carried out.32) can be expanded to show the difference to standard assumption of constant pressure as − h ρ0 g P0 P (z − z0 ) g (z − z0 ) g + + ··· =1− P0 RT 6RT Or in a simplified form where the transformation of h = (z − z0 ) to be correction factor  h2 P ρ0 g h −  + ··· =1+   6 P0 P0 2 (4.33). The modified equation is P = P0 Or in a series form which is P (z − z0 ) g (z − z0 ) g =1− + + ··· P0 Z RT 6Z RT 2 e „ − g (z−zo ) Z RT « (4. The compressibility is defined in equation (2. the first approximation should be noticed that the compressibility factor. These deviations have a limited practical purpose.34) is useful in mathematical derivations but should be ignored for practical use4 .36) Without going through the mathematics.33) (4. the value of the compressibility factor. In these cases. . Another point that is worth discussing is the relationship of Z to other gas properties. 4 These derivations are left for a mathematical mind person. In general.

only one hydrostatic equation depends on density equation.42) It can be noted that BT has units of pressure and therefore the ratio in front of the exponent in equation (4.43) .40) is the counterpart for the equation of state of ideal gas for the liquid phase.40) in equation (4. For these cases.41) e P −P0 BT = z + Constant (4. The governing differential density equation (see equation (1. here.4.39) can be represented in a more convenient form as Density variation ρ = ρ0 e P −P0 BT (4.42) has units of length.38) The integration of equation (4.2 Liquid Phase Under Hydrostatic Pressure 83 The bulk modulus was defined in equation (1.39) Equation (4. So.3. The simplest approach is to assume that the bulk modulus is constant (or has some representative average).3. can be evaluated at any specific point.28)) is ρ = BT ∂ρ ∂P (4.3.37) The variables for equation (4. If at z = 0 the pressure is P0 and the density is ρ0 then the constant is Constant = BT g ρ0 (4. the differential equation for density should be solved first. PRESSURE AND DENSITY IN A GRAVITATIONAL FIELD 4. Fortunately. The integration constant.11) transformed into ∂P = −gρ0 ∂z Equation (4. Utilizing equation (4.28). there are two differential equations that needed to be solved.37) should be separated and then the integration can be carried out as P ρ dP = P0 ρ0 BT dρ ρ (4.40) Equation (4.41) can be integrated to yield BT g ρ0 e P −P0 BT (4.38) yields P − P0 = BT ln ρ ρ0 (4. with units of length.

10. Additional discussion will be presented in the dimensionless issues chapter (currently under construction). In Example 1.44) and is plotted in Figure 4. BT /g ρ0 . The difference between the two equations is the fact that Example 1. 2008 P −P0 BT Or in a dimensionless form Density in Liquids g ρ0 z BT e −1 z g ρ0 = BT (4. the integral equation uses the fact that the pressure is function of location.6: 5 This author is not aware of the “equation of state” solution or the integral solution.45) is presented for historical reasons and in order to compare the constant density assumption. The equation of state suggests that ∂P = g ρ0 f (P ) dz while the integral equation is ∆P = g ρ dz where no assumption is made on the relationship between the pressure and density.47) is reduced to the standard equation when the normalized pressure ratio.l) while here the ratio is expressed by different equations.10. The solution becomes BT g ρ0 CHAPTER 4. The solution is a reverse function (that is not P = f (z) but z = f (P)) it is a monotonous function which is easy to solve for any numerical value (that is only one z corresponds to any Pressure).XIV. -4. The comparison between the two methods will be presented. it can be observed that the correction is on the left hand side and not as the “traditional” correction on the piezometric pressure side.  pressure (P − P0 ) + Example 4. FLUIDS STATICS e P −P0 BT P −P0 BT −1 =z (4.14 ratio of the density was expressed by equations (1.84 This constant.44) March 11.45) Fig. Hydrostatic pressure when there is compressibility in the liquid phase. P/BT is small (<< 1). The solution is presented in equation (4. However. .46) An approximation of equation (4. Sometimes.14 use the integral equation without using any “equation of state.” The method described in the Example 1. please pass this information to this author. If you know of any of these solutions or similar.47) BT P − P0 BT P − P0 + + ··· 2 BT 6 BT It can be noticed that equation (4. The exponent can be expanded as piezometric  corrections 2 3  = z g ρ0 (4. the solution is presented as P BT = ln P0 P0 g ρ0 z +1 +1 BT (4. is a typical length of the problem.14 is more general which provided a simple solution5 . Additionally.

3. a simple case is examined for which the temperature is a linear function of the height as dT = −Cx dh (4. please.49) where the Constant is the integration constant which can be obtained by utilizing the initial condition. . the temperature–distance function can be written as T = Constant − Cx h (4.50) with (4. Using these definitions results in dP g dξ = P RCx ξ (4. For the atmosphere. If you feel that it is too simple.53) 6 A colleague asked this author to insert this explanation for his students. For h = 0. Hence.4. the temperature is T0 and using it leads to Temp variations T = T0 − Cx h Combining equation (4.).1 The Pressure Effects Due To Temperature Variations The Basic Analysis There are situations when the main change of the density results from other effects. A bit more complicate case is when the gas is a function of the pressure and another parameter.3.50) Separating the variables in equation (4.48) where h here referred to height or distance.51) (4. PRESSURE AND DENSITY IN A GRAVITATIONAL FIELD 85 4. Here.4. just ignore it.4 4.11) results in ∂P gP =− ∂h R (T0 − Cx h) (4. For example.52) Defining a new variable6 as ξ = (T0 − Cx h) for which ξ0 = T0 − Cx h0 and d/dξ = −Cx d/dh. when the temperature field is not uniform.3. the density is affected and thus the pressure is a location function (for example. Air can be a function of the temperature field and the pressure. the temperature in the atmostphere is assumed to be a linear with the height under certain conditions. it is commonly assumed that the temperature is a linear function of the height.51) and changing the formal ∂ to the informal d to obtain dP g dh =− P R (T0 − Cx h) (4.

However. This situation is roughly representing the pressure in the atmosphere and results in a temperature decrease.57) Equation (4. (4. Eckert who was the pioneer of the dimensional analysis in heat transfer and was kind to show me some of his ideas.56) and (4.e.50). T0 R 2 T0 2 R2 (4.86 CHAPTER 4. this kind of analysis will be presented in the dimensional analysis chapter7 . Cx . Equation (4. The first approximation for a small distance. and the second approximation for a small temperature gradient.. It has to be noted that these equations (4. .56) Equation (4. The second approximation for small Cx is P Cx = lim h 1− Cx −>0 P0 T0 g R Cx = e gh −RT 0 − g h2 Cx 2 T0 2 R e gh −RT 0 − .R. influences at only large values of height. It is worth to point out that the above statement has a qualitative meaning when additional parameter is added.55) It can be noticed that equation (4. FLUIDS STATICS After the integration of equation (4. negative direction).56) shows that the first two terms are the standard terms (negative sign is as expected i.54) Or in a more convenient form as Pressure in Atmosphere P = P0 g T0 − Cx h ( R Cx ) T0 (4.55) can be approximated by two approaches/ideas. I am grateful to my adviser E.55) and (4.57) are not properly represented without the characteristic height.. For engineering purposes. It has to be inserted to make the physical significance clearer.. h.55) is a monotonous function which decreases with height because the term in the brackets is less than one.52) and reusing (the reverse definitions) the variables transformed the result into ln P g T0 − Cx h = ln P0 R Cx T0 (4.. This relationship can be obtained from combining equations (4.G. The correction factor occurs only at the third term which is important for larger heights. it is sometimes important to obtain the density ratio. It can be recalled that the following expansions are g h ρ0 P0 correction factor P Cx = lim 1 − h h−>0 P0 T0 g R Cx =1− R g C x − g 2 h2 gh − − . It can be observed that Cx has a “double role” which can change the pressure ratio. The simplest assumption to combine these 7 These concepts are very essential in all the thermo–fluid science.57) shows that the correction factor (lapse coefficient).55) represents only the pressure ratio. Equation (4.

If ρ (h) > ρ(h + dh) then the situation is stable. this shock is insignificant (check book on Fundamentals of Compressible Flow Mechanics by this author on the French problem). PRESSURE AND DENSITY IN A GRAVITATIONAL FIELD equations is by assuming the ideal gas model.4. the free expansion is not far way from the actual process. The thermal process is in the range of [cm/sec] while the speed of sound is about 300 [m/sec]. Clearly. That is. higher heights). to layer at height h + dh (see Figure 4. The whole system falls apart and does not stay if the analysis predicts unstable conditions. the surroundings “pressure” forces (buoyancy forces) are equal to gravity forces. two main possibilities one: the slab could return to the original layer or two: stay at the new layer (or even move further.55) is stable and if so under what conditions. Under equilibrium. The term ρ (h) is slab from layer h that had undergone the free expansion. However. The buoyancy forces are proportional to the ratio of the density of the slab to surrounding layer density. -4. .11.3.2 The Stability Analysis It is interesting to study whether h + dh this solution (4. the body forces that acting on the slab are equal to zero. a small slab of material moves from a layer at height. ρ (h) undergoing a free expansion is higher or lower than the density of the layer h + dh.4. In reality. h. A weak wind or other disturbances can make the unstable system to move to a new condition. Thus. the stability question is whether the slab density from layer h. equation (2. The second issue that occurs during the “expansion” is the shock (in the reverse case [h + dh] → h).3.58) Advance material can be skipped 4. Whether these forces are toward the original layer or not.11) What could happen? There are Fig. This question is determined by the net forces acting on the slab. to yield P P0 T0 T g R Cx 87 ρ P T0 = = ρ0 P0 T 1− Cx h ( T0 ) 1+ Cx h T (4. Suppose that h for some reason. the pressure process is about thousands times faster than the thermal process. The reason that the free expansion is chosen to explain the process that the slab undergoes when it moves from layer h to layer h + dh is because it is the simplest. Two adjoin layers for stability analysis. The first case is referred to as the stable condition and the second case referred to as the unstable condition. the slab is in equilibrium with its surroundings before the movement (not necessarily stable). The two processes that occurred here are thermal and the change of pressure (at the speed of sound). That is. The two forces that act on the slab are the gravity force and the surroundings pressure (buoyant forces).25).

to keep the inequality for a small dh only the first term need to be compared as g ρ Cx gρ > − Pk P T (4.55) but can be approximated by equation (4.63) provides the conditions to determine the stability. can be assumed to be adiabatic (that is. Pk 2 P 2 k2 (4.88 CHAPTER 4.58) as following ρ(h + dh) P T0 = = ρ(h) P0 T 1− g Cx dh ( R Cx ) Cx dh 1+ T0 T (4. The pressure ratio is given by equation (4. The process. under the above discussion and simplifications. FLUIDS STATICS The slab density at layer h+dh can be obtained using equation (4.64) and (4..59) The pressure and temperature change when the slab moves from layer at h to layer h + dh.63) The density at layer h + dh can be obtained from (4.65) .60) When the symbol denotes the slab that moves from layer h to layer h + dh.62) in Taylor series results in 1− ρ gdh P 1/k =1− g 2 ρ2 k − g 2 ρ2 dh2 g ρ dh − − . no significant heat transfer occurs in the short period of time).25)) ρ (h + dh) = ρ(h) P (h + dh) P (h) 1/k (4.59) and then it is expanded in taylor series as ρ(h + dh) = ρ(h) g Cx dh ( R Cx ) Cx dh 1− 1+ T0 T ∼1− g ρ Cx − P T dh + · · · (4.56) and thus ρ (h + dh) = ρ(h) 1− gdh T (h) R 1/k (4. From a mathematical point of view..62) transformed into ρ (h + dh) = ρ(h) 1− ρ gdh P 1/k (4.61) Again using the ideal gas model for equation (4.62) Expanding equation (4.64) The comparison of the right hand terms of equations (4. The little slab undergoes isentropic expansion as following for which (see equation (2.

Thus. while the gravity force source in liquid can be the liquid itself. It should be noted that this value should be changed a bit since the k should be replaced by polytropic expansion n. equation (4. Equation (4.12.65) and using the ideal gas identity. g. This assumption must be deviated when the distance from the body source is significantly change. Again. However.66) The analysis shows that the maximum amount depends on the gravity and gas properties.will not be introduced here. When lapse rate Cx is equal to the right hand side of the inequality. 4. Fig. would the situation become stable now? One has to remember that temperature gradient forces continuous heat transfer which the source temperature change after the movement to the new layer. PRESSURE AND DENSITY IN A GRAVITATIONAL FIELD 89 After rearrangement of the inequality (4. At first glance. What is the source of the force(s) that make this situation when unstable continue to be unstable? Supposed that the situation became unstable and the layers have been exchanged. r → ∞ the pressure is about zero. ρ and the body force. One of the common question this author has been asked is about the forces of continuation. the body force is independent of the fluid. issues. it is said that situation is neutral. the density. it was explained that the gravity is a function of the distance from the center of the plant/body. 4. The gravity force can be assumed that for infinity. one has to bear in mind that this analysis only provides a range and isn’t exact.3. -4.5 Gravity Variations Effects on Pressure and Density Until now the study focus on the change of density and pressure of the fluid. Assuming that the pressure is affected by this gravity/body force. The source of the gravity force in gas is another body.11) can be used 8 The same issue of the floating ice. Thus.11) has two r P b ρb terms on the right hand side. The body force was assumed rb g ∝ r2 until now to be constant.1 Ideal Gas in Varying Gravity In physics. it transformed to Cx (k − 1) g ρ > T kP k−1 g Cx < k R (4. The varying gravity effects Thus. the discussion is separated into two different on density and pressure. . around this value additional analysis is needed 8 . See example for the floating ice in cup.3. the unstable situation is continuously unstable.3.4. The issues of magnetohydrodynamics are too advance for undergraduate student and therefore.5. The gravity force is reversely proportional to r2 .

4. It has to remember when this assumption isn’t accurate enough.2 Real Gas in Varying Gravity The regular assumption of constant compressibility. numerical integration is a possible solution.70) demonstrates that the pressure is reduced with the distance. The integration of equation (4.68) results in ln Or in a simplified form as ρ P = = ρb Pb P G =− Pb RT 1 1 − rb r (4. As before.69) e G r−r − RT r r b b (4.70) demonstrates that the pressure is reduced with the distance.70) Equation (4.68) is transformed into P Pb dP G =− P Z RT r rb dr r2 (4. This equation confirms that the density in outer space is zero ρ(∞) = 0. The regular method of separation is employed to obtain P Pb dP G =− P RT r rb dr r2 (4.5. is employed. ρb Pb 2 RT 2 rb (R T ) Notice that G isn’t our beloved and familiar g and also that G rb /RT is a dimensionless number (later in dimensionless chapter about it and its meaning). one can obtain P ρ = = ρb Pb e G r−r −Z RT r r b b (4.73) Equation (4.90 CHAPTER 4. Thus. It can be observed that for r → rb the pressure is approaching P → Pb .3. equation (4.. This equation confirms .70) can be expanded in Taylor series as standard correction f actor ρ P 2 2 G R T + G2 rb (r − rb ) G (r − rb ) (4.72) With the same process as before for ideal gas case.68) where the subscript b denotes the conditions at the body surface. It can be noticed that for r → rb the pressure is approaching P → Pb .67) where G denotes the general gravity constant. equation (4. Z. FLUIDS STATICS (semi one directional situation) when r is used as direction and thus ∂P G = −ρ 2 ∂r r (4..71) = = 1− − + .

4. 1− − ρb Pb 2 Z RT 2 rb (Z R T ) (4..5.6 Liquid Phase While for most practical purposes.75) e P0 −P BT = Constant − BT g ρ0 r (4. there are situations where the spherical coordinates must be considered and used.3.77) • + 4 π Gρ = 0 (4.4.000 [m]. it is left for the reader to apply according to problem.75) is e P −P0 BT G r2 (4.3.74) It can be noted that compressibility factor can act as increase or decrease of the ideal gas model depending on whether it is above one or below one.3. As before Taylor series for equation (4. If the liquid “equation of state” (4. 4.76) Since this author is not aware to which practical situation this solution should be applied. This issue is related to Pushka equation that will be discussed later. if applicable. Derivations of the fluid static in spherical coordinates are Pressure Spherical Coordinates 1 d r2 dP + 4 π Gρ = 0 r2 dr ρ dr Or in a vector form as 1 P ρ (4.. the Cartesian coordinates provides sufficient treatment to the problem. PRESSURE AND DENSITY IN A GRAVITATIONAL FIELD 91 that the density in outer space is zero ρ(∞) = 0.3 Liquid Under Varying Gravity For comparison reason consider the deepest location in the ocean which is about 11.70) is standard correction f actor ρ P 2 2 G Z R T + G2 rb (r − rb ) G (r − rb ) = = + .78) .40) is used with the hydrostatic fluid equation results in ∂P = −ρ0 ∂r which the solution of equation (4.

Generally the acceleration is divided into two categories: linear and angular and they will be discussed in this order. in a two dimensional system. Example 4.1 a 5  m  sec g geff Fig. However. The effective gravity is for accelerated cart.13.92 CHAPTER 4.81) Perhaps the best way to explain the linear acceleration is by examples. This question is one of the traditional question of the fluid static and is straight forward. body forces were considered as one-dimensional. the constant pressure plane is perpendicular to the direction of the effective gravity. Consider the following example to illustrate the situation. for the effective gravity (4. The change of the acceleration from the right to left is . -4. 4.7: A tank filled with liquid is accelerated at a constant acceleration. the linear acceleration have three components as opposed to the previous case of only one.1 Fluid in a Linearly Accelerated System ˆ gef f = a ˆ + g k i For example.4 Fluid in a Accelerated System Up to this stage. the previous method can be used and there is no need to solve new three (or two) different equations. As before. what happened to the liquid surface? What is the relative angle of the liquid surface for a container in an accelerated system of a = 5[m/sec]? Solution 27.8) can be transformed into a different coordinate system where the main coordinate is in the direction of the effective gravity. Thus.4.79) where the magnitude of the effective gravity is |gef f | = g 2 + a2 (4. In general. The solution is obtained by finding the effective angle body force.80) and the angle/direction can be obtained from tanβ = a g (4. Equation (4. The effective angle is obtained by adding vectors. the previous derivations can be easily extended. When the acceleration is changing from the right to the left. FLUIDS STATICS 4.

FLUID IN A ACCELERATED SYSTEM 93 like subtracting vector (addition negative vector). the acceleration in the cart direction is determined from a = g sin β (4. In that case the effective body moves closer to the gravity forces. the liquid surface is parallel to the surface of the inclination surface.81 The magnitude of the effective acceleration is |gef f | = 52 + 9. lar to the slope.812 = 11. If there is no resistance. Calculate the shape of the surface.01◦ g 9.015[m/sec2 ] End Solution Example 4. If there is a resistance. -4. Thus.8: A cart partially filled with liquid and is sliding on an inclined plane as shown in Figure 4.14.4. This angle/direction can be found using the following a 5 tan−1 β = tan−1 = ∼ 27. α < β.Fig.84) (c) .4. A cart slide on inclined plane.82) ) F (a β The effective body force is acting perpendicu.14. End Solution (b) In case of resistance force (either of friction due to the air or resistance in the wheels) reduces the acceleration of the cart.83) (4. what will be the angle? What happen when the slope angle is straight (the cart is dropping straight down)? Solution (a) The angle can be found when the acceleration of the cart is found. is now tan α = net g − Fm g cosβ Fnet m (4. The net body force depends on the mass of the liquid and the net acceleration is a=g− The angle of the surface.

-4. the first case deals with a rotation in a perpendicular to the gravity. The center of rotation is a distance.2 Angular Acceleration Systems: Constant Density Fig.94 In the case when the angle of the inclination turned to be straight (direct falling) the effective body force is zero. Notice that the integration constant was substituted by z0 .85) z r unit mass ω2 r g geff center of circulation Equation (4.87) Fig. That effective body force can be written as ˆ gef f = −g k + ω 2 r r ˆ The lines of constant pressure are not straight lines but lines of parabolic shape. Example 4.86) (4. Because the asymmetrical nature of the problem there is difference in the heights in the U tube arms of S as shown in Figure 4. The constant pressure will be along Angular Acceleration System ω 2 r2 (4. example 4. The pressure is uniform in the tank and no pressure difference can be found. CHAPTER 4.15. Solution .16. -4.9: A “U” tube with a length of (1 + x)L is rotating at angular velocity of ω.88) P − P0 = ρg (z0 − z) + 2g To illustrate this point.17. Expresses the relationship between the different parameters of the problem. So.86) can be integrated as ω 2 r2 z − z0 = 2g (4.4. L from the “left” hand side. Forces diagram of cart sliding on inclined plane. the pressure at any point in the liquid is the same and equal to the atmospheric pressure. For simplification reasons. FLUIDS STATICS ce fa th wi t ic fr n io r su α a β g sin β − Fnet m β g geff 4. Schematic to explain the angular angle. The angle of the line depends on the radius as dz g =− 2 dr ω r (4.9 is provided.

4. At what rotating nt . FLUID IN A ACCELERATED SYSTEM Calculation of the correction factor dA Rotation center ns ta su re lin e 95 pr es S ω L co xL Fig. What will be the correction factor if the curvature in the liquid in the tube is taken in to account. Notice that the curvature in the two sides are different from each other. End Solution Example 4. The height of the infinitesimal area is ?.9.9 is rotating with upper part height of . End Solution Example 4.17. equation (4. The volume above the lower point is ? which is only a function of the geometry. The pressure at the interface at the two sides of the tube is same. The distance of the infinitesimal area from the rotation center is ?. Thus. Taking the “left” wing of U tube change in z direction zl − z0 The same can be said for the other side zr − z0 = ω 2 x2 L2 2g = change in r direction ω 2 L2 2g Thus subtracting the two equations above from each each other results in zr − zl = L ω 2 1 − x2 2g It can be noticed that this kind equipment can be used to find the gravity. It is first assumed the height is uniform at the tube (see for the open question on this assumption). How would you suggest to define the height in the tube? Solution In Figure 4. Schematic angular angle to explain example 4.17 shows the infinitesimal area used in these calculations.10: Assume the diameter of the U tube is Rt . -4.11: In the U tube in example 4.87) represent the pressure line.4.

It is common in geology to assume that the Earth is made of several layers.3 Fluid Statics in Geological System This author would like to express his gratitude to Ralph Menikoff for suggesting this topic. For the purpose of this book. In one extreme is the equator which the rotation play the most significant role. 9 The image was drawn by Shoshana Bar-Meir. This explaination is provided to understand how to use the Fig. Two different extremes can recognized in fluids between the outer core to the crust.9 bulk modulus and the effect of rotation. -4. Earth layers not to scale. outer core. FLUIDS STATICS velocity liquid start to exit the U tube? If the rotation of U tube is exactly at the center. In reality. there might be an additional effects which affecting the situation but these effects are not the concern of this discussion. In geological systems such as the Earth provide cases to be used for fluid static for estimating pressure. inspired from image made by user Surachit .96 CHAPTER 4. the interest is the calculate the pressure at bottom of the liquid phase. If this assumption is accepted. The assumption states that the Earth is made from the following layers: solid inner core. these layers assumption will be used to do some estimates. and two layers in the liquid phase with a thin crust.18. what happen the rotation approach very large value? Advance material can be skipped 4.4.

r.93) ρ0 dρ = − ρ3 r R0 G dr r2 (4.90) it is assumed that BT is a function of pressure and the pressure is a function of the location. If the bulk modulus is assumed constant (for simplicity) governing equation can be constructed starting with equation (1. Hence.89) Using equation to express the pressure difference (see Example 1.92) is a relatively simple (Fredholm) integral equation.j).4.45) or in approximation of equation (1.28).4.96) 1 1 − 2 ρ0 2 ρ =G 1 1 − R0 r (4.94) is ρ0 2 or ρ= 1 1 2G − 2 ρ0 ρ0 1 1 − R0 r (4.14 for details explanation) as ρ(r) = 1− R0 r ρ0 g(r)ρ(r) dr BT (r) (4.94) The solution of equation (4. ρ0 (4. the bulk modulus can be written as a function of the radius. FLUID IN A ACCELERATED SYSTEM 97 In the other extreme north–south does not play any effect since the radius is relatively very small. In this case it also can be noticed that g is a function of r. Again. In that case. The solution of this equation obtained by differentiation as ρ0 d ρ G + 2ρ = 0 ρ2 dr r Under variables separation the equation changes to ρ ρ0 (4. Thus.91) ρ(r) = r 1 1− g(r)ρ(r)dr B T R0 The governing equation can be written using the famous relation for the gravity as ρ0 1 =1− ρ(r) BT r R0 G ρ(r)dr r2 (4. for simplicity the bulk modulus is assumed to be constant. the pressure at the bottom of the liquid layer can be estimated using the equation (4.XIV.92) Equation (4.90) In equation (4.95) . The approximate definition of the bulk modulus is BT = ρ ∆P ρ ∆P =⇒ ∆ρ = ∆ρ BT (4.

95) and (4. this analysis gives some indication on the pressure and density in the core.99) Thus the approximated density ratio can be written as ρ0 1 =1− ρ BT r ρ R0 G − ω r2 r2 dr (4.R0 The integral can evaluated numerically or analytically as ρ0 log ∆P = − (2 ρ0 G + r) R0 − 2 r ρ0 G r ρ0 2 R0 2G ρ0 log (ρ0 ) G − (4.100) Taking derivative of the two sides results in − ρ0 1 = 3 ρ BT G − ω r2 r2 dr = 0 (4. The conclusion is that the pressure at the “equator” is substantially lower than the pressure in the north or the south “poles” of the solid core.101) ρ0 1 = 2 ρ2 BT −G ω r3 − r 3 (4. The pressure difference is r ∆P = R0 ρ G − ω r2 r2 dr (4. What is the pressure at the equator when the rotation is taken into account. mathematical complications caused by the coupling creates additionally difficulty. The pressure can be calculated since the density is found as r     1 G  dr   ∆P = (4.92) has to include the rotation effects. The rotation affects the density since the pressure changes. The pressure difference is due to the large radius. End Advance material . Thus.96) referred to as expanded Pushka equation. FLUIDS STATICS These equations (4. Nevertheless.101) Integrating equation (4. In real liquid.98 CHAPTER 4. the effect of rotation is reduced because the radius is reduced.97)  1 2G 1 1 BT  r2    − − ρ0 2 ρ0 R 0 r . The integral in equation (4. It can be noticed that the rotation acts in the opposite direction to the gravity.98) The other issue that related to this topic is.102) Where the pressure is obtained by integration as previously was done. In the range between the two extreme. the flow is much more complicated because it is not stationary but have cells in which the liquid flows around.

19. Calculate the minimum forces. These calculations are divided into two categories. Solution The forces can be calculated by looking at the moment around point “O.103) The solution of the above integral is M = g ρ a sin β 3 b l2 + 3 b2 l + b3 3 . -4. This section deals with these calculations. how the calculations can be simplified will be shown. P can be expressed as a function ξ as the following P = g ρ ( + ξ)sinβ The liquid total moment on the gate is b Fig.19.4. Later. straight surfaces and curved surfaces. M= 0 g ρ ( + ξ) sin β a dξ( + ξ) The integral can be simplified as b M = g a ρ sin β 0 ( + ξ)2 dξ (4. a simple case will be examined.5 Fluid Forces on Surfaces The forces that fluids (at static conditions) extracts on surfaces are very important for engineering purposes.” The element of moment is a dξ for the width of the gate and is dF "0" β = 50◦ h A-A ξ ℓ = 5[m] ξ A-A a[m] dξ dM = P a dξ ( + ξ) dA F2 F1 b[m] The pressure.12: Consider a rectangular shape gate as shown in Figure 4. 4.5. Assuming that the atmospheric pressure can be ignored. F1 and F2 to maintain the gate in position. Rectangular area under pressure.1 Fluid Forces on Straight Surfaces A motivation is needed before going through the routine of derivations.5. Initially. Example 4. FLUID FORCES ON SURFACES 99 4.

it can be observed that there is a moment of area in equation (4. These concepts have been introduced in Chapter 3. Additional equation is needed.104) . which is b Ftotal = 0 g ρ ( + ξ) sin β a dξ The total force integration provides b Ftotal = g ρ a sin β 0 ( + ξ)dξ = g ρ a sin β 2 b + b2 2 The forces on the gate have to provide F1 + F2 = g ρ a sin β 2 b + b2 2 Additionally. The symmetry is around any axes parallel to axis x. FLUIDS STATICS This value provides the moment that F1 and F2 should extract. Looking at the above calculations. These tabulated values can be used to solve this kind of problems. It is the total force. -4. the force is h(ξ) 1 F = A P dA = (Patmos + ρgh)dA = A Patmos + ρg 0 (ξ + 0 ) sin β dA (4.20.103) and also a center of area. Schematic of submerged area to resented areas for which moment of inertia explain the center forces and moments. First.20.100 CHAPTER 4. Several rep.Fig. and center of area have been tabulated in Chapter 3. β ξ ξ ℓ0 dξ ℓ1 ξ Symmetrical Shapes Consider the two–dimensional symmetrical area that are under pressure as shown in Figure 4. the moment of forces around point “O” is F1 + F2 ( + b) = g ρ a sin β The solution of these equations is F1 = F2 = (3 + b) a b g ρ sin β 6 (3 + 2 b) a b g ρ sin β 6 End Solution "O" 3 b l 2 + 3 b2 l + b3 3 The above calculations are time consuming and engineers always try to make life simpler. The total force and moment that the liquid extracting on the area need to be calculated.

The general forces acting on submerged area. the atmospheric pressure can include any additional liquid layer above layer “touching” area.106) "O" y ξ0 β a F1 b My = ξ0 P (ξ)ξdA (4. -4.12 can be generalized to solve any two forces needed to balance the area/gate. The boundaries of the integral of equation (4.21 which has two forces that balance the body. is about the axis through point “O” into the page. The integral in equation (4.106) and (4. Ix ξ1 Or separating the parts as xc A ξ1 x My = Patmos ξ0 ξdA +g ρ sin β ξ0 ξ 2 dA (4. FLUID FORCES ON SURFACES 101 In this case. Ix x .5.105) A+ 0   ξdA  In a final form as Total Force in Inclined Surface Ftotal = A [Patmos + ρ g sin β ( 0 + xc )] The moment of the liquid on the area around point “O” is ξ1 (4. Equations (4.108) Fig.110) Example 4.4. The “atmospheric” pressure can be set to zero.104) refer to starting point and ending points not to the start area and end area.110) can be combined the moment and .104) can be further developed as    Ftotal = A Patmos + ρ g sin β   0 xc A 1  (4.109) can be written in more compact form as Total Moment in Inclined Surface My = Patmos xc A + g ρ sin βIx x (4. Consider the general symmetrical body shown in figure 4.107) ξ1 ξ1 ξ sin β F2 My = ξ0 (Patmos + g ρ h(ξ) )ξdA (4.21. Equation (4.109) The moment of inertia.

117) The compact form can be written as Moment in Inclined Surface Mx = Patmos A yc + ρ g sin β Ix (4.102 CHAPTER 4.111) (4.110) and the total force is given by (4. Additionally.118) y . The moment around the y axis is given by equation (4. In symmetrical area only two forces are required since the moment is one dimensional. If the “atmospheric pressure” can be zero or include additional layer of liquid. This equation is for the additional moment around the x axis (see for explanation in Figure 4. the atmospheric pressure can contain either an additional liquid layer above the “touching” area or even atmospheric pressure simply can be set up to zero.116) The integral in equation (4.114) In the solution. However. additional equation is required.106).115) Substituting the components for the pressure transforms equation (4. The moment around the x axis (which was arbitrary chosen) should be Mx = A y P dA (4. FLUIDS STATICS force acting on the general area.113) ρ sin β − ρ sin β − Patmos ga xc + 0 ρ sin β + Patmos g aA g (b − a) (4.112) ρ sin β − Patmos gb xc + 0 ρ sin β + g (b − a) Patmos g b A−.22). Ix x ρ sin β (4. and the distance a or b can be positive or negative.115) into Mx = A y (Patmos + ρ g ξ sin β) dA (4.115) can be written as A yc Ix y Mx = Patmos A y dA +ρ g sin β A ξ y dA (4. in non–symmetrical area there are two different moments and therefor three forces are required. the forces can be negative or positive. Thus. The forces balance reads F1 + F2 = A [Patmos + ρ g sin β ( and moments balance reads F1 a + F2 b = Patmos xc A + g ρ sin βIx The solution of these equations is F1 = and F2 = Ix x x 0 + xc )] (4.

Example to illustrate the Fig. Triangle 1 can be calculated as the moment of inertia around its center which is 0 +2∗( 1 − 0 )/3.4. There are many combix nations of problems (e. Solution The three equations that needs to be solved are F1 + F2 + F3 = Ftotal The moment around x axis is F1 b = My The moment around y axis is F1 1 (4.118) provide the base for solving any problem for straight area under pressure with uniy dA form density. FLUID FORCES ON SURFACES 103 The product of inertia was presented y These equations in Chapter 3.13: Calculate the forces which required to balance the triangular shape shown in the Figure 4.118). the moment of ∆x2 2 1 A2 Ixx 2 = b[a−( 1− 36 0 )] + b[a−( 1 − 0 )] 3 + [a−( 1 − 0 )] 2 3 . metrical straight area.22. The moment of inertia of the triangle around x is made of two triangles (as shown in the Figure (4.106).23. The height of triangle 1 is ( 1 − 0 ) and its width b and thus.110) and (4.110) and (4. ξ (4. -4. (4. two forces and moment) but no general solution is provided. moment of inertia about its center is Ixx = b( 1 − 0 )3 /36.23) for triangle 1 and 2). (4.120) + F2 (a + 0) + F3 0 = Mx (4. The moment of inertia for triangle 1 about y is A1 ∆x1 2 0 2 Ixx 1 = b( 3 1− 0) 36 + 1 b( 1− 0) 3 0) + 2( 1− 0) 3 The height of the triangle 2 is a − ( inertia about its center is 3 − and its width b and thus.106).g.119) (4.5.121) The right hand side of these equations are given before in equations (4. Example 4. The general forces acting on non symuse of these equations is provided.

5. The general forces acting on a non symmetrical straight area. pressure centers are commonly defined. 2 a b2 2 1 +2 a b 0 +a 2  + 0 +a Ixy = 0  b 1 − 0 )x + b 0 x y dx dy = b2 24 The solution of this set equations is A F1 = a b (g (6 3 „ (3 1 + 3 a) + 6 g „ 12 a 0) ρ sin β + 8 Patmos 24 1 .1 Pressure Center In the literature. 72 „„ « „ « « 15 12 12 2 a− a 1 + 0 27− a 1 + a 0 g ρ sin β „„ 24 a 72 « 48 1 +24 + a 72 End Solution 1 −14 a)− 0 « « 12 2 −27 + a 0 g ρ sin β = + « 0 Patmos 4. -4.23.123) .110) and equation (4.122) In the same way.” Thus. The pressure center is the distance that will create the moment with the hydrostatic force on point “O. FLUIDS STATICS ℓ1 y b 1 ℓ0 F3 a F1 2 F2 x Fig. It can be noticed that upper line of the triangle is y = ( 1 − 0 )x + 0 .1.104 and the total moment of inertia Ixx = Ixx 1 + Ixx 2 The product of inertia of the triangle can be obtain by integration.  b ( ( 1 − 0 −a)x CHAPTER 4. the pressure center in the y direction is defined as yp = 1 F y P dA A (4. The definition is derived or obtained from equation (4. The lower line of the b 0 triangle is y = ( 1 − b −a)x + 0 + a.118). the pressure center in the x direction is xp = 1 F x P dA A (4. These definitions are mathematical in nature and has physical meaning of equivalent force that will act through this center. F2 ab 3 =− F3 ab 3 − 72 „„ « « 24 1 48 0 Patmos a −24 + a .

11 A qualitative discussion on what is reasonably is not presented here. It also means that the density can be a non-continuous function. In fact. the density was assumed to be constant. 4. the reader can find that direct calculations can sometimes simplify the problem. FLUID FORCES ON SURFACES 105 To show relationship between the pressure center and the other properties. However.124) according to equation (3. the force that is acting on the body is GeogologicalFtotal = A g ρ h dA ∼ ρ ¯ A g h dA (4.5.4. Why? Because of the buoyancy issue.5. If density can be represented by average density. it can be found by setting the atmospheric pressure and 0 to zero as following xp = Expanding Ix x g ρ sin β Ix x A ρ g sin β xc (4.128) As before for single density. In cases where density is non–continuous. the following can be written  x c A1 xc A2 1 2 xc n An  (4. For non constant density the derivations aren’t “clean” but are similar. Consider straight/flat body that is under liquid with a varying density10 . if the variation of the density is within 10% and/or the accuracy of the calculation is minimal.2 Multiply Layers In the previous sections. the following can be said Ftotal = A g ρ h dA = A1 g ρ1 h dA + A2 g ρ2 h dA + · · · + An g ρn h dA (4.1. . the integral has be carried out. the reasonable average can be used. but constant in segments.17) results in xp = Ixx + xc xc A (4. Thus.129)  Ftotal = g sin β ρ1  ξ dA +ρ2 A1 A2 ξ dA + · · · + ρn An  ξ dA  10 This statement also means that density is a monotonous function. these limitations diminish the usefulness of pressure center definitions.125) and in the same fashion in y direction yp = Ixy + yc yc A (4.126) It has to emphasis that these definitions are useful only for case where the atmospheric pressure can be neglected or canceled and where 0 is zero.127) In cases where average density cannot be represented reasonably11 .

130) where the density. ρ2 = 800[kg/m3 ]. h3 = 3[m]. ρ3 = 850[kg/m3 ]. Example 4.14: Consider the hypothetical Figure 4. a2 = 1. h2 = 2[m]. My under the same considerations as before is My = A g ρ ξ 2 sin β dA (4. The moment around axis y. one can find that n My = g sin β i=1 ρi Ix x i (4. Calculate the forces at points a1 and b1 . Assume that the layers are stables without any movement between the liquids.24.5[m]. The heights are: h1 = 1[m]. The forces distances are a1 = 1. The densities are ρ1 = 500[kg/m3 ].5[m].134) To illustrate how to work with these equations the following example is provided. FLUIDS STATICS Or in a compact form and in addition considering the “atmospheric” pressure can be written as Total Static Force n Ftotal = Patmos Atotal + g sin β i=1 ρi xc i Ai (4. and b1 = 4. ρi is the density of the layer i and Ai and xc i are geometrical properties of the area which is in contact with that layer. .106 CHAPTER 4.133) In the same fashion one can obtain the moment for x axis as Total Static Moment n Mx = Patmos yc Atotal + g sin β i=1 ρi I x y i (4. The last layer is made of water with density of 1000[kg/m3 ].and h4 = 4[m]. Also neglect all mass transfer phenomena that may occur.131) After similar separation of the total integral. The angle of inclination is is β = 45◦ . the atmospheric pressure can include all the layer(s) that do(es) not with the “contact” area. and ρ4 = 1000[kg/m3 ].75[m]. Moreover.132) If the atmospheric pressure enters into the calculations one can find that Total Static Moment n My = Patmos xc Atotal + g sin β i=1 ρi I x x i (4. The atmospheric pressure can be entered into the calculation in the same way as before.

133) to be written for the moment around the point “O” as xc Atotal F1 a1 + F2 b1 = Patmos (b2 + a2 ) (b2 − a2 ) +g sin β ρi+1 Ix 2 i=1 3 x i The solution for the above equation is 2 b1 g sin β P3 i=1 F1 = ρi+1 xc i Ai −2 g sin β 2 b1 −2 a1 P3 i=1 ρi+1 Ix x i − (b2 2 −2 b1 b2 +2 a2 b1 −a2 2 ) 2 b1 −2 a1 Patmos . stead of using the regular atmo.24.Fig. spheric pressure the new “atmospheric” pressure can be used as ρ2 ρ3 ρ4 h3 h2 b2 b1 F2 F1 a1 ℓ The effects of multi layers density on static Patmos = Patmos + ρ1 g h1 The distance for the center for each area is at the middle of each of the “small” rectangular. the first equation is Atotal 3 F1 + F2 = Patmos (b2 − a2 ) +g sin β i=1 ρi+1 xc i Ai The second equation is (4. -4.130).5.133) and (4. Equation (4. only two equations are needed. which are (4. FLUID FORCES ON SURFACES Solution ρ1 y "O" 107 β h1 a2 Since there are only two unh4 knowns. the following equations are obtained Thus. The solution method of this example is applied for cases with less layers (for example by setting the specific height difρ4 ference to be zero).133) can be used by modifying it. as it can be noticed that in.4.forces. The geometries of each areas are „ xc 1 = xc 2 = xc 3 = h2 a2 + sin β 2 h2 +h3 2 sin β h3 +h4 2 sin β A1 = A2 = A3 = h2 sin β sin β sin β − a2 Ix x 1 = x 2 x 3 h2 sin β −a2 36 «3 + (xc 1 ) A1 + (xc 2 ) A2 + (xc 3 ) A3 2 2 2 (h3 − h2 ) (h4 − h3 ) Ix Ix = = (h3 −h2 )3 36 sin β (h4 −h3 )3 36 sin β After inserting the values.

718 The final answer is F1 = 304809.5355 xc3 = 4.2892 xc2 = 3.696 A2 = 3. if the y component of the force is needed. The intermediate results in SI units ([m].215 Ix x 2 = 44.2 Forces on Curved Surfaces The pressure is acting on surfaces perpendicular to the direction of the surface (no shear forces assumption).137)) it can be observed that the force in the direction of y.92[N ] End Solution 4. A mini source code for the calculations is provided in the the text source. FLUIDS STATICS ρi+1 Ix x i F2 = −2 a1 g sin β 2 b1 −2 a1 P3 i=1 ρi+1 xc i Ai + (b2 2 +2 a1 b2 +a2 2 −2 a1 a2 ) 2 b1 −2 a1 Patmos The solution provided isn’t in the complete long form since it will makes things messy. the pressure is treated as a scalar function. the conventional notation is used which is to denote the area. So.9497 A1 = 2.292 Ix x 3 = 86.137) From this analysis (equation (4. The forces on curved area. The element force is d F = −P n dA ˆ (4. [m2 ]. outward as positive. dA. is simply the integral of the area perpendicular to y as . [m4 ]) are: xc1 = 2.25.135) z dAy dAx dA Here. P n dA ˆ (4. The total force on the area will be the integral of the unit force F=− A y dAz x Fig.535 A3 = 3. -4. only a dot product is needed as dFy = dF • ˆ j (4. At this stage.136) The result of the integral is a vector.5.79[N ] and F2 = 958923.108 2 g sin β P3 i=1 CHAPTER 4. for example. It is simpler to compute the terms separately.535 Ix x 1 = 14.

“y z” is tan θzy = (4. Figure 4. Schematic of Net Force on floating The moment due to the curved surface require integration to obtain the value.140) only the liquid above the body affecting the body And the angle in “x z” plane is tan θxz = Fz Fx Fz Fy (4. There are no readily made expressions for these 3–dimensional geometries. For example.138) The same can be said for the x direction. Fig. The atmospheric pressure acts on the area with continuous lines. Example 4. Additional point that is worth mentioning is that the depth where the cut–out occur is insignificant (neglecting the change in the density). the atmospheric pressure with it piezometric pressure is canceled by the upper part of the slot.139) implicitly means that the net force on the body is z direction is only the actual liquid above it.141) and the angle in the other plane.26 shows a floating body with cut–out slot into it. only the net force is the actual liquid in the slot which is acting on the body.139) The force which acting on the z direction is the weight of the liquid above the projected area plus the atmospheric pressure. Thus. This force component can be combined with the other components in the other directions to be Ftotal = Fz 2 + Fx 2 + Fy 2 (4. The force in the z direction is Fz = A h g ρdAz (4.15: . -4. FLUID FORCES ON SURFACES 109 Fy = A P dAy (4. However. Cut–Out Shapes Effects There are bodies with a shape that the vertical direction (z direction) is “cut– out” aren’t continuous.5. Inside the slot. Equation (4.26.142) body. for some geometries there are readily calculated center of mass and when combined with two other components provide the moment (force with direction line).4.

dAx Fx = A P r cos θ dθ (4. Area above the dam arc subtract triangle. b r dθ where b is the width of the dam (into the page). The atmospheric pressure does cancel itself (at least if the atmospheric pressure on both sides of the dam is the same. When the area Ax is b r dθ cos θ.8[m/sec2 ] and width of the dam is b = 4[m]. . Solution The force in the x direction is CHAPTER 4. -4. The pressure is only a function of θ and it is P = Patmos + ρ g r sin θ The force that is acting on the x direction of the dam is Ax × P . FLUIDS STATICS δθ θ θ0 θ Y 4[m] x direction A θ Ax Ay Fig. The differential area that will be used is. -4.28.27)). why? Fig.). The gravity is 9.27.110 Calculate the force and the moment around point “O” that is acting on the dam (see Figure (4. Ax (see Figure 4. You can assume that the liquid density is constant and equal to 1000 [kg/m3 ]. The net force will be θ0 P dAx Fx = 0 ρ g r sin θ b r cos θ dθ results in The Fx = integration ρ g b r2 1 − cos2 (θ0 ) 2 Alternative way to do this calculation is by calculating the pressure at mid point and then multiply it by the projected area.28) as Ax xc A△ = r2 sin θ cos θ Aarc = r θ r2 2 Fx = ρ g b r sin θ0 r sin θ0 ρgbr = sin2 θ 2 2 Notice that dAx (cos θ) and Ax (sin θ) are different. direct and indirect.143) Note that the direction of the area is taken into account (sign). Compare the different methods of computations. The dam is made of an arc with the angle of θ0 = 45◦ and radius of r = 2[m]. Calculations of forces on a circular shape dam.

The force in the y direction is the area times width.0[N ] 2 Since the last two equations are identical (use the sinuous theorem to prove it sin2 θ + cos2 = 1).29. Some mathematics are required because the shift in the arc orientation.28) should be calculated as yc = yc Aarc − yc Atriangle A The center area above the dam requires to know the center area of the arc and triangle shapes.5. The arc center (see Figure 4.1 and 3.65174[m] The result of the arc center from point “O” (above calculation area) is Fig.348[m] 12 Well.216[N ] 2  2  The center area ( purple area in Figure 4.8 × 4 × 2 sin(45◦ ) = 19600.29) is at yc arc = 4 r sin2 3θ θ 2 All the other geometrical values are obtained from Tables 3. and substituting the proper values results in Aarc θ r2 2 yc yc Atriangle 4 r sin θ 2 cos θ 2 3θ 4 r sin yc r = 2 r cos θ sin θ r2 − 3θ 3 2 θ r2 r2 sin θ cos θ − 2 2 cos Aarc Atriangle θ 2 θ 2 θ 4 r sin 3θ θ 2 This value is the reverse value and it is yc r = 1.65174 ∼ 0. -4. FLUID FORCES ON SURFACES 111 The values to evaluate the last equation are provided in the question and simplify subsidize into it as Fx = 1000 × 9.  V A   θ r2 r2 sin θ0 cos θ0    0 − Fy = −   b g ρ ∼ 22375. Area above the dam arc calculation for the center.2. it is just a demonstration! .4. yc = r − yc r = 2 − 1. clearly the discussion earlier was right (not a good proof LOL12 ).

2 ∼ 7792. FLUIDS STATICS Mv = yc Fy ∼ 0.30.5[N × m] For direct integration of the moment it is done as following θ0 O dF = P dA = 0 ρ g sin θ b r dθ θ θ/2 θ/2 π−θ 2  ℓ = 2 r sin   and element moment is θ 2 θ 2 θ  2  π 2 dM = dF × = dF 2 r sin and the total moment is θ0 cos dF θ/2 M= 0 dM θ0 Fig.348 × 22375. Moment on arc element around Point “O.31759[N × m] The center pressure for x area is Ixx b ¡ (r cos θ0 ) r cosθ0 Ixx 5 r cos θ0 36 = + xp = xc + = r cosθ0 xc A 2 9 b ¡ (r cos θ0 ) 2 xc 3 The moment due to hydrostatic pressure is Mh = xp Fx = 5 r cosθ0 Fx ∼ 15399.112 The moment is CHAPTER 4. -4.21[N × m] 9 The total moment is the combination of the two and it is Mtotal = 23191.” or M= 0 ρ g sin θ b r 2 r sin θ 2 cos θ 2 dθ The solution of the last equation is M= g r ρ (2 θ0 − sin (2 θ0 )) 4 θ0 The vertical force can be obtained by Fv = 0 P dAv .

16: For the liquid shown in Figure 4. Polynomial shape dam description for the moment around point “O” and force calculations.calculate the moment around point “O” and the force created by the liquid per unit depth. The function of the dam shape is n y = i=1 ai xi and it is a monotonous function (this restriction can be relaxed somewhat).4. The calculations are done per unit depth (into the page) and do not require the actual depth of the dam. Fv = End Solution To demonstrate this point further. -4.31) in this case is P h dA dF = (b − y) g ρ dx2 + dy 2 The size of the differential area is the square root of the dx2 and dy 2 (see Figure 4. In fact. Solution o y= b n i=1 ai x i dA dy y x dx Fig. and thus. Example 4. The element force (see Figure 4.31).31 . consider a more general case of a polynomial function. Also calculate the horizontal and vertical forces. From mathematics. and the direct approach second. It can be noticed that the differential area that is used here should be multiplied by the depth. FLUID FORCES ON SURFACES or θ0 P dAv 113 Fv = 0 ρ g r sin θ r dθ cos θ g r2 ρ 2 1 − cos (θ0 ) 2 Here. The reason that a polynomial function was chosen is that almost all the continuous functions can be represented by a Taylor series.31.5. it can be shown that dx2 + dy 2 = dx 1+ dy dx 2 . there are many programs or hand held devices that can carry numerical integration by inserting the function and the boundaries. this example provides for practical purposes of the general solution for curved surfaces. It is much simpler now to use the second method. the traditional approach was presented first.

The distance is = (b − 2 2 x6 ) + 6 b −x 2 2 .32). The number “2” is a dimensional number with dy = 12 x5 dx units of [1/m5 ]. -4. The derivative at x is and the derivative is dimensionless (a dimensionless number). The distance between the point on the dam at x to the point “O” is (x) = (b − y)2 + (xb − x)2 The angle between the force and the distance to point “O” is θ(x) = tan−1 dy dx − tan−1 b−y xb − x The element moment in this case is dF 2 dM = (x) (b − y) g ρ 1+ dy dx cos θ(x) dx To make this example less abstract.32.114 CHAPTER 4. expression of the distance and angle to point “O” are needed (see Figure 4. For example. FLUIDS STATICS O y The right side can be evaluated for any given function. The difference between the slop and the direction angle. To evaluate the moment. In this case. only one term is provided and xb can be calculated as following xb = Notice that 6 6 b 2 b 2 is measured in meters. in this case describing the dam function is 1+ dy dx 2 n 2 dy dx ℓ dF b θ y = 1+ i=1 i a (i) x (i) i−1 x x The value of xb is where y = b and can be obtained by finding the first and positive root of the equation of n 0= i=1 ai x − b i Fig. consider the specific case of y = 2 x6 .

the calculations of the center of the area were not carried out. Here. If the reader wonders why such a class is taught in a high school. However. This omission saves considerable time. perhaps the name can explain it: Sea Officers High School. the floating vessels structure (more than 150 years ago) show some understanding13 . ship builders who knew how to calculate GM but weren’t aware of scientific principles behind it. more advance mathematics will be used.6 Buoyancy and Stability h r One of the oldest known scientific rea search on fluid mechanics relates to buoyancy due to question of money was carried by Archimedes.Fig.6. To understand this issue. . 150 years ago and more. In fact. ture the essence. Archimedes princib ple is related to question of density and volume. because this material is presented in a different era. While the question of the stability was not scientifically examined in the past. It was taught by people like these. BUOYANCY AND STABILITY The angle can be expressed as θ = tan−1 12 x5 − tan The total moment is √ 6 b 115  b − 2 x6  −1  6  b 2 −x M= 0 (x) cos θ(x) b − 2 x6 g ρ 1 + 12 x5 dx This integral doesn’t have a analytical solution. While Archimedes did not know much about integrals. The horizontal force is Fh = b ρ g b ρ g b2 = 2 2 The vertical force per unit depth is the volume above the dam as √ 6 b Fv = 0 b − 2 x6 ρ g dx = ρ g 5 b6 7 7 In going over these calculations. consider a cubical and a cylindrical body that is immersed 0 0 13 This topic was the author’s high school name. This author find this method to be simpler for complicated geometries while the indirect method has advantage for very simple geometries.33. The total forces the liquid exacts on a body are considered as a buoyancy issue. End Solution 4.4. -4. for a given value b this integral can be evaluate. he was able to cap. Schematic of Immersed Cylinder. trying to find the center of the area will double the work.

Another way to look at this point is by approximation. -4. On the upper surface the pressure is ρg(h0 − a/2). the horizontal forces are canceling each other. The force due to the liquid pressure per unit depth (into the page) is F = ρg ((h0 − a/2) − (h0 + a/2)) b = −ρ g a b = −ρgV In this case the be (4.34) is P dAvertical h0 dF = ρ g (h0 − r sin θ) sin θ r dθ 2π (4. The forces on square geometry body are made only of vertical forces because the two sides cancel each other. on the vertical direction. Any body that has a projected area that has two sides.145) V The force on the immersed body is equal to the weight of the displaced liquid. However.33.146) r θ The total force will be the integral of the equation (4. The force to hold the cylinder at the place must be made of integration of the pressure around the surface of the square and cylinder bodies. All the horizontal forces are canceled. (4.148) Fig.146) transforms it to 2π F = rgρ 0 (h0 − r sin θ) sin θ dθ (4. FLUIDS STATICS in liquid and center in a depth of.34.33. On the other hand. Thus even these bodies are in contact with each other. the imaginary pressure make it so that they cancel each other. the pressure on the two surfaces are different. In illustration of this concept.150) . For any two rectangle bodies. h0 as shown in Figure 4. any shape is made of many small rectangles. The force per area (see Figure 4. The solution of equation (4. While the horizontal force is Fv = 0 (h0 − r sin θ) cos θ dθ = 0 (4. Thus.144) to F = ρg (4.147) Rearranging equation (4.148) is F = −π r2 ρ g 2π The floating forces on Immersed Cylinder. This analysis can be generalized by noticing two things. the total force is made of the sum of all the small rectangles which is the weight of the sum of all volume. The force on every rectangular shape is made of its weight of the volume.144) represents a depth (into the page). Rearranging equation (4. those will cancel each other. consider the cylindrical shape in Figure 4.149) The negative sign indicate that the force acting upwards.146) F = 0 ρ g (h0 − r sin θ) r dθ sin θ (4. On the lower surface the pressure is ρg(h0 + a/2).116 CHAPTER 4.

You can provide that the angle or the depth. T1 for the body to float. the pressure at the interface from the air point of view (ideal gas model) should be mair R T1 Pin = hin π w2 V . calculate the pressure inside the container. Thus. Schematic of a thin wall function of the density of the wall. The container diameter is w. ρs liquid density. and density.is floating in liquid with density. the pressure at the interface can be written as Pin = ρl g hin On the other hand. ρw in liquid with denisty. r. shown in Figure 4. BUOYANCY AND STABILITY 117 Example 4. ρl .4. floating body. the height. The second example of the speed of the floating bodies. Express the maximum wall thickness. The body was inserted into liquid in a such a way that the air had remained in it. as a Fig.6. Assume that ρl > ρw . ρl and the surroundings air temperature. In the case where thickness is half the maximum.35 . Since there are no better examples.18: A cylindrical body. Note that for the maximum thickness.35. t. ρl . Typical examples to explain the buoyancy are of the vessel with thin walls put upside down into liquid. -4. Assume that the wall thickness is small compared with the other dimensions (t << w and t << h). h1 has to be zero. h1 t w hin h Example 4. these examples are a must.17: To what depth will a long log with radius. a length. Solution The air mass in the container is V ρair mair = π w2 h The mass of the container is  Patmos RT  A   mcontainer = π w2 + 2 π w h t ρs The liquid amount enters into the cavity is such that the air pressure in the cavity equals to the pressure at the interface (in the cavity).

the air. Archimedes theorem states that the force balance is at displaced weight liquid (of the same volume) should be the same as the container.118 CHAPTER 4. hin = Example 4. ρ π w2 h ρl g hin + Patmos = Pin = The last equation can be simplified into ρl g hin + Patmos = And the solution for hin is hin = − and Patmos + Patmos R T1 R T1 hin π w2 h Patmos hin 4 g h Patmos ρl + Patmos 2 2 g ρl 4 g h Patmos ρl + Patmos 2 − Patmos 2 g ρl The solution must be positive. FLUIDS STATICS Since the air mass didn’t change and it is known. Advance material can be skipped Extreme Cases The solution demonstrates that when h −→ 0 then hin −→ 0. When the gravity approaches zero (macro gravity) then hin = Patmos h 2 ρl g 2 h 3 ρl 2 g 2 5 h 4 ρl 3 g 3 +h− + − + ··· ρl g Patmos Patmos 2 Patmos 3 This “strange” result shows that bodies don’t float in the normal sense. Thus.19: Calculate the minimum density an infinitely long equilateral triangle (three equal sides) has to be so that the sharp end is in the water. so that the last solution is the only physical solution. the following height can be expanded into hin = h Patmos Patmos + + ··· g ρl 2 g ρl End Advance material which shows that the large quantity of liquid enters into the container as it is expected. net displayed water π w2 (h − hin ) g container = π w 2 + 2 π w h t ρs g + π w 2 h air Patmos R T1 g . it can be inserted into the above equation. When the floating is under vacuum condition.

but the liquid displacement is still unknown. The thickness is known.6. BUOYANCY AND STABILITY If air mass is neglected the maximum thickness is tmax = 2 g h w ρl + Patmos w − w 4 gh Patmos ρl + Patmos 2 (2 g w + 4 g h) ρl ρs 119 The condition to have physical value for the maximum thickness is 2 g h ρl + Patmos ≥ The full solution is tmax = − “ ” √ w R 4 gh Patmos ρl +Patmos 2 −2 g h w R ρl −Patmos w R T1 +2 g h Patmos w ρl (2 g w+4 g h) R ρl ρs T1 4 gh Patmos ρl + Patmos 2 In this analysis the air temperature in the container immediately after insertion in the liquid has different value from the final temperature. The pressure at the interface (after long time) is ρl g hin + Patmos = which can be simplified to h Patmos hin + h1 The second equation is Archimedes’ equation. It is reasonable as the first approximation to assume that the process is adiabatic and isentropic. Thus. the temperature in the cavity immediately after the insertion is Ti = Tf Pi Pf The final temperature and pressure were calculated previously. The equation of state is Pi = mair R Ti Vi The new unknown must provide additional equation which is Vi = π w2 hi Thickness Below The Maximum For the half thickness t = tmax the general solution for any given thickness below 2 maximum is presented. which is ρl g hin + Patmos = π w2 (h − hin − h1 ) = π w2 + 2 π w h) t ρs g + π w2 h End Solution atmos π w2 h PR T1 R T1 (hin + h1 ) π w2 Patmos R T1 g .4.

Is the body volume important? Solution The net force is liquid weight body weight F = V g ρl − V g α ρl = V g ρl (1 − α) But on the other side the internal force is m F = m a = V αρl a Thus. This idea can lead to experiment in “large gravity” because the acceleration can be magnified and it is much more than the reverse of free falling.120 CHAPTER 4. End Solution Example 4. Find equivalent cylinder that has the same diameter that has the same force. h0 and left at rest.21: In some situations. Calculate acceleration and time for a body to reach the surface. it is desired to find equivalent of force of a certain shape to be replaced by another force of a “standard” shape. FLUIDS STATICS Example 4. it can be observed that only the density ratio is important.20: A body is pushed into the liquid to a distance. The body’s density is α ρl . Consider the force that acts on a half sphere. where α is ratio between the body density to the liquid density and (0 < α < 1). the acceleration is a=g 1−α α If the object is left at rest (no movement) thus time will be (h = 1/2 a t2 ) t= If the object is very light (α −→ 0) then tmin = 2hα + g √ 2 g h α2 3 + 2g 3 2 hα g(1 − α) √ 2 g h α2 5 + 8g 5 √ 2 g h α2 + ··· 16 g 7 From the above equation. Solution The force act on the half sphere can be found by integrating the forces around the .

4. ρl < ρs < rhoh is floating between the two liquids. The net force down is the weight of the body ρc h A. In this case there are two different liquid densities. it was shown that net force is the body volume times the the density of the liquid. Body with density between the two liquids. it was assumed that above liquid is a gas with inconsequential density. This force is balance according to above explanation by the two liquid as ρc ¨A = ¨h (α ρl + (1 − α)ρh ) h¨ A¨ . There are situations where density is a function of the depth. Suppose that the above layer is another liquid which has a bit lighter density. Develop the relationship between the densities of liquids and solid and the location of the solid cubical. BUOYANCY AND STABILITY sphere.6. Solution In the discussion to this section.22: In the introduction to this section. the body can be separated into two: one in first liquid and one in the second liquid. the height is h π = r 4 End Solution 1 π 2 (ρL − ρS ) r3 4 Example 4. The element force is dAx h 2 dA 121 dF = (ρL − ρS ) g r cos φ cos θ cos θ cos φ r dθ dφ The total force is then π π 0 Fx = 0 (ρL − ρS ) g cos2 φ cos2 θ r3 dθ dφ The result of the integration the force on sphere is Fs = The force on equivalent cylinder is Fc = π r2 (ρL − ρS ) h These forces have to be equivalent and thus $ ! £ (ρL $$ 3 π 2 $$− ρS ) r¡ $ = &  $$− ρS ) h π r2 (ρL $$   4 Thus. What will be the location of solid body if the liquid density varied parabolically. Where h is the height of the body and A is its cross section. In the same vein.

The density as a function of x coordinate along h starting at point ρh is ρ(x) = ρh − x h 2 (ρh − ρl ) Thus the equilibration will be achieved. when x1 +h ρc h = x1 ρh − x h 2 (ρh − ρl ) dx After the integration the equation transferred into ρc h = (3 ρl − 3 ρh ) x12 + (3 h ρl − 3 h ρh ) x1 + h2 ρl + 2 h2 ρh 3h And the location where the lower point of the body (the physical). will be at √ 3 3 h2 ρl 2 + (4 ρc − 6 h2 ρh ) ρl + 3 h2 ρh 2 − 12 ρc ρh + 3 h ρl − 3 h ρh X1 = 6 ρh − 2 ρl For linear relationship the following results can be obtained. However. End Solution Example 4. Thus.8) with a t wall thickness. FLUIDS STATICS Where α is the fraction that is in low liquid. Solution The weight of displaced water has to be equal to the weight of the sphere ρs g ¡ 4 π R3 = ρw g ¡ 3 4 π R3 4 π (R − t) − 3 3 3 (4. the calculations can be carried out under the assumption of sharp change. What is the = thickness if the sphere is neutrally buoyant? Assume that the radius of the sphere is R. For the thickness below this critical value.XXIII. After rearrangement it became α= ρc − ρh ρl − ρh the second part deals with the case where the density varied parabolically.a) .122 CHAPTER 4.23: A hollow sphere is made of steel (ρs /ρw ∼ 7. they have to accounted for. x1 . develop an equation for the depth of the sphere. A is canceled on both sides. x1 = h ρl + h ρh − 6 ρc 2 ρl − 2 ρh In many cases in reality the variations occur in small zone compare to the size of the body. if the body is smaller compare to the zone of variation.

XXIII.b) is third order polynomial equation which it’s solution (see the appendix) is t1 t2 t3 = = = √ 3 − 2i √ 3i 2 3 − 1 2 1 2 ρs 3 R − R3 ρw ρs 3 R − R3 ρw 1 3 +R 1 3 − +R (4. Thus the Archimedes law is ρw 4 π R 3 − 3 R h 2 + h 3 ρs 4 π 3 t R 2 − 3 t 2 R + t 3 (4. The last solution is the solution that was needed. The depth that sphere will be located depends on the ratio of t/R which similar analysis to the above.XXIII.h) .c) R ρs −1+1 ρw The first two solutions are imaginary thus not valid for the physical world.XXIII.b) Equation (4.XXIII.g) is −f R (4 R3 2 + −f R (4 R3 2 − f R) fR − 2 R 2 3 h= − 1 3 R2 − f R) − fR − 2 R 2 3 1 3 (4.4.d) Where h is the sphere height above the water.e) When Vwater denotes the volume of the sphere in the water.a) becomes ρs R 3 = 3 t R2 − 3 t2 R + t3 ρw 123 (4.XXIII.XXIII. the weight displaced by the sphere has to be same as the sphere weight.XXIII.g) ρs The solution of (4.f) = 3 3 or ρw R 3 − 3 R h 2 + h3 = 3 t R 2 − 3 t2 R + t3 (4.XXIII. BUOYANCY AND STABILITY after simplification equation (4. The volume in the water is Vwater = 4 π R 3 − 3 R h 2 + h3 4 π R3 π h2 (3R − h) − = 3 3 3 (4.6. For a given ratio of t/R.XXIII.XXIII. The volume of a sphere cap (segment) is given by Vcap = π h2 (3R − h) 3 (4.

124 Where −f R = R3 − CHAPTER 4. These solutions are rejected.XXIV. End Solution Example 4. FLUIDS STATICS ρw (3 t R2 − 3 t2 R + t3 ) There are two more solutions which ρs contains the imaginary component.a) 9 π ρw ρ Va (4.XXV. Find the reverse function. Here it is assumed that this relationship can be written as Vw = f (d. For example. Solution It is assumed that the volume can be written as a function of the depth.b) (4. the relationship between the depth and the displaced liquid volume of the sphere. πd Vw = Thus.e. the depth is d= 3 d √ 3 3 2 = π d3 9 (4.25: In example 4.b) End Solution 4.6. other geometrical parameters) The Archimedes balance on the body is ρ Va = ρ w Vw (4.1 Stability .XXIV.24 a general solution was provided. For simplicity. f −1 for cone with 30◦ when the tip is in the bottom.XXIV.XXV. The general question is at what the depth of the object (i. wedge) will be located. Solution First the function has to built for d (depth). a wood wedge of wood with a fix weight/load. As it was shown in the previous example.24: One of the common questions in buoyancy is the weight with variable cross section and fix load. assume that the body is of a solid material.a) d = f −1 ρ Va ρw (4.c) End Solution Example 4.

Small amount of tilting of Fig. If one draws the stability (later about this criterion) as a function of the rotation angle will show a sinusoidal function with four picks in a whole rotation. The cubic mass (gravity) centroid is in the middle of the cubic. So. That is. When the body is at the position shown in Figure 4. β. the immersed part of the body center changes to a new location.36 shows a body made of hollow balloon and a heavy sphere connected by a thin and light rod.37). . If this arrangement is inserted into liquid and will Fig. -4.36b). B’ as shown in Figure 4. c a b The buoyant center is below the middle of the balloon.36c . BUOYANCY AND STABILITY Empty buoyancy center 125 Figure 4. the original state is referred as the stable body and vice versa.38. it is referred to as the neutral stable. These points are raised from the buoyant force analysis. any experiment of this cubic wood shows that it is stable locally. If the new immerse volume creates a new center in such way that couple forces (gravity and buoyancy) try to return the body. This B situation is similar to Figure 4.6. The cubic is stable in six positions (every cubic has six faces). it results in a flipping into the next stable position. gravity center This arrangement has mass centroid Full close to the middle of the sphere.the body is unstable and any tilt from the original position creates moment that will further continue to move the body from its original position.4. Schematic of floating bodies. The center of the mass (gravity) is still in the old location since the body did not change. in any of these six positions. be floating. When the body is tilted at a small angle. Part of the block floats above water line. A wooden cubic (made of pine. the balloon will be on the top and sphere on the bottom. This analysis doesn’t violate the second law of thermodynamics. Tilting the body with a small angle from its resting position creates a shift in the forces direction (examine Figure 4. However.37. the body is “stable” in some points more than others in their vicinity. the body is in situation like in 4. the cubic results in returning to the original position. for example) is inserted into water. Schematic of floating cubic. The third state is when the couple forces do have zero moment.36c.36c. the body stability must be based on the difference between the body’s local positions rather than the “absolute” stability. The reason for this local stability of the cubic is that other positions are less stable. When tilting a larger amount than π/4 . HowG ever the buoyant center is the middle of the volume under the water (see Figure 4. Moving bodies from an unstable position is in essence like a potential. -4. These forces create a moment which wants to return the body to the resting (original) position. The stability of the body is divided into three categories.36. In fact.

BB W = M (4. B. β.). The displacement of the buoyant center can be calculated by examining the moment these forces creats.151) Where M is the moment created by the displaced areas (volumes). . should to be calculated. So the perpendicular distance. Stability analysis of floating body. move to a new buoyant center. the analysis is still correct because the volume and not the area is used. This deviation of the buoyant center from the old buoyant center location. shown in Figure 4.38.38 as ∆F . The right green area (volume) in Figure 4.38 is displaced by the same area (really the volume) on left since the weight of the body didn’t change14 so the total immersed section is constant.153) 14 It is correct to state: area only when the body is symmetrical. This analysis is based on the difference of the displaced liquid. The body. BB .38. B’. FLUIDS STATICS β M ∆F GM δF δF ∆F G dA B B’ Fig. It can be noticed that the distance BB is an approximation for small angles (neglecting the vertical component. BB is the distance between points B and point B’.126 CHAPTER 4. The body weight creates opposite moment to balance the moment of the displaced liquid volume. W referred to the weight of the body. when given a tilted position. For small angle. when the body is not symmetrical.152) M= A g ρl x β dA x = g ρl β dV A x2 dA (4. and. However. the moment is calculated as the integration of the small force shown in the Figure 4. should be BB = The moment M can be calculated as δF M W (4. -4.

At this condition.b) .155) And combining equations (4.158) Example 4.26: A solid cone floats in a heavier liquid (that is ρl /ρc > 1). The relationship between the radius the depth is r = d tan θ (4. BUOYANCY AND STABILITY 127 The integral in the right side of equation (4.154) The point where the gravity force direction is intersecting with the center line of the cross section is referred as metacentric point. The moment of inertia of the cone is circle shown in Table 3. For a very light cone ρc /ρl ∼ 0. The ratio of the cone density to liquid density is α.157) It is remarkable that the results is independent of the angle.156) lim (4.1. The distance BG 3 BG = D/4 − d/4 (4.XXVI.154) with (4.a) Where D is the total height and d is the height of the submerged cone. Analyze this situation.4.153) as BB = g ρl Ixx ρs Vbody (4.38.153) is referred to as the area moment of inertia and was discussed in Chapter 3. Looking at Figure 4. the cone has zero depth. BB can be written from equation (4. The distance. The location of the metacentric point can be obtained from the geometry as BM = BB sin β (4. Solution The floating cone volume is depent on d as π d r2 and the center of gravity is D/4. 1 > ρc /ρl > 0 there could be a range where the cone is stable.6. the geometrical quantities can be related as BM GM = ρl Ixx −BG ρs Vbody (4.XXVI.155) yields BM = For small angle (β ∼ 0) β→0 g ρl βIxx ρl Ixx ¡ = g ρs sin β Vbody ρs Vbody ¡ sin β ∼1 β (4. M. The angle of the cone is θ. the cone is unstable. For middle range.

d) The relationship between D and d is determined by the density ratio ( as displaced volume is equal to cone weight)15 ρl d3 = ρc D3 =⇒ D = d 3 ρl ρc (4.XXVI.XXVI.c) Equation (4. Example 4. Solution Equation (4.XXVI. Show that the block’s length.f) 0= − −  =⇒ = 3 −1  4 ρs 192 4 ρs 48 ρc Since ρl > ρc this never happened.e) into (4.XXVI. L. The distance BG is obtained from Archimedes’ theorem and can be expressed as immersed volume ρs W = ρs a h L = ρl a h1 L =⇒ h1 = h ρl V 15 Only the dimension is compared.27: A solid block of wood of uniform density. The moment of 3 inertia for a block is given in Table 3. ρs = α ρl where ( 0 ≤ α ≤ 1 ) is floating in a liquid. Where L is the length into the 12 page.1 and is Ixx = La .d) yield the solution when GM = 0   ρl d3 ρc ρl d tan2 θ  d ρl ρl tan2 θ (4. FLUIDS STATICS Ixx π (d tan θ) 64 GM = 2 − π d (d tan θ) ρs 3 ρl Vbody 4 BG D d − 4 4 (4.158) requires that several quantities should be expressed.XXVI. End Solution To understand these principles consider the following examples.XXVI.c) can be simplified as GM = ρl d tan2 θ − ρs 192 D d − 4 4 (4.e) Substituting equation (4. why? .128 CHAPTER 4. Construct a graph that shows the relationship of the GM as a function of ratio height to width. is insignificant for this analysis.XXVI.

Notice that GM /h isn’t a function of the depth.1 1.2 α = 0.4 0.8 2. This equation leads to the condition where the maximum height above which the body is not stable anymore as a ≥ h 6 (1 − α)α (4.0 a h April 16.7 0.39.2 -0.2 0.6.161) End Solution . -4.5 0.6 1.4 α = 0.37) h1 2.0 0. 2008 Simplifying the above equation provides GM 1 = h 12 α a h 2 Fig. BUOYANCY AND STABILITY 129 h h1 L a Fig.3 1.5 -0.5 α = 0.5 0.4 α = 0.9 Ixx 0.2 1.8 0.3 0. Stability of Square Block 3.1 0.1 BG = GM h h ρs 1 h − h = 2 ρl 2 2 1− ρs ρl (4. Stability of cubic body infinity long.40.9 1.4.0 0.1 1.0 1.0 0. Cubic body dimensions for stability analysis.3 1. -4. L.0 -0. − 1 (1 − α) (4.2 Thus.4 1.7 α = 0. the distance BG is (see Figure 4.6 0.160) 2 where α is the density ratio.5 α = 0.8 1.159) 2.6 0.0 α = 0.0 1.2 1.8 0.0 L a g ρl ¡ 12 − h GM = g ρs a h  2 L ¡ V 3 ρs 1− ρl -0.

5 0.0 body width is not stable anymore. This axis is where the main rotation of the body will occur.5 drical shape equivalent to equation (4. The maximum height reverse as a g GM = h 64 α b h 2 − 1 (1 − α) 2 function of density ratio. a square shape body has larger moment of inertia around diagonal. Thus.6 0. It can be noticed that the square body is more stable than the circular body shape.5 moment of inertia is Ixx = π b4 /64.7 0. Unstable Bodies What happen when one increases the height ratio above the maximum height ratio? The body will flip into the side and turn to the next stable point (angle). Thus.07 a4 Which show that if the body is stable at main axises. And the condition for maximum height for stability is b ≥ h 32 (1 − α) α This kind of analysis can be carried for different shapes and the results are shown for these two shapes in Figure 4. it is enough to find if the body is stable around the smallest moment of inertia.0 can be expressed. In cylin1. With the exception of the circular shape. This is not a hypothetical question. it must be stable at the “diagonal” axis. For stability analysis. The 0. 2008 α shape (cubic) (see above (4.159)).3 0. this problem is reduced to find the stability for principle axis.9 1.0 0.41.0 circle above analysis is that there is a point 2. Some analysis of floating bodies are done by breaking the rotation of arbitrary axis to rotate around the two main axises.161) 1.2 0.1 0. every geometrical shape has an axis in which the moment of inertia is without the product of inertia. This happens when a ship is overloaded with containers above the maximum height. there is a different moment of inertia.4 0. In commercial ships.41. the equation is Fig.130 CHAPTER 4. Principle Main Axises Any body has infinite number of different axises around which moment of inertia can be calculated. but rather practical.5 above where the ratio of the height to the 2. The difference between the previous calculation and the moment of inertia around the diagonal is I diagonal axis √ ∆Ixx = 2a √ 3a 2 3 “normal axis 6 − a4 12 a h ∼ 0. the fuel is .0 0. FLUIDS STATICS Stability of Solid Blocks One of the interesting point for the square 3. -4. For cylinder (circle) the 0.8 0. For each of these axises.0 distance BG is the same as for the square April 16. For example.

the ship that was stable (positive GM ) leaving the initial port might became unstable (negative GM ) before reaching the destination port.42. ¯ Solution h The answer to the question is that the limiting case where GM = 0. Example 4.28: One way to make a ship to be a hydrodynamic is by making the body as narrow as possible. So. a a Stability of two triangles put The moment of inertia is triangle (see explanation in example (3. On the other side if the a/h −→ ∞ the body is very stable. tougher. Suppose that two opposite sides triangle (prism) is attached to each other to create a long “ship” see Figure 4.42.6. To find this ratio equation terms in (4.4. The point B can be expressed as B= And thus the distance BG is BG = a 2 1− ρs ρl a ρs 2 ρl The limiting condition requires that GM = 0 so that ρl Ixx = BG ρs Vbody .158) have to be found.7) is Ixx = And the volume is Vbody = a2 h2 − a h3 2 a2 = a2 h 4 1− 1 a2 4 h2 The point B is a function of the density ratio of the solid and liquid. Supposed that a/h −→ ˜ the body will be 0 unstable. -4. Denote the liquid density as ρl and solid density as ρs . The Volume of the body is V =2 a2 h 2 = a2 h Fig. What is the ˜ minimum ratio of a/h that keep the body stable at half of the volume in liquid (water). Assume that density ratio is ρl /ρs = ρ. BUOYANCY AND STABILITY 131 stored at the bottom of the ship and thus the mass center (point G) is changing during the voyage.

Exact analysis requires taking into the GM . for stability analysis. a ship that carries Gc wheat grains where the cargo is not propG G′ erly secured to the ship. A body is loaded with liquid “B” and is floating in a liquid “A” as shown in Figure 4. After the above manipulation and selecting the positive value and to keep stability as √ x< 64 ρ4 −64 ρ3 +ρ2 −2 ρ+1 ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ρ ¯ + 2 √ 1 ρ ¯ −1 2ρ ¯ End Solution 4. here. furniture. the extreme case where the load reacts in the same speed as the tilting of the ship/floating body is examined. For example.6. Moreover.43. is enough to be ig. However.43). and/or liquid) B does not occur in the same speed as the B′ body itself or the displaced outside liquid. the dynamics are ignored and only the statics is examined (see Figure 4. in this analysis.132 Or explicitly ρl ρs a2 h a h3 2 1− 1 a 4 h2 2 CHAPTER 4.Fig. There are situations where the real case approaches to this extreme. the slow reaction of the load.1 Stability of Body with Shifting Mass Centroid Ships and other floating bodies carry liquid or have a load which changes the M mass location during tilting of the floating body. FLUIDS STATICS = a 2 1− ρs ρl After rearrangement and using the definitions of ξ = h/a ρρl /ρs results in ¯ ρ ξ2 ¯ 1− ξ 4 2 = 1− 1 ρ ¯ The solution of the above solution is obtained by squaring both sides and defining a new variable such as x = ξ 2 . The effects of liquid movement on nored. For practical purposes. These situations involve liquid with a low viscosity (like water. Sometimes. it is used as a limit for the stability analysis. The movement of the load (grains. -4.1. account these shifting mass speeds. alcohol) and ship with low natural frequency (later on the frequency of the ships).43. When the body is given a tilting position the body displaces the liquid on the .

The total change of the vessel is then calculated similarly to center area calculations.167) If there are more than one tank partially filled with liquid.166) The distance that was used before GM is replaced by the criterion for stability by Gc M and is expressed as Gc M = g ρA Ixx A 1 Ixx b − BG − ρs Vbody mtotal Vb (4. it can be written as GG = g Wtotal n (4.164) Gi Gi ρl i Vi = i=1 g Wtotal n i=1 Ixxb i Vb i (4.6. This quantity. the general formula is Gc M = g ρA Ixx A 1 − BG − ρs Vbody mtotal n i=1 Ixx b i Vb i (4. The moment created by the inside displaced liquid is Min = g ρl B βIxx B (4. G Gc = GG sin β (4. This point is the intersection of the center line with the vertical line from G .4.168) . BUOYANCY AND STABILITY 133 outside. X0 g mtotal GG = $mbody + g mf G1 G1 g $$$ ¡ ¡ For more than one tank. At the same time. is similar for all liquid tanks on the floating body. The change in the mass centroid of the liquid “A” then is Ixx B g ρl¨βIxx B = G1 G1 = ¡ ¨B g VB ¨B VB ρl¨ ¡ Inside liquid weight (4.162) Note that IxxB isn’t the same as the moment of inertia of the outside liquid interface. the liquid inside is changing its mass centroid. G1 G1 .163) Equation (4.165) A new point can be defined as Gc .163) shows that GG is only a function of the geometry.

The angle. of the ship. .44.171) results in GM a ctual = GM new T mtotal −h mship mship (4.169) Where. -4.6. GM . This control of the stability. GM .171) provides the solution. The moment of inertial of the combine two G tanks is smaller than the moment of inertial of a single tank. FLUIDS STATICS One way to reduce the effect of the moving mass center due to liqd T uid is done by substituting a single h tank with several tanks.2 Metacentric Height. is the total weight of the floating body including measuring weight. design the tanks in such a way that the moment of inertia is operationally changed.172) The weight of the ship is obtained from looking at the ship depth. is measured as the difference in the orientation of the floating body. θ. Increasing the number of tanks reduces the moment of inertia. Movement of the liquid (mostly the fuel and water) provides way to control the stability. d then the moment created is Mweight = T d This moment is balanced by Mrighting = Wtotal GM new θ (4. The engineer could Fig.134 CHAPTER 4. Measurement The metacentric height can be measured by finding the change in the angle when a weight is moved on the floating body. Wtotal .171) If the change in the GM can be neglected. T a distance. equation (4. GM .1. can be achieved by having some tanks spanning across the entire body with tanks spanning on parts of the body. The calculation of GM can be improved by taking into account the effect of the measuring weight.172) with equation (4. The change in height of G is g mtotal Gnew = g mship Gactual + g T h ¡ ¡ ¡ Combining equation (4. Measurement of GM of floating body. Moving the weight.173) (4.170) (4. 4. The metacentric height is GM new = Td Wtotal θ (4.

45.1. These calculations are done as if none of the body under the liquid. The moment created by change in the displaced liquid (area) act in the same fashion as the before. -4.6. Calculations of GM for abrupt The mathematical condition for the border shape body.6. 4. The moment of inertia should be calculated around this axis. However.1.6. the mass centroid must be below than buoyant centroid in order to have stable condition. The center of the moment is needed to be found. For the case of b < 3 a the calculation of moment of inertia are similar to the previous case. the stability analysis must take into account the changes of the displaced liquids of the two liquid layers. all fluids have density varied in some degree. The moment of inertia is calculated around this point (note the body is “ended” at end of the upper body). the upper part of the body is above the liquid or part of the body is submerged under the water. Generally. the moment to return the body is larger than actually was calculated and the bodies tend to be more stable (also for other reasons). this density change helps to increase the stability of the floating bodies. there are situations where the body has a “strange” ∆F M δβ and/or un-symmetrical body. The body ∆F GM weight doesn’t change during the rotation that the green area on the left and the B’ B green area on right are the same (see Figb ure 4. When the floating object is immersed into two layers.4. After the tilting. is when b = 3 a. The calculations for such cases are a bit more complicated but based on the similar principles. This point is intersection point liquid with lower body and it is needed to be calculated. it must be taken into account. For the case where b < 3 a x some part is under the liquid. Fig. For an example of such a case is an object floating in a solar pond where the upper layer is made of water with lower salinity than the bottom layer(change up to 20% of the density). Thus. This analysis is out of the scope of this book (for now).4 Stability of None Systematical or “Strange” Bodies While most floating bodies are symmeta rical or semi–symmetrical. There are two situations that can occur. This point is the intersection of the liquid line with the brown middle line.3 Stability of Submerged Bodies 135 The analysis of submerged bodied is different from the stability when the body lays between two fluid layers with different density. BUOYANCY AND STABILITY 4. In cases where the density changes significantly. .45. However. then none of the changes of buoyant centroid occurs. When the body is submerged in a single fluid layer.45). The amount of area under the liquid section depends on the tilting angle. Consider the first strange body that has an abrupt step G change as shown in Figure 4.

6.177) V ρs GM Ibody (4. 1647 was an Italian physicist best known for his invention of the barometer. If the floating body is used to transport humans and/or other creatures or sensitive cargo it requires to reduce the GM so that the traveling will be smoother. .The main effect is the pressure difference beween the two surfaces (in the tube and out side the tune). Thus.5 Neutral frequency of Floating Bodies CHAPTER 4. This effect is large for very small diameters.176) In general. 1608 October 25. The tube is filled with a liquid and turned upside down into the liquid container. In one of the early studies of the surface tension/pressure was done by Torricelli16 . coating. etc. the surface tension affects the high. the frequency of pendulum is 21π g which measured in Hz.2 Surface Tension The surface tension is one of the mathematically complex topic and related to many phenomena like boiling. The basic differential equation is used to balance and is rotation rotating moment ¨ Iβ − V ρs GM β =0 (4. Similar situation exists in the case of floating bodies. the larger GM the more stable the floating body is. The period of the cycle is 2 π /g. 16 Evangelista Torricelli October 15. In this section. In this study he suggest construction of the early barometer. Increase in GM increases the frequency of the floating body.1. The governing equation for the pendulum is ¨ β −gβ = 0 (4. only simplified topics like constant value will be discussed.6.174) Where here is length of the rode (or the line/wire) connecting the mass with the rotation point. 4. FLUIDS STATICS This case is similar to pendulum (or mass attached to spring). However.136 4.175) In the same fashion the frequency of the floating body is 1 2π and the period time is 2π Ibody V ρs GM (4. In barometer is made from a tube sealed on one side.

In poor designs or other situations. Thus. the surface tension between the needle and the liquid hold the needle above the liquid. Example 4. After certain diameter.29: In interaction of the molecules shown in Figure ? describe the existence of surface tension. However. Taylor. .7. -4. in this case. This situation has engineering implications in several industries. some air is not evacuated and stay in small cavity on the edges of the shape to be casted. Solution Under Construction End Solution 4. the body should be accelerate. Newton’s law states when there is unbalanced force.7 Rayleigh–Taylor Instability Rayleigh–Taylor instability (or RT instability) is named after Lord Rayleigh and G. heavy fluid that is being placed above a lighter fluid in a gravity field perpendicular to interface. Calculate the maximum diameter needle that can be inserted into liquid without drowning. End Solution Fig.46. liquid metal is injected in a cavity filled with air. the needle cannot be held by the liquid. However. There are situations where a heavy liquid layer is placed over a lighter fluid layer. the liquid is not in motion. the common explanation is wrong. it can create a situation where the liquid metal is above the air but cannot penetrate into the cavity because of instability.30: Needle is made of steel and is heavier than water and many other liquids.2) are always stable but unstable of the density is in the reversed order. or water over air(gas–liquid). RAYLEIGH–TAYLOR INSTABILITY 137 Example 4. Thus.3. Explain why this description is erroneous? Solution The upper layer of the molecules have unbalanced force towards the liquid phase.3. The original Rayleigh’s paper deals with the dynamics and density variations. This instability deals with a dense. A heavy needle is floating on a liquid. Example for such systems are dense water over oil (liquid–liquid). For example in die casting. density variations according to the bulk modulus (see section 4. For example. I.4.

ρG .47.178) the radius is 1 4 π 2 hmax =− R L2 (4. This analysis asks the question of what happen when a small amount of liquid from the above layer enter into the lower layer? Whether this liquid continue and will grow or will it return to its original conditions? The surface tension is the opposite mechanism that will returns the liquid to its original place. the heavy fluid will stay above the lighter fluid. The depression is returned to its h original position if the surface forces are L large enough.57).57) can be approximated as d2 h 1 = 2 R dx For equation (4. Thus. this situation x σ σ is considered to be stable. Any continues function can be expanded in series of cosines. For example a heavy fluid density. above lower fluid with lower density.180) (4. The simplified case is the two different uniform densities. The fluid above the depression is in equilibrium with the sounding pressure since the material is extending to infinity. The first derivative of cos around zero is sin which is approaching zero or equal to zero.179) . the situation is Fig. The conditions that required from this function will be required from all the other functions. If the surface will be disturbed.138 CHAPTER 4. ρL . In that case. This disturbance can grow or returned to its original situation. As usual there is the neutral stable when the forces are equal. FLUIDS STATICS Supposed that a liquid density is arbitrary function of the height. Thus. This analysis is referred to the case of infinite or very large surface. the force that acting to get the above fluid down is the buoyancy force of the fluid in the depression. The weakest point is at x = 0 because symmetrical reasons the surface tension does not act against the gravity as shown in Figure (4. example of a cosine function will be examined. The depression has different radius as a function of distance from the center of the depression. Description of depression to explain unstable and the heavy liquid enters into the Rayleigh–Taylor instability. x. the liquid fluid zone and vice versa. if the surface forces (surface tension) are not sufficient. Thus. the surface density. Thus. equation (1. This condition is determined by competing forces. and the buoyancy forces. On the other hand. some of heavy liquid moves down.47). The disturbance is of the following 2πx h = −hmax cos (4. if the center point of the depression can “hold” the intrusive fluid then the whole system is stable. -4.178) L where hmax is the maximum depression and L is the characteristic length of the depression. The radius of any equation is expressed by equation (1. This distortion can be as a result of heavy fluid above the lighter liquid. For perfectly straight interface.

7. This acts Fig. The θ “extra” lines of the depression should be ignored. The first control volume is made of a cylinder with a radius r and the second is the depression below it. To analyze it. considered two control volumes bounded by the blue lines in 2r Figure 4. The point where the situation is neutral stable Lc = 4 π2 σ g (ρH − ρL ) (4. At the cylinder bottom.183) (4.182) It should be noted that hmax is irrelevant for this analysis as it is canceled.46) the pressure difference or the pressure jump is due to the surface tension at this point must be PH − PL = 4 hmax σ π 2 L2 (4. If all the heavy liquid “attempts” to move straight down.48. At the bottom.48. cylinder to be in equilibrium with its surroundings if the pressure at bottom is indeed ρ g h. In this process the heavier liquid “enter” the lighter liquid in one point and creates a depression as shown in Figure 4. For the depression.4. they are not part of the control volume.182) show that if the relationship is 4 σ π2 > g (ρH − ρL ) L2 (4.48. the force at the top is the same force at the bottom of the cylinder. At the top.48. the force is ρ g h × A. the force is atmospheric pressure times the area.181) and (4. Consider the situation described in Figure 4. Description of depression to explain against the gravity force which make the the instability.21) This value is exact if the shape is a perfect half sphere. The horizontal forces around the control volume are canceling each other. the lighter liquid will “prevent” it. It can be approximated as a flat cylinder that has depth of r π/4 (read the explanation in the example 4. RAYLEIGH–TAYLOR INSTABILITY 139 According to equation (1.181) The pressure difference due to the gravity at the edge of the disturbance is then PH − PL = g (ρH − ρL ) hmax Comparing equations (4. the error σ σ . The heavier liquid needs to move in one side and the lighter liquid in another location. In reality.184) An alternative approach to analyze this instability is suggested here. the force is the integral around the depression. -4. The lighter liquid needs to move up at the same time but in a different place.

185) The force that hold this column is the surface tension. the radius is r∼ 2πσ (ρL − ρG ) g (4.140 CHAPTER 4.188) (4. Thus.186) πr + h (ρL − ρG ) g + Patmos 4 (4.187) The maximum surface tension is when the angle. the force at the bottom is Fbottom ∼ π r2 The net force is then Fbottom ∼ π r2 πr 4 (ρL − ρG ) g (4.48. the liquid level is reduced a bit and the lighter liquid is filling the missing portion. As shown in Figure 4. -4.” The maximum possible radius of the depression depends on the geometry of the container.190) Fig. the total force is then Fσ = 2 π r σ cos θ The forces balance on the depression is then 2 π r σ cos θ ∼ π r2 The radius is obtained by r∼ 2 π σ cos θ (ρL − ρG ) g (4.49. At that case. FLUIDS STATICS is not significant. The purple color represents the maximum heavy liquid raising area.189) πr 4 (ρL − ρG ) g (4. For the cylindrical geometry. θ = π/2. the maximum depression radius is about half . The yellow color represents the maximum lighter liquid that are “going down. Additionally when the depression occurs. The cross section of the interface.

it was shown that the depression and the raised area are the same. the specific radius is limited. RAYLEIGH–TAYLOR INSTABILITY 141 for the container radius (see Figure 4.191) The actual radius will be much larger.191. dollars and your name will be associated with the solution in this book. σ 8 π 0. ω. This analysis introduces a new dimensional number that will be discussed in a greater length in the Dimensionless chapter.32: A canister shown in Figure 4. Example 4.4 2400 × 9. it can be written that the minimum radius is rmin tube = 2 2πσ g (ρL − ρG ) (4.50 has three layers of different fluids with different densities. Example 4. this angle is never can be obtained.31: Estimate the minimum radius to insert liquid aluminum into represent tube at temperature of 600[K]. For example. In Figure 4.190) can be used. The heavier liquid can stay on top of the lighter liquid without being turned upside down when the radius is smaller than the equation 4. Assume that the fluids do not mix. In equation (4.7.the depression is larger for square area. The canister is rotate with circular velocity. The actual area of the depression is only a fraction of the interfacial cross section and is a function. This radius is limited because the lighter liquid has to enter at the same time into the heavier liquid zone.49. r∼ End Solution Open Question by April 15.49). The density of air is negligible as can be seen from the temperature compare to the aluminum density. The density of the aluminum is 2400kg/m3 .02[m] which demonstrates the assumption of h >> r was appropriate. Since the “exchange” volumes of these two process are the same.81 The minimum radius is r ∼ 0. Assume that the surface tension is 400[mN/m]. The actual value of this angle is about π/4 to π/3 and in only extreme cases the angle exceed this value (considering dynamics). Solution The depression radius is assume to be significantly smaller and thus equation (4.S. However. Thus. 2010 The best solution of the following question will win 18 U.191) the angle was assumed to be 90 degrees. .4.168 by introducing experimental coefficient. These two scenarios should be inserting into equation 4.

2. How would you estimate the difference between the two locations. FLUIDS STATICS L3 L2 L1 Fig. D. the canister top center is connected to another tank with equal pressure to the canister before the rotation (the connection point). For example.50. she points out that warm air raise and therefor the warm spont in a house is the top floor (that is correct in 4 story home). examinations). The author’s daughther (8 years old) that fluid mechanics make no sence. So why when there is snow on high mountains? It must be that the temperature is below frizing point on the top of the mountain (see for example Mount Kilimanjaro. 3. Kenya). what is the difference? 4. Describe the interface of the fluids consider all the limiting cases. Where will be atmosphere thicknesss larger in the equator or the north pole? Explain your reasoning for the difference. for known geometries of the fluids. Use the ideal gas model. The surface of the ocean has spherical shape.142 Z CHAPTER 4. How would you explain this situation? Hint.8 Qualetive questions These qualetitive questions are for advance students and for those who would like to prepare themself prelimanry examination (Ph. Three liquids layers under rotation with various critical situations. . you should explain this phenomenon using only concepts that where develped in this chapter. The stability analysis that was discussed in this chapter was based on the assumption that surface is straight. Is there any difference if the fluids are compressible? Where is the maximum pressure points? For the case that the fluids are compressible. You can assume that the process is isothermal. -4. The atmosphere has different thickness in different locations. 1. How in your opinion the effec of the surface curviture affects the stability analysis. Is there any difference if the process is isentropic? If so. What happen after the canister start to be rotated? Calculated the volume that will enter or leave.

What are the direction of the force if the cylinder is not symetrical? . If the gravity was change due the surface curviture what is the effect on the stablity. QUALETIVE QUESTIONS 143 4. 5. A car is accelarated (increase of velocity) in an include surface upwards.8. What will constant pressure lines if the car will be driven downwords. What are the directions of the forces that acting on cylinder.4. Draw the constant pressure line. 6. A symmetrical cylinder filled with liquid is rotating around its center.

FLUIDS STATICS .144 CHAPTER 4.

Part I Integral Analysis 145 .

.

CHAPTER 5 The Control Volume and Mass Conservation 5. 147 . The main difficulty lies in the fact that every particle has to be traced to its original state. This kind of analysis is reasonable and it referred to in the literature as the Lagrangian Analysis.1. the Lagrangian system turned out to be difficult to solve and to analyze. Control volume and system before and after the later part of this book. one wants to find or predict the velocities in the system. -5. These differential equations will be used in Fig.motion. Leonard Euler (1707–1783) suggested an alternative approach. Langrange (1736–1813) who formulated the equations of motion for the moving fluid particles. This method applied and used in very few cases. This name is in honored J. The main target of such analysis is to find the value of certain variables. Ad. When the fluid system moves or changes. The use of the Eulerian methods leads to a set differentic control ation equations that is referred to volume as Navier–Stokes equations which are commonly used. In Euler’s approach the focus is on a defined point or a defined volume.1 Introduction This chapter presents a discussion on the control volume and will be focused on the conservation of the mass. Even though this system looks reasonable. L. The Eulerian method focuses on a defined area or locaa system tion to find the needed informab tion. This methods is referred as Eulerian method.

The Eulerian method plays well with the physical intuition of most people.148 CHAPTER 5. Fig. momentum. The green lines in Figure 5. The red dotted lines are the control volume.piston with in and out flow. MASS CONSERVATION ditionally. Therefore a limited discussion on the Lagrangian system will be presented (later version). This methods has its limitations and for some cases the Lagrangian is preferred (and sometimes the only possibility). mass.2. At certain time the system and the control volume are identical location.1.2 Control Volume The Eulerian method requires to define a control volume (some time more than one). Non–deformable control volume is a control volume which is fixed in space relatively to an one coordinate system. energy. The difference between the system and the control volume is shown in Figure 5. The control volume should be chosen so that the analysis should be simple and dealt with as less as possible issues which are not in question. This coordinate system may be in a relative motion to another (almost absolute) coordinate system. the control volume is a system. 5.1. non–deformable and deformable. Control volume of a moving The control volume chosen is non-deformable con. trol volume. Deformable control volume is a volume having part of all of its boundaries in motion during the process at hand. Flow in conduits can be analyzed by looking in a control volume between two locations. the Eulerian system leads to integral equations which are the focus of this part of the book. Every control volume is the focus of the certain interest and will be dealt with the basic equations. -5.2. The control volume is differentiated into two categories of control volumes. . The coordinate system could be fixed to the conduit.1 represent the system. When a piston pushing gases a good choice of control volume is a deformable control volume that is a head the piston inside the cylinder as shown in Figure 5. Lagrangian equations are associated with the system while the Eulerian equation are associated with the control volume. some of the mass in the system exited the control volume which are marked “a” in Figure 5. The control volume is a defined volume that was discussed earlier. The material that remained in the control volume is marked as “b”. the control gains some material which is marked as “c”. entropy etc. After a certain time. At the same time. In the case where no mass crosses the boundaries. Two examples of control volume are presented to illustrate difference between a deformable control volume and non–deformable control volume.

(t) d = dt dt ρ dV Vc.1. The velocity component that velocities at the interface.3. the mass conservation will be discussed.6) Where n is an unit vector perpendicular to the surface.3) The first term in equation (5. Schematics of velocity (see Figure 5.3).4) Control Volume and is a function of the time.7) .1) The system mass after some time. The interface of the control volume can move. is perpendicular to the surface is − → Urn = −ˆ · Ur = Ur cos θ n (5. The mass flow out of the control volume is the system mass that is not included in the control volume. The system mass change is D msys D = Dt Dt ρdV = 0 Vsys (5.v.3 Continuity Equation In this chapter and the next three chapters.3).3. In this chapter.2) The change of the system mass is by definition is zero. The actual velocity of the fluid leaving the control volume is the relative velocity (see Figure 5. CONTINUITY EQUATION 149 5. according Figure 5. The change with time (time derivative of equation (5.v. is made of msys = mc.v. -5.v.5. The relative velocity is − → − → − → Ur = Uf − Ub (5. Thus. + ma − mc (5.5) Ub n ˆ θ Uf −Ub Uf − Ub Where Uf is the liquid velocity and Ub is the boundary Fig. the flow out is d ma = dt ρs Urn dA Scv (5. (5.2)) results in 0= D msys d mc. d ma d mc = + − Dt dt dt dt (5. The convention of direction ˆ is taken positive if flow out the control volume and negative if the flow is into the control volume. the conservation equations will be applied to the control volume.3) is the derivative of the mass in the control volume and at any given time is d mc.

Schematics of flow in in pipe with varying density as a function time for example 5.8) and (5.9) into equation (5. the flow rate in is d mb = dt ρs Urn dA Sc. X dx L Fig. The negative sign is because flow out marked positive which reduces of the mass (negative derivative) in the control volume. due to temperature variation and other reasons.1: The density changes in a pipe. can be approximated as x 2 t ρ(x. Scv ρ Urn dA (5.7) are similar and can be combined. taking the positive or negative value of Urn with integration of the entire system as d ma d mb − = dt dt ρs Urn dA Scv (5. Example 5.9) applying negative value to keep the convention. (5. Substituting equation (5. t) = 1− cos .150 CHAPTER 5.8) It can be noticed that the two equations (5.v. The next example is provided to illustrate this concept. -5. MASS CONSERVATION It has to be emphasized that the density is taken at the surface thus the subscript s.v. In the same manner.4. Again notice the negative sign in surface integral.3) results in Continuity d dt ρs dV = − c. ρ0 L t0 . The change of mass change inside the control volume is net flow in or out of the control system.10) Equation (5.10) is essentially accounting of the mass.1.

t.v. θ and they can be taken out the integral as d d x 2 t ρdV = π R2 ρ0 1 − cos dx dt c. Solution Here it is very convenient to choose a non-deformable control volume that is inside the conduit dV is chosen as π R2 dx.10) can enter the integral since the boundaries are fixed in time and hence. and is the change of the mass in the control volume.3. L t0 which results in A Flow Out = π R2 d dt L ρ0 1 − 0 x L 2 cos t π R2 L ρ0 dx = − sin t0 3 t0 t t0 The flow out is a function of length. . 5. the derivative in equation (5.5.v. Continuity with Fixed b. CONTINUITY EQUATION 151 The conduit shown in Figure 5.11) Equation (5.10).2 Constant Density Fluids Further simplifications of equations (5.10). x 1− L 2 cos t t0 π R2 dx The density is not a function of radius.11) is simpler than equation (5.v.v.c. (5. dt c.10) become conservation of the volume.10) can be obtained by assuming constant density and the equation (5. the flow out (or in) is ρ(t) dV d dt d ρdV = dt c. ρ0 c. r and angle.v.3. Using equation (5.3. End Solution 5. L.4 length is L and its area is A. and time. Write the expression for the mass change in the pipe.1 Non Deformable Control Volume When the control volume is fixed with time. dρ dV = − dt ρ Urn dA Sc. Express the mass flow in and/or out. Vc. and the mass in the conduit as function of time.v.

The average velocity of the liquid at the exit of the filling pipe is Up and cross section of the pipe is Ap .v. And where Aj is the area of jet when touching the .v.12) Steady State Continuity Vrn dA = Sin Sout Vrn dA = 0 (5. Physically. the meaning is that volume flow rate in and the volume flow rate out have to equal.3.v.15) The meaning of the equation (5. Example 5.7 Ap .v. and hence the mass change of the control volume is zero. Urn dA (5.13) Notice that the density does not play a role in this equation since it is canceled out. dρ dV +ρ dt n · Ub dA = ρ ˆ Sc. 5.2 Deformable Control Volume The left hand side of question (5. the net flow (in and out) is zero. Hence.2 illustrates this point.5. Find the height as a function of the other parameters.14) where Ub is the boundary velocity and Ubn is the normal component of the boundary velocity. MASS CONSERVATION Non Deformable Control Volume For this case the volume is constant therefore the mass is constant.152 5. =0 =0 d dt ρ dV = c.2. (5. Sc.2: Liquid fills a bucket as shown in Figure 5. This condition can be written mathematically as =0 d −→ dt or in a more explicit form as Vrn dA = 0 Sc.15) is the net growth (or decrease) of the Control volume is by net volume flow into it. c.v.v. Ubn dA (5. The liquid fills a bucket with cross section area of A and instantaneous height is h.10) can be examined further to develop a simpler equation by using the extend Leibniz integral rule for a constant density and result in thus. Sc.1 CHAPTER 5.v.3. Steady State Continuity Deformable Ubn dA = Sc.2. Assume that the density is constant and at the boundary interface Aj = 0. Example 5.

-5. the air effects are negligible. the ratio is determined by height of the pipe from the liquid surface in the bucket. the liquid in the bucket has a straight surface. The last assumption is result of the energy equation (with some influence of momentum equation). The control volume around the jet is deformable because the length of the jet shrinks with the time. Substituting the known values for Urn results in Urn Ub dA = c. Third. First. there are no evaporation or condensation processes.v. This assumption is a strong assumption for certain conditions but it will be not discussed here since it is advance topic. flow in = c. c. this effect can be neglected for this range which this problem.v. liquid boundary in bucket. Filling of the bucket and choices of the deformable control volumes for example 5. Calculate the bucket liquid interface velocity. (Uj + Ub ) dA .5. In this analysis. Urn dA where Ubn is the perpendicular component of velocity of the boundary. In reality.v.5.2. The relationship is function of the distance of the pipe from the boundary of the liquid.3. The first control is around the jet and second is around the liquid in the bucket. Solution This problem requires two deformable control volumes.v. CONTINUITY EQUATION 153 Up Ap Ub Aj h Uj A Fig. The mass conservation of the liquid in the bucket is boundary change Ubn dA c. several assumptions must be made. However. Second. no liquid leaves the jet and enters the air. Fourth.

a) To find the jet velocity. Urn is Urn = −Up 0 @ the valve every else .II.7 which is Ap Ub = =∞ 0 The physical meaning is that surface is filled instantly.v.g. Urn dA The entrance is fixed. The other limit is that and Ap /A −→ 0 then Ap Ub = A which is the result for the “intuitive” solution. When examining solution there are two limits. Uj . Calculate the velocity of the balloon boundaries assuming constant density. (5.7 Ap It is interesting that many individuals intuitively will suggest that the solution is Ub Ap /A. thus the relative velocity. It also interesting to point out that if the filling was from other surface (not the top surface). the velocity will be Ub = Up in the limiting case and not infinity.3: Balloon is attached to a rigid supply in which is supplied by a constant the mass rate.II.II.II.c) The solution of equation (5.a) into (5.II. c. MASS CONSERVATION The integration can be carried when the area of jet is assumed to be known as Ub A = Aj (Uj + Ub ) (5.b) and using the ratio of Aj = 0. End Solution Example 5.7 Ap Ub (5.II.c) is Ub = Ap A − 0.b) The above two equations (5.154 CHAPTER 5.II. Substituting the first equation.a) and (5. mi .II. e. the second control volume around the jet is used as the following flow in flow out boundary change Up Ap − Aj (Ub + Uj ) = −Aj Ub (5. The reason for this difference is that the liquid already fill the bucket and has not to move into bucket. The first limit is when Ap = A/0. Solution The applicable equation is Ubn dA = c.7 Ap results Up Ap − Ub A = −0.v. the side.b) are enough to solve for the two unknowns.

v. The right side of equation (5. This assumptions leads d ρ2 U2 dA − ρ1 U1 dA = dt A2 A1 dV ρ(x) A(x) dx V (x) (5. End Solution 5.v. This simplification provides very useful description for many fluid flow phenomena. CONTINUITY EQUATION 155 Assume equal distribution of the velocity in balloon surface and that the center of the balloon is moving.3.v. (Ubr r) · n dA ˆ ˆ The first integral is zero because it is like movement of solid body and also yield this value mathematically (excises for mathematical oriented student). The total velocity of boundary is Ut = mi (ˆ + r) x ˆ ρ 4 π r2 It can be noticed that the velocity at the opposite to the connection to the rigid pipe which is double of the center velocity.2. Ubr = mi ρ 4 π r2 The center velocity is (also) exactly Ubr .3.5.v. The main assumption made in this model is that the proprieties in the across section are only function of x coordinate . thus the velocity has the following form Ub = Ux x + Ubr r ˆ ˆ Where x is unit coordinate in x direction and Ux is the velocity of the center and where ˆ r is unit coordinate in radius from the center of the balloon and Ubr is the velocity in ˆ that direction.16) . Substituting into the general equation yields A ρ 4 π r2 Ubr = ρ Up Ap = mi Hence. The second integral (notice n = r) yields ˆ ˆ (Ubr r) · n dA = 4 π r2 Ubr ˆ ˆ Sc.3 One–Dimensional Control Volume Additional simplification of the continuity equation is of one dimensional flow.15) is the net change due to the boundary is center movement net boundary change (Ux x + Ubr r) · n dA = ˆ ˆ ˆ Sc. (Ux x) · n dA + ˆ ˆ Sc. Sc.

16) is reduced to U2 dA − A2 A1 U1 dA = d dt A(x)dx (5.19) For incompressible flow (constant density).18) For steady state and uniform density and velocity equation (5.17) For steady state but with variations of the velocity and variation of the density reduces equation (5. Height of the liquid for example 5.16) to become ρ2 U2 dA = A2 A1 ρ1 U1 dA (5. MASS CONSERVATION When the density can be considered constant equation (5. determine the height. continuity equation is at its minimum form of U1 A1 = A2 U2 (5. Assume that the height at time zero is h0 . Example 5. For the first case.20) The next example is of semi one–dimensional example to illustrate equation (5. The mass flow rate out is √ function of the height. -5.4. min h Fig.6.16). h as function of the time. First assume that qout = b h second Assume as qout = b h.4: Liquid flows into tank in a constant mass flow rate of a. What happen if the h0 = 0? . Is there a critical value and then if exist find the critical value of the system parameters.18) reduces further to ρ1 A1 U1 = ρ2 A2 U2 (5.156 CHAPTER 5.

b t − ρ1L e e h b1 = m1 e − ρ1L b t +c e b1 t ρL With the initial condition that at h(t = 0) = h0 the constant coefficient can be found as h0 b 1 h0 b1 = 1 − c =⇒ c = 1 − m1 mi which the solution is h b1 = m1 e − ρ1L b t + 1− h0 b1 mi e b1 t ρL 0 0 It can be observed that if 1 = hmb1 is the critical point of this solution. For second case. the height will increase. If the term hmb1 i i is larger than one then the solution reduced to a negative number.5. However. negative number for height is not possible and the height solution approach zero. Essentially.16) is d L dh ρ h dx = ρ L dt 0 dt Substituting into equation equation (5. It can be noticed that control volume satisfy the demand of one dimensional since the flow is only function of x coordinate. the governing equation (5. For case one the right hand side term in equation (5. the critical ratio state if the flow in is larger or lower than the flow out determine the condition of the height. CONTINUITY EQUATION Solution 157 The control volume for both cases is the same and it is around the liquid in the tank. The solution can rearranged to a new form (a discussion why this form is preferred will be provided in dimensional chapter). If the reverse case appeared.3.16) is dh ρL = dt solution is h= flow out b1 h flow in − mi private solution homogeneous solution b1 t mi + c1 ρ L b1 The solution has the homogeneous solution (solution without the mi ) and the solution of the mi part.16) is flow out flow in √ dh ρL = b h − mi dt with the general solution of √ hb ln −1 mi √ √ mi hb hb + − 1 = (t + c) ρL mi 2ρL .

25) papers can be read on-line at http://www. y) = ∂G ∂x (5. y) − − (x1 .24) differentiating (chain rule d uv = u dv + v du) by part of left hand side of the Leibniz integral rule (it can be shown which are identical) is 1 2 3 4 d [G(x2 .22) Initially.org/details/papersonmechanic01reynrich. Leibniz integral rule2 is an one dimensional and it is defined as d dy x2 (y) x2 (y) f (x. y) dy ∂x2 dy ∂y ∂x1 dy ∂y 1 These 2 This (5. MASS CONSERVATION The constant is obtained when the initial condition that at h(t = 0) = h0 and it left as exercise for the reader. Osborne. y) dα (5. y)] ∂G dx2 ∂G ∂G dx1 ∂G = + (x2 . material is not necessarily but is added her for completeness. The ideas are the similar but extended some what. . y) − f (x1 . 3 There was a suggestion to insert arbitrary constant which will be canceled and will a provide rigorous proof. specific enthalpy. c. if there will be a demand for such. y) ∂y dy dy (5. y) = f (α.archive. (1842-1912) which is actually a three dimensional generalization of Leibniz integral rule1 . End Solution 5. the Reynolds Transport Theorem will be reproofed and discussed.23) Notice that lower boundary of the integral is missing and is only the upper limit of the function is present3 . a proof will be provided and the physical meaning will be explained.4 Reynolds Transport Theorem It can be noticed that the same derivations carried for the density can be carried for other intensive properties such as specific entropy. Assume that there is a function that satisfy the following x G(x. y) − G(x1 . Suppose that g is intensive property (which can be a scalar or a vector) undergoes change with time. For its derivative of equation (5.23) is f (x. This is engineering book and thus. To make the previous derivation clearer. This author find material just given so no questions will be asked.158 CHAPTER 5.v f ρ Urn dA (5. Nevertheless. it will be provided.v. The change of accumulative property will be then D Dt f ρdV = sys d dt f ρdV + c. y) dx = x1 (y) x1 (y) dx2 dx1 ∂f dx + f (x2 .21) This theorem named after Reynolds. the exact mathematical proof is not the concern here.

25) is dx2 ∂G dx2 = f (x2 .30) Fout = f2 ρ Urn (5. is then F2 dx2 dt (5. y) dx ∂y (5.29) If two limiting points (for the one dimensional) are moving with a different coordinate system. the flow in (or out) will be the velocity of fluid minus the boundary at x1 . F .31) The change with time of the accumulative property. between the boundaries is d dt ρ(x) f A(x) dA c. F . F . The change with time is DF D = Dt Dt ρ f dV sys (5. The interesting information that commonly needed is the change of the accumulative property.32) . F . f is investigated or the accumulative property.25) are actually (the x2 is treated as a different variable) x2 (y) x1 (y) ∂ f (x.26) The first term (1) in equation (5. REYNOLDS TRANSPORT THEOREM 159 The terms 2 and 4 in equation (5. The intensive property. This limiting condition is the control volume for which some of the mass will leave or enter.v. The accumulative flow of the property in. Urn = U1 − Ub . Thus this explanation is a proof the Leibniz rule. is then F1 dx1 dt Fin = f1 ρ Urn The accumulative flow of the property out. with time. the mass will be different and it will not be a system. The same can be said for the other side. (5.4. y) ∂x2 dy dy (5.27) The same can be said for the third term (3).5.28) For one dimensional situation the change with time is DF D = Dt Dt ρ f A(x)dx sys (5. Since the change is very short (differential). Suppose that a fluid is flowing in a conduit. The above “proof” is mathematical in nature and physical explanation is also provided. F .

Reynolds Transport theorem is a generalization of the Leibniz rule and thus the same arguments are used. Reynolds Transport d f ρdV = f ρ dV + dt c.V.33) 5.b) The solution of equation (b) results in average velocity as Uave = (5. (5. After magical mixing.c) End Solution .V. is arbitrary and it can be replaced by any letter.160 CHAPTER 5. The only difference is that the velocity has three components and only the perpendicular component enters into the calculations. Thus. The above discussion is one of the physical meaning the Leibniz rule. For which R Umax 1 − 0 r R 2 π r dr = Uave π R2 (5. Write the equation which describes the velocity at the entrance.v sys D DT f ρ Urn dA Sc.a) is Umax π R2 = Uave π R2 6 Umax 6 (5.v. Since the time variable. What is the magical averaged velocity at the exit? Assume no–slip condition.V. t. MASS CONSERVATION When put together it brings back the Leibniz integral rule. the boundary condition is U (r = R) = 0 and U (r = 0) = Umax Therefore the velocity profile is r U (r) = Umax 1 − R Where R is radius and r is the working radius (for the integration).5 Examples For Mass Conservation Several examples are provided to illustrate the topic. the velocity became uniform. Additionally.a) The integration of the equation (5. Solution The velocity profile is linear with radius. It will be assumed that the velocity at the interface is zero.V. The magical averaged velocity is obtained using the equation (5. Example 5. later a discussion on relationship between velocity at interface to solid also referred as the (no) slip condition will be provided. This assumption is good for most cases with very few exceptions.13).5: Liquid enters a circular pipe with a linear velocity profile as a function of the radius with maximum velocity of Umax .

-5. right. For simplicity assume slowed fluid has a linear velocity profile.7.5. Compare the two different velocity profiles affecting on the mass transfer. calculate the relationship of the mass transfer across the control volume. and upper. The assumption is that fluid attaches itself to surface. The above integrals on the . The slowed liquid is slowing the layer above it. (to satisfy the boundary condition) it will be U0 y Ux (y) = δ The chosen control volume is rectangular of L × δ. Then assume parabolic velocity profile as Ux (y) = 2 U0 y 1 + δ 2 y δ 2 and calculate the mass transfer across the control volume. Boundary Layer control mass. EXAMPLES FOR MASS CONSERVATION (1) (2) 161 U0 ge Ed of B n ou yL dr er ay L Fig. No mass can cross the lower surface (solid boundary).13) results in x direction y direction out in δ δ U0 dy − 0 0 U0 y dy = δ L U xdx 0 It can be noticed that the convention used in this chapter of “in” as negative is not “followed. In this case.5.7. Example 5.” The integral simply multiply by negative one. Solution Assuming the velocity profile is linear thus. The boundary layer is growing with x because the boundary effect is penetrating further into fluid. the left. The situation is steady state and thus using equation (5.6: Experiments have shown that a layer of liquid that attached itself to the surface and it is referred to as boundary layer. A common boundary layer analysis uses the Reynolds transform theorem. Where δ is the height of the boundary layer at exit point of the flow as shown in Figure 5. The control volume has three surfaces that mass can cross.

7: Air flows into a jet engine at 5 kg/sec while fuel flow into the jet is at 0.8: The tank is filled by two valves which one filled tank in 3 hours and the second by 6 hours. The tank is 3/4 fulls.162 right hand side can be combined as δ CHAPTER 5. MASS CONSERVATION U0 1 − 0 y δ L dy = 0 U xdx the integration results in U0 δ = 2 or for parabolic profile δ δ L U xdx 0 U0 dy − 0 0 δ U0 y y + δ δ y y − δ δ L 2 L dy = 0 U xdx or 0 U0 1 − the integration results in 2 dy = U0 U0 δ = 2 U xdx 0 End Solution Example 5. the flow out is ( 5 + 0. The next example deal with such reversed mass flow rate. 7 hours.1 kg/sec.1 ) 5. Is there a combination of valves that make the tank at steady state? . calculate the time for tank reach empty or full state when all the valves are open.1 m2 with velocity of 500 m/sec. The burned gases leaves at the exhaust which has cross area 0. Example 5.1 kg/sec The density is ρ= m ˙ 5. and 8 hours.1 kg/sec = = 1. the mass (or the volume) is given by indirect quantity such as the effect of flow. The tank also has three emptying valves of 5 hours.01 m2 500 m/sec End Solution The mass (volume) flow rate is given by direct quantity like x kg/sec. What is the density of the gases at the exhaust? Solution The mass conservation equation (5.02kg/m3 AU 0. Thus. However sometime.13) is used.

Solution The applicable equation is increase pressure Vc. Thus. dρ dV dt ρ Ub dV ρUrn dA Every term in the above equation is analyzed but first the equation of state and volume to pressure relationship have to be provided. if all the valves are open the tank will be filled.9: Inflated cylinder is supplied in its center with constant mass flow. assume that the process is isothermal. The gas inside the cylinder obeys the ideal gas law. ρ= P RT and relationship between the volume and pressure is P = f π Rc 2 . For example valve of 3 hours can be converted to 1/3 tank per hour. EXAMPLES FOR MASS CONSERVATION Solution 163 Easier measurement of valve flow rate can be expressed as fraction of the tank per hour. The time to completely filled the tank is 1 70 4 = hour 159 1 131 − 2 280 The rest is under construction. Assume that the gas mass is supplied in uniformed way of mi [kg/m/sec].v boundary velocity + Sc.v. The pressure inside the cylinder is linearly proportional to the volume.v. For simplicity.5. in or out flow rate = Sc. mass flow rate in is min = 1/3 + 1/6 = 1/2tank/hour ˙ The mass flow rate out is mout = 1/5 + 1/7 + 1/8 = ˙ 131 280 Thus. Assume that the cylinder inflated uniformly and pressure inside the cylinder is uniform. Calculate the cylinder boundaries velocity.5. End Solution Example 5.

4 The proof of this idea is based on the chain differentiation similar to Leibniz rule. Assume that balloon volume is a linear function of the pressure inside the balloon such as P = fv V . Where fv is a coefficient describing the balloon physical characters.v. Combining the above two equations results in f π Rc 2 ρ= RT Where f is a coefficient with the right dimension. MASS CONSERVATION Where Rc is the instantaneous cylinder radius. It also can be noticed that boundary velocity is related to the radius in the following form Ub = dRc dt The first term requires to find the derivative of density with respect to time which is Ub dρ d = dt dt Thus the first term is dρ dV = dt 2 π Rc f π Rc RT 2 = 2 f π Rc dRc RT dt Vc. When the derivative of the second part is dUb /dRc = 0. Calculate the velocity of the balloon boundaries under the assumption of isothermal process. Assume that gas obeys the ideal gas law.v Vc. mi . A f π 3 Rc 2 RT Ub substituting in the governing equation obtained the form of f π 2 Rc 3 4 f π 2 Rc 3 Ub + Ub = mi RT 3RT The boundary velocity is then Ub = mi 3 mi R T G= 7 f π 2 Rc 3 7 f π 2 Rc 3 3RT End Solution Example 5.164 CHAPTER 5. .10: A balloon is attached to a rigid supply and is supplied by a constant mass rate.v 2 f π Rc Ub RT 2 π Rc dRc dV = 4 f π 2 Rc 3 Ub 3RT The integral can be carried when Ub is independent of the Rc 4 The second term is ρ f π Rc 2 ρ Ub dA = Ub 2 πRc = RT Sc.

v The right hand side of the above equation is ρUrn dA = mi Sc. The ideal gas law is ρ= P RT 165 The relationship between the pressure and volume is P = fv V = 4 fv π Rb 3 3 The combining of the ideal gas law with the relationship between the pressure and volume results 4 fv π Rb 3 ρ= 3RT The applicable equation is dρ dV + dt ρ (Uc x + Ub r) dA = ˆ ˆ Sc. The density change is Ub dρ 12 fv π Rb dRb = dt RT dt The first term is =f (r) Rb 0 2 12 fv π Rb 2 16 fv π 2 Rb 5 Ub 4 π r2 dr = Ub RT 3RT dV The second term is 8 fv π 2 R b 5 4 fv π R b 3 4 fv π R b 3 Ub dA = Ub 4 π Rb 2 = Ub 3RT 3RT 3RT A A Subsisting the two equations of the applicable equation results Ub = 1 mi R T 8 fv π 2 R b 5 Notice that first term is used to increase the pressure and second the change of the boundary.5.5.v. ρUrn dA Vc.10. .v. Sc. EXAMPLES FOR MASS CONSERVATION Solution The question is more complicated than Example 5.v.

34) V 5 The liquid surface is not straight for this kind of problem. The integral approached is used to calculate the averaged velocity of each to the components. The mass balance reads dρ dV + dt Ubn ρ dA + A A Urn ρ dA = 0 (5.8.11: Solve example 5.6 The Details Picture – Velocity Area Relationship The integral approach is intended to deal with the “big” picture. under certain conditions it is reasonable to assume straight surface which have been done for this problem. The control volume is bounded by the container wall including the exit of the flow. Indeed the method is used in this part of the book for this A purpose. 2010 The best solution of the following question will win 18 U.166 CHAPTER 5. Also assume that the relationship between the pressure and the volume is P = fv V 2 . -5. Example 5. To relate the velocity in the z direction with the flow rate out or the exit the velocity mass balance is constructed. What are the units of the coefficient fv in this problem? What are the units of the coefficient in the previous problem? 5. A similar control volume construction to find the velocity of the boundary velocity (height) can be carried out. There is no general way to provide these quantities. Control volume usage to calculate of this approach.10 under the assumption that the process is isentropic. dollars and your name will be associated with the solution in this book. .S. there is very little written about the usability of this approach to provide way to calculate the average quantities in the control system. Sometimes hℓ z y Ae it is desirable to find the averaged velocx Ue ity or velocity distribution inside a control volume. However. Consider a container filled with liquid on which one exit opened and the liquid flows out as shown in Figure 5.8. The upper boundary is surface parallel to upper surface but at Z distance from the bottom. Therefore an example will be provided to demonstrate the use Fig. local averaged velocity in three coordinates. However. The velocity has three components in each of the coordinates under the assumption that flow is uniform and the surface is straight5 . MASS CONSERVATION End Solution Open Question: Answer must be received by April 15.

37) results in Ae Ue ρ dA + A Ux ρ dA = 0 Ayz (5.37) Fig. The only difference is that the velocity has two different directions.35) In the container case for uniform velocity equation 5. Ax− X controlpage into the page into the The control volume is shown in Figure 5.9. One zone is right to the exit with flow to the left and one zone to left with averaged velocity to right. Control volume and system before and after the motion. Usage of control volume not included in the previous analysis provides the velocity at the upper boundary which is the same as the velocity at y direction.9.38) into Ae − Ax Ue + Ux Y (x) h = 0 A Ayz (5. It can be notice that the velocity. -5. The x component of velocity is obY control Volume Volume tained by using a different control volume. 6 The point where (z = h) the boundary term is substituted the flow in term. If the volumes on the left and the right are symmetrical the averaged velocity will be zero.5. The mass conservation for constant density of this control volume is − A Ue Ae Ubn ρ dA + A Urn ρ dA = 0 (5.38) Ax − Where Ax − is the area shown the Figure under this label. The calculations for the y directions are similar to the one done for x direction.36) It can be noticed that the boundary is not moving and the mass inside does not change this control volume.39) Where Y (x) is the length of the (blue) line of the boundary. . The area Ayz referred to area into the page in Figure 5. The boundary are the container far from Ay − y the flow exit with blue line projection into x page (area) shown in the Figure 5. Ux is generally increasing with x because Ax − increase with x. Because averaged velocities and constant density are used transformed equation (5. THE DETAILS PICTURE – VELOCITY AREA RELATIONSHIP For constant density (conservation of volume) equation6 and (h > z) reduces to Urn ρ dA = 0 A 167 (5.6.35 becomes Uz A = Ue Ae =⇒ Uz = − Ae Ue A (5.9. Substituting into (5. The velocity Uz is the averaged velocity downward.9 under the blow line.

Integrating the velocity for the entire container and dividing by the angle.a) Ue Ae This relationship also can be expressed in the term of α as Y (x) = 2 r sin α (5.XII.c) The area Ax − is expressed in term of α as Ax − = Thus the velocity.XII. The same way it can be represented for angle calculations. Circular cross section for finding Ux and various cross sections. Ux = which results in Ux = 1 2r π 0 Ae r α − 1 sin(2α) 2 Ue r dα A h tan α (π − 1) Ae r Ue 4 A h End Solution (5. Ux for a cross section of circular shape (cylinder). When the relationship between radius angle and x are x = r(1 − sin α) (5. Since this expression is simpler it will be adapted.XII.XII. The value dS is r cos α.13: .d) Ux = Averaged velocity is defined as Ux = U dS S (5.e) (5.168 CHAPTER 5.XII. The length of the line Y (x) is Y (x) = 2 r 1− 1− x r 2 Ax− Y(x) (r − x) x α y r (5. sin(2α) r2 2 (5. -5.b) Fig. α provides the averaged velocity.12: Calculate the velocity. Ux is Ae A α− 1 sin(2α) r2 Ue + Ux 2 r sin α h = 0 2 Ae r α − 1 sin(2α) 2 Ue A h sin α 1 S (5.XII.h) (5.10.XII.f) 1 α − . MASS CONSERVATION Example 5.XII. Solution The relationship for this geometry needed to be expressed.g) Where here S represent some length.XII.i) Example 5.

39) modified to be Ae − Ax Ue + Ux Y (x) h = 0 A The integral is the same as before but the upper limit is only to π/2 Ux = which results in Ux = (π − 2) Ae r Ue 8 A h End Solution Ayz (5. Uy for a cross section of circular shape (cylinder). Thus. What is the averaged velocity if only half section is used. The calculations are similar to those in the previous to example 5.40) 1 2r π/2 0 Ae r α − 1 sin(2α) 2 Ue r dα A h tan α (5.12. State your assumptions and how it similar to the previous example.b) 5. equation (5. Example 5. -5. y velocity for a circular shape The flow out in the x direction is zero because symmetrical reasons.5.11.14: . MORE EXAMPLES FOR MASS CONSERVATION Calculate the velocity.7 More Examples for Mass Conservation Typical question about the relative velocity that appeared in many fluid mechanics exams is the following. Thus.XIII.a) (5. That is the flow field is a mirror images. every point has different velocity with the same value in the opposite direction. The flow in half of the cylinder either the right or the left has non zero averaged velocity.XIII. Solution X(y) x 169 y r (r − x) Ay − Ue Ae Fig. The main concept that must be recognized is the half of the flow must have come from one side and the other come from the other side.7.

15: Liquid A enters a mixing device depicted in at 0. The relative jet discharge velocity is Urout = 50 − (10 + 5) = 35[m/sec] The volume flow rate is then Qout = Aout Urout = 35 × 0. The inboard engine uses a pump to suck in water at the front Ain = 0. what Fig. MASS CONSERVATION A boat travels at speed of 10m/sec upstream in a river that flows at a speed of 5m/s.1 + 0. In same time liquid B enter the mixing device with a different specific density at 0. Find the average leaving velocity and density of the mixture leaving through the 2O [cm] diameter pipe.05 [kg/s].11) is applicable mA + mB = Qmix ρmix =⇒= 0. what is the exit velocity? State your assumptions. Assume incompressible process. Solution In the first scenario. -5. However. the total volume flow in is equal to volume flow out as mA ˙ mA ˙ 0. since the flow is incompressible flow. The density of liquid A is 1000[kg/m3 ] and liquid B is 800[kg/m3 ].14 are the relative velocities entering and leaving the boat and the pumping rate? Us = 5[m/sec] Uo = 50[m/sec] Ub = 10[m/sec] Solution The boat is assumed (implicitly is stated) to be steady state and the density is constant.a) Thus in this case. Urin = Aout 0.XV.05 m2 .15[m] ˙ ˙ (5.2 m2 and eject it through the back of the boat with exist area of Aout = 0.1 [kg/s]. the flow is steady state and equation (5. Schematic of the boat for example 5.05 = 1.002 [m3 /s]. the calculation have to be made in the frame of reference moving with the boat.10 0. The water absolute velocity leaving the back is 50m/sec.75m/sec Ain 0.2 End Solution Example 5. If the mixing device volume is decreasing (as a piston pushing into the chamber) at rate of .12.75m3 /sec The flow rate at entrance is the same as the exit thus.05 = 0.05 ˙ ˙ ˙ QA + QB = Qmix =⇒= + = + ρA ρA 1000 800 .170 CHAPTER 5.05 Urout = 35 = 8. The results of the mixing is a homogeneous mixture.

5.07[kg/m3 ] mA ˙ mB ˙ + ρA ρB 171 (5.XV.c) Umix = In the case that a piston is pushing the exit density could be changed and fluctuated depending on the location of the piston.XV.000001 [m3 /s]. .05 − mexit mexit = 1.9974[kg/s] End Solution (5.7. and coordinates) since the mass in the control volume (the syringe volume is not constant).XV. −Qb ρmix in out Ubn A ρb = mA + mB − mmix ˙ ˙ ˙ That is the mixture device is with an uniform density −0. Solution The situation is unsteady state (in the instinctive c.01 [m/s]. if the assumption of well mixed is still holding the exit density should not affected. He gave a speech about how inhuman these engineering students are. There are several possible control volumes that can be used to solve the problem. So governing equation is (5. The term that should be added to the governing equation the change of the volume.e) Example 5.012 π (5.0003 [m]. MORE EXAMPLES FOR MASS CONSERVATION Thus the mixture density is ρmix = mA + mB ˙ ˙ = 923. If the piston is withdrawn at O. However.1 + 0.002[m/ sec] 923. This part of the solution is art.16: A syringe apparatus is being use to withdrawn blood7 .7[kg/m3 ] = 0. Yet.b) The averaged velocity is then Qmix Aout mA ˙ mB ˙ + 1.005[m] and the tip radius is 0.15).625 ρ ρB = A = [m/s] π 0. I hope that no one will have teachers like him. The chose of the control volume and coordinate system determine the amount of work.XV. What is the average velocity of blood into syringe (at the tip)? The syringe radios is 0. At that stage air leaks in around the piston at the rate 0.v.d) (5. The two “instinctive control volumes” are the blood with the air and the the whole volume between the tip and syringe plunger (piston). The first choice seem reasonable 7 The author still remember his elementary teacher that was so appalled by the discussion on blood piping which students in an engineering school were doing. it can be observed that bioengineering is “cool” today while in 40 years ago is a disgusting field.

in/out ˙ Uplunger As ρa − Ub As ρb = ρa Qin (5. Solution The situation is steady state and which density of the liquid is irrelevant (because it is the same at the inside and outside).XVI. At this stage.XVI.5[m/s].XVI.172 CHAPTER 5. attached to the blood edge.b) In the case. Later the two stream are mixed. The cross section inside and outside radii ratio is r1 /r2 = 0.a) .c. stationary. For this case. The second part of the control volume is the air.a) and (5. In stationary coordinates two boundaries are moving and thus moving b.c) results in Ub = Uplunger − Ub As = = Atip Uplunger − ρa Qin As ρ b As (5. Using equations (5. MASS CONSERVATION since it provides relationship of the total to specific material. There several coordinate systems that can used. In this device.17: The apparatus depicted in Figure ?? is referred in the literature sometime as the water– jet pump.XVI. U1 A1 + U2 A2 = U3 A3 (5.15) is applicable and can be written as Utip Atip & = Ub As & ρb ρb (5.2. In that case. the equation (5.0[m/s] and U2 = 0. attached to plunger. Calculate the mixing averaged velocity. Notice that change of the volume do not enter into the calculations because the density of the air is assumed to be constant.a) & & In the air side the same equation can used. and two equations. In this question the what is the mixed stream averaged velocity with U1 = 4. control volume is the volume syringe tip to the edge of the blood. velocity in/out ˙ (Uplunger − Ub ) As ρb = ρa Qin (5.XVI. the relative plunger velocity is zero while the blood edge boundary velocity is Uplunger − Ub . The outside pipe is lower pressure which suck the water (other liquid) into device. Ub and Utip . the choice is coordinates moving with the plunger.XVI. The air governing equation is blood b.c) In the case of coordinates are attached to the blood edge similar equation is obtained.d) Utip ρa Qin As ρb Atip End Solution Example 5.XVII. there are two unknowns. the water (or another liquid) is pumped throw the inner pipe at high velocity.

MORE EXAMPLES FOR MASS CONSERVATION The velocity is A3 = A1 + A2 and thus U3 = U1 A1 + U2 A2 A1 A1 == U1 + U2 1 − A3 A3 A3 End Solution 173 (5.5.b) .7.XVII.

MASS CONSERVATION .174 CHAPTER 5.

1) It can be noticed that bold notation for the velocity is U (and not U ) to represent that the velocity has a direction. For several bodies (n).2) The fluid can be broken into infinitesimal elements which turn the above equation (6. The Reynolds Transport Theorem (RTT) is applicable to any quantity and the discussion here will deal with forces that acting on the control volume.1 Momentum Governing Equation 6. Newton’s law becomes n n Fi = i=1 i=1 U d(mU )i dt (6.3) 175 . This chapter deals with momentum conservation which is a vector. the Reynolds Transport Theorem (RTT) was applied to mass conservation.1.2) into a continuous form of small bodies which results in n Fi = i=1 D Dt element mass U ρ dV sys (6. Mass is a scalar (quantity without magnitude).1 Introduction to Continuous In the previous chapter.CHAPTER 6 Momentum Conservation for Control Volume 6. Newton’s second law for single body is as the following F = U d(mU ) dt (6.

-6. only the pressure component is used which is reasonable for most situations. is made out of two components. n is an unit vector outward ˆ of element area and the negative sign is applied so that the resulting force acts on the body. The surface “force”.7) Fig.5) which acts through the mass center towards the center of earth. the surface forces are with the divided into two categories: one perpendisurface n ˆ perpendicular to cular to the surface and one with the surthe surface face direction (in the surface plain see Figure 6. 6.v. is in the surface direction. Where the surface “force”. or the forces. and τ are the shear stresses. it can be written as Fs = c. are the body forces. Again. The forces. have to be discussed. Thus. The Reynold’s Transport Theorem (RTT) has to be used on the right hand side. The gravity acts on all the system elements.). MOMENTUM CONSERVATION Note that the notation D/Dt is used and not d/dt to signify that it referred to a derivative of the system.v.1. The explaination for the direction relative to surface perpendicular and with the surface. The total gravity force is element mass Fb = sys g ρ dV (6.4) In this book (at least in this discussion). hence. one due to viscosity (solid body) and two consequence of the fluid pressure. In this chapter.2 External Forces First. Sn .176 CHAPTER 6.1. Sn . Here for simplicity.8) Where Sν is perpendicular stress due to viscosity. After infinitesimal time the gravity force acting on the system is the same for control volume. . and the surface forces as the following F total = F b + F s (6.1. ∼0 Pˆ S n = −P n + Sν (6. g ρ dV = sys cv g ρ dV (6. excluding the external forces. Sn dA + c. τ dA (6.6) The integral yields a force trough the center mass which has to be found separately. the main body force is the gravity. Thus. the terms on the left hand side.

the right hand side has to include the following acceleration r ˙ a acc = ω × (r × ω) + 2 U × ω + r × ω − a 0 (6. c.12) t dt ρ U x dV + c. τ x · dA = ρ U x · U rn dA (6. is ρ U dV = sys ρ U dV + c.v.v.v. the general form of the momentum equation without the external forces is Integral Momentum Equation g ρ dV − P dA + τ · dA c. Fext .9) The liquid velocity.v. supporting solid structures. according Reynolds Transport Theorem (RTT).v.v. g · ˆ ρ dV i c.v. t dt c. ducts.1.v.1.v. c. Equation (6. (6.3 Momentum Governing Equation D Dt t dt The right hand side. etc.10) ρ U Urn dV ρ U dV + c. where θx is the angle between n and ˆ or (ˆ · ˆ ˆ i n i). is measured in the frame of reference and U rn is the liquid relative velocity to boundary of the control volume measured in the same frame of reference. c. c.v.v. (6.10) is transformed to Integral Momentum Equation & External Forces F ext + g ρ dV − P · dA + τ · dA = c. These external forces are commonly associated with pipe. U .11) ρ U dV + c. c.13) . friction (non-fluid). P cos θx dA + c. ρ U U rn dA (6. for example in the x coordinate.v.4 Momentum Equation in Acceleration System For accelerate system.v. c.v. ρ U Urn dV The external forces.v. are the forces resulting from support of the control volume by non–fluid elements.11) is a vector equation which can be broken into its three components. t = dt c.6.v. With external forces equation (6. In Cartesian coordinate.v. 6. Thus. MOMENTUM GOVERNING EQUATION 177 6. the components are Fx + c.1.

18) is applicable to any velocity profile and any geometrical shape. Thus.v.15) is further reduced to Urn Urn F = out U U ˆ ρU (U · n) dA − in U U ˆ ρU (U · n) dA (6.v.1.5. P dA + c.15) 6. The unsteady term (where the time derivative) is zero. τ dA = c.v.17) 1 A [U (r)] dA A 2 (6. g ρ dV − c. 6. . a acc ρ dV (6.1 Momentum for For Constant Pressure and Frictionless Flow Another important sub category of simplification deals with flow under approximation of the frictionless flow and uniform pressure.v. ρ U Urn dA (6.1. In this case the resulting force due to the pressure is zero to all directions. This kind of situations arise when friction (forces) is small compared to kinetic momentum change.5 Momentum For Steady State and Uniform Flow The momentum equation can be simplified for the steady state condition as it was shown in example 6. it common to obtain a situation where one of the term will be an integral of the pressure over the body surface.6.178 CHAPTER 6. Additionally.v.14) Integral of Uniform Pressure on Body In this kind of calculations. in these situations. equation (6. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION Where r is the distance from the center of the frame of reference and the add force is F add = Vc.3. In this situation.18) Equation (6. Integral Steady State Momentum Equation F ext + c. This situation is a similar idea that was shown in Section 4. the mass flow rate in and out are equal. flow is exposed to the atmosphere and thus (almost) uniform pressure surrounding the control volume.16) In situations where the velocity is provided and known (remember that density is constant) the integral can be replaced by F = mU o − mU i ˙U ˙U The average velocity is related to the velocity profile by the following integral U = 2 (6.

18) U = results in U = (Umax ) Thus.I. Schematics of area impinged by a jet and angle effects. Neglect the friction.I.2).I. Fig. Schematics of area impinged by a jet for example 6.2. What is the angle for which maximum force will be created? .I.2: A jet is impinging on a stationary surface by changing only the jet direction (see Figure 6.1. Umax U= √ 6 End Solution 2 1 2 π R2 1 0 R 0 [U (r)] 2 π r dr 2 (6.2.a) into equation (6. Schematics of maximum angle for impinged by a jet. MOMENTUM GOVERNING EQUATION 179 Example 6. calculate the force and the angle which the support has to apply to keep the system in equilibrium. Example 6. -6.a) Substituting equation (6.6.1: Calculate the average velocity for the given parabolic velocity profile for a circular pipe.b) 2 2 1 − r2 ¯ 2 rd¯ = ¯ r 1 2 (Umax ) 6 (6. Uo θ Ui F Fig b.c) y x Uo Ui F Fig a. Solution The velocity profile is U r R = Umax 1 − r R 2 (6.

3 with a mass .a) can be explicitly written for the two coordinates.a) It can be noticed that even though the velocity change direction. to Urn Urn F = out U U ˆ ρU (U · n) dA − in U U ˆ ˙U ˙U ρU (U · n) dA = mUo − mUi (6.11) can be reduced. Fx occurs when cos θ = π. the mass flow rate remains constant. The equation for the x coordinate is Fx = m (cos θ Uo − Ui ) ˙ or since Ui = Uo Fx = m Ui (cos θ − 1) ˙ It can be observed that the maximum force.II.180 Solution CHAPTER 6.II. For small angle analysis is important in the calculations of flow around thin wings. Equation (6.3: Liquid flows through a symmetrical nozzle as shown in the Figure 6. because it is a steady state. It can be proven by setting dFx /dθ = 0 which yields θ = 0 a minimum and the previous solution. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION Equation (6. Hence Fx |max = −2 m Ui ˙ and the force in the y direction is Fy = m Ui sin θ ˙ the combined forces are Ftotal = Which results in Ftotal = m Ui sin (θ/2) ˙ with the force angle of tan φ = π − Fy π θ = − Fx 2 2 Fx 2 + Fy 2 = m Ui ˙ (cos θ − 1) + sin2 θ 2 For angle between 0 < θ < π the maximum occur at θ = π and the minimum at θ ∼ 0. End Solution Example 6.

ˆ g · k ρ dV + P cos θz dA + (6. forces on the nozzle Fnozzle solid surface P cos θz dA + c. Solution U2 =? P2 = 1[Bar] A2 = 10[cm2] 181 z P2 = 3[Bar] A1 = 50[cm2] U1 = 5[m/sec] Fig.v. ˆ g · k ρ dV + t dt P cos θz dA + c.3. First.3. =0 liquid surface Fz + c. The entrance area is 0.0001 Equation (6. =0 c. ρ U z · U rn dA .12) is applicable but should be transformed into the z direction which is Fz + c. Nozzle schematic for the discussion on the forces and for example 6. The exit velocity is uniform but unknown.01 [gk/sec]. c.v.v. c.v. The chosen control volume is shown in Figure 6.3.v.v. This situation is a steady state for constant density.III. The control volume does not cross any solid body (or surface) there is no external forces.0001[cm2 ]. -6.b) c.0015 [m3 ].v.1.III. Hence. the exit velocity is U2 = A1 0. MOMENTUM GOVERNING EQUATION flow rate of 0.6. What is the exit velocity? What is the force acting the nozzle? Assume that the density is constant ρ = 1000[kg/m3 ] and the volume in the nozzle is 0.v. The entrance pressure is 3[Bar] and the entrance velocity is 5 [m/sec]. τ z dA = (6. the velocity has to be found. The exit pressure is 1[Bar]. Then A1 U1 = A2 U2 and after rearrangement. τ z dA = c.a) ρ U z · U rn dA ρ U z dV + c.v.0005 U1 = × 5 = 25[m/sec] A2 0.v.0005[m2 ] and the exit area is 0.

A2 U2 (U2 ) dA − A1 U1 (U1 ) dA which results in ρ U z · U rn dA = ρ U2 2 A2 − U1 2 A1 c. fan etc.III. Here. Or there is a line (or surface) in which the fluid outside changes only the flow direction.c) The second term or the body force which acts through the center of the nozzle is Fb = − c.III.v. P cos θz dA = c. P dA = 1 P dA − 2 P dA = P A|1 − P A|2 The last term in equation (6. this analysis is used for academic purposes.v. Improvements can be made to this analysis. Many times it is used for propulsion purposes of airplanes. The propeller can be stationary like in cooling tours.d) 6.v.c) into Fz = −g ρVnozzle + P A|2 − P A|1 + ρ U2 2 A2 − U1 2 A1 Fz = 9.8 × 1000× End Solution (6. g · n ρ dV = −g ρVnozzle ˆ Notice that in the results the gravity is not bold since only the magnitude is used. ships and other devices (thrust) as shown in Figure 6.III. ˆ g · k ρ dV + c. Of course it is only approximation but is provided a crude tool. . Combining all transform equation (6. For a steady state the analysis is simpler and used here to provide an example of steady state.2 Momentum Equation Application Momentum Equation Applied to Propellers The propeller is a mechanical devise that is used to increase the fluid momentum. Either it is assumed that some of the fluid enters into the container and fluid outside is not affected by the propeller. The propeller analysis of unsteady is complicated due to the difficulty in understanding the velocity field. The part of the pressure which act on the nozzle in the z direction is − c. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION All the forces that act on the nozzle are combined as Fnozzle + c. ρ U z · U rn dA (6.182 CHAPTER 6. In the Figure 6.4 the fluid flows from the left to the right.4. The other common used of propeller is mostly to move fluids as a pump.v.v. This surface is called slip surface.III.v.c) is ρ U z · U rn dA = c.v.

Calculate the friction force on the . Note that in this analysis it was assumed that the flow is horizontal that z1 = z2 and/or the change is insignificant.4. in many case more efficient. The propellers are moved by a mechanical work which is converted to thrust. Essentially. Further increase of the exit area with the increased of the burned gases further increase the thrust. MOMENTUM EQUATION APPLICATION As first approximation.21) An academic example to demonstrate how a steady state calculations are done for a moving control volume. and is.2. the air is sucked into engine and with addition heating (burning fuel) the velocity is increased. Jet Propulsion Jet propulsion is a mechanism in which the air planes and other devices are propelled.4: A sled toy shown in Figure 6. Hence. as it will be shown in the Chapter on compressible flow it allows to achieve velocity above speed of sound. In Jet propulsion. Propeller schematic to explain the change of movolume between points 1 and mentum due to velocity. Furthermore. Thus. -6.20) This analysis provide way to calculate the work needed to move this propeller. The difference between the jets propulsion and propellers is based on the energy supplied. The one dimensional momentum equation is reduced F = ρ U2 2 − U1 2 (6. the thermal energy is converted to thrust. a major obstacle in the past.19) 183 1 U1 3 4 2 U2 Liquid Combining the control Fig. pressure drops from the calculation.6. The inlet area and exit area are different for most jets and if the mass of the fuel is neglected then F = ρ A2 U2 2 − A1 U1 2 (6. 3 with (note that there are no external forces) with points 4 and 2 results in ρ U2 2 − U1 2 = P4 − P3 (6. The analysis of such device in complicated and there is a whole class dedicated for such topic in many universities. a very limited discussion related to the steady state is offered.5 is pushed by liquid jet. Notice that Example 6. the pressure around control volume is the same. Here. this direct conversion can be.

The dyjet in a steady state for example 6. P dA + c. Assume that the jet is horizontal and the reflecting jet is vertical. namics friction is µd .a) The relative velocity into the control volume is U 1j = (Uj − U0 ) x ˆ The relative velocity out the control volume is U 2j = (Uj − U0 ) y ˆ The absolute exit velocity is U 2 = U0 x + (Uj − U0 ) y ˆ ˆ For small volume. The velocity of the jet is uniform. -6.5. U0 Uj Calculate the absolute velocity of the Ff jet exit.v.v. ρ U U rn dV (6.v. τ dA = c. The pressure is uniform around the control volume and thus the integral is P dA = 0 c.v. 2 1 Solution The chosen control volume is attached to the toy and thus steady state is obtained. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION toy when the toy is at steady state with velocity. Toy Sled pushed by the liquid relative to the vertical force. U 0 . g ρ dV − c. The same can be said for air friction as τ dA ∼ 0 c. .184 CHAPTER 6. Assume that the friction between the toy and surface (ground) is Fig. The applicable mass conservation equation for steady state is A1 U1 = A2 U2 The momentum equation in the x direction is Ff + c. the gravity can be neglected also because this term is small compared to other terms.IV. Neglect y the friction between the liquid (jet) and control x volume the toy and between the air and toy.v. The frame of reference is moving with the toy velocity. thus g ρ dV ∼ 0 c.v.4. U0 .v.

1 Momentum for Unsteady State and Uniform Flow The main problem in solving the unsteady state situation is that the control volume is accelerating. -6.10). Additionally larger toy mass decrease the velocity.2.IV.6.b) into equation (6. Alternative method of solution is done by attaching the frame of reference to the accelerating body.a) yields Ff = A ρ U1j 2 The friction can be obtained from the momentum equation in the y direction mtoy g + A ρ U1j 2 = Fearth According to the statement of question the friction force is Ff = µd mtoy g + A ρ U1j 2 The momentum in the x direction becomes µd mtoy g + A ρ U1j 2 = A ρ U1j 2 = A ρ (Uj − U0 ) The toy velocity is then U0 = Uj − µd mtoy g A ρ (1 − µd ) 2 (6. 185 (6.b) The substituting (6. One such example of such idea is associated with the Rocket Mechanics which is present here.v.6.IV.IV. End Solution 6.2. This method is cumbersome in many cases. The momentum flux is ρ Ux Ui rn dA = A ρ U1j 2 Sc. FR mf mR UR Ug Fig.c) Increase of the friction reduce the velocity. MOMENTUM EQUATION APPLICATION The control volume was chosen so that the pressure calculation is minimized.IV. A possible way to solve the problem is by expressing the terms in an equation (6. A rocket with a moving control volume. .

25) Combining all the above term results in −FR − (mR + mf ) g + dU (mR + mf ) = m (Ug − UR ) ˙ dt (6. the first term FR . c. (6.v. the derivative with respect to time. The gravity term is an instantaneous mass times the gravity times the constant and the same can be said for the acceleration term. The momentum equation is FR 0 τ dA + c.24) Clearly.186 CHAPTER 6.26) . g ρ dV + c. The pressure term vanish because the pressure essentially is the same and the difference can be neglected. The rocket is accelerating and thus the frame for reference is moving the with the rocket. Yet. However.v. The oxidant and fuel flow outside.2 Momentum Application to Unsteady State Rocket Mechanics A rocket is a devise similar to jet propulsion.2. This change is minimal and for this analysis.23) The first term on the right hand side is the change of the momentum in the rocket volume. vanishes. The resistance of the medium is Denote as FR .v. c. d [(mR + mf ) U ] dt (6. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION 6. inside the rocket the change in the velocity is due to change in the reduction of the volume of the oxidant and fuel. In contrast to other mechanisms such as jet propulsion which obtain the oxygen from the medium which they travel the rockets carry the oxygen with it. The velocity of the rocket in the rocket frame of reference U is zero. P dA − d dt ρ a0 dV = ρUy dV + Vc.v. However. dU /dt = 0 is not zero. ρUy Urn dA (6. This mechanism is useful for specific locations because it is independent of the medium though which it travels. The difference is the fact that the oxidant is on board with the fuel. The last term is ρUy Urn dA = m (Ug − UR ) ˙ c. the acceleration is the derivative of the velocity and thus ρ a0 dV = dU (mR + mf ) dt (6.22) There are no external forces in this control volume thus. it can be neglected. This change is due to the change in the volume of the oxidant and the fuel.v. d dt ρUy dV = Vc. The two components are burned and the gases are ejected through a nozzle.v.v. the change of the rocket mass can be considered minimal or even neglected.

As first approx˙ imation. This problem demonstrates the used of control volume to find method of approximation for not given velocity profiles1 Example 6. However.28).29) ˙ the results of the integration is (notice M = M0 − t M) U = Ue ln M0 ˙ M0 − t M −gt (6. MOMENTUM EQUATION APPLICATION 187 Denoting MT = mR + mf and thus dM/dt = m and Ue = Ug − UR .27) Separating the variables equation (6. gas flow out is constant as well. it can be noticed that the friction resistance FR . material that surface made and the medium it flow in altitude.2. For simplicity here the part close to Earth (to the atmosphere) is assumed to be small compared to the distance in space. This author was called for consultation and to solve a related problem. Thus it is assume that FR = 0. For which he noticed this “constant velocity.30) The following is an elaborated example which deals with an unsteady two dimensional problem. Integrating equation (6. in the past it was not noticed that a slight change in configuration leads to a constant x velocity. for constant fuel consumption (and almost oxidant). Thus.27) yields dU = ˙ −MT Ue FR − − g dt MT MT (6. the speed (the Reynolds number). This problem was aroused in manufacturing industry.6.5: 1 A variation of this problem has appeared in many books in the literature.” .28) with limits of U (t = 0) = 0 provides U 0 ˙ dU = −MT Ue 0 t dt − MT t g dt 0 (6.28) Before integrating equation (6. for constant constant gas consumption equation (6. is a function of the several parameters such the duration.26) transformed to −FR − MT g + dU ˙ MT = MT Ue dt (6.

12) for two dimensions is used. U0 = B h (6.7.188 CHAPTER 6.7. Furthermore.c) + U0 A0 = 0 dt It can be noticed that the area of the tank is almost constant (A = constant) thus A dh dh U0 A0 + U0 A0 = 0 =⇒ =− dt dt A (6. Schematic of a tank seating on wheel for unsteady state discussion Assume that the exit velocity is a This problem is similar to the rocket mechanics with a twist.v.d) into equation (6. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION UT y x h A tank with wheels is filled with liquid is depicted in Figure 6.b) Where m0 is mass flow rate out. At initial time the valve on the tank is opened and the liquid flows out with an uniform velocity profile.e) . = −ρ U0 A0 = −m0 dt (6. the fluid has two velocity components verse one component in the rocket mechanics. the source of the propulsion is the potential energy. Calculate the tank velocity for two cases.V.b) can be further reduced due to constant density to d (A h) (6.c) results in dh B h A0 + =0 dt A (6. The tank upper part is opened to the atmosphere. linear function of the height. mt .V.V. Substituting equation (6.V.a) Equation (6. -6. One the wheels have a constant resistance with the ground and two the resistance linear function of the weight. Equation (6.d) that represent the resistance in the system and substitute the energy equation.V.a) can be transferred to dmc. This situation is unsteady state thus equation (6.V. The control volume is shown in Figure 6.7.d) Where B is the coefficient that has the right units to mach equation (6. The frame of reference is moving with the tank.V. Solution Uo FR Fig.V. The mass conservation equation is d dt ρ dV + Vc.V.V.v. Sc. The tank mass with the wheels (the solid parts) is known.v.31) The relationship between the height and the flow now can be used. ρdA = 0 (6.

h.e) is a first order differential equation which can be solved with the initial condition h(t = 0) = h0 .V.V. Using this function.j) It can be noticed that the velocity in the y is a function of time as oppose to the x direction.1 ) is h(t) = h0 e − t A0 B A (6.g) results ¨ t A0¨ B h0 x A0   B − ¨   ¨ A = x A0 B (6.V. . R Ubn dA = Urn dA =⇒ Ubn = Urn . The mass con. The tank depth. The solution (see for details in the Appendix A.h) e Ux (x) = ¨ A Ah ¡ The average x component of the velocity is a linear function of x.k) 2 The boundaries are the upper (free surface) and tank side with a y distance from the free surface. Substituting (6.Fig.g) Where here w is the depth or width of the tank. The applicable momentum equation (in the tank frame of reference) is (6. h x o R w &x dh = −& h Ux w dt (6.V.V. y The boundary of this control volume are x the tank boundary on the left with the U straight surface as depicted in Figure 6.5.f) UT To find the average velocity in the L x direction a new control volume is used. In fact. it can be shown that average velocity is a function of cross section (what direction?).8. the average velocity in the y direction is Uy = dh h0 A0 B − =− e dt A t A0 B A (6.2. F The last boundary is variable surface in a distance x from the tank left part.2. Using a similar control volume2 . the average velocity in the tank is Ux = 1 L L 0 L A0 B x A0 B = A 2A (6.V.V. MOMENTUM EQUATION APPLICATION 189 Equation (6.i) It can be noticed that Ux is not function of height.8.11) which is reduced to acceleration F −F R − (mt + mf ) g − a (mt + mf ) = R d [(mt + mf ) U r ] + U0 mo dt (6.V.6. A new control volume to find the servation for this control volume is velocity in discharge tank for example 6. it also can be noticed that Ux (x) is a not function of the time. Perhaps surprising. is not relevant. -6.f) into (6.V.

The mass in the control volume include the mass of the liquid with mass of the solid part (including the wheels).m) There is no mass flow in the y direction and Uy is component of the velocity in the y direction. This effect is known as the add mass/momentum and will be discussed in the Dimensional Analysis and Ideal Flow Chapters. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION Where U r is the relative fluid velocity to the tank (if there was no tank movement). The acceleration of the tank is a = −ˆ 0 or ˆ · a = −a.v.32) In the x coordinate the momentum equation is −Fx + (mt + mf ) a = d [(mt + mf ) Ux ] + U0 mf ˙ dt (6. The momentum flow rate out of the tank is ρ Ux Urn dA = ρ Uo 2 Ao = mo Uo Sc. It .l) Where Fx is the x component of the reaction which is opposite to the movement direction. mc.190 CHAPTER 6. The pressure around the control volume is uniform thus P cos θx dA ∼ 0 Sc. This momentum is function of the tank volume times the air density times tank velocity (h0 × A × ρa × U ).v. a Vc. (6. Here this effect is neglected.V. The momentum equation in the y coordinate it is Fy − (mt + mf ) g = d (mt + mf ) Uy dt (6.V.v. This limitation can be partially overcome by assuming some kind of average. mf and mt are the mass of the fluid and the mass of tank respectively. hence τ dA ∼ 0 Sc. And the additional force for accelerated system ia i is −ˆ · i a ρdV = mc.v.v. The tank movement cause movement of the air which cause momentum change.v. The main problem of integral analysis approach is that it does not provide a way to analysis the time derivative since the velocity profile is not given inside the control volume. = mf + mT because the density of the air is very small the change of the air mass is very small as well (ρa << ρ). and the resistance due to air is negligible.

The velocity in the y direction does not contribute to the momentum in the x direction.V.V.V. From equation (6.V.n) Noticing that the derivative with time of control volume mass is the flow out in equation (6.2. Ux + dt dt dt (6.v.r) mf = ρ A h0 e − t A0 B A (6. Ux = mc. dt dt L A0 B Ux = −m0 2A (6.v.v.p) into a= Fx − m0 mf + mt L A0 B + 2 A U0 (mf + mt ) 2 A (mf + mt ) (6. d Ux mc.n) becomes mass rate out = − m0 ˙ d mc.V. if the difference between the actual and averaged momentum is neglected then d dt ρ Ux dV ∼ Vf ∼0 d d mc.6.v. MOMENTUM EQUATION APPLICATION 191 can be noticed that the velocity in the tank has two components. if it is the opposite the toy start to move.V.o) Combining all the terms results in −Fx + a (mf + mt ) = −m0 L A0 B − U0 m0 2A (6.q) A0 If the Fx ≥ m0 L 2 A B + U0 the toy will not move. The average velocity in the tank (because constant density and more about it later section) is Ux = 1 Vt Ux dV Vf Because the integral is replaced by the average it is transferred to ρ Ux dV ∼ mc. d Ux Ux + mc.V. Ux Vf Thus. However.d) the mass flow out is U0 h t A0 B − A A0 ρ m0 (t) = B h0 e The mass in the control volume is V (6.p) Rearranging and noticing that a = dUT /dt transformed equation (6.V.s) .v.V.v. The first component is downward (y) direction and the second in the exit direction (x).

v. For example.v U = ρ V c.s) into equation (6. C ρV c. the coefficient is not equal to one. The momentum for average velocity is Ma = mc. There are situations where actual velocity profile is not known but is function can be approximated.v U dV = c.33) The y component of the average velocity is function of the time.35) These two have to equal thus.V. the velocity profile can be estimated using the ideal fluid theory but the actual values are not known. For the second case where Rx is a function of the Ry as Rx = µ Ry (6. ρ Ux dV (6.36) If the density is constant then the coefficient is one (C ≡ 1).V. the flow profile in example 6.v U dV (6. ρ Ux dV (6.1 relationship between momentum of maximum velocity to average velocity was presented. Rearranging the momentum equation in the y direction transformed   m f  t A0 B    −  A g + 2 Fy = mt + ρ A h0 e      ρ h0 A0 2 B2 A 2 e − t A0 B A (6.r) and (6.5 can be estimated even by hand sketching.V.v. The change in the accumulative momentum is d dmf dUy (6. if the density is not constant.34) The actual momentum for control volume is Mc = c.u) The actual results of the integrations are not provided since the main purpose of this exercise to to learn how to use the integral analysis.t) (mf ) Uy = Uy + mf dt dt dt The reason that mf is used because the solid parts do not have velocity in the y direction. However. This correction factor can be calculated by finding the relation between the two cases. For example. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION The initial condition is that UT (t = 0) = 0.192 CHAPTER 6. End Solution Averaged Velocity! Estimates In example 6. Here.V. .q) transforms it to a differential equation which is integrated if Rx is constant. relationship between momentum for the average velocity to the actual velocity is presented. For these cases a correction factor can be used.V. Substituting equations (6.

38) Now the left hand side has to be transformed into the control volume as M= d dt r ρ (r × U ) dV + Vc. The height of the impeller is h. U2 has two components. Notice that tangential liquid velocity. Um2 Ulr2 U2 Un2 Ut2 (6. Ut2 and radial component.41) .3. and h. The pressure on the outer side is uniform thus does not create a moment. The impeller of the centrifugal pump and the velocities diagram at the exit. one the tangential velocity. Un2 .9 commonly used in industry.9.v. applying equation (6. The impeller increases the velocity of the fluid by increasing the radius of the particles. Ut2 is not equal to the impeller outer edge velocity Um2 . -6.v r ρ (r × U ) U rn dA (6. The exit liquid velocity. Here it is assumed that fluid is incompressible (ρ = constant). To demonstrate this idea. The relative exit velocity is Ulr2 and the velocity of the impeller edge is Um2 . It is assumed that required torque is function U2 .37) The angular momentum then will be obtained by calculating the change of every element in the system as M = r ×F = D Dt ρ r × U dV Vsys (6.Fig. ditionally increase of velocity occur.39) to uniform and steady state flow with neglected pressure gradient is reduced to M = m (r2 × U2 + r2 × U1 ) ˙ Introduction to Turbo Machinery The analysis of many turbomachinary such as centrifugal pump is fundamentally based on the angular momentum. The force F = D Dt U ρU dV Vsys (6. The inside particle is obtained larger velocity and due to centrifugal forces is moving to outer radius for which ad. r. Sc. The flow is assumed to enter the impeller radially with average velocity U1 .39) The angular momentum equation. A pump impeller is shown in Figure 6.6.40) M = m r2 Ut2 ˙ (6. the following discussion is provided. CONSERVATION MOMENT OF MOMENTUM 193 6.3 Conservation Moment Of Momentum The angular momentum can be derived in the same manner as the momentum equation for control volume.

The following is not the solution but rather the approach how to treat this problem. 3 This problem appeared in the previous version (0.43) The difference between Um2 to Ut2 is related to the efficiency of the pump which will be discussed in the chapter on the turbomachinary. What is the instantaneous vehℓ locity of the rocket at time zero? Develop Uexit the expression for the pressure (assuming no friction with the walls). Liquid fills the lower part of the rocket tank.42) (6. The angular velocity is 1200 r. hypotherical volume height Solution Under construction for time being only hints3 In the solution of this problem several assumptions must be made so that the integral system can be employed.p. ˙ W = m Um2 Ut2 ˙ (6. h is 2[cm] and the exit diameter is 0. Several people ask to provide a solution or some hints for the solution. Assume that angle velocity is leaving the impeller is 125◦ .40[m]. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION Multiplying equation (6. -6.4 More Examples on Momentum Conservation Example 6. Example 6.7 What are the parameters that effect the problem. Develop exFig.3) without a solution. Assume that ter rocket for the discussion on the the gas is obeying the perfect gas model. forces for example 6.6: A centrifugal pump is pumping 600 2[m3 /hour]. 6.2. Assume that this idea has a good enUrocket gineering logic. hg Gas Select the control volume in such a way that provides the ability to find the rocket Liquid acceleration. Nozzle schematics wapression for rocket velocity.10.10.7: A design of a rocket is based on the idea that density increase of the leaving jet increases the acceleration of the rocket see Figure 6.41) results in Um2 M ω = m r2 ω Ut2 ˙ The shaft work is given by the left side and hence. The upper part of the rocket tank is filled with compressed gas.m. Estimate what is the minimum energy required by the pump.194 CHAPTER 6. . The thickness of the impeller.

The gas pressure at the initial point is P0 = ρ0 R T (6. Using the above definition. ˆ No resistance to the rocket (can be added). ˆ The gas mass is negligible in comparison to the liquid mass and/or the rocket. ˆ The mixing between the liquid and gas is negligible.4. Furthermore.VII. Additionally. it can be observed that the gas pressure is a direct function of the mass flow out. ˆ The cross section of the liquid is constant.c) The gas geometry is replaced by a virtual constant cross section which cross section of the liquid (probably the same as the base of the gas phase).VII. ˆ The gas obeys the ideal gas law. Once the gas pressure reduced to be equal or below the outside pressure the rocket have no power for propulsion. equation (6.b) becomes P0 = The relationship between the gas volume Vg = h g A (6. ˆ No gas leaves the rocket.VII.VII.e) =A = −A dt dt dt The last identify in the above equation is based on the idea what ever height concede by the liquid is taken by the gas. In this problem the energy source is the pressure of the gas which propels the rocket. The minus sign is to account for change of “direction” .d) mg R T V0g (6.6.VII. The mass conservation is similar to the rocket hence it is dm = −Ue Ae dt (6.b) Per the assumption the gas mass remain constant and is denoted as mg . MORE EXAMPLES ON MOMENTUM CONSERVATION 195 ˆ The surface remained straight at the times and no liquid residue remains behind.a) The mass conservation on the gas zone is a byproduct of the mass conservation of the liquid.VII. ˆ The process is isothermal (can be isentropic process). The change of the gas volume is dhg dh dVg (6. the initial take off is requires a larger pressure.

VII.VII. Example 6. . At a specific moment the valve is opened and the rocket is allowed to fly. Develop an expression for the rocket velocity. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION of the liquid height. What are the parameters that effect the rocket velocity.VII.j) From equation (6.g) (6.VII.a) can be written as t mg R T hg0 A mg R T hg A 1 ∆h 1− hg0 (6.VII.VII.i) m (t) = m 0 − 0 Ue Ae dt (6.VII.l) −g (mR + m ) − a (mR + m ) = d (mR + m ) U +bc + (UR + U ) m dt End Solution (6.VII.k) According to the assumption the flow out is linear function of the pressure inside thus.196 CHAPTER 6.f) It must be point out that integral is not function of time since the height as function of time is known at this stage. Ue = f (P ) + g h rho Where ζ here is a constant which the right units.a) it also can be written that dh Ue Ae = dt ρe A (6. What is the minimum pressure which make the rocket fly. The liquid momentum balance is =0 f (P ) = ζ P (6. The initial pressure now can be expressed as P0 = The pressure at any time is P = Thus the pressure ratio is hg0 hg0 P = = = hg0 P0 hg hg0 − ∆h Equation (6.VII.8: A rocket is filled with only compressed gas.m) Where bc is the change of the liquid mass due the boundary movement. The total change of the gas volume can be obtained by integration as Vg = A (hg0 − ∆h ) (6.h) (6.VII.

4.11: .6.5 it was mentioned that there are only two velocity components. MORE EXAMPLES ON MOMENTUM CONSERVATION 197 Example 6. Situations Explanations Uout F U Uin Flow in and out of Angle β θ Flow in and out at angle from a tank Example 6.1 Qualitative Questions Example 6. What was the assumption that the third velocity component was neglected.9: In Example 6.10: For each following figures discuss and state force direction and the momentum that act on the control volume due to . 6.4.

The exit is located on the left hand side at the front. However. First. Calculated the minimum height of the liquid in the tank in order to start to have the block moving? Solution The solution of this kind problem first requires to know at what accuracy this solution is needed.a) Fig.12.XII. -6. Assume that resistence between the air and the water jet is negligible. if the gravity was in the opposite direction. -6. that is the same height will be required on the moon as the earth.XII.12: A large tank has opening with area. . Jet impinging jet surface perpendi- The miminum force the push the plock is cular and with the surface.11. the velocity to move the block can be obtained from the analysis of the block free body diagram (the impeging jet diagram). τw mg The jet stream has only one componet in the horizontal component. That is the gravity has no effect on the velocity (height) required to move the block. ρ A Uexit 2 = m g µ =⇒ Uexit = And the velocity as a function of the height is U = h= mµ ρ2 A √ mgµ ρA ρ g h and thus (6. Example 6.c) It is interesting to point out that the gravity is relavent. So. What are the direction of the forces that keep the control volume in the same location? Hints.XII. the gravity has effect and the effect is the direction. Look at the direcFig. consider the unsteady effects. The friction factor between the block and surface is 0. the effect minor loss or the loss in the tank opening have taken into account. The control volume is attached to the block. Flow out of un symmetritions which the unsteady state momentum cal tank for example 6. A.198 CHAPTER 6.b) (6. ρU 2 out F = ρ A Uexit 2 (6. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION A similar tank as shown in Figure 6. For great accuracy.11 in the tank change its value. no matter what the height will be the block will not move (neglecting other minor effects). In front and against the opening there a block with mass of 50[kg].5. First assuming that a minimum accuracy therefore the infomration was given on the tank that it large. It is assumed that the two ρ Uexit2 streams in the vertical cancle each other.11 is built with a exit located in uneven distance from the the right and the left and is filled with liquid. Hence.

In fact because the gravity the jet impeging in downwards slend direction. End Solution . MORE EXAMPLES ON MOMENTUM CONSERVATION 199 For very tall blocks. The pressure is canceled because the flow is exposed to air.d) Where Vliquid is the liquid volume in the control volume (attached to the block). In cases were ρ Vliquid g > 2 ρ Uout the required height is larger. the forces that acts on the block in the vertical direction is can be obtained from the analysis of the control volume shown in Figure 6. all liquid flows downwords. The jet impenged on the surface results in out flow stream going to all the directions in the block surface.XII. Yet.4. the gravity acts on all these “streams” and eventually the liquid flows downwards.12. In the oposite cases the height is smaller.6. The balance on the stream downwords (for steady state) is 2 ρ Uout ∼ ρ Vliquid g + m g = (6. At the exreme case.

MOMENTUM CONSERVATION .200 CHAPTER 6.

Clearly this topic is very important and will be extensively discussed here. as all phases and materials. The fluid. obeys this law which creates strange and wonderful phenomena such as a shock and choked flow.1 The First Law of Thermodynamics This chapter focuses on the energy conservation which is the first law of thermodynamics1 . the above view is wrong when the heat convection. is included on the right hand side. Moreover. which were assumed in the previous chapters. the relationship between height and flow rate was assumed previously.2) (7. which is external force. This simplistic representation is correct only under extreme conditions. 201 .2) is similar to equation (6. Additionally a discussion on various energy approximation is presented. For example. during time of the constructing this book only a simple skeleton by Potto standards will be build.CHAPTER 7 Energy Conservation 7. It was shown in Chapter 2 that the energy rate equation (2. For example. However. The right hand side is very complicated and only some of the effects will be discussed (It is only an introductory material). 1 Thermodynamics is the favorite topic of this author since it was his major in high school. here it will be derived.3) in which the right hand side has to be interpreted and the left hand side interpolated using the Reynold’s Transport Theorem (RTT)2 . this law allows to solve problems. 2 Some view the right hand side as external effects while the left side of the equation represents the internal effects.1) Equation (7.10) for a system is D m U2 D EU D (m g z) ˙ ˙ Q−W = + + Dt Dt Dt This equation can be rearranged to be D ˙ ˙ Q−W = Dt EU + m U2 + mgz 2 (7.

There are three modes of heat transfer. The main heat transfer mode on the left hand side is conduction.7) are other methods such as magnetic fields (like microwave) which are not part of this book. . The issues of convection are mostly covered by the terms on the left hand side. Hence. Conduction for most simple cases is governed by Fourier’s Law which is dq = kT ˙ dT dA dn (7.1. conduction.Fig. ENERGY CONSERVATION The energy transfer is carried (mostly3 ) by heat transfer to the system or the control volume. the surface forces are divided into two categories: one per.v. convection4 and radiation. dealing with convection.3) Where dq is heat transfer to an infinitesimal small area per time and kT is the heat ˙ conduction coefficient. The heat derivative is normalized into area direction. surface direction. Issues related to radiation are very complicated and considered advance material and hence will be left out.6) S (Sn + τ ) U dA − Wshaf t (7. 3 There 4 When (7. the radiation is minimal. In most problems.5) dw d S S = − (Sn + τ ) · dA = − (Sn + τ ) · U dA dt dt The total work for the system including the shaft work is ˙ W =− Ac. The total heat transfer to the control volume is ˙ Q= Acv k dT dA dn System at t n (7. There are two kinds of works that the system does on the surroundings. The work done by system on the surroundings (see Figure 7. Sn and τ . As in the previous chapter. The work on the control volume is pendicular to the surface and one with the done by two different mechanisms. actual mass transfer must occur and thus no convection is possible to a system by the definition of system. -7.202 CHAPTER 7.1) is F dF dV S A S dw = −S dA ·d = − (Sn + τ ) · d dA The change of the work for an infinitesimal time (excluding the shaft work) is U (7. the discussion here will be restricted to convection and conduction.4) τ S The work done on the system is dℓ more complicated to express than the heat transfer. The first kind work is by the friction or the shear System at t + dt stress and the second by normal force.

8) and thus yields Energy Equation kT Acv dT dA+ dn ˙ S (Sn + τ ) dA + Wshaf t = d dt + Acv Acv (7. The system can contain solid parts as well several different kinds of fluids.11) Equation (7.11) can be further manipulated to become work due to the flow work due to boundaries movement P n · U dA = ˆ S S P ρ Urn dA + ρ P Ubn dA S (7.1.2) for system is kT Asys 203 dT dA+ dn S (Sn + τ ) dV D ˙ +Wshaf t = Dt Asys ρ Vsys EU + m U2 + g z dV 2 (7. The work rate (excluding the shaft work) is flow work ˙ = W ∼ S P n · U dA − ˆ S τ · U n dA ˆ (7. In the last term in equation (7. THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS The energy equation (7.10) The first term on the right hand side is referred to in the literature as the flow work and is Urn P n · U dA = ˆ S S P (U − Ub ) n dA + ˆ S P Ubn dA (7. Note that U is the velocity in the frame of reference while Urn is the velocity relative to the boundary.8) Equation (7.8) for more details).7.8) does not apply any restrictions on the system.9) ρ Vcv Eu + m Eu + m U2 +gz 2 U2 + g z dV 2 ρ Urn dA From now on the notation of the control volume and system will be dropped since all equations deals with the control volume.9) the velocity appears twice.12) . As it was discussed in the previous chapter the normal stress component is replaced by the pressure (see equation (6. Now Reynolds Transport Theorem can be used to transformed the left hand side of equation (7.

14) The new term P/ρ combined with the internal energy.15) Equation (7. Also note that the shear work inside the the control volume considered as shaft work. With these definitions equation (7.2. The enhℓ Ae ergy equation with mass conservation will Ue be utilized for this analysis. Flow Out From A Container In the previous chapters of this book.13) Substituting all these terms into the governing equation yields d U2 ˙ ˙ ˙ + g z dV + Q − Wshear − Wshaf t = Eu + dt V 2 U2 P + g z Urn ρ dA + P Urn dA Eu + + ρ 2 S S (7. so the velocity can be assumed uniform (not a function of the opening height)5 .15) describes the energy conservation for the control volume in stationary coordinates. In this analysis several assumptions are made which includes the following: constant density. Eu is referred to as the enthalpy. .204 CHAPTER 7. and exit area is relatively with a small diameter. The flow out is related to the height but in a more complicate function and is the focus of this discussion. ENERGY CONSERVATION The second term is referred to as the shear work and is defined as ˙ Wshear = − S τ · U dA (7. surface tension effects are negligible and 5 Later a discussion about the height opening effects will be discussed.15). The example of flow from a tank or container is presented to demonstrate how to treat some of terms in equation (7. h. -7. small. the flow rate out of a tank or container was assumed to be a linear function of A the height. the gas density is very small compared to Fig. which was discussed on page 50. Discharge from a Large Container liquid density.14) transformed Simplified Energy Equation d U2 ˙ ˙ ˙ Q − Wshear + Wshaf t = Eu + + g z ρ dV + dt V 2 2 U h+ + g z Urn ρ dA + P Ubn dA 2 S S (7.

for the energy analysis the averaged velocity cannot be considered zero.17) Equation (7. However. Similar estimate that was done for x direction can be done to every side of the opening if they are not symmetrical. The averaged velocity in the y direction is zero because the flow is symmetrical7 . the temperature is assumed to constant. this quantity will be used.19) The x component of the averaged velocity is a function of the geometry and was calculated in Example 5. Second reason for this exercise the surface velocity has only one component is to avoid dealing with Bar-Meir’s instability. THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 205 the liquid surface is straight6 . The kinetic energy of the tank or container is based on the half part as shown in Figure 7. A discussion about this issue will be presented in the Dimensional Chapter and is out of the scope of this chapter. The surface has three velocity components which non have them vanish. 7 For the mass conservation analysis.1. Also note that the straight surface assumption is not the same surface tension effects zero. Since in this case the geometry is assumed to be symmetrical one side is sufficient as (π − 2)r dh Uy ∼ = 8h dt (7.16) which also can be written (because = 0) as Urn dA = 0 A Ubn dA + A (7.21) 6 This assumption is appropriated only under certain conditions which include the geometry of the tank or container and the liquid properties. However. The control volume is chosen so that all the liquid is included up to exit of the pipe. However. The averaged velocity in z direction is same as the boundary velocity Ub = Uz = dh Ae = Ue dt A (7.18) Note that the boundary velocity is not the averaged velocity but the actual velocity. Hence it requires that velocity profile in x y to be parabolic.17) provides the relationship between boundary velocity to the exit velocity as A Ub = Ae Ue (7.20) In this analysis.12 to be larger than Ux 2 r Ae 2r 2 r dh Ue =⇒ Ux ∼ Ub = = h A h h dt (7. the change of the kinetic energy due to the change in the velocity field isn’t zero. Also notice that the surface velocity is not zero. for simplicity. the velocity is zero for symmetrical geometry and some other geometries. .3.7. Additionally. in this discussion it is assumed that surface has only one component in z direction. The conservation of the mass is d dt V ρ dV + ¡ dρ dt A ρ Urn dA = 0 ¡ (7.

-7. . In this case. Yet. A discussion about this effect will be presented in the dimensional analysis chapter.3. the shear stresses at Fig. Note that the (exit) velocity on the upper surface is zero Urn = 0.15) which is applicable to this case. why this approach is correct in most cases is not explained here. the dissipation creates a loss that has temperature component. ENERGY CONSERVATION Uy 1 2 Uy 1 2 Uy = 0 Ue The boundary shear work is zero because the velocity at tank boundary or walls is zero. hence the shear work is vanished. 10 It is assumed that the pressure in exit across section is uniform and equal surroundings pressure.25) A It can be noticed that Pa = Pe hence =0 Pa A Ue dA − A Ub dA =0 (7. Clearly.23) Now the energy equation deals with no “external” effects. Furthermore.24) are Pe Ue ρdA − ρ Pa Ub dA = Pe A A Ue dA − Pa A Ub dA (7.24) Where Ub is the upper boundary velocity. ˙ ˙ Wshear = Wshaf t = 0 (7. Additionally.22) CHAPTER 7. The dissipation can be neglected for small Ec number. Eckert. Some examples how to calculate these losses will be resent later on. The pressure terms in equation (7. Combining all these information results in energy flow out internal energy change energy in and out upper surface work d dt V U + g z ρ dV + 2 2 A Pe Ue + ρ 2 2 Ue ρ dA − A Pa Ub dA = 0 (7.206 The energy balance can be expressed by equation (7. this change is a function of Eckert number. The temperature is constant8 . 9 It is only the same assumption discussed earlier. How to compensate and estimate the the exit are normal to the flow direction kinetic energy when averaged Velocity is zero.R. At the free surface the velocity has only normal component9 and thus shear work vanishes there as well.26) 8 This approach is a common approximation. the internal shear work is assumed negligible. E. In this light. Ec number is named after this author’s adviser. Pa is the external pressure and Pe is the exit pressure10 .G. Ec which is very small. the following approximation can be written Eu ˙ Q= = hin − hout = 0 dt (7.

28) is d dt d g z ρ dV = g ρ dt h A 0 dV z dz dA (7. A comparison between the actual kinetic energy and the kinetic energy due to the “averaged” velocity (to be called the averaged kinetic energy) provides a correction coefficient. THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS The governing equation (7. The averaged velocity is Uave = 1 V U dV V (7.s) of equation (7.29) yields   V 2 d h d h dh gρ dA = g ρ  h A  = g ρ A h dt A 2 dt 2 dt (7.28) The second integral (in the r.7. A discussion on the correction factor is presented to provide a better “averaged” velocity.24) is reduced to d dt U2 + g z ρ dV − 2 Ue 2 2 Ue ρ dA = 0 207 (7. Furthermore. The inside integral can be evaluated as h zdz = 0 h2 2 (7. Even the averaged velocity is zero the kinetic energy is not zero and another method should be used.1.27) V A The minus sign is because the flow is out of the control volume.31) The kinetic energy related to the averaged velocity with a correction factor which depends on the geometry and the velocity profile.33) . Similarly to the previous chapter which the integral momentum will be replaced by some kind of average. The terms under the time derivative can be divided into two terms as d dt V U2 d + g z ρdV = 2 dt V U2 d dV + 2 dt g z ρ dV V (7.32) The total kinetic energy for the averaged velocity is ρ Uave 2 V = ρ 1 V 2 2 U dV V V =ρ V U dV (7.h.29) V Where h is the height or the distance from the surface to exit.30) Substituting the results of equation (7. The first integral can be estimated by examining the velocity profile effects.30) into equation (7.

37) The correction factor for many other velocity profiles and other geometries can be smaller or larger than this value. More about this issue in the Differential Analysis Chapter. Calculations according to this point can improve the accurately based on the above discussion.1. The difference between the “averaged momentum” velocity and the “averaged kinetic” velocity is also due to the fact that energy is added for different directions while in the momentum case. . different directions cancel each other out. Note. the velocity is U r R = U (¯) = Umax 1 − r2 = 2 Uave 1 − r2 r ¯ ¯ (7. For a pipe geometry.35) results Uave 2 V U 2 dV V V = Uave 2 V 2 Uave 1 − r2 ¯ 2 = dV 3 Uave 2 V = 4 4 Uave 2 π L R2 3 (7. The correction factor for a constant density fluid is 2 2 ρ U dV CF = V = ρ U 2 dV ρ ¡ ρ ¡ U dV V = U 2 dV Uave 2 V U 2 dV V (7. For circular shape. 12 The advantage is described in the Dimensional Analysis Chapter.34) Here.35) V V This integral can be evaluated for any given velocity profile. The relationship between Umax to the averaged velocity. ENERGY CONSERVATION The general correction factor is the ratio of the above value to the actual kinetic energy as 2 ρ U dV CF = V ρ U 2 dV V ρ (Uave ) V = ¡ ρ U 2 dV ¡ V 2 (7.36) into equation (7. Uave is obtained by using equation (7.32) which yields 1/2. A large family of velocity profiles is laminar or parabolic (for one directional flow)11 . 11 Laminar flow is not necessarily implies that the flow velocity profile is parabolic. it is assumed that the averaged velocity indeed represent the energy in the tank or container.208 CHAPTER 7. CF is the correction coefficient. for simplicity reason. the inequality sign because the density distribution for compressible fluid. The flow is parabolic only when the flow is driven by pressure or gravity. In this case.36) It can be noticed that the velocity is presented as a function of the reduced radius12 . Substituting equation (7. a good guess number is about 1.

is about one page. But in the same vain.7.43) f (G) dh U∼ = dt (π − 2) r 8h 2 + (π − 1) r 4h 2 + 12 (7. not the derivation.1. the mathematical complication are enormous14 and this effect is assumed negligible and the function to be constant.40) Ue = A dh dh = −Ub Ae dt dt (7.41) Combining all the three components of the velocity (Pythagorean Theorem) as 2 2 2 2 U ∼ Ux + Uy + Uz = (7. THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS The unsteady state term then obtains the form  2 U2 d  U d gh ∼ρ ρ + g y dV = + dt V 2 dt 2 2  209 V hA (7. the velocity in the z direction13 is Uz = dh dt (7. Analytical solution of the governing equation is possible including this effect of the height.42) 2 U ∼ = (π − 2) r dh 8h dt 2 + (π − 1) r dh 4h dt 2 + dh dt 2 (7. 14 The solution. some other effects have to be taken into account which were neglected in construction of this model such as upper surface shape.39) Therefore. It must be remembered that is effect extremely important in the later stages of the emptying of the tank. The reader is encouraged to do it to get acquainted with this concept. 13 A similar point was provided in mass conservation Chapter 5.44) It can be noticed that f (G) is a weak function of the height inverse. However. .38) The relationship between the boundary velocity to the height (by definition) is Ub = dh dt (7. However. it easy can be proved by construction the same control volume.

results in d U gh + dt 2 2 2 (7. .48) Notice that U = Ub f (G) and thus f (G) Ub U dU h A g dh h A U gh 1 + + + − dt Ue Ae 2 dt Ue Ae 2 2 2 2 dh dt 2 A Ae 2 =0 (7.s.h.47) can be rearranged and simplified and combined with mass conservation 15 .50) f (G)2 h 15 This d2 h g h f (G)2 + + dt2 2 2 dh dt 2 + gh 1 − 2 2 dh dt 2 A Ae 2 =0 (7. Advance material can be skipped Dividing equation (7.47) Equation (7.49) Further rearranging to eliminate the “flow rate” transforms to 1 U dh  1 A B ¨ gh  dU Ub A¨ f (G)2 dt ¨ + f (G) h  + ¨ dt ¨Ue Ae 2  e Ae U 2 dh dt 2 + gh 1 − 2 2 dh dt 2 A Ae 2 =0 (7.40) A Ae A Ue d U gh + dt 2 2 2 hA U gh + + Ue Ae 2 2 2 dh 1   A  − dt 2   dh dt 2 A Ae 2 $ Ue A $$ e = 0 (7.46) by Ue Ae and utilizing equation (7.27) results in   V 2 2 2 d U gh 1 dh A ρ  + hA − Ue ρ Ae = 0 ¡ dt ¡ 2 2 2 dt Ae taking the derivative of first term on l.46) hA + U gh + 2 2 2 A dh 1 − dt 2 dh dt 2 A Ae 2 Ue Ae = 0 (7.210 The last term is CHAPTER 7. ENERGY CONSERVATION A Ue 2 Ue 2 1 Ue ρ dA = Ue ρ Ae = 2 2 2 dh A dt Ae 2 Ue ρ Ae (7.51) part can be skipped to end of ”advanced material”.45) Combining all the terms into equation (7.

54) The solution can either of these equations16        −      - dh (k1 Te − 2 k1 ) eln(h) T e + 2 g h2 = t + k2 h (T e − 2) f (G) (7.53) This parameter represents the characteristics of the tank which controls the emptying process. Thus define function of the height as  dh      (k1 Te − 2 k1 ) eln(h) T e + 2 g h2  f (h) = −  (7.52) by f (G)2 and using this parameter.55) or              - dh (k1 Te − 2 k1 ) eln(h) T e + 2 g h2 = t + k2 h (T e − 2) f (G) (7.58) discussion about this equation appear in the mathematical appendix.1.52) after minor rearrangement transformed to h d2 h g Ae 2 + dt2 Te A2 + 1 2 dh dt 2 [1 − Te ] = 0 (7.7.57)    h (T e − 2) f (G)   - The initial condition for this case are: one the height initial is h(0) = h0 16 A (7. as Te = A f (G) Ae 2 (7. . equation (7. THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 211 End Advance material Combining the gh terms into one yields f (G)2 h d2 h 1 +gh+ dt2 2 dh dt 2 f (G)2 − A Ae 2 =0 (7.52) Defining a new tank emptying parameter. Dividing equation (7.56) The solution with the positive solution has no physical meaning because the height cannot increase with time. Te .

ENERGY CONSERVATION dh =0 dt (7. Thus it is assumed that the initial velocity is not relevant at the core of the process at hand. Thus for a very short time.65) 2 dt A 1 − Ae The nature of first order Ordinary Differential Equation that they allow only one initial condition.54) into h g Ae 2 Te A2 + 1 2 dh dt 2 (7.63) is still non linear equation. However. This information travel in characteristic sound speed which is over 1000 m/sec.59) This condition pose a physical limitation17 which will be ignored.60) The complication of the above solution suggest a simplification in which g Ae 2 d2 h << dt2 Te A2 which reduces equation (7. And taking the “positive” branch √ dh 2gh = (7.63) While equation (7. It is 17 For the initial condition speed of sound has to be taken into account. This initial condition is the initial height of the liquid. . if this phenomenon is ignored this solution is correct.212 The initial boundary velocity is CHAPTER 7.61) (7. The first condition yields k2 = −f (h0 ) The second condition provides dh =0= dt (k1 Te − 2 k1 ) eln(h0 ) T e + 2 g h0 2 h0 (T e − 2) f (G) (7.64) It can be noticed that Te “disappeared” from the equation. The initial velocity field was eliminated by the approximation (remove the acceleration term). the information about opening of the valve did not reached to the surface.62) [1 − Te ] = 0 (7. the non linear element can be removed by taking negative branch (height reduction) of the equation as dh dt 2 = 2gh −1 + A Ae 2 (7.

It seems that Torricelli was an honest man who gave to others and he died at young age of 39 while in his prime.70) A few loss coefficients for different configuration is given following Figure 7.69) is referred in the literature as Torricelli’s equation18 This analysis has several drawbacks which limits the accuracy of the calculations.65) integrated to yield 1− A Ae 2 h h0 dh √ = 2gh t dt 0 (7.1.66) The initial condition has been inserted into the integral which its solution is 1− A Ae √ 2 h − h0 √ =t 2gh √ (7.68) 1− If the area ratio Ae /A << 1 then U∼ = 2gh (7. 1608 October 25. Yet. The experimental coefficient can be added to account for the dissipation and other effects such dh ∼ =C dt The loss coefficient can be expressed as C = Kf U2 2 (7. Today the exact reference to his work is lost and only “sketches” of his lecture elude work. 1647) was an Italian physicist and mathematician. this analysis demonstrates the usefulness of the integral analysis to provide a reasonable solution. THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 213 correct only for large ratio of h/r and the error became very substantial for small value of h/r. 18 Evangelista Torricelli (October 15. He was student (not formal) and follower of Galileo Galilei. Equation (7. This analysis can be improved by experimental investigating the phenomenon.4.67) dh A Ue = = dt Ae 2gh A Ae 1− A = 2 Ae 2gh Ae 2 A (7. He derived this equation based on similar principle to Bernoulli equation (which later leads to Bernoulli’s equation). .69) Equation (7.71) 2gh (7.7.

the integral does not provide a sufH equilibrioum level ficient tool to analyze the issue at hand. (b) Sharp edge pipe connection K=0. The integral method does not handle the problems such as the free surface with reasonable accuracy. In cases that dissipation play major air air role.2 Limitation of Integral Approach Some of accuracy issues to enhance the quality and improvements of the integral method were suggested in the analysis of the emptying tank. (c) Rounded inlet pipe K=0. the knowledge of whether the flow is laminar or turbulent (later on this issue) has to come from different techniques. the analysis of the oscillating manometer cannot be carried by the intelowest level for the liquid gral methods. The accuracy issues that integral methods intrinsically suffers from no ability to exact flow field and thus lost the accuracy as was discussed in the example. . the averaged energy in the x direction contributes or effects the energy equation.5. A liquid in manometer is disturbed from a rest by a distance of H0 . In the calculations of the exit velocity of a tank. -7. -7. H For example. There are problems that the integral methods even with these enhancements simply cannot tackle. Furthermore. In the analysis of the tank it was assumed that the dissipation can be igD nored. Typical resistance for selected outlet configuration. The second type of corrections is the understanding that averaged of the total field is different from the averaged of different zooms. Hence the prediction can skew the actual predictions. ENERGY CONSERVATION (a) Projecting pipe K=1.04. Additionally. The description H(t) as a function of time requires exact knowledge of the velocity field. The first type is the prediction of the velocities profile (or the concentration profile). The improvements to the integral methods are the corrections to the estimates of the energy or other quantities in the conservation equations. the averaged velocity in x direction is zero yet the averaged velocity in the two zooms (two halves) is not zero. In fact. the integral methods is Fig.214 CHAPTER 7. 7. Flow in an oscillating manometer.5. In the case of the tank.4. two such corrections were presented. Fig.

73) for non-deformable control volume does not vanished. These problem were minor for the emptying the tank but for the oscillating manometer it is the core of the problem. 7. For a stationary fix control volume the energy equation.73) U2 + g z Urn ρAin + P Ubn Aout − P Ubn Ain 2 It can be noticed that last term in equation (7. The acceleration term must be eliminated for the obvious reason. under this simplification transformed to ˙ ˙ ˙ Q − Wshear − Wshaf t = h+ U2 + g z Urn ρAout − 2 U2 h+ + g z Urn ρAin 2 (7. Hence the energy equation is reduced to Steady State Equation ˙ ˙ ˙ Q − Wshear − Wshaf t = S h+ U2 + g z Urn ρ dA + 2 P Ubn dA S (7. It turn out that these simplifications can provide reasonable results and key understanding of the physical phenomena and yet with less work.3. The integral method is a powerful and yet simple method but has has to be used with the limitations of the method in mind. the pressure is different. the problems can be solved. APPROXIMATION OF ENERGY EQUATION 215 too crude to handle issues of free interface.72) is reduced to Steady State Equation & uniform ˙ ˙ ˙ Q − Wshear − Wshaf t = h+ h+ U2 + g z Urn ρAout − 2 (7. The discussion on the limitations was not provided to discard usage of this method but rather to provide a guidance of use with caution. The time derivative term can be eliminated since the time derivative is zero. The reason is that while the velocity is constant. 7.3.3 Approximation of Energy Equation The emptying the tank problem was complicated even with all the simplifications that were carried. Hence different techniques are required. Engineers in order to reduce the work further simplify the energy equation.74) . The following sections provides further explanation. equation (7.1 Energy Equation in Steady State The steady state situation provides several ways to reduce the complexity.72) If the flow is uniform or can be estimated as uniform.7.

75) in 7.77) (7.80) becomes h D ˙ Qrev = Dt Eu + V P ρ ρ dV − D Dt V dP ρ ρ dV (7. ENERGY CONSERVATION Dividing equation the mass flow rate provides Steady State Equation.81) Using the Reynolds Transport Theorem to transport equation to control volume results in d ˙ Qrev = dt h ρ dV + V A h Urn ρ dA + D Dt V dP ρ ρ dV (7. Equation (2. The second low is the core of “no losses” and can be employed when calculations of this sort information is needed.216 CHAPTER 7.3. Fix m & uniform ˙ q − wshear − wshaf t = ˙ ˙ ˙ h+ U2 +gz 2 − out h+ U2 +gz 2 (7.2 Energy Equation in Frictionless Flow and Steady State In cases where the flow can be estimated without friction or where a quick solution is needed the friction and other losses are illuminated from the calculations.82) .80) Taking time derivative of the equation (7.21) which can be written as dqrev = T ds = dEu + P dv Using the multiplication rule change equation (7.79) Integration over the entire system results in h Qrev = V Eu + P ρ ρ dV − V dP ρ ρ dV (7.78) P ρ − v dP (7.77) yields dqrev = dEu + d P ρ − v dP (7.76) qrev = Eu + P ρ − dP ρ (7. This imaginary fluid reduces the amount of work in the calculations and Ideal Flow Chapter is dedicated in this book.76) dqrev = dEu + d (P v) − v dP = dEu + d integrating equation (7.

General Acceleration can be broken into a linear acceleration and a rotating acceleration.84) in Subtracting equation (7. ENERGY EQUATION IN ACCELERATED SYSTEM As before equation (7. the mathematical treatment is somewhat different which is the reason for the separation.83) in (7. There is no conceptional difference between these two accelerations. it was assumed that the control volume is at rest.E. is the gravity that was compensated by the gravity potential. the control volume is moving in accelerated coordinates. The only acceptation to the above statement. In many cases.87) 7. The accelerations are referring to two kinds of acceleration. linear and rotational.1 Energy in Linear Acceleration Coordinate 2 The potential is defined as P.7. It was pointed earlier in this book that accelerated forces can be translated to potential force. These accelerations will be translated to potential energy.88) .85) Equation (7.81) can be simplified for uniform flow as ˙ Qrev = m (hout − hin ) − ˙ or qrev = (hout − hin ) − ˙ dP ρ − out 217 dP ρ − out dP ρ dP ρ (7.86) reduced to 0= P2 − P1 U2 2 − U1 2 + + g (z2 − z1 ) ρ 2 (7. In building the gravity potential it was assumed that the gravity is a conservative force. 7.4. = − ref F ·d (7.85) for constant density is 0 = wshaf t + P2 − P1 U2 2 − U1 2 + + g (z2 − z1 ) ρ 2 (7. However.86) For no shaft work equation (7.4 Energy Equation in Accelerated System In the discussion so far.75) results in change in pressure energy change in kinetic energy change in potential energy 0 = wshaf t + dP ρ − 2 dP ρ + 1 U2 2 − U1 2 + g (z2 − z1 ) 2 (7.84) from equation (7.4.

r and m are the distance and mass respectively.92) P Ea = (0) a · d dm = (ax (x1 − x0 ) ay (y1 − y0 ) az (z1 − z0 )) dm (7. ENERGY CONSERVATION In Chapter 3 a discussion about gravitational energy potential was presented. Thus. The gravity potential is then r P Egravity = − ∞ − GM m dr r2 (7. the element of the potential is d P Ea = a · d dm The total potential for element material (1) (7. The same can be done for the other two coordinates.95) . The Force due to the acceleration of the field can be broken into three coordinates. For example. for the gravity force is F =− GM m r2 (7. The potential of unit material is P Eatotal = sys (ax x + ay y + az z) ρ dV (7.218 CHAPTER 7. 7. and z = 0.91) The total work or potential is the integral over the whole mass.94) The change of the potential with time is D D P Ea total = Dt Dt (ax x + ay y + az z) dm sys (7.89) Where G is the gravity coefficient and M is the mass of the Earth.4.90) The reference was set to infinity.2 Linear Accelerated System The acceleration can be employed in similar fashion as the gravity force. y = 0. The gravity force for fluid element in small distance then is g dz dm.93) At the origin (of the coordinates) x = 0. The linear acceleration “creates” a conservative force of constant force and direction. The work this element moving from point 1 to point 2 is 2 g dz dm = g (z2 − z1 ) dm 1 (7. Using this trick the notion of the ax (x1 − x0 ) can be replaced by ax x. The “potential” of moving the mass in the field provides the energy.

3 Energy Equation in Rotating Coordinate System The coordinate system rotating around fix axises creates a similar conservative potential as a linear system. and k are units vector in the coordinates r. The cross product is zero of U ×ω ×U = U ×ω ×ω = 0 .99) ˆ where r. one is the centrifugal and one the Coriolis force.7. θ and z respectively.4.4. θ. To understand it better.98) The work or the potential then is P E = ω 2 r r + 2 U × ω · d dm ˆ The cylindrical coordinate are ˆ ˆ d = drˆ + r dθ θ + dz k r (7. There are two kinds of acceleration due to this rotation.100) (7. The ˆ ˆ potential is then ˆ ˆ P E = ω 2 r r + 2 U × ω · drˆ + r dθ θ + dz k dm ˆ r (7. The forces acting on particles are   centrifugal Coriolis   F =  ω 2 r r + 2 U × ω  dm ˆ (7. ENERGY EQUATION IN ACCELERATED SYSTEM Equation can be added to the energy equation as D ˙ ˙ Q−W = Dt Eu + sys 219 U2 + ax x + ay y + (az + g)z ρ dV 2 (7.101) The first term results in ω 2 r2 (see for explanation in the appendix 363 for vector explanation).96) The Reynolds Transport Theorem is used to transferred the calculations to control volume as Energy Equation in Linear Accelerated Coordinate d ˙ ˙ Q−W = dt + cv Eu + cv U2 + ax x + ay y + (az + g)z ρ dV 2 (7. consider a particle which moves with the our rotating system.97) h+ U2 + ax x + ay y + (az + g)z Urn ρ dA 2 + cv P Ubn dA 7.

103) Inserting the potential energy due to the centrifugal forces into the energy equation yields Energy Equation in Accelerated Coordinate d ˙ ˙ Q−W = dt + cv U2 ω 2 r2 + ax x + ay y + (az + g)z − ρ dV 2 2 cv U2 ω2 r2 h+ + ax x + ay y + (az + g) − z Urn ρ dA 2 2 Eu + + cv (7.1 Simplified Energy Equation in Accelerated Coordinate Energy Equation in Accelerated Coordinate with Uniform Flow One of the way to simplify the general equation (7.4. This multiplication creates lines (surfaces ) of constant values.104) is to assume uniform flow. The second part is (2 U × ω) · d dm (7. ENERGY CONSERVATION because the first multiplication is perpendicular to the last multiplication. this term canceled and does not contribute to the potential.104) can be written as Energy Equation in steady state ˙ ˙ Q−W = cv h+ U2 ω 2 r2 + ax x + ay y + (az + g) − z 2 2 + cv Urn ρ dA P Ubn dA (7. However.102) This multiplication does not vanish with the exception of the direction of U .104) P Ubn dA 7. In that case the time derivative term vanishes and equation (7. the most important direction is the direction of the velocity.220 CHAPTER 7.4.4 7. the flux of this property is important only in the direction of the velocity. The net change of the potential energy due to the centrifugal motion is 2 P Ecentrif ugal = − 1 ω 2 r2 dr dm = ω 2 r1 2 − r2 2 dm 2 (7.4.105) . From a physical point of view. Hence.

108) P Ubn dA + energy loss A V A P U2 + + g z Urn ρ dA + ρ 2 Equation can be further simplified under assumption of uniform flow and steady state as wshaf t = ˙ P U2 + +gz ρ 2 − out P U2 + +gz ρ 2 2 + energy loss in (7.4.109) Equation (7.105) by assuming uniform flow for which ˙ ˙ Q−W = U ω 2 r2 h+ + ax x + ay y + (az + g) − z 2 2 + cv 2 221 U rn ρ dA P U bn dA (7. these losses are very important for many real world application. 7. ENERGY EQUATION IN ACCELERATED SYSTEM Further simplification of equation (7. as will be shown.107) sometimes written as d ˙ Wshaf t = dt U2 +gz 2 ρ dV + (7.4.15) when the energy and the internal energy as a separate identity as d ˙ Wshaf t = dt A V U2 +gz 2 ρ dV + P Ubn dA+ A P U2 + + g z Urn ρ dA + ρ 2 energy loss (7. However. And these losses have practical importance and have to be considered in engineering system. it was assumed that there are no energy loss. has to be constant for frictionless flow without any addition and loss of energy.5 Energy Losses in Incompressible Flow In the previous sections discussion. Hence writing equation (7.7.109) suggests that term h + U + g z has a special meaning (because it 2 remained constant under certain conditions).107) d dt Eu ρ dV + V A ˙ ˙ Eu Urn ρ dA − Q − Wshear Equation (7. The correction factors have to introduced into the equation to account for the energy averaged verse to averaged velocity (mass averaged). This term. These factor make this equation with larger error and thus less effective tool in the engineering calculation. This term represents .106) Note that the acceleration also have to be averaged.

Furthermore. ENERGY CONSERVATION the “potential energy. At time. For example. 0= V ∂ρ dV + ∂t ρ Ubn dA + A A ρ Urn dA =⇒ ρ  Uin = ρ  Uexit ¡A ¡A (7. Assume that flow is incompressible. -7.1: Consider a flow in a long straight pipe.6. It can be noticed that for the energy balance on the pipe. and the resistance or energy loss is f . the time derivative can . Develop equation to describe the exit velocity as a function of time. Solution The mass balance on the liquid in the pipe results in =0 =0 L Fig. fluid flow in a pipe has resistance and energy dissipation. the flow in and out are equal because the density is identical.109) reduces to simple Bernoulli’s equation. There are several categories of the loss which referred as minor loss (which are not minor).a) There is no change in the liquid mass inside pipe and therefore the time derivative is zero (the same mass resides in the pipe at all time). the velocity is identical because the cross area is same. t0 the a constant pressure difference is applied on the pipe. The dissipation is lost energy that is transferred to the surroundings. State your assumptions. Initially the flow is in a rest.I. Thus. and duct losses. The loss is normally is a strong function of the velocity square.110) in Equation (7. These losses will be tabulated later on. 7. Furthermore assume that this loss is a function of the velocity square. There also unsteady state and other form of this equation that will be discussed in differential equations Chapter. U 2 /2. If the energy loss is negligible and the shaft work vanished or does not exist equation (7. The boundaries do not move and the second term is zero. Flow in a long pipe when exposed to a jump in the pressure difference. Simple Bernoulli 0= P U2 + +gz ρ 2 − out P U2 + +gz ρ 2 (7.222 CHAPTER 7.” The loss is the combination of the internal energy/enthalpy with heat transfer. Euler.110) is only a simple form of Bernoulli’s equation which was developed by Bernoulli’s adviser.5 Examples of Integral Energy Conservation Example 7.

In the locations where the velocity does not vanished.I. The gravity in the first term and all other terms. is zero.h) dU + (Pin − Pout ) U dt .I. There is no shaft work and this term vanishes as well. =0 =0 223 ˙ ˙ Q − Wshear + ˙ Wshaf t = 2 V S d dt Eu + U2 +gz 2 S ρ dV + P Ubn dA U + g z Urn ρ dA + h+ 2 (7. Hence.a). Hence the second term becomes  ¨ constant B U 2 ¨¨ h +  ¨+ g z ρ Urn dA = ¨ 2 A   h Eu + A P ρ ρ Urn dA (7.I. In this analysis. EXAMPLES OF INTEGRAL ENERGY CONSERVATION enter the integral because the control volume has fixed boundaries. related to the pipe.f) Combining all the terms results in dU d ˙ Q = ρU Vpipe +ρ dt dt L π r2 Eu dV + ∆P U dA + Vpipe A ρ Eu U dA (7. the work is zero because shear stress are perpendicular to the velocity).g) can be rearranged as −K U 2 2 ˙ Q−ρ Vpipe d (Eu ) dV − dt ρ Eu U dA = ρ L π r2 U A (7.I.I. it is assumed that the pipe is perpendicular to the gravity line and thus the gravity is constant.5. where velocity is zero.I. the velocity is identical (in and out).c) where L is the pipe length.e) The third term vanishes because the boundaries velocities are zero and therefore P Ubn dA = 0 A (7.d) Equation (7. such as in and out.g) equation (7.I. U averaged velocity.d) can be further simplified (since the area and averaged velocity are constant. Also.I. as can be noticed from equation (7.b) The boundaries shear work vanishes because the same arguments present before (the work.I.I. The first term on the right hand side (with a constant density) is ρ Vpipe d dt U2 + Eu + 2 constant gz dU dV = ρ U Vpipe +ρ dt L π r2 Vpipe d (Eu ) dV dt (7. additionally notice that U = Urn ) as Eu + A P ρ ρ Urn dA = ∆P U A + A ρ Eu Urn dA (7. vanish again because the value of z is constant.7. r is the pipe radius.

I.1). The solution of the linear equation and the steady state solution of the differential equation are the same.I.224 CHAPTER 7.). .k) 1 Applying the initial condition. it should be noted that if momentum balance was used a similar solution (but not the same) was obtained (why? hint the difference of the losses accounted for).m) Another note.h) can be written as −K U2 dU = ρ L π r2 U + (Pin − Pout ) U 2 dt (7. 19 The shear work inside the liquid refers to molecular work (one molecule work on the other molecule). velocity regime and etc.I. Thus.I. End Solution The following example combined the above discussion in the text with the above example (7.l) The solution is an exponentially approaching the steady state solution. velocity range. equation (7. 20 Via the viscosity effects. Additionally.j) Equation (7. U (t = 0) = 0 results in  0 U= 2 (Pin − Pout )  1 −  K e −@ 1 tK A 2 π r2 ρ L    (7. This function will be discussed in a greater extent later on. K.I. in reality the resistance. It common to assume (to view) that these terms are representing the energy loss and are a strong function of velocity square19 . U= 2 (Pin − Pout ) K (7.i) to U+ 2 ρ L π r2 d U 2 (Pin − Pout ) = K dt K (7. In steady state the flow equation (7. is not constant but rather a strong function of velocity (and other parameters such as temperature20 .I.j) reduced to a simple linear equation.i) Dividing equation (7.i) by K U/2 transforms equation (7.I. ENERGY CONSERVATION The terms on the LHS (left hand side) can be combined.j) is a first order differential equation.I. The solution this equation is described in the appendix and which is U= e 1  tK A −@ 2 π r2 ρ L  2 (P − P )  in out  K 0 0 e tK @ A 2 π r2 ρ L 1    + c 0 e @ 2 π r2 ρ t L A K (7.I. This shear work can be viewed also as one control volume work on the adjoined control volume.I.

h. The pipe is exposed to the surroundings and 3 thus the pressure is Patmos at the pipe exit.II. consider that the tank has a constant presD sure above liquid (actually a better assumpVair tion of air with a constant mass.5.II.b) simply can Atank Atank . -7. Solution D This problem can split into two control vol3 umes. EXAMPLES OF INTEGRAL ENERGY CONSERVATION 225 Example 7.2: A large cylindrical tank with a diameter.b) 2 ρ U1 Apipe = ρ U3 π R2 = ρ ¡ dt π R ¡ ¡ It can be noticed that U3 = dh/dt and D = 2 R and d = 2 r when the lower case refers to the pipe and the upper case referred to the tank. State all the assumptions that were made during the derivations.7. Equation (7.a) The first term vanishes and the second and third terms remain and thus equation (7. Analysis of control volume in the tank was provided previously 1 h and thus needed to be sewed to Example d U1 7. contains liquid to height. Liquid exiting a large tank Assume that the resistance or the friction trough a long tube. in the pipe is a strong function to the velocity square in the tank.1. d Assume that the liquid is incompressible. Patmos Derive approximated equations that related L the height in the large tank and the exit 1 2 velocity at the pipe to pressure difference.8. The mass conservation reads =0 V ∂ρ dV + ∂t ρ Ubn dA + A A ρ Urn dA = 0 (7.II. The effect is negligible in most cases because air mass is small with exception the “spring” effect (expansion/compression effects).). Figure 7. A long pipe is connected to a tank from which the liquid is emptied.II. Tank control volume for Example 7.7. Note. one of the liquid in the tank and one of the liquid in pipe.7.2.a) reduces to dh (7. Fig. -7. To analysis this situation. the energy loss is considered (as opposed to the discussion in the text). The control volume in tank is depicted in Fig. Tank Control Volume The effect of the energy change in air side was neglected. D.

c) The boundaries shear work and the shaft work are assumed to be vanished in the tank. U = dh/dt × f (G). The second term can be recognized as similar to those by equation (7. Hence. the second term is U2 + gz 2 z=0 A 1 Urn ρ dA ∼ = 2 dh A3 dt A1 2 U1 ρ A1 = 1 2 dh R dt r 2 U1 ρ A1 (7.45).II. That is.d) Where Ut denotes the (the upper surface) liquid velocity of the tank. the velocity is a derivative of the height with a correction factor.f) ¡ A ρ ¡ It is assumed that the exit velocity can be averaged (neglecting the velocity distribution effects).44). Using equation (7.II.II. The pressure component of the second term is P Urn ρ dA = ρ P1 U1 A1 (7.d) to become d dt Ut 2 +gz 2 U3 ρ dV + A1 Vt P Ut 2 + +gz ρ 2 K Ut 2 2 U1 Urn ρ dA+ (7.II. the first term changes to  d dt ρ V U +gz 2 2 dV ∼ ρ d  Ut + g h = dt 2 2 2 V  (7.226 CHAPTER 7.g) .111) P Ubn dA = A3 d dt Eu ρ dV + Vt A1 ˙ Eu ρ Urn dA − Q Similar arguments to those that were used in the previous discussion are applicable to this case. Therefore.38).e) hA Where the velocity is given by equation (7. Moving all internal energy terms and the energy transfer to the right hand side of equation (7.II. ENERGY CONSERVATION be written when the area ratio is used (to be changed later if needed) as U1 Apipe = dh Atank =⇒ U1 = dt R r 2 dh dt (7. f (G) ≡ 1 will be assumed. the energy conservation in the tank reduces to =0 ˙ ˙ Q − Wshear + d Ut 2 ˙ Wshaf t = Eu + + g z ρ dV + dt Vt 2 Ut 2 h+ + g z Urn ρ dA + P Ubn dA 2 A1 A3 =0 (7. Since the focus in this book is primarily on the physics.II.

1.II.II.m) Solution The equations (7.m).l) can be rearranged as Kp 2ρ r R 2 R r 2 2 (P1 − P2 ) Kp (7.II.I.II.j) (7. it can be noticed that the liquid velocity in the tank is related to the height and the liquid velocity in the pipe.II.i) have two unknowns (dh/dt and P1 ) which are sufficient to solve the problem.k) where Kp is the resistance in the pipe and Up is the (averaged) velocity in the pipe. there is only one equation with one unknown.l) dh 4 ρ L π r2 d2 h + dt K dt2 = (P1 − P2 ) ρ (7. EXAMPLES OF INTEGRAL ENERGY CONSERVATION The last term on the left hand side is P Ubn dA = P3 A A 227 dh dt (7.II.n) 2 2 2 Kp r (P3 − P2 ) dh 4 ρ L π r d h + + = 2ρ R dt K dt2 ρ .II. Thus.i) Pipe Control Volume The analysis of the liquid in the pipe is similar to Example 7.II.5. The conservation of the liquid in the pipe is the same as in Example 7. In fact.II.II.c) eliminates the Up as dh 4 ρ L π r2 d2 h + = dt K dt2 Equation (7.II.h) The combination of all the terms for the tank results in   V 2 2 2 gh 1 dh d  Ut A3 Kt + hA − U1 A1 + dt 2 2 2 dt A1 2ρ dh dt 2 = (P3 − P1 ) ρ (7.m) and (7.m) and (7.II. The relationship between the height was obtained by substituting equation (7.c) in equation (7.II.II. It can be noticed that two initial conditions are required to solve the problem.7. The governing equation obtained by from adding equation (7.i) provide the frame in which the liquid velocity in tank and pipe have to be solved.i) as  V 2 2 2 2 d Ut gh 1 dh A3 Kt dh + hA − U1 A1 + dt 2 2 2 dt A1 2 ρ dt (7.1 and thus equation (7.m) and (7.II.II. Using equation (7. The equations (7.II.a) is used U1 = U2 Up + 4 ρ L π r 2 d Up 2 (P1 − P2 ) = Kp dt Kp (7.

II. The dimensional analysis method can be used to obtain solution various situations which will be presented later on. What is the direction of the heat from the pipe or in to the pipe. the height of liquid is at prescript point as h(0) = h0 dh (0) = 0 dt (7. A certain point the tank is punctured and the liquid flows out.228 CHAPTER 7. Additionally. To keep the tank at uniform temperature what is the direction of the heat (from the tank or to the tank)? . Assume that the liquid is slightly compressible. BT . ˆ A different liquid flows in the same pipe. What kind of internal work the liquid performed. If the liquid is compressible what is the direction of the heat to keep the flow isothermal? ˆ A tank is full of incompressible liquid. Explain why the direction based on physical reasoning. ENERGY CONSERVATION The initial conditions are that zero initial velocity in the tank and pipe.o) The solution of equation can be obtained using several different numerical techniques. Would happen when the liquid velocity is very large? What it will be still correct. End Solution Qualitative Questions ˆ A liquid flows in and out from a long pipe with uniform cross section as single phase. That is the liquid has a constant bulk modulus.

Part II Differential Analysis 229 .

.

A discussion about the “regular” solution is present and a brief discussion about limitations when the solution is applicable. This analysis leads to partial differential equations which are referred to as the Navier-Stokes equations. As usual Simon-Denis Poisson independently. which leads to a different approach of differential analysis. First these equations were derived by Claude–Louis– Marie Navier as it is known in 1827. 231 . These equations are named after Claude– Louis Navier–Marie and George Gabriel Stokes. Like many equations they were independently derived by several people. derived these equations in 1831 for the same arguments as Navier. However even for the “regular” solution the mathematics is very complex. as he done to many other equations or conditions. with a presentation of the “non–regular” solutions will be presented with the associated issues of stability. the emphasis is on infinitesimal scale and thus the analysis provides better accuracy1 . Later in the Chapters on Real Fluid and Turbulence. In differential analysis. The concepts 1 Which can be view as complementary analysis to the integral analysis. the solution is not unique.1 Introduction The integral analysis has a limited accuracy. The differential analysis allows the flow field investigation in greater detail. The foundations for their arguments or motivations are based on a molecular view of how stresses are exerted between fluid layers. Barr´ de e Saint Venant (1843) and George Gabriel Stokes (1845) derived these equation based on the relationship between stress and rate–of–strain (this approach is presented in this book). Navier-Stokes equations are non–linear and there are more than one possible solution in many cases (if not most cases) e.g. One of the approaches is to reduce the equations by eliminating the viscosity effects. The equations without the viscosity effects are referred to as the ideal flow equations (Euler Equations) which will be discussed in the next chapter.CHAPTER 8 Differential Analysis 8.

and will be presented in the Ideal Flow chapter. the following can be written D Dt ρdV = V d dt ρdV + V A Urn ρ dA = 0 (8.2) For a constant control volume. 8. on one hand.1. the derivative can enter into the integral (see also for the divergence theorem in the appendix A. The mass conservation for this infinitesimal small system is zero thus D Dt ρdV = 0 V x A ρ Ux dy dz ρ+ dρ dz Uz + dUz dz dx dy E F dρ y ρ+ d U dU + dy y y dx dz B ρ+ dρ dx Ux + dUx dx dy dz G dx dz H ρU y C ρ Uz dx dy D (8. Sometimes. This phenomenon is presented in Multi–phase chapter and briefly discussed in this chapter. However for a control volume using Reynolds Transport Theorem (RTT).1) Fig.1. which are easier to discuss when the viscosity is ignored. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS of the Add Mass and the Add Force. These equations cannot satisfy the boundary conditions in other cases and in way the fluid pushes the boundary condition(s) further downstream (choked flow).3) . Historically. These issues are discussed in Open Channel Flow and Compressible Flow chapters. there are cases when complying with the boundary conditions leads to a discontinuity (shock or choked flow). Even for simple situations.2) on the right hand side and hence dρ dt dV V dρ dV + dt Urn ρ dA = 0 A (8. It has to be pointed out that the Add Mass and Add Force appear regardless to the viscosity. The choked flow is associated with a single phase flow (even the double choked flow) while the Interfacial instability associated with the Multi–Phase flow. the boundary conditions create instability which alters the boundary conditions itself which is known as Interfacial instability. complexity of the equations. The connection between these two ideas or fields was done via introduction of the boundary layer theory by Prandtl which will be discussed as well.232 CHAPTER 8.1.2 Mass Conservation Fluid flows into and from a three dimensional infinitesimal control volume depicted in Figure 8. The mass balance on the infinitesimal control volume. leads to approximations and consequently to the ideal flow approximation (equations) and on the other hand experimental solutions of Navier–Stokes equations. At a specific time this control volume can be viewed as a system. -8.

for example. in the x coordinate. MASS CONSERVATION 233 The first term in equation (8. It also can be noticed that. neglecting higher order derivatives.4) The second term in the LHS of equation (8.2. produces additional dx thus a infinitesimal volume element dV is obtained for all directions.8) Cylindrical Coordinates The same equation can be derived in cylindrical coordinates.7) Combining the first term with the second term results in the continuity equation in Cartesian coordinates as Continuity in Cartesian Coordinates ∂ρ ∂ρ Ux ∂ρ Uy ∂ρ Uz + + + =0 ∂t ∂x ∂y ∂z (8.5) The difference between point x and x + dx can be obtained by developing Taylor series as (ρ Ux )|x+dx = (ρ Ux )|x + ∂ (ρ Ux ) ∂x dx x (8. The combination can be divided by dx dy dz and simplified by using the definition of the partial derivative in the regular process to be Urn ρ dA = − A ∂(ρ Ux ) ∂(ρ Uy ) ∂(ρ Uz ) + + ∂x ∂y ∂z (8. . as depicted in Figure 8.2.3) for the infinitesimal volume is expressed. the operation.8. as ∼0 V dρ dρ dV = dx dy dz + f dt dt dV d2 ρ dt2 + ··· (8. in the control volume is ∂ρ dm = ˙ dr dz r dθ ∂t 2 Note dv (8.9) that sometime the notation dAyz also refers to dAx . The net mass change.6) The same can be said for the y and z coordinates.2) is expressed2 as dAyz Urn ρ dA = A dAxz dy dz (ρ Ux )|x − (ρ Ux )|x+dx + dAxz dx dz (ρ Uy )|y − (ρ Uy )|y+dy + dx dy (ρ Uz )|z − (ρ Uz )|z+dz (8.

11)–(8. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS + ∂ (ρ Ur r)  dz dθ dr ∂z   ρ U θ ∂ (ρ Uθ )  + dθ dr dz ∂θ  dz  ρ Uz  r) d r r ρU ∂ ( ∂z r+  dθ dz ρU r rd θd z rd z θ dr ρ Uθ dr dθ y θ x ρ Uz r dr dθ Fig. This change creates a different differential equation with additional complications. the net flux in the z coordinate be written as net flux in z direction = r dθ dr The net change in the θ direction is then net flux in θ direction = dr dz ∂ρ Uθ dθ ∂θ (8.13) ∂ (ρ Uz ) dz ∂z (8. results in total net flux =− 1 ∂ (ρ Ur r) ∂ρ Uz r ∂ρ Uθ + + r ∂r ∂z ∂θ (8. Hence. the r is “trapped” in the derivative.11) Note3 that the r is still inside the derivative since it is a function of r. r . The net mass flow out or in the r direction has an additional term which is the area change compared to the Cartesian coordinates. The mass conservation in cylindrical coordinates. e. -8.12) Combining equations (8. The change is flux in r direction = dθ dz r ρ U r − r ρ Ur + ∂ρ Ur r dr ∂r (8. The mass flow at r + dr is ρ Ur r dθ dz|r + d/dr (ρ Ur r dθ dz) dr + · · · . In a similar fashion.13) and dividing by infinitesimal control volume.10) The net flux in the r direction is then ∂ρ Ur r net flux in the = dθ dz dr ∂r r direction (8. Expansion to Taylor serious ρ U r dθ dz| r r r+dr is obtained by the regular procedure.234  ρ U r z CHAPTER 8. the change of r with r.14) 3 The mass flow is ρ U r dθ dz at r point.2.g. dr r dθ dz.

There are very few cases where this equation is used on its own merit.2. 4 notice the irony the second i is the dirction and first i is for any one of direction x(i).15) and (8. It can be noticed that the second part of these equations is the divergence (see the Appendix A.16) can be expressed in different coordinates. and k 4 .18) Where i is is of the i. .9) divided by infinitesimal control volume. The index notation really does not add much to the scientific understanding. the continuity equation can be written in a general vector form as Continuity Equation ∂ρ + · (ρ U ) = 0 ∂t Advance material can be skipped (8.17) The mass equation can be written in index notation for Cartesian coordinates.2 page 366). the continuity equation becomes Continuity in Spherical Coordinates 1 ∂ r 2 ρ Ur 1 ∂ (ρ Uθ sin θ) 1 ∂ρ Uφ ∂ρ + 2 + + =0 ∂t r ∂r r sin θ ∂θ r sin θ ∂z (8. The mass equation (see in the appendix for more information on the index notation) written as ∂ρ ∂ (ρ U )i + =0 ∂t ∂xi (8. End Advance material The use of these equations is normally combined with other equations (momentum and or energy equations). (8.8. Hence.1.8).8). However. MASS CONSERVATION 235 Combining equation (8. Compare to equation (8. dr r dθ dz yields Continuity in Cylindrical Coordinates ∂ρ 1 ∂ (r ρ Ur ) 1 ∂ρ Uθ ∂ρ Uz + + + =0 ∂t r ∂r r ∂θ ∂z (8. this writing reduce the amount of writing and potentially can help the thinking about the problem or situation in more conceptional way.14) with the change in the control volume (8.15) Carrying similar operations for the spherical coordinates. several examples are constructed here. and z(k).16) The continuity equations (8. y(j). j. Again remember that the meaning of repeated index is summation. For academic purposes.

Neglect the mutual dependency of the temperature and the height. For this question.1: A layer of liquid has an initial height of H0 with an uniform temperature of T0 . The density is a function of the temperature according to T − T0 =α T1 − T0 ρ − ρ0 ρ1 − ρ0 (8.I.a)) is ρ − ρ0 H0 − y =α 1 − e−β t (8. as a function of time into the governing equation (8.2. the upper surface is exposed to temperature T1 (see Figure 8.3).c) The exponential decay is 1 − e−β t and thus the combination (with equation (8. It can be noticed that the height H0 is a function of time. ρ. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS 8.d) relates the temperature with the time and the location was given in the question (it is not the solution of any model).I.I.e) =0 e −β t + ∂y .I.b) with the boundary condition of zero velocity at the lower surface Uy (y = 0) = 0.I. Mass flow due to temperature tom. The expression that connects the temperature with the space for the final temperature as T − T0 H0 − y =α T1 − T0 H0 (8. Solution The situation is unsteady state thus the unsteady state and one dimensional continuity equation has to be used which is ∂ρ ∂ (ρUy ) + =0 ∂t ∂y (8.1 function of the y coordinate. Assume that the velocity at the lower boundary is zero at all times. -8.I. Calculates the velocity of the liquid.b) results in ∂ρ ∂t ∂ρ Uy ∂y 0 ∂ Uy α HH−y 1 − e−β t 0 αβ H0 − y H0 (8. t0 . it is treated as a constant. Substituting the density.d) ρ1 − ρ0 H0 Equation (8.I. Assume that the actual temperature is exponentially approaches to a linear temperature profile as depicted in Figure 8.3.I.a) T1 ρ1 H0(t) T0 ρ0 y T(t = 0) T(t > 0) T(t = ∞) where ρ1 is the density at the surface and where ρ0 is the density at the botFig.3.236 CHAPTER 8.1 Mass Conservation Examples Example 8. At time. Assume that the velocity is only a difference for example 8.

I.I.2 Simplified Continuity Equation A simplified equation can be obtained for a steady state in which the transient term is eliminated as (in a vector form) · (ρ U ) = 0 (8.I.i) It can be noticed that indeed the velocity is a function of the time and space y.h) or the velocity is Uy = β 2 H0 − y 2 (H0 − y) e−β t (1 − y) (1 − e−β t ) (8. (8. it can be treated for the solution of equation (8. Equation (8.f) Uy is a function of the time but not y.e) is first order ODE with the boundary condition Uy (y = 0) = 0 which can be arranged as 0 ∂ Uy α HH−y 1 − e−β t 0 ∂y = −α β H0 − y H0 e−β t (8.19) If the fluid is incompressible then the governing equation is a volume conservation as ·U = 0 Note that this equation appropriate only for a single phase case. Example 8.8. .I.I.f) as a constant5 . End Solution 8.g) Utilizing the boundary condition Uy (y = 0) = 0 yields Uy α H0 − y 1 − e−β t H0 = −α β 2 H0 − y 2 H0 e−β t (y − 1) (8. MASS CONSERVATION 237 Equation (8.f) holds for any time and thus.2.2.2: In many coating processes a thin film is created by a continuous process in which liquid injected into a moving belt which carries the material out as exhibited in Figure 8.4.I.I. the integration with respect to y yields Uy α H0 − y 1 − e−β t H0 = −α β 2 H0 − y 2 H0 e−β t y + c (8. Hence.20) 5 Since the time can be treated as a constant for y integration.

238 CHAPTER 8. If the frame of reference was moving with the belt then there is only velocity component in the y direction7 . Assume that the film temFig. One of the early pioneers who suggest this idea is Higbie which Higbie’s equation named after him. it can be assumed that the material moves with the belt in the x direction in the same velocity.II.1 for a general function T = F (x). this author Master thesis is extension Higbie’s equation.c) Where Ux is the belt velocity.I. At any point the governing equation in coordinate system that moving with the belt is ∂ (ρ Ux ) ∂ (ρ Uy ) (8.II.b). Mass flow in coating process perature is only a function of the distance for example 8.II. however it can be considered as steady state.4.b) can be written as Ux ∂ρ ∂ (ρ Uy ) =− ∂x ∂y (8. from the extraction point.d) into the governing equation results in ∂Uy ρ α ∂F (x) = (ρ0 − ρ∞ ) ∂y Ux ∂x (8.a) ρ0 − ρ∞ T0 − T∞ State your assumptions. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS The temperature and mass transfer takT0 ing place which reduces (or increases) the thickness of the film. Higbie’s idea which was rejected by the scientific establishment. .e) 6 The presentation of one dimension time dependent problem to two dimensions problems can be traced to heat and mass transfer problems. The relationship between the density and the temperature is linear as ρ − ρ∞ T − T∞ =α (8.16 . Solution This problem is somewhat similar to Example 8. Hence equation (8.II. The solution is similar to the previous Example 8.II.b) + =0 ∂x ∂y At first. He spend the rest of his life to proof it and ending in a suicide.2. See the resembles to equation (8.II. However. the discussion about this point is beyond the scope of this section. asH0 T0 T(x) T∞ sume that no mass transfer occurs or can x be neglected and the main mechanism is x heat transfer. Calculate the film velocity field if the density is a function of the temperature.II. -8. On personal note. This assumption is consistent with the first solution (no stability issues).d) Substituting this relationship in equation (8. 7 In reality this assumption is correct only in a certain range. For this example. ∂ρ α ∂F (x) = (ρ0 − ρ∞ ) ∂x Ux ∂x (8.

Solution The flow field must comply with the mass conservation (8. Calculate the velocity field in this case.19) is applicable and used as ∂ a x2 + b y 2 (m ex+y ) ∂ Uy (m ex+y ) + =0 ∂x ∂y (8.III.III. It can be noted that x should be treated as a constant parameter for the y coordinate integration.III.II.III.III.II.II.8.g) Example 8.b) (8. Uy = − 2 a x + f (x) = −2 x y + f (x) (8. Ux = a x2 + b y 2 Next. For the second part equation (8. The velocity. Ux has also arbitrary function in the y component.III. assume the density is also a function of the location in the form of ρ = m ex+y Where m is constant.a) Equation (8. Assume that the density is constant and calculate the vertical velocity (y component) for the following x velocity component.c) is an ODE with constant coefficients.e) . MASS CONSERVATION The density is expressed by equation (8.2. Notice the symmetry of the situation. Thus.f) Notice that ρ could “come” out of the derivative (why?) and move into the RHS.c) (8. Applying the boundary condition Uy (t = 0) = 0 results in Uy = α ∂F (x) (ρ0 − ρ∞ ) y ρ(x) Ux ∂x End Solution (8.3: The velocity in a two dimensional field is assumed to be in a steady state.d) The integration constant in this case is not really a constant but rather an arbitrary function of x.a) and thus Uy = α ∂F (x) (ρ0 − ρ∞ ) y + c ρ Ux ∂x 239 (8.20) thus 2ax + ∂Uy =0 ∂y (8.

The derivative of each componnet are ∂Ux = t2 z ∂x ∂Uy =t ∂y ∂Uz =t ∂z (8. The private solution is Uy |private = −b y 2 − 2 y + 2 − a x2 − 2 a x The total solution is Uy = c e−y + −b y 2 − 2 y + 2 − a x2 − 2 a x (8. The homogeneous equation is ∂ Uy + Uy ∂y =0 (8.IV.h) The solution for (8.IV.4: Can the following velocities co-exist Ux = (x t) z 2 Uy = (x t) + (y t) + (z t) Uz = (x t) + (y t) + (z t) (8. this flow field is not steady state since it contains time componnet.h) is Uy = c e−y (see for an explanation in the appendix).III.j) (8.III.III.g) ∂y a Equation (8.III.III.i) End Solution Example 8.IV.b) Hence the gradient or the combination of these derivatives is U = t2 z + 2 t (8. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS Taking the derivative of the first term while moving the second part to the other side results in ∂ Uy b a 2 x + x2 + y 2 ex+y = − ex+y + Uy (8.III. Thus.c) .240 CHAPTER 8.III.g) is a first order ODE that can be solved by combination of the homogeneous solution with the private solution (see for an explanation in the Appendix). Is the flow is incompressible? Is the flow in a steady state condition? Solution Whether the solution is in a steady state or not can be observed from whether the velocity contains time component.III.a) in the flow field.f) a ∂y The exponent can be canceled to further simplify the equation (8.f) and switching sides to be ∂ Uy b + Uy = −a 2 x + x2 + y 2 (8. This continuity equation is checked if the flow incompressible (constant density).

MASS CONSERVATION 241 The divergence isn’t zero thus this flow. is substituted.8. However physically there are velocity components in y and z directions. is a function of x results of ∂ρ 5 α y ∂ρ = −ρ x e5 α y (cos (α t)) − e (cos (α t)) ∂t ∂x Equation (8. In that case the left hand side is 1 ∂ρ = c1 cos (α t) ∂t The solution of equation (8.e) is reduced to ODE and its solution is ρ= c1 sin (α t) + c2 α (8.e) . ρ.V. The initial density is ρ(t = 0) = ρ0 .c) 1 ∂ρ ∂ρ 5 α y = −ρ x e5 α y − e cos (α t) ∂t ∂x (8. must be compressible flow. Hence.V.f) (8. if it exist.a) Mathematically speaking.b) into equation (8. this kind of presentation is possible. This flow can exist only for a limit time since over time the divergence is unbounded (a source must exist). these physical components are ignored for academic reasons. End Solution Example 8.V.V. In this problem.d) A possible solution is when the left and the right hand sides are equal to a constant.V.c) can be separated to yield f (t) f (y) (8. Ux . Using.V.a) and noticing that the density.a) is first order partial differential equation which can be converted to an ordinary differential equations when the velocity component. Equation (8.V. ∂Ux = e5 α y (cos (α t)) ∂x (8.V. Solution This problem is one dimensional unsteady state and for a compressible substance.V.2.b) Substituting equation (8.V.5: Find the density as a function of the time for a given one dimensional flow with Ux = x e5 α y (cos (α t)).V. the mass conservation is reduced only for one dimensional form as ∂ρ ∂ (Ux ρ) + =0 ∂t ∂x (8.

are presented. scalar.k) Where the constant. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS The same can be done for the right hand side as ρ x e5 α y + ∂ρ 5 α y e = c1 ∂x (8.j) The solution is the multiplication of equation (8.22) .21) Where Φ is the total quantity of the system which has a volume V and a surface area of A which is a function of time. real value.V.j) by (8.3. c1 vanishes as well and the solution contain only the homogeneous part and the private solution is dropped ρ = c2 e− x2 2 (8.V.3 Conservation of General Quantity 8. is an arbitrary function of the y coordinate.V. t).V.f) transfered to ρ = c2 e− x2 2 c1 sin (α t) + c2 α (8.h) ρx + = 5 α y = c3 ∂x e Equation (8.i) ρ = e− 2   2 √ c− 2 which indicates that the solution is a complex number thus the constant. y.V. must be zero and thus the constant. and independent of y thus equation (8.V.V.g.V.1 Generalization of Mathematical Approach for Derivations In this section a general approach for the derivations for conservation of any quantity e. A change with time is D DΦ = Dt Dt φ ρ dV sys (8.g) The term e5 α y is always positive.h) is a constant coefficients first order ODE which its solution discussed extensively in the appendix.g) becomes ∂ρ c1 (8.h) is given by   impossible solution √ 2 x i  π i c3 erf √x  (8. The total amount of quantity that exist in arbitrary system is Φ= sys φ ρ dV (8. End Solution 8. c3 .V.242 CHAPTER 8. c2 . The solution of (8. Suppose that the property φ is under a study which is a function of the time and location as φ(x.V. vector or tensor. z.

3.1 Examples of Several Quantities The General Mass Time Derivative DΦ Dt Using φ = 1 is the same as dealing with the mass conservation. The integral is carried over arbitrary system.2.33)) yields D Dt φ ρ dV = sys 243 d dt φ ρ dV + cv A ρ φ U · dA (8.3.28) 8 These integrals are related to RTT.27) 8. . the volume integral can be changed to the surface integral) as ρ φ U · dA = A V · (ρ φ U ) dV (8.3.21) LHS can be changed to simply the derivative of Φ. the derivative can enter into the integral and thus combining the two integrals on the RHS results in D Dt φ ρ dV = sys cv d (φ ρ) + dt · (ρ φ U ) dV (8.2 8.23) The last term on the RHS can be converted using the divergence theorem (see the appendix8 ) from a surface integral into a volume integral (alternatively. Basically the divergence theorem relates the flow out (or) in and the sum of the all the changes inside the control volume.8. In that case which is equal to zero as     φ       d  1 ρ  dV    φ     dx dy dz = 0   ρ 1 U   + ·   dt   - = Dρ Dt (8.26) The definition of equation (8.24) into equation (8. CONSERVATION OF GENERAL QUANTITY Using RTT to change the system to a control volume (see equation (5.24) Substituting equation (8.23) yields D Dt φ ρ dV = sys d dt φ ρ dV + cv cv · (ρ φ U ) dV (8.25) Since the volume of the control volume remains independent of the time. For an infinitesimal control volume the change is DΦ ∼ = Dt d (φ ρ) + dt dV · (ρ φ U ) dx dy dz (8.

The substantial derivative represents the change rate of the density at a point which moves with the fluid. t) k Therefor the acceleration will be U d Uy d Uz DU d Ux i+ j+ = k Dt dt dt dt (8. y. Acceleration Direct Derivations One of the important points is to find the fluid particles acceleration.21) leads to CHAPTER 8. Therefore.31) Equation (8. and t).36) . z. y. z. and hence =1 Ux Uy Uz D Ux ∂ Ux d t ∂ Ux d x ∂ U x d y ∂ U x d z = + + + Dt ∂t d t ∂x d t ∂y d t ∂z d t The acceleration in the x can be written as D Ux ∂ Ux ∂ Ux ∂ Ux ∂ Ux ∂ Ux U = + Ux + Uy + Uz = + (U · Dt ∂t ∂x ∂y ∂z ∂t ) Ux (8. y.35) The same can be developed to the other two coordinates which can be combined (in a vector form) as ∂U dU U = + (U · dt ∂t )U (8. The term in the bracket LHS is referred in the literature as substantial derivative. A fluid particle velocity is a function of the location and time. z. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS Dρ ∂ρ = 0 −→ + Dt ∂t Equation (8. t) = Ux (x.30) can be further rearranged so derivative of the density is equal the divergence of velocity as substantial derivative 1 ρ ∂ρ +U ∂t ·ρ =− ·U (8. y.29) ·U = 0 (8.31) relates the density rate of change or the volumetric change to the velocity divergence of the flow field. y.29) can be rearranged as ∂ρ +U ∂t ·ρ+ρ · (ρ U ) = 0 (8. x.33) (8. z.32) The velocity components are a function of four variables. it can be written that U (x.34) (8. t) i + Uy (x.30) Equation (8. t) j + Uz (x. (x.244 Using equation (8.

The area has a direction or orientation which control the results of this division. and τxy is the stress acting on surface x in the y direction. A common approach is to collect the stress in a “standard” orientation and then if needed the stresses can be reorientated to a new direction. A ) (8. The notation τ (xi ) is used to denote the stresses on xi surface. The transformation is available because the “standard” surface can be transformed using trigonometrical functions.37) The time derivative referred in the literature as the local acceleration which vanishes when the flow is in a steady state. While the flow is in a steady state there is only convecive acceleration of the flow.38) It was shown that in a static case (or in better words. However. when the shear stresses are absent) it was written τ = −P n (8. 8. So it can be written that F τ = f (F . This division creates a tensor which the physical meaning will be explained here (the mathematical explanation can be found in the mathematical appendix of the book). similarly for τxz .40) where τxx is the stress acting on surface x in the x direction.39) It also was shown that the pressure has to be continuous.4 Momentum Conservation The relationship among the shear stress various components have to be established. The stress is a relationship between the force and area it is acting on or force divided by the area (division of vector by a vector). .4. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION or in a more explicit form as local acceleration convective acceleration 245 dU ∂U ∂U ∂U ∂U = + U +U +U dt ∂t ∂x ∂y ∂z (8. It can be noticed that no mathematical symbols are written between the components.8. The flow in a nozzle is an example to flow at steady state but yet has acceleration which flow with a very low velocity can achieve a supersonic flow. these stresses that act on every point and have three components on every surface and depend on the surface orientation. Similar “vectors” exist for the y and z coordinates which can 9 It can be argue that there is physical meaning that does not significant to the understanding of the subject. In Cartesian coordinates on surface in the x direction the stresses are τ (x) = τxx τxy τxz (8. The reason for this omission is that there is no physical meaning for it9 .

DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS  τxz τyz  τzz τxx τ =  τyx τzx Suppose that a straight angle tetrahedron is under stress as shown in Figure 8.5. Stress diagram on a tetrahedron face area of the tetrahedron in the x dishape. and z directions. A finite angular distortion of 10 For infinitesimal change the lines can be approximated as straight. This matrix is referred to as stress tensor and as it can be observed has nine terms. The cubical rotation can involve two parts: one distortion and one rotation10 . Here only one will be discussed the same conclustions can be drown on the other direction. rection and δAz is the surface area of the tetrahedron in the z direction.45) The same can be done for y and z directions.41) Z Y τn ℵ τnn τnℓ τ τ xx xy τxz τ yx τy y X τyz where δAy is the surface area of the tetrahedron in the y direction. These relationships provide the transformation for the different orientations which depends only angles of the orientations. .43) Where here ℵ.44) ·j ℵ · j  δAn  Fx n·k ·k ℵ·k When the tetrahedron is shrunk to a point relationship of the stress on the two sides can be expended by Taylor series and keeping the first derivative. -8. If the first derivative is neglected (tetrahedron is without acceleration) the two sides are related as −τyx δAy − τxx δAx − τzx δAz = δAn τnn n · i − τn · i − τnℵℵ · i (8. The areas are related to each other through angles. The opposing forces which acting on the slanted surface in the x direction are Fx = δAn τnn n · i − τn · i − τnℵℵ · i (8.246 be written in a matrix form  CHAPTER 8. δAx is the surFig.5.42) τxy τyy τzy (8. and n are the local unit coordinates on n surface the same can be written in the x. The Symmetry of the Stress Tensor A small liquid cubical has three possible rotation axes. The forces balance in the x direction excluding the slanted surface is Fx = −τyx δAy − τxx δAx − τzx δAz (8. The transformation matrix is then     n·i ·i ℵ·i Fx   Fy  =  n · j (8.

48) where η is the local coordinate in the y direction stating at y and “mostly used” between y < η < y + dy. However. Hence. Diagram to analysis the shear stress specific location. such as the magnetic fields. The clarity of this analysis can τyx be improved if additional terms are taken.4. the shear stress at point x + dx is τxy |x+dx = τxy + dτxy dx dx (8. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION 247 infinitesimal cube requires an infinite shear which required for infinite moment. This point is for self convincing since it deals with a “strange” and problematic “animals” of integral of infinitesimal length.6 is Mz = Izz dθ dt (8. y Advance material can be skipped The shear stress in the surface direction potentially can result in the torque due to the change in the shear stress12 . The shear stress at point x is τxy .47) The same can be said for τyx for y τyy direction.46) Where Mz is the cubic moment around the cubic center and Izz 11 is the moment of inertia around that center. τxx at x can be expended as a linear function τxx = τxx |y + dτxx dy η y (8. does not. For simplicity and generality. for the derivations in Example 3. can credx x ate torque. 12 This 11 See . yet it turn out that the results will be τxy τxx the same. point bother this author in the completeness of the proof. The moment that creats by this acτyx τ tion can be neglected (the changes are inyy significant). but provided to those who wonder why body forces can contribute to the torque while pressure.6. The body force can exert tensor. Balance of momentum around the z direction shown in Figure 8. The normal body force (gravdy τ τxx xy ity) acts through the cubic center of gravity. -8. The momentum can be assested by the shear stresses which act on it.8. for cases that body force. It can be ignored.5 for moment of inertia. torque is due to the fact that the body force is not uniform and hence not act through the mass center. However. even though varied. For example. the rotation of the infinitesimal fluid cube can be viewed as it is done almost as a solid body rotation. it is assumed that the external body force exerts a torque GT per unit volume at the Fig.

The reason that this term is neglected because on the other face of the cubic contributes an identical term but in the opposing direction (see Figure 8.” .49) results y+dy y τxx |y + dτxx dy η y τyy (8.50) isn’t zero (non symFig.248 The moment that results from this shear force (clockwise positive) is y+dy CHAPTER 8. since Potto Project books are used extensively and numerous people asked to include this notation it was added.52) which means since that dx −→ 0 and dy −→ 0 that GT + τxy = τyx (8.6). The shear stress creating torque.7. It is believed that this notation should and can be used only after the physical meaning was “digested.49) y η dy dx dη η− dy 2 Substituting (8.50) x The integral of (8. End Advance material The net torque in the z-direction around the particle’s center would then be (τyx ) dx dy dz − 2 τxy + τyx + ∂τxy ∂x ∂τxy ∂x dx dy dz 2 + (τxy ) dx dy dz − 2 Izz (8.51) 2 2 dθ dt dx dy dz 2 = ρ dx dy dz (dx) + (dy) The actual components which contribute to the moment are ∼ =0 (dx)2 + (dy)2 =0 GT + τxy − τxy + ∂ (τyx − τxy ) =ρ ∂y 12 dθ dt (8. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS τyy τxx (η) y η− dy 2 dη (8.53) This analysis can be done on the other two directions and hence the general conclusion is that GT + τij = τji (8. y. For the case of GT = 0 the stress tensor becomes symmetrical. However. z and the j is any of the other x. y. metrical function around the center of integration).54) where i is one of x. The gravity is a body force that is considered in many kind of calculations and this force cause a change in symmetry of the stress 13 The index notation is not the main mode of presentation in this book.48) into (8. z 13 . -8.

-8. can be neglected14 .57) the Dimensional Analysis a discussion about this effect hopefully will be presented. gravitation forces (body forces).8.8.56) The dot product yields a force in the directing of x. If the body forces effect is neglected or do not exist in the problem then regardless the coordinate system orientation τij = τji (i = j) (8.5. for almost all practical purposes.5 Derivations of the Momentum Equation τzz + ∂τzz dz ∂z ∂τ y y + ∂ y dy τ yy Z τxz τxx τxy τxx + τxz + τxy + ∂τxz dx ∂x ∂τxx dx ∂x τyy ∂τxy dx ∂x y τzz x Fig. The magnetic body forces on the other hand are significant and have to be included in the calculations.55) 8. For surface forces that acting on the cubic are surface forces. The shear stress at different surfaces. Equation (6. this change. The body force that acting on infinitesimal cubic in x direction is i · f B = f B x dx dy dz (8. Later Newton second law will be used and generalized.8).11) is equivalent to Newton second law for fluids. Previously it was shown that equation (6. However. . All shear stress shown in surface x and x + dx. DERIVATIONS OF THE MOMENTUM EQUATION 249 tensor. and internal forces.11) is also applicable for the small infinitesimal cubic. The surface forces in x direction on the x surface on are dAx dAx fxx = τxx |x+dx × dy dz − τxx |x × dy dz 14 In (8. One direction of the vector equation will be derived for x Cartesian coordinate (see Figure 8.

60) after rearrangement equations such as (8. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS The surface forces in x direction on the y surface on are dAy dAy fxy = τyx |y+dy × dx dz − τyx |y × dx dz (8. The shear stresses can be expanded into Taylor series as τix |i+di = τix + ∂ (τix ) di + · · · ∂i i (8.62) The same can be obtained for the z component ρ DUz = Dt ∂τxz ∂τyz ∂τzz + + ∂x ∂y ∂z + ρ fG z (8. the total net surface force results from the shear stress in the x direction is fx = ∂τyx ∂τzx ∂τxx + + ∂x ∂y ∂z dx dy dz (8.64) can be written in a vector form which combined all three components into one equation. or z.57) and (8.61) for y coordinate is ρ DUy = Dt ∂τxy ∂τyy ∂τzy + + ∂x ∂y ∂z + ρ fG y (8.63) Advance material can be skipped Generally the component momentum equation is as ρ DUi = Dt ∂τii ∂τji ∂τki + + ∂i ∂j ∂j End Advance material + ρ fG i (8.59) where i in this case is x. Hence.64) Where i is the balance direction and j and k are two other coordinates. Equation (8.250 CHAPTER 8.58) The same can be written for the z direction.61) equivalant equation (8.58) transformed into internal forces surface forces body forces DUx & & ρ&   & = dx dy dz Dt ∂τxx ∂τyx ∂τzx + + ∂x ∂y ∂z & & & & dx dy dz dx dy dz &   & + fG x ρ &   & (8. y. The advantage of the vector from allows the usage of the different coordinates. The vector form is ρ U DU = Dt · τ (i) + ρ fG (8.65) .

Additionally. B @ t + dt the deformation can be viewed as a function of the velocity field. when applying the shear stress in fluids. y. rotates and changes the shape (the purpule color in in Figure 8.61) or (8. there is no left over stresses (In other words when the “no shear stress” situation exist the rate of deformation or strain is zero). or z.62) or (8.66) End Advance material Equations (8.8. DERIVATIONS OF THE MOMENTUM EQUATION where here τ (i) = τix i + τiy j + τiz k is part of the shear stress tensor and i can be any of the x.Fig. In contrast. The control volume moves to a new location. The similarity to solids the increase shear stress in fluids yields larger deformations. -8.5. As engineers   ∂Uy  Uy dt U + do in general. At time t. The translational movement is referred to a movement of body without change of the body and without rotation. reduction of the shear stress does three combinations of the deformation shown by purple color relative to blue color.63) requires that the stress tensor be defined = + + in term of the velocity/deformaiton. In this model the relationship bewtween the (shear) stresses and x 45◦ rate of strains are assumed to be linear.der continuous angle deformation. not return the material to its original state as in solids. Further. Or in index (Einstein) notation as ρ DUi ∂τji = + ρ fG i Dt ∂xi 251 (8.9 (by the blue color). the simplest model is asdt y ∂x @t C A sumed which referred as the solid continA Uxdt uum model. In solid material. The rotation is the second movement that referred to a change in of the relative orientation inside x’ . and c.9). b. Thus this “solid” model is a linear relationship with three main assumptions: y’ a. At time t + dt the control volume undergoes three different changes. The   relationship between the stress tensor and ∂Uy  U + dt y y ∂y deformation depends on the classes of maD terials the stresses acts on. the control volume is at a square shape and at a location as depicted in Figure 8. There is no preference in the orientation (also call isentropic fluid).9. Control volume at t and t + dt unsult is a continuous deformation. a linear relationship exist between the shear stress and the rate of shear strain. the shear stress yields a fix amount of deformation. the re. Notice the more.

is the diagonal component which to be dealt below.71) Fig.69) where. This deformation angle coefficient is assumed to be a property of the fluid. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS the control volume. The third change is the misconfiguration or control volume (deformation). the relationship for the two of stress tensor parts was established. However. the symmetry dxy = dUx was not assumed and or required because dy rotation of the control volume. first assumption was mentioned above.72) not marked as important equation this equation is the source of the derivation. In general equation (8. The angle between x to the new location of the control volume can be approximate for a small angle as dγx = tan dt Uy + dUy dx dx − Uy dx = tan dUy dx ∼ dUy = dx (8.70) D y τxx τxy A τx y ’ ’ τx x ’ ’ C τyx τyy x and for the directions of y z as τyz = µ Dγyz =µ Dt dUz dUy + dy dz y’ (8. µ is the “normal” or “ordinary” viscosity coefficient which relates the linear coefficient of proportionality and shear stress. The deformation of the control volume has several components (see the top of Figure 8. .9).69) can be written as τij = µ 15 While 16 The Dγij =µ Dt dUj dUi + di dj x’ 45◦ (8. For the assumption of a linear fluid15 .10.252 CHAPTER 8. Advance material can be skipped two coordinates in 45◦ orientations. The only missing thing. The shear stress is related to the change in angle of the control volume lower left corner. τxy = µ Dγxy =µ Dt dUy dUx + dx dy B (8. Shear stress at Note that the viscosity coefficient (the linear coefficient16 ) is assumed to be the same regardless of the direction. In a similar fashion it can be written to other directions for x z as τxz Dγxz =µ =µ Dt dUz dUx + dx dz (8. at this stage. It can be noticed at this stage.67) The total angle deformation (two sides x and y) is Dγxy dUy dUx = + Dt dx dy dU (8. under isentropic material it is assumed that all the shear stresses contribute equally.68) In these derivatives. This assumption is referred as isotropic viscosity. -8.

73) dividing by dx and after some rearrangements utilizing the identity τxy = τyx results in τxx + τyy + τyx = τx’x’ 2 Setting the similar analysis in the y’ results in τxx + τyy − τyx = τy’y’ 2 Subtracting (8. The force balance in the x’ is Ax cos θx dy τxx √ 1 1 1 1 √ + dx τyy √ + dx τyx √ + dy τxy √ = dx 2 τx’x’ 2 2 2 2 Ay cos θy Ay cos θy Ax cos θy Ax’ (8.5.x.10. . It can be noticed √ that “dx’” surface is 2 times larger than dx and dy surfaces.76) (8. y’ coordinates) and the angular strain rate in the regular (x. y coordinates). The normal shear stress relates to the change in the diagonal line length change. In addition. This relationship can be obtained by changing the coordinates orientation as depicted by Figure 8. the shear stresses are acting in this direction. The diagonal lines (line BC and line AD in Figure 8.11(a) depicts the deformations of the triangular particles between time t and t + dt. z) appears in the shear matrix diagonal. on the “x” surface (lower surface) and the “y” (left) surface. The dx is constructed so it equals to dy. y) is frame related to the strain rates in the (x’.74) Equation (8.76) becomes τyx = 1 (τx x − τy’y’ ) 2 ’’ (8. DERIVATIONS OF THE MOMENTUM EQUATION where i = j and i = x or y or z.8. End Advance material 253 Normal Stress The normal stress. For example. Figure 8. y. To find the main (or the diagonal) stress the coordinates are rotate by 45◦ .74) results in 2 τyx = τx’x’ − τy’y’ or dividing by 2 equation (8. The forces acting in the direction of x’ on the ellement are combination of several terms.9) in the control volume move to the new locations.75) (8. τii (where i is either . the sides AB and AC rotate in unequal amount which make one diagonal line longer and one diagonal line shorter. y’) frame. The angular strain rate in the (x. The linear deformations in the x’ and y’ directions which is rotated 45◦ relative to the x and y axes can be expressed in both coordinates system.77) (8.75) from (8.76) relates the difference between the normal shear stress and the normal shear stresses in x’.

78) d x= dx The rate of the strain in y direction is d y = a dx (8. Fig. c. x (b) Deformation of the straight angle triangle.11(b). cos 45◦ or sin 45◦ times the change contribute as first approximation to change. The linear strain in the x direction can be computed by observing Figure 8. The small deformations a .80) Here. -8. The linear angular deformation in xy direction is dγxy = b+d dx (8. It ◦ can be approximated that the change is about 45 because changes are infinitesimally small.81) . and d in the Figure are related to the incremental linear strains.254 b CHAPTER 8.11. Hence.79) The total change in the deformation angle is related to tan θ. Different triangles deformation for the calculations of the normal stress. The hypotenuse of the triangle is oriented in the x’ direction (again observe Figure 8. b. The change in the hypotenuse length is (c + b) + (a + d) . in both sides (d/dx+b/dy) which in turn is related to combination of the two sides angles. the ratio strain in the x’ direction is 2 2 d x’ = (c + b) + (a + d) √ 2dx (c + b) (c + b) √ + √ + f (dx’) 2 √ 2 2dx ∼0 (8. The original length of the √ 2 2 hypotenuse 2dx. and d y is its linear strain in the y-direction. d x is the linear strain (increase in length divided by length) of the particle in the x direction. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS b y’ y x’ a 45◦ y a d+a c+b d c 45◦ y’ x’ x (a) Deformations of the isosceles triangular. Thus.11(b)). The rate of strain in the x direction is c (8.

DERIVATIONS OF THE MOMENTUM EQUATION 255 Equation (8. . the strain in y’ coordinate can be interpreted to be d y’ = 1 (d 2 y +d y − dγxy ) (8.83) Notice the negative sign before dγxy . Changing it to the Eulerian coordinates transforms equation (8.76) τxy be substituted and equation (8.86) can be continued and replaced as D y’ 1 D x’ − = (τx x − τy’y’ ) Dt Dt 2µ ’ ’ Figure 8.84) describing in Lagrangian coordinates a single particle.89) ple denotes t and blue is for t + dt.78).83) results in d x’ −d y’ = dγxy (8.85) From (8.84) Equation (8.79). Linear strain of the element purD y’ ∂Uy’ = Dt ∂y’ (8.81) can be interpreted as (using equations (8.80)) as d x’ = 1 2 a+b+c+d dx = 1 (d 2 y +d y + dγxy ) (8. The linear deformation is the difference between the two sides as D x’ ∂Ux’ = Dt ∂x’ (8. Dashed squares denotes the movement without the linear change.12.5.82) In the same fashion.87) y’     Uy’ + ∂Uy ’ ’ dy  dt  ∂y ’  Uy’dt ∂Ux ’ ’  Ux ’ + dx  dt ∂x ’ x’   The same way it can written for the y’ coordinate.69) it can be observed that the right hand side of equation (8.12 depicts the approximate linear deformation of the element. Fig.86) From equation (8. Combining equation (8. (8.84) into D y’ Dγxy D x’ − = Dt Dt Dt (8.88) (8.85) can be replaced by τxy /µ to read D x’ D y’ τxy − = Dt Dt µ (8.8.82) with equation (8. -8. and (8.

DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS Equation (8. The mechanical pressure can be defined as averaging of the normal stress acting on a infinitesimal sphere.88) can be written in the y’ and is similar by substituting the coordinates.93) Dividing the restuls by 3 so that one can obtained the following “mechanical” pressure τx’x’ = 2 ∂Ux’ τx’x’ + τy’y’ + τz’z’ − µ +2 µ 3 ∂x’ 3 ∂Uy’ ∂Uz’ ∂Ux’ + + ∂x’ ∂y’ ∂z’ (8. Batchelor. It can be shown that this two definitions are “identical” in the limits18 .94) can be written as ∂Ux + ∂x is the mechanical pressure and is τxx = −Pm + 2 µ 2 µ ·U 3 defined as (8.89) changes into τx’x’ − τy’y’ = 2µ ∂Ux’ ∂Uy’ − ∂x’ ∂y’ (8.256 CHAPTER 8.88) and (8.92) transforms it into 3 τx’x’ = τx’x’ + τy’y’ + τz’z’ + 6 µ ∂Ux’ − 2µ ∂x’ ∂Ux’ ∂Uy’ ∂Uz’ + + ∂x’ ∂y’ ∂z’ (8. With this definition and noticing that the coordinate system x’–y’ has no special significance and hence equation (8. The rate of strain relations can be substituted by the velocity and equations (8. p. In situations where the main diagonal terms of the stress tensor are not the same in all directions (in some viscous flows) this property can be served as a measure of the local normal stress.91) Adding equations (8. is defined as the (negative) average value of pressure in directions of x’–y’–z’. Cambridge University Press.94) must be valid in any coordinate system thus equation (8.92) rearranging equation (8. An Introduction to Fluid Mechanics.90) and (8.96) identical only in the limits to the mechanical measurements.95) Again where Pm Mechanical Pressure τxx + τyy + τzz Pm = − 3 17 It 18 G. This pressure is a true scalar value of the flow field since the propriety is averaged or almost17 invariant to the coordinate transformation. 1967. Pm .94) The “mechanical” pressure. K. For example in y’–z’ plan one can obtained τx’x’ − τz’z’ = 2µ ∂Uz’ ∂Ux’ − ∂x’ ∂z’ (8.91) results in 2 4 (3 − 1) τx’x’ − τy’y’ − τz’z’ = (6 − 2) µ ∂Ux’ − 2µ ∂x’ ∂Uy’ ∂Uz’ + ’ ∂y ∂z’ (8. (8. .90) Similar two equations can be obtained in the other two plans.141.

connection between τxy and the deformation was built.3.9. this association was established. if the derivations before were to include additional terms.99) End Advance material where δij is the Kronecker delta what is δij = 1 when i = j and δij = 0 otherwise. To reduced one unknown (the shear stress) equation (8.100) 3 Summary of The Stress Tensor The above derivations were provided as a long mathematical explanation19 .5.98) Advance material can be skipped or index notation 2 τij = − Pm + µ 3 ·U δij + µ ∂Ui ∂Uj + ∂xj ∂xi (8. it will be provide before version 0.72). The linkage between the stress in the rotated coordinates to the deformation was established. This correction results in P = Pm + λ ·U (8. Using the coordinates transformation.101) 19 Since the publishing the version 0. Commonality engineers like to combined the two difference expressions into one as τxy or τxx 2 = − Pm + µ 3 =1 2 = − Pm + µ 3 =0 ·U δxy +µ ∂Ux ∂Uy + ∂y ∂x (8.61) the relationship between the stress tensor and the velocity were to be established.0 several people ask this author to summarize conceptually the issues. This expression suggests a new definition of the thermodynamical pressure is Thermodynamic Pressure 2 P = Pm + µ · U (8.8. First. an additional correction will be needed.97) ·U δxy +µ ∂Ux ∂Uy + ∂x ∂y (8. Second Viscosity Coefficient The coefficient 2/3µ is experimental and relates to viscosity. Then the association between normal stress and perpendicular stress was constructed. However.1 . DERIVATIONS OF THE MOMENTUM EQUATION 257 It can be observed that the non main (diagonal) terms of the stress tensor are represented by an equation like (8. While this expression has the advantage of compact writing. it does not add any additional information. With God help.2.

τxy . In most cases. The thermodynamic pressure always tends to follow the mechanical pressure during a change. as τij = − P + 2 µ−λ 3 · U δij + µ ∂Ui ∂Uj + ∂xj ∂xi (8. λ is large (3 times µ) but the net effect is small because in that cases · U −→ 0. For complex liquids this coefficient. is τxy = τyx = ∂Uy ∂Ux + ∂x ∂y · U = 0.According to second law of thermodynamic derivations (not shown here and are under construction) demonstrate that λ must be positive. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS The value of λ is obtained experimentally.103) To explain equation (8.104) ∂Uy ∂y (8. In fact this effect is so insignificant that there is difficulty in to construct experiments so this effect can be measured.” Here the term bulk viscosity will be adapted. The expansion rate of change and the fluid molecular structure through λ control the difference. For example. for the τxx it can be written that τxx = −P + 2 and the y coordinate the equation is τyy = −P + 2 however the mix stress.106) 20 The reason that the effect vanish is because . Thus. This coefficient is referred in the literature by several terms such as the “expansion viscosity” “second coefficient of viscosity” and “bulk viscosity.258 CHAPTER 8. The dimension of the bulk viscosity.102) The significance of the difference between the thermodynamic pressure and the mechanical pressure associated with fluid dilation which connected by · U . this coefficient or the whole effect is vanished20 .105) (8. Clearly for incompressible flow. In material such as water. is similar to the viscosity µ. λ. ∂Ux ∂x (8. the total effect of the dilation on the flow is very small. Only in micro fluids and small and molecular scale such as in shock waves this effect has some significance.103). it can be written for spesific coordinates. Equation (8. λ. The physical meaning of · U represents the relative volume rate of change. neglecting this effect results in τij = −P δij + µ ∂Ui ∂Uj + ∂xj ∂xi (8.101) can be written in terms of the thermodynamic pressure P . can be over 100 times larger than µ. For simple gas (dilute monatomic gases) it can be shown that λ vanishes.

109) For incompressible flow the term · U vanishes.107) or in a vector form as N-S in stationary Coordinates U 1 DU =− P + µ+λ ( ·U) + µ ρ Dt 3 For in index form as ρ D Ui ∂ =− Dt ∂xi P+ 2 µ−λ 3 ·U + ∂ ∂xj µ ∂Ui ∂Uj + ∂xj ∂xi + f Bi (8.102) into equation (8. substitute equation (8.111) The momentum equation in Cartesian coordinate can be written explicitly for x coordinate as ρ ∂Ux + ∂t ∂Ux ∂Ux ∂Ux + Uy + Uz = ∂x ∂y ∂z 2 2 ∂ Ux ∂ Ux ∂ 2 Ux ∂P − +µ + + ∂x ∂x2 ∂y 2 ∂z 2 Ux (8. DERIVATIONS OF THE MOMENTUM EQUATION in ρ DUx Dt =− ∂ P+ 2 3µ 259 For the total effect.110) or in the index notation it is written ρ D Ui ∂P ∂ 2U =− +µ + f Bi Dt ∂xi ∂xi ∂xj (8. In the y coordinate the momentum equation is ρ ∂Uy + ∂t Ux ∂Uy ∂Uy ∂Uy + Uy + Uz = ∂x ∂y ∂z ∂2v ∂2v ∂2v ∂P +µ + 2 + 2 + ρgy − 2 ∂y ∂x ∂y ∂z (8.61) which results −λ ∂x ·U ∂ 2 Ux ∂ 2 Ux ∂ 2 Ux + + ∂x2 ∂y 2 ∂z 2 +µ f +f B x (8.8.108) is reduced to 2 U +fB (8.5.113) . thus equation (8.112) + ρgx Where gx is the the body force in the x direction (i · g ).108) Momentum for Incompressible Flow ρ U DU =− P +µ Dt 2 U +fB (8.

1–Dimensional free surface describing n and (8. The slip condition is dealing with a difference in the velocity between the solid (or other material) and the fluid media.1 Boundary Conditions Categories The governing equations that were developed earlier requires some boundary conditions and initial conditions.116) . In another view. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS in z coordinate the momentum equation is ρ ∂Uz + ∂t ∂Uz ∂Uz ∂Uz + Uy + Uz = ∂x ∂y ∂z ∂P ∂ 2 Uz ∂ 2 Uz ∂ 2 Uz − +µ + + 2 2 ∂z ∂x ∂y ∂z 2 Ux (8. In the literature.13). Another condition which affects whether the slip condition ext n ist is how rapidly of the velocity change. when the flow is with a strong direction velocity fluctuations. -8. the difference in the velocities vanishes as the scale increases.260 CHAPTER 8.6. A common velocity condition is that the liquid has the same value as the solid interface velocity.13. or in more general terms as the shear stress conditions (mostly at the interface). For this discussion. pressure. Mathematically the “no slip” condition is x written as f (x) y U t · (U f luid − U boundary ) = 0 b Fig. The solid surface is rough thus the liquid participles (or molecules) are slowed to be at the solid surface velocity.6 Boundary Conditions and Driving Forces 8. pressure (at the interface direction) and shear stress (perpendicular to the area). The slip condition (as oppose to “no slip” condition) exist in situations where the scale is very small and the velocity is relatively very small. The difference between the small scale and the large scale is that the slip can be neglected in the large scale while the slip cannot be neglected in the small scale. These conditions can be categorized by the velocity.114) + ρgz 8.115) is given in a vector form.115) b. This boundary condition was experimentally observed under many conditions yet it is not universal true. The slip condition canflow not be ignored in some regions. this condition is referred as the “no slip” condition. While this condition (8. the shear tensor will be separated into two categories. These conditions described physical situations that are believed or should exist or approximated. it is more common to write this condition as a given velocity at a certain point such as U( ) = U (8. t where n is referred to the area direction (perpendicular to the area see Figure 8.

this condition cannot be tolerated since infinite velocity (acceleration) is impossible. The jump in the density (between the two fluids) creates a surface tension which offset the jump in the shear stress. the relative perpendicular velocity at the interface must be zero. In this book. the transition is idealized an almost jump (a few molecules thickness). is extremely hard to handle because the location isn’t given but the derivative given on unknown location. While a jump in density does not break any physical laws (at least those present in the solution). There are situations where the transition should be analyzed as a continuous transition between two phases. The location of r the (free) moving boundary can be given as f (r .115) as U t · (U f luid − U boundary ) = f (Q. Furthermore. In these cases the assumptions are that the transition occurs in a sharp line. sometime. scale. a requirement on the acceleration (velocity) can be given in unknown position. The perpendicular relative velocity at the surface must be zero and therefore Df =0 Dt r on the surface f (r . t) = 0 (8. In other cases. the jump in a shear stress (without a jump in density) does break a physical law.8. The condition becomes as 0= ∂f ∂f ∂f + Ux + Uy ∂t ∂x ∂y (8. The condition (8. etc) (8. In reality the interface between these two fluids is not a sharp transition but only approximation (see for the surface theory). The ”slip” condition is written in similar fashion to equation (8. The free surface is a special case of moving surfaces where the surface between two distinct fluids. this condition will not be discussed (at least not plane to be written). Off course. the “no slip” condition is applicable to the ideal fluid (“inviscid flows”) because this kind of flow normally deals with large scales.117) As oppose to a given velocity at particular point. and the density has a jump while the shear stress are continuous (in some cases continuously approach zero value). BOUNDARY CONDITIONS AND DRIVING FORCES 261 Note. x. The shear stress difference is ∆τ (n) = 0 = ∆τ (n) upper − ∆τ (n) lower surface surface (8.115) can be mathematically represented in another way for free surface conditions. t) = 0 as the equation which describes the bounding surface. A jump in the shear stress creates infinite force on the adjoin thin layer.118) This condition is called the kinematic boundary condition. To make sure that all the material is accounted for in the control volume (does not cross the free surface).120) .119) The solution of this condition. y). there are situations where the fluid (above one of the sides) should be considered as weightless material. For example. The jump in shear stress can appear when the density has a jump in density. the free surface in the two dimensional case is represented as f (t.6. This condition is expressed mathematically by equating the shear stress difference to the forces results due to the surface tension.

122) t · τ (t) = −t · where n is the unit normal and t is a unit tangent to the surface (notice that direction pointed out of the “center” see Figure 8. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS where the index (n) indicate that shear stress are normal (in the surface area). The condition with curved surface are out the scope of this book yet mathematically the condition is given as without explanation as n · τ (n) = σ 1 1 + R1 R2 σ (8. no. Free surface of the steady flow of a Newtonian fluid in a finite channel. Rational Mech.125) The Pressure Condition The second condition that commonality prescribed at the interface is the static pressure at a specific location.57). Arch.262 CHAPTER 8. If the surface is straight there is no jump in the shear stress.123) where 1 is the upper surface and 2 is the lower surface. it just for completeness and can be ignored for most purposes. the moving surface condition) is that integration constant is unknown).13) and R1 and R2 are principal radii. In this category include the boundary conditions with issues of surface tension which were discussed earlier. .121) (8. The equation is given by ∂f ∂f + Ux = Uy ∂t ∂x (8. In index notation equation (8. this constant is determined from the volume conservation. The last condition is similar to the pressure condition of prescribed shear stress or a relationship to it. f (x)) 1 + (f (x)) 2 (8. For example in one dimensional22 n= t= (−f (x). 197–217. Anal. M. Jean. 3.121) is written21 as τij nj + σ ni (1) 1 1 + R1 R2 = τij nj (2) (8. 1) 1 + (f (x)) (1.124) 2 the unit vector is given as two vectors in x and y and the radius is given by equation (1. In same instances. It can be noticed that the boundary conditions that involve the surface tension are of the kind where the condition is given on boundary but no at a specific location. 22 A one example of a reference not in particularly important or significant just a random example. 21 There is no additional benefit in this writing. The static pressure is measured perpendicular to the flow direction. 74 (1980). One of results of the free surface condition (or in general.

} } } . Schematic of kerosene surface tension is result of temperature gradient. the case shown in Figure 8. The physical conditions in Figure 8. in general and gravity in a particular. somewhere downstream the temperature gradient is insignificant. The gravity is a common body force which is considered in many fluid mechanics problems. For example. In this book. the contribution due to the curvature is zero in the direction of the flow (see Figure 8. The outer diameter is depends on the surT ∂r ∂h face tension (the larger surface tension the smaller the liquid diameter).15. Consider. the surface tension gradient remains. under the assumption presented here.14. In fluid (mostly liquid) shear stress pulling side (surface) will have limited effect and yet sometime is significant and more rarely dominate. -8. The fluid surrounds the rode temperature and flows upwards. pulling the side will pull all the material. In that case. The liquid does not move up due the gravity (actually it is against the gravity) but because the surface tension. The gravity can be considered as a constant force in most cases (see for dimensional analysis for the reasons). Shear Stress and Surface Tension as Driving Force If the fluid was solid material. for example. the velocity at the gradent surface of the inner rode is zero. in the kerosene lamp the burning occurs at the surface of the lamp top and the liquid is at the bottom. Kerosene lamp.8. The velocity at U(ri) = 0 mix zone the outer surface is unknown. In that case.6. BOUNDARY CONDITIONS AND DRIVING FORCES Gravity as Driving Force 263 The body forces. The surface tension is a function of the temperature therefore the gradient in Fig. The only (almost) propelling source of the ∂σ flow is the surface gradient ( ∂n ). this effect is not discussed. are the condition that given on the flow beside the velocity. lamp.14. Even in that case. -8.15). The shear stress carry the Fig. material as if part of the material was a solid material. The boundary condition at outer surface given by a jump of the shear ∂U ∂σ constant = µ stress. shear stress (including the surface tension) and the pressure. However. One radius toward the center of the rode while the other radius is infinite (approximatly). there are two principal radii of the flow.14 are used to idealize the flow around an inner rode to understand how to apply the surface tension to the boundary conditions. It can be noticed that.

examples with two phase are presented. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS 8.7 Examples for Differential Equation (Navier-Stokes) Examples of an one-dimensional flow driven by the shear stress and pressure are presented. First. . U (The rightside is defined as positive). The momentum conservation leads − cv 23 The P dA + cv τ xy dA = 0 (8. -8. the flow in and the flow out are equal. Uℓ y flow direction dy x z Fig.16). The distance between the plates is .128) difference is measured at the bottom point of the plate. top plate is moving at speed of U to the right (as positive).264 CHAPTER 8. The static pressure per length is given as ∆P 23 . Example 8. Later. Solution In this example. The upper surface is moving in velocity.126) The momentum is not accumulated (steady state and constant density).127) Thus. example dealing with one phase are present.6: Incompressible liquid flows between two infinite plates from the left to the right (as shown in Figure 8. Flow between two plates. The control volume shown in darker colors. Further because no change of the momentum thus ρ Ux Urn dA = 0 A (8.16. the mass conservation yields =0 d dt ρdV = − cv cv ρ Urn dA = 0 (8. It can concluded that the velocity in and out are the same (for constant density). For further enhance the understanding some of the derivations are repeated.

9 1.132) A discussion why ∂P ∼ 0 will be presented later.7 0.131) The assumptions is that there is no pressure difference in the z direction.75 green line to 3 the blue line.1 0.0 y ℓ October 4.6 0.130)  dU  d3 U 2 d2 U  τ xy = µ   dy + dy 2 dy + dy 3 dy + · · · The net effect of these two will be difference between them µ d2 U dU dU ∼ d2 U + dy − µ = µ 2 dy 2 dy dy dy dy (8.8.6 0.2 0.75 Ψ = 0. EXAMPLES FOR DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION (NAVIER-STOKES) 265 The reaction of the shear stress on the lower surface of control volume based on Newtonian fluid is τ xy = −µ dU dy (8. Equation (8.129) On the upper surface is different by Taylor explanation as  ∼0 =  (8.75 Ψ = 1.75 Ψ = −0.75 Ψ = −1. One dimensional flow with a shear “no slip” condition on the boundaries con. the left hand side is equal to constant.2 0. .75 Ψ = 2.133) is a partial differential equation but can be treated as ordinary differential equation in the z direction of the pressure difference is uniform.25 1.25 Ψ = −0.3 0. The “standard” boundary conditions is non–vanishing pressure gradient (that is the pressure exist) and velocity of the upper or lower surface or both.2 Ψ = −1. The momentum equation in the x ∂y direction (or from equation (8.7.8 0.25 Ψ = 1. No assumption was imposed on the pressure distribution.4 0.between two plates when Ψ change value be1. Newtonian fluid. In that case.133) Equation (8. 2010 tween -1.112)) results (without gravity effects) in − dP d2 U =µ 2 dx dy (8. The only difference in the pressure is in the x direction and thus P− P+ dP dx dx =− dP dx dx (8.8 Ux Uℓ 0. It is common to assume that the Fig.0 0.133) was constructed under several assumptions which include the diVelocity distributions in one dimensional flow rection of the flow.0 0. -8.0 0.17.25 Ψ = 2.4 0.25 Ψ = 0.5 0.

134)/ results in   =Ψ y  2 dP y  y   Ux (y) =  1− +  U0 2µ dx  (8.133) after the integration becomes Ux = − 1 dP 2 y + c2 y + c3 2 dx (8. However. if the plates or the boundary conditions do not move the solution is Ux (y) = What happen when ∂P ∂y dP y 1− U0 2µ dx 2 + y (8. .137) ∼ 0? End Solution r θ dz r θ flow Directi on r z Fig.18. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS Ux (y = 0) = 0 Ux (y = ) = U (8.134) The solution of the “ordinary” differential equation (8. -8. The boundaries conditions are CHAPTER 8. Cylindrical Coordinates Similarly the problem of one dimensional flow can be constructed for cylindrical coordinates.266 dition24 . equation (8.17).135) Applying the boundary conditions. The control volume of liquid element in cylindrical coordinates.136) For the case where the pressure gradient is zero the velocity is linear as was discussed earlier in Chapter 1 (see Figure 8. The problem is still one dimensional because the flow velocity is a function 24 A discussion about the boundary will be presented later.

This flow referred as Poiseuille flow after Jean Louis Poiseuille a French Physician who investigated blood flow in veins. the last term is ρ Uz Urn dA = 0 Substituting equation (8.139) Pz + ∂P dz − Pz ∂z π r2 = ∂P dz π r2 ∂z (8.140) Uz Urn dA = − z Uz+dz 2 dA Uz 2 dA =ρ z Uz+dz 2 − Uz 2 dA (8.144) is a first order differential equation for which only one boundary condition is needed. Poiseuille studied the flow in a small diameters (he was not familiar with the concept of Reynolds numbers). The “no slip” condition is assumed Uz (r = R) = 0 (8.140) into equation (8.144) dUz ∂P & & 2&¡ & = − π r dz dz π 2 & &r £ dr ∂z (8. Hence. Rederivation are carried out for a short cut. The shear stress on the circumferential part small dark blue shown in Figure 8. EXAMPLES FOR DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION (NAVIER-STOKES) 267 of (only) radius.138) results in µ Which shrinks to 2 µ dUz ∂P =− r dr ∂z (8.18a is − P dA + τ dA = ρ Uz Urn dA (8.145) .143) (8.142) Equation (8.7.141) The term Uz+dz 2 − Uz 2 is zero because Uz+dz = Uz because mass conservation conservation for any element. The momentum equation for the control volume depicted in the Figure 8.18a is τ dA = µ The pressure integral is P dA = (Pzd z − Pz ) π r2 = The last term is ρ Uz Urn dA = ρ ρ z+dz dUz 2 π r dz dr dA (8.8. Thus.138) The shear stress in the front and back surfaces do no act in the z direction.139) and (8.

The situation is best suitable to solved in cylindrical coordinates.144) results in Uz = − 1 ∂P 2 r + c1 µ ∂z (8. it has several deficiencies which include the ability to incorporate different boundary conditions such as flow between concentering cyliders.268 CHAPTER 8. Example 8.19. It turn out that the “simple” solution is the first mode that appear in reality. or z coordinate. In fact there is no physical reason why the flow should be only one dimensional. Calculate the flow rate for a given pressure gradient.148) While the above analysis provides a solution. Solution After the previous example. the flow is assumed to be one dimensional. it is possible to satisfy the boundary conditions. One of the solution of this problems is one dimensional solution. Liquid flow between concentric cylinders for example 8.147) (8.7. the appropriate version of the Navier–Stokes equation will be used. the velocity isn’t a function of the angle. The integration constant obtained via the application of the boundary condition which is c1 = − The solution is Uz = 1 ∂P 2 r R 1− µ ∂z R 2 1 ∂P 2 R µ ∂z (8.146) It can be noticed that asymmetrical element25 was eliminated due to the smart short cut.19. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS Where R is the outer radius of pipe or cylinder. -8. Thus only equation in z coordinate is needed.7: A liquid with a constant density is flowing between concentering cylinders as shown in Figure 8. In this solution will be discussing the flow first mode. Assume that the velocity at the surface of the cylinders is zero calculate the velocity profile. Build the velocity profile when the flow is one directional and viscosity is Newtonian. Integrating equation (8. element or function is −f (x) = f (−x) ro flow Directi o ut r in z n . It can be noticed 25 Asymmetrical r θ θ r Fig. However. For this mode. That is.

h) ∂P ln(ri ) ro 2 − ln(ro ) ri 2 dz 1 ∂P 2 ro + c1 ln ro + c2 4 µ ∂z (8.VII.VII.8.c) and integrating results for the second times results ∂Uz 1 ∂P c1 = r+ ∂r 2 µ ∂z r Integration of equation (8.VII.VII.a) The PDE above (8.149) The steady state governing equation then becames ρ ¡ =0=− 0 ∂P +µ ∂z 1 ∂ r ∂r r ∂Uz ∂r =0 + ··· + $$ ρ gz (8.a) required boundary conditions which are Uz (r = ri ) = Uz (r = ro ) = Integrating equation (8.a) once results in r ∂Uz 1 ∂P 2 = r + c1 ∂r 2 µ ∂z (8.VII.VII. EXAMPLES FOR DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION (NAVIER-STOKES) 269 that this case is steady state and also the acceleration (convective acceleration) is zero   =f (t) =0  ∂U ∂Uz Uφ  z + Ur + ρ ∂r r  ∂t =0 Uz =f (φ) =0 ∂Uz ∂Uz   +Uz =0 ∂φ ∂z  (8.VII.g) = .b) Dividing equation (8.c) 0 0 (8.7.e) (8.VII.d) results in Uz = 1 ∂P 2 r + c1 ln r + c2 4 µ ∂z (8.VII.VII.f) applying the second boundary condition yields 0= The solution is c1 c2 = 1 ln 4µ 1 ln 4µ ro ri ro ri ∂P ro 2 − ri 2 dz (8.VII.d) Applying the first boundary condition results in 0= 1 ∂P 2 ri + c1 ln ri + c2 4 µ ∂z (8.VII.

150) in which the identy of (a4 − b4 )/(a2 − b2 ) is b2 + a2 and hence Uave = ln ro ri 1 ∂P 2 µ ∂z + (8.l) The first integration of the first part of the second squere bracket.n) ro 2 ln (ro ) ro 2 ri 2 ln (ri ) ri 2 − − + 2 4 2 4 . (−a × r ln r) can be done by parts to be as r2 log (r) r2 − a 4 2 Applying all these “techniques” to equation (8.j) Or substituting equation (8.j) transfomed into Q= A 1 ∂P 2 1 r + ln 4 µ ∂z 4µ ro ri ro ri ∂P ro 2 − ri 2 ln r dz (8.i) ro ri ∂P ln(ri ) ro 2 − ln(ro ) ri 2 dz ro Uz (r)dA (8.VII. Uave = (8.m) ro 2 ln (ro ) ro 2 ri 2 ln (ri ) ri 2 − − + 2 4 2 4 Q π (ro 2 − ri 2 ) ro 2 ri 2 + 4 4 The averaged velocity is obtained by dividing flow rate by the area Q/A.k) dA 1 + ln 4µ ∂P ln(ri ) ro 2 − ln(ro ) ri 2 dz A finite intergation of the last term in the integrand results in zero because it is constant.VII.VII. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS The solution is when substituting the constats into equation (8. is 1/4 ro 4 − ri 4 .VII.VII.VII.VII. The integraion of the rest is Q= 1 ∂P 4 µ ∂z ro ri r2 + ln ro ri ro 2 − ri 2 ln r 2 π r dr (8.270 CHAPTER 8. The second part.VII.i) into equation (8.VII.l) results in Q= ln ro ri ro − ri 2 2 π ∂P 2 µ ∂z ro 4 ri 4 − 4 4 + (8. (r3 ).e) results in Uz (r) = 1 1 ∂P 2 r + ln 4 µ ∂z 4µ 1 + ln 4µ The flow rate is then Q= ri ro ri ∂P ro 2 − ri 2 ln r dz (8. of the second squere bracket.VII.

8.8: In many situations in nature and many industrial processes liquid flows downstream on inclined plate at θ as shown in Figure 8. Ernst Kraft Wilhelm Nusselt born November 25. Comprehensive discussion about this problem can be found this author Master thesis.1 pump Solution This problem is sutiable to Cartesian coordinates in which x coordinate is pointed in the flow direction and y perpendicular to flow direction (depicted in Figure 8. Furthermore.20. assume that the flow is two dimeng sin θ θ g cos θ sional. this analysis is a building bloc for heat and mass transfer understanding27 .20. For this system. This problem is related to many industrial process and is fundamental in understanding many industrial processes. For simplicity.20). the gravity in the x direction is g sin θ while the direction of y the gravity is g cos θ. Assume that “scale” is large x h enough so that the “no slip” condition prevail at the plate (bottom). 1957 in Munchen 27 Extensive discussion can be found in this author master thesis.a) −  ∂ 2 Ux ∂ 2 Ux ∂P ∂ 2 Ux   + ρ gx +µ  + +  ∂x2 ∂x ∂y 2 ∂z 2  26 German mechanical engineer. Calculate the velocity profile. . -8. Mass flow due to temperature dimensional in the x direction.VIII. 1882 September 1. assume that the y gas density is zero (located outside the liquid domain). This problem study by Nusselt26 which developed the basics equations. Assume that the flow is one Fig. The dominate force is the gravity. EXAMPLES FOR DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION (NAVIER-STOKES) 271 End Solution The next example deals with the gravity as body force in two dimensional flow. Assume that the flow obtains a θ g steady state after some length (and the acceleration vanished). Write the governing equations for this situation. For this example. difference for example 8. Example 8. The governing in the x direction is  =f (t) =0  =0 −0  ∂U ∂Ux ∂Ux ∂Ux   x = ρ + Ux + Uy + Uz ∂x ∂y ∂z  ∂t ∼0  =0 =0  g sin θ (8.7.

d) If there is additional requirement. The surface has no curvature and hence the pressure at liquid side similar to the gas phase and the only change in liquid is in the y direction.VIII. Thus. The last term of the velocity Laplacian is zero because no velocity in ∂x the z direction.a) is reduced to 0=µ ∂ 2 Ux + ρ g sin θ ∂y 2 (8.c) The boundary at the interface is simplified to be ∂Ux ∂y = τair (∼ 0) y=0 (8. The pressure is almost constant along the x coordinate.VIII.VIII. such a specific velocity at the surface. Hence the pressure at the gas phase is almost constant hence the pressure at the interface in the liquid is constant.VIII.g) The second integration applying the second boundary condition yields c2 = 0 results in g sin θ τair Ux = 2 y h − y2 − (8.VIII.b) With boundary condition of “no slip” at the bottom because the large scale and steady state Ux (y = 0) = 0 (8. The second and the third terms in the convective acceleration are zero because the velocity at that direction is zero (Uy = Uz = 0). The first term of the convective acceleration is zero under the assumption of this example flow is fully developed and hence not a function of x (nothing to be “improved”).VIII.b) yields ρ ∂Ux = g sin θ y + c1 (8.e) ∂y µ The integration constant can be obtain by applying the condition (8. the pressure loss in the gas phase (mostly air) is negligible. As it will be shown later.VIII.VIII. Integration of equation (8. the governing equation can not be sufficient from the mathematical point of view.f) τair 1 + g sin θ h µ ν µ ρ (8.272 CHAPTER 8. Fully developed flow means that the first term of the velocity Laplacian is zero ( ∂Ux ≡ 0).VIII.VIII.h) ν µ .d) as τair Solving for c1 results in c1 = ∂Ux =µ ∂y y = −ρ g sin θ h +c1 µ h (8. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS The first term of the acceleration is zero because the flow is in a steady state. equation (8.

Two boundary conditions must be satisfied at the interface. Assume that radios of the liquid and solid core are given and the flow is at steady state. the velocity profile is Ux = The flow rate per unit width is Q = W h 273 g sin θ 2 h y − y2 ν (8. If the air is considered two governing equations must be solved one for the air (gas) phase and one for water (liquid) phase. For the liquid. The vanishing shear stress at the interface was the only requirement was applied. 8. Which results in g sin θ 2 h3 τair h Q = − W ν 3 µ The average velocity is then Q g sin θ 2 h2 τair Ux = W = − h ν 3 µ (8.j) Where W here is the width into the page of the flow. EXAMPLES FOR DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION (NAVIER-STOKES) When the shear stress caused by the air is neglected.VIII. the boundary condition of “no air (g y x wa ter (liq as ) uid ) ah h Fig. The flow surface is curved and thus pressure is not equal on both sides of the interface. The flow in the kerosene lamp is depends on the surface tension.l) (8. Calculate the minimum shear stress that required to operate the lump (alternatively. End Solution In the following following example the issue of driving force of the flow through curved interface is examined.VIII.7. the maximum height).7.8 no requirement was made as for the velocity at the interface (the upper boundary).8. Example 8. Flow of liquid in partially filled duct.i) Ux dA = A 0 g sin θ τair 2 h y − y2 − ν µ dy (8. .VIII.VIII.k) Note the shear stress at the interface can be positive or negative and hence can increase or decrease the flow rate and the averaged velocity.1 Interfacial Instability sa m e so ve lu loc tio it n y In Example 8. -8.9: A simplified flow version the kerosene lump is of liquid moving up on a solid core.21.

the constants c1 and c2 are dimensional which mean that they have physical units (c1 −→ [1/sec] The governing equation in the liquid phase (0 ≥ y ≥ h) is Ux = g sin θ 2 y + c3 y + c4 2ν (8. However. The second domain (the gas phase) provides another equation with two constants but again three boundary conditions need to satisfied.153) Assuming “no slip” for the liquid at the bottom boundary as Ux (0) = 0 The boundary condition (8. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS slip” at the bottom surface of liquid must be satisfied.b) and subtitling ν = µ/ρ.157) (8. The experiments were conducted on a solid concrete laboratory and the flow was in a very stable system. These experiments were to study the formation of small and big waves at the interface. This explanation bothered this author. The governing equation solution29 for the gas phase (h ≥ y ≥ a h) is Ux g = g sin θ 2 y + c1 y + c2 2 νg (8.VIII. The solution to the differential governing equations provides only two constants.152) The gas velocity at the upper interface is vanished thus Ux g [(1 + a) h] = 0 At the interface the “no slip” condition is regularly applied and thus Ux g (h) = Ux (h) Also at the interface (a straight surface). No matter how low flow rate was small and big occurred.156) 28 The author was hired to do experiments on thin film (gravity flow). .274 CHAPTER 8.154) (8. there is total of three boundary conditions28 to be satisfied.151) Note. the shear stress must be continuous µg ∂Ux g ∂Ux =µ ∂y ∂y (8. 29 This equation results from double integrating of equation (8. The phenomenon is explained by the fact that there is somewhere instability which is transferred into the flow. two of the boundary conditions for these equations are the identical and thus the six boundary conditions are really only 4 boundary conditions.155) (8.153) results in 0= g sin θ 2 h (1 + a)2 + c1 h (1 + a) + c2 2 νg (8. Thus. thus current explanation was developed to explain the wavy phenomenon occurs.

159) 1 2 2 2 νg c1 2 c2 νg + g h sin θ g h2 sin θ (8.162) C1 1 µ 2 µg C3 1+ νg c1 ρ µ νg c3 = + g h sin θ ρg µg g h sin θ (8.156) which leads c4 = 0 Applying equation (8. EXAMPLES FOR DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION (NAVIER-STOKES) The same can be said for boundary condition (8.155) yields ρg ρ 275 (8.157) transformed by some simple rearrangement to be C1 C2 (1 + a) = And equation (8.154) with (8.157). (8.159) and (8.8.163) .159) (8.7.158) µg µ g sin θ h + c1 µg = g sin θ h + c3 µ νg ν Combining boundary conditions equation(8.160) is obtained by computer algebra (see in the code) to be sin θ (g h ρg (2 ρg ν ρ + 1) + a g h ν ) ρg (2 a ν + 2 ν ) (8. So equation (8.161) c1 = − c2 = sin θ g h2 ρg (2 ρg ν ρ + 1) − g h2 ν 2 ρg ν sin θ (g h ρg (2 a ρg ν ρ − 1) − a g h ν ) ρg (2 a ν + 2 ν ) End Advance material c3 = When solving this kinds of mathematical problem the engineers reduce it to minimum amount of parameters to reduce the labor involve.160) The solution of equation (8.157) results in g sin θ 2 g sin θ 2 h + c1 h + c2 = h + c3 h 2 νg 2ν Advance material can be skipped (8.

The solution for the constant is ρg µg µg C1 = − 2 + a2 + 2 a +2 (8.171) C3 = − 30 Later µg ρ + a2 + 2 a + 2 µ ρg (8. Equation (8.164) C1 C2 C3 νg 2 νg c1 2 νg c2 2 νg c3 + 2 − −1= ν h g sin θ h g sin θ g h sin θ (8.169) The set of equation can be solved for the any ratio of the density and dynamic viscosity.165) This presentation provide similarity and it will be shown in the Dimensional analysis chapter better physical understanding of the situation.164) Or rearranging equation (8.172) it will be move to the Dimensional Chapter . The ratio of the dynamics viscosity can be eliminated from equation (8.166) This process that was shown here is referred as non–dimensionalization30 .162) can be written as (1 + a) = C1 + C2 Further rearranging equation (8.163) C1 µ C3 ρ −1= − ρg 2 µg 2 and equation (8. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS g sin θ + 2 νg c2 νg 2 νg h c3 ¡ = + 2 g sin θ 2 h ν g h£ sin θ (8.160) 1+ 2 νg h c1 ¡ 2 h£ CHAPTER 8.167) 2 (8.276 and equation (8.170) ρ µ µ µg ρ +a µ ρg µg µg −2 +3 + a2 µ µ µg µ µg −1 −2 µ − C2 = 2 (8.165) νg − 1 = C1 + C2 − C3 ν (8.168) to be µg ρ − 1 = C1 + C2 − C3 µ ρg (8.168) (8.

. This is one of the source of the instability at the interface.8. flow at infinite is zero. There is no way obtain one dimensional solution for such case and there is a component in the y direction. Combining infinite size domain of one fluid with finite size on the other one side results in unstable interface. 31 This topic will be covered in dimensional analysis in more extensively. EXAMPLES FOR DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION (NAVIER-STOKES) 277 The two different fluids31 have flow have a solution as long as the distance is finite reasonable similar. mostly the gas. What happen when the lighter fluid.7. The point here the understanding issue related to boundary condition not per se solution of the problem. The requirement of the shear stress in the infinite is zero as well. is infinite long. The boundary conditions of flow with infinite depth is that flow at the interface is zero.

DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS .278 CHAPTER 8.

In Buckingham’s technique only the 1 The history of dimensional analysis is complex. The approach or the technique used in these books is referred to as Buckingham–π–theory. The Buckingham–π goes further and no equations are solved and even no knowledge about these equations is required. The π–theory was coined by Buckingham. there is another technique which is referred to in the literature as the Nusselt’s method. this author observed that Nusselt’s technique is much more effective as it will demonstrated later.1 Introductory Remarks Dimensional analysis refers to techniques dealing with units or conversion to a unitless system. Possible topics that dimensional analysis deals with are consistency of the units. In this chapter. Furthermore. The key in these techniques lays in the fact of consistency of the dimensions of any possible governing equation(s) and the fact that some dimensions are reoccurring. Several scientists used this concept before Buckingham and Nusselt (see below history section). in many advance fluid mechanics classes Nusselt’s technique is used and Buckingham’s technique is abandoned. Eckert. Perhaps this fact can be attributed to tremendous influence Nusselt and his students had on the heat transfer field. change order of magnitude. Both these methods attempt to reduce the number of parameters which affect the problem and reduce the labor in solving the problem. and creation of group parameters without any dimensions. Buckingham’s technique is discussed and studied in Fluid Mechanics while almost completely ignored by Heat and Mass Transfer researchers and their classes. Even.CHAPTER 9 Dimensional Analysis This chapter is dedicated to my adviser. the focus is on the applying the old to unknown as different scales and the creation of dimensionless groups. Nusselt number. It is interesting to point out that there are several dimensionless numbers that bear Nusselt and his students name. Their work culminated at the point of publishing the paper Buckingham’s paper and independently constructed by Nusselt. However.R. Eckert number. this author can be accused for being bias as the Eckert’s last student. Schmidt number. There is no known dimensionless number which bears Buckingham name. E. the dimensional analysis is taught and written in all fluid mechanics textbooks. applying from the old and known to unknown (see the Book of Ecclesiastes).G. Since the 1940s1 . These techniques gave birth to dimensional parameters which have a great scientific importance. Genick Bar-Meir 9. However. 279 . The definition of dimensional analysis is not consistent in the literature which span over various fields and times. Dr.

Some attribute it to Newton (1686) who coined the phrase of “great Principle of Similitude. When no governing equations are found. Rayleigh probably was the first one who used dimensional analysis (1872) to obtain . It can be argued that these situations really do not exist in the Thermo–Fluid field. The advantage of the Nusselt’s technique are: a) compact presentation. and the relative relationship of these parameters. more information is put into the problem and thus a better understanding on the dimensionless parameters is extracted. This author is aware of only a single class of cases were Buckingham’s methods is useful and or can solve the problem namely the pendulum class problem (and similar). In fact. In the Buckingham’s approach it merely suggests the number of dimensional parameters based on a guess of all parameters affecting the problem. c) easier to extent the solution to more general situations. there are fields in thermo–fluid where dimensional analysis. is recognized as useless. Aim´em Vaschy.1. Nusselt’s technique provides the form of these dimensionless parameters. Buckingham’s method has usefulness.1 Brief History The idea of experimentation with a different. In very complex problems both techniques suffer from in inability to provide a significant information on the effective parameters such multi-phase flow etc. The advantage or disadvantage of these similar methods depend on the point of view. The dimensional analysis was independently developed by Nusselt and improved by his students/co workers (Schmidt. It has to be recognized that the dimensional analysis provides answer to what group of parameters affecting the problem and not the answer to the problem. a German Mathematical Physicist (1857–1899). The Buckingham–π technique is simpler while Nusselt’s technique produces a better result. Maxwell a Scottish Physicist played a major role in establishing the basic units of mass. Jean B. rather than the actual. and time as building blocks of all other units. the area of multiphase flows there is no solution based on dimensionless parameters (with the exception of the rough solution of Martinelli). J.” Later. While the majority of the contributions were done by thermo–fluid guys the concept of the equivalent or similar propagated to other fields. Both techniques are discussed in this book.280 CHAPTER 9. Another example. John Smeaton (8 June 1724–28 October 1792) was an English civil and mechanical engineer who study relation between propeller/wind mill and similar devices to the pressure and velocity of the driving forces. Fourier (1768-1830) first attempted to formulate the dimensional analysis theory. 9. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS dimensions or the properties of the problem at hand are analyzed. Eckert) in which the governing equations are used as well. suggested using sime ilarity in electrical engineering and suggested the Norton circuit equivalence theorems. dimension was suggested by several individuals independently. Thus. For example. b)knowledge what parameters affect the problem. Sometime. This idea was extend by William Froude (1810-1871) by relating the modeling of open channel flow and actual body but more importantly the relationship between drag of models to actual ships. the simplicity of Buckingham’s technique yields insufficient knowledge or simply becomes useless. Nusselt’s technique is more cumbersome but more precise and provide more useful information. length.

1957). quantity of substance (mole). mass. The units or dimensions are. it was recognized that in many physical systems there are basic fundamental units which can describe all the other dimensions or units in the system. θ. 591. Buckingham culminated the dimensional analysis and similitude and presented it in a more systematic form. 1882 – September 1. a German engineer. Table -9. 1915 .1. For example. Nature Vol 99 p. isothermal single component systems (which does not undergo phase change. temperature change and observed no magnetic or electrical effect) can be described by just basic four physical units. 9. allowing this system to be non–isothermal will increase only by one additional dimension of temperature.1. Basic Units of Two Common Systems Standard System Name Mass Length Time Temperature Letter M L t θ Units [kg] [m] [sec] [ C] ◦ Old System Name Force Length Time Temperature Letter F L t T Unis [N ] [m] [sec] [◦ C] Additional Basic Units for Magnetohydrodynamics Continued on next page 2 Riabouchunsky. developed the dimensional analysis (proposed the principal parameters) of heat transfer without knowledge about previous work of Buckingham. INTRODUCTORY REMARKS 281 the relationships between the physical quantities (see the question why the sky is blue story). For example.1. Riabouchunsky2 proposed of relating temperature by molecules velocity and thus creating dimensionless group with the byproduct of compact solution (solution presented in a compact and simple form).e.2 Theory Behind Dimensional Analysis In chemistry it was recognized that there are fundamental elements that all the material is made from (the atoms). Similarly to this concept. Osborne Reynolds (1842–1912) was the first to derive and use dimensionless parameters to analyze experimental data. Increase of degree of freedom. length. the dimension or the units of force can be constructed utilizing Newton’s second law i. mass times acceleration −→ m a = M L/t2 . time.9. These five fundamental units are commonly the building blocks for most of the discussion in fluid mechanics (see Table of basic units 9. That is. all the molecules are made from a combination of different atoms. In the about the same time (1915.1). Wilhelm Nusselt (November 25.

L. time. length. these two selections are presented. One common selection is substituting the mass with the force in the previous selection (F. Example 9. θ)? What are the units of mass when the basic units are: force. t. This notation has no significance but for historical reasons remained in use.a) as M= F t2 L (9.282 CHAPTER 9.1. T)? Notice the different notation for the temperature in the two systems of basic units.a) F = 2 t For the second method the unit of mass are obtain from Equation (9. it can be the reverse. Solution These two systems are related as the questions are the reversed of each other.I. and a is the acceleration. Thus.b) . L. mol. temperature (M. time. the units of force are ML (9.1: What are the units of force when the basic units are: mass. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS Table -9. length. Basic Units of Two Common Systems (continue) Standard System Name Electric Current Luminous Intensity Letter A cd Units [A]mpere [cd] candle Name Electric Current Luminous Intensity Old System Letter A cd Unis [A]mpere [cd] candle Chemical Reactions Quantity of substance M mol Quantity of substance M mol The choice of these basic units is not unique and several books and researchers suggest a different choice of fundamental units. t. m is the mass. Temperature).I. The connection between the mass and force can be obtained from the simplified Newton’s second law F = m a where F is the force. Yet. temperature (F. will not be discussed here. at the moment. Other selections are possible but not common and. In this book. t.I. there are situations in which first method is better than the second one while in other situations. L. This author is not aware of any discussion on the benefits of one method over the other method.

9. . The same units force has to be applied to 7 thus it must be in [N ]. just knowing the parameters is enough the identify the problem. operation of reducing the number affecting parameters. The dimensions or units which affect the problem at hand can be reduced because these dimensions are repeating or reoccurring. What are the requirement on equation (9.a) where 7 represent the second term. INTRODUCTORY REMARKS End Solution 283 The number of fundamental or basic dimensions determines the number of the combinations which affect the physical3 situations. the units of [F ]. In particular case. This idea alludes to connections between similar parameters to similar solution. study of compressible flow (a flow where the density change plays a significant part) can be achieved 3 The dimensional analysis also applied in economics and other areas and the statement should reflect this fact.3 Dimensional Parameters Application for Experimental Study The solutions for any situations which are controlled by the same governing equations with same boundary conditions regardless of the origin the equation. The units of force are [N ] which is defined by first term of the right hand side.1. For example. the solution by experiments or other cases.a)? Solution Clearly. This idea alludes to the fact that these unitless parameters can be found without any knowledge of the governing equations. The following trivial example demonstrates the consistency of units Example 9.II. The Buckingham method is based on the fact that all equations must be consistent with their units. a is the acceleration and dot above m indicating the mass ˙ derivative with respect to time.1. The non–dimensionalization i. or economical. Thus. That is the left hand side and the right hand side have to have the same units. The solutions are similar or identical regardless to the origin of the field no matter if the field is physical. This technique is employed in many fluid mechanics situations. Where F ˙ is force. However. this equation get a form of F = ma + 7 (9. The Buckingham’s technique implicitly suggested that since the governing equations (in fluid mechanics) are essentially are the same. End Solution 9.e. or biological. the arrangement of the effecting parameters in unitless groups yields the affecting parameters. Because they have the same units the equations can be divided to create unitless equations. m is the mass.2: Newton’s equation has two terms that related to force F = m a + m U . m a and 7 have to be same. this book is focused on engineering topics and other fields are not discussed. has a useful by–product. The analogy or similitude refers to understanding one phenomenon from the study of another phenomenon.II. These unitless parameters are the dimensional parameters. the analogy in other words.

1. The ratio is a dimensionless number and with this number one can tell that for a ratio larger Fig. if one wants to deal with tolerances. In the preceding simplistic example. Throughout this book the reader will notice that the systems/equations in many cases are converted to a dimensionless form to augment understanding. Dimensional analysis is useful also for those who are dealing with the numerical research/calculation. the dimensional analysis can easily be extended to say that when the ratio is equal from 0. the radius ratio. On the other hand.1) is an example how dimensional analysis can be used. In many real problems this approach can remove clattered views and put the problem into focus. In this section several examples of the pendulum type problem are presented. it is required to have only one parameter. D2 D1 1) the rode diameter and 2) the diameter of the hole. Thus for similar governing equations if the solution exists for one case it is a solution to both cases. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS by study of surface of open channel flow. the rod is too small. This author believes that at the present the Buckingham method has extremely limited use for the real world and yet this method is presented in the classes on fluid mechanics. study of large air planes can done on small models. Experiments in different scale than actual dimensions can be conducted for cases where the actual dimensions are difficult to handle. The compressible flow is also similar to traffic on the highway. 9. than one. The first example is the classic Pendulum problem.284 CHAPTER 9.99 to 1. larger models are used to study small or fast situations. On the other situations. the ratio of the rode diameter to the hole diameter. many examples on the use of this method will be presented in this book. Fitting rod into a hole. the rode is said to be fit. and a ratio smaller than one. This method supplement knowledge when some parameters should be taken into account and why.0 the rode is fitting. the advantages are minimal. Furthermore. For example. Thus. the rode will not enter the hole. it is required to know two parameters. Only when the ratio is equal to one. The analogy can be used to conduct experiment in a cheaper way and/or a safer way.4 The Pendulum Class Problem The only known problem that dimensional analysis can solve (to some degree) is the pendulum class problem. -9.3: . Example 9. Actually. If one were to use the two diameters description. Nusselt’s method has a larger practical use in the real world and therefore will be presented for those who need dimensional analysis for the real world. This presentation allows one to draw or present the situation by using only one coordinate. Fitting a rod into a circular hole (see Figure 9. further significant information will be needed.1. and etc. To solve this problem.

III.b) results in t−1 = C1 L1 a L1 t−2 b =⇒ La+b t−2 b (9. Table -9. that a trigonometric function relates and g and frequency. -9. the result of operation not match i. for example. Assume that no other parameter including the mass affects the problem. For example.III. INTRODUCTORY REMARKS Derive the relationship for the gravity [g].III. Furthermore. . the relationship can be expressed as ω = f ( . if a sin function is used.2. frequency [ ω] and length of pendulum [ ]. assuming. Units of the Pendulum Parameters Parameter ω Units t−1 Parameter Units L1 Parameter g Units L1 t−2 Thus substituting of the Table 9.4 Solution The solution technique is based on the assumption that the indexical form is the appropriate form to solve the problem.3 not necessarily given or known.b) the units of every term are examined and summarized the following table. For that reason the form in equation (9. (sec = sin (sec)). this knowledge is ample 9.III.b) is selected. the multiplication of g have to be in the same units of the frequency units. In other words.b) The solution functional complexity is limited to the basic combination which has to be in some form of multiplication of and g in some power.2.a) 285 ℓ θ mg Notice in this problem. however in the real world.1.9.c) after further rearrangement by multiply the left hand side by L0 results in L0 t−1 = C La+b t−2 b 4 The (9.d) reader can check if the mass is assumed to affect the problem then.III. That is. the result is different.7 in equation (9. Here it is provided because the real solution is already known from standard physics classes. then the functionality looks like ω = sin( g).e.III. The Indexical form ω = C1 × a b g (9. Figure for exvided. the real knowledge is proFig.III. From the units point of view. g) (9. To satisfy equation (9.

III. According to some books and researchers.3) Again as stated before. the following must exist 0=a+b and −1 = −2 b (9. In that case. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS In order to satisfy equation (9. “Model Experiments and the Forms of Empirical Equations. U ) = 0 (9. ρ.d). For example. q2 .g. If.1) where qi is the “i” parameter effecting the problem. the functionality e. The pendulum frequency is known to be 1 g (9. ν.2 Buckingham–π–Theorem All the physical phenomena that is under the investigation have n physical effecting parameters such that F1 (q1 . Thus.” Transactions of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. D.g) ω= 2π End Solution What was found in this example is the form of the solution’s equation and frequency. µ can be replaced by dynamic viscosity. L. Vol.III. D. qn ) = 0 (9. Yet.e) is a = −1/2 and b = −1/2. study of the pressure difference created due to a flow in a pipe is a function of several parameters such ∆P = f (L. 9. U ) (9. If the guess is relevant and correct then the functional relationship can be obtained by experiments. The choice is made normally as the result of experience and it can be observed that ν is a function of µ and ρ.III. . 37. a new function can be defined as F (∆P. the solution is in the form of g (9. the viscosity. this part is the importance of the dimensional analysis.III. Buckingham. the mass is added to considerations. It can be noticed that the initial guess merely and actually determine the results. µ.286 CHAPTER 9. the chosen parameters are not necessarily the most important parameters. ρ. a different result will be obtained.f) ω = C1 1/2 g −1/2 = C1 It can be observed that the value of C1 is unknown. Finding the important parameters is based on “good fortune” or perhaps intuition. Buckingham’s5 methods suggested to reduce the number of 5 E. For example. µ. 1915.2) In this example. The constant can be obtained from experiment for plotting ω as the abscissa and /g as ordinate.e) The solution of the equations (9.III. However. q3 . the value of the constant was not found. · · · . the study of every individual parameter will create incredible amount of data. however.

BUCKINGHAM–π–THEOREM 287 parameters. L. π3 . There are 2 conditions on the dimensionless parameters: 1.9. For the pipe problem above. can provide the time [t].3)) there are 6 variables or n = 6. the first term D can provide the length. then the equation relating all the variables will have (n-m) dimensionless groups. U . If independent parameters of same physical situation is m thus in general it can be written as F2 (π1 . The fundamental units. Each of the fundamental dimensions must appear in at least one of the m variables 2.1 Construction of the Dimensionless Parameters In the construction of these parameters it must be realized that every dimensionless parameters has to be independent. · · · . and the third term. The number of the fundamental dimensions is 3 that is m = 3 ([M]. One possible combination is of D. In the case of the pressure difference in the pipe (Equation (9. 9.4) If there are n variables in a problem and these variables contain m primary dimensions (for example M. The fundamental units can be written in . and D have the same dimension and therefore both cannot be chosen as they have the same dimension. the second term. It can be written that one dimensionless parameter is a function of two other parameters such as i π1 = f (π2 . and M are length. to make these dimensionless parameters independent they cannot be multiply or division of each other. Thus. A recurring set is a group of variables forming a dimensionless group. velocity of U = [L t−1 ] and density as ρ = [M L−3 ]. πm ) = 0 (9. Note. [t]) The choice of fundamental or basic units is arbitrary in that any construction of these units is possible. [L]. L.2. then.5) If indeed such a relationship exists. Additionally. The meaning of independent is that one dimensionless parameter is not a multiply or a division of another dimensional parameter. The dimensions of these physical variables are: D = [L1 ]. T). time and mass respectively.2. It must not be possible to form a dimensionless group from one of the variables within a recurring set. According to Buckingham’s theorem the number of dimensionless groups is n − m = 6 − 3 = 3. U and ρ are chosen as the recurring set. ρ can provide the mass [M ]. the number of parameters that control the problem is reduced and the number of experiments that need to be carried is considerably smaller. π3 ) (9. [L]. π2 . mass is a proper choice. the π–theorem does not specify how the parameters should be selected nor what combination is preferred. For example. another combination of the basic units is time. t. In the above example there are three dimensionless parameters which required of at least one of the physical parameter per each dimensionless parameter. force.

7) The third dimensionless group (using µ dimension of [M L1 t−1 ]) and therefore dimensionless is [M −1 ] π3 = µ 1 D D3 ρ [L] [t] D µ = U DU ρ (9. can be expressed by ρ D3 . is described above. Now the dimensionless groups can be constructed by looking at the remaining physical parameters. The mass. The fact that this method used is the hall mark that the material was written by mathematician. has dimensions of [M L−1 t−2 ] Therefore. can be expressed by D/U . The second and third methods require to identification of the building blocks. the first dimensionless group is [M L−1 t−2 ] [M −1 ] [t2 ] [L] 2 unitless π1 = ∆P 1 D ∆P = D ρ D3 U2 ρ U2 (9.1. The pressure difference. The second method. The first one solving it in one shot. Here. The last method is mostly used by mathematicians which leads and connects to linear algebra. These building blocks are used to construct the dimensionless parameters.2 Basic Units Blocks In Thermo–Fluid science there are several basic physical quantities which summarized in Table 9.6) The second dimensionless group (using D) is [L] [L−1 ] −1 π2 = D = D L (9. [t].2. There are several requirements on these building blocks which were discussed on page 287. Yet this method becomes complicated for large number of parameters. ∆P . ∆P M −1 L t2 is a dimensionless quantity and these values were calculated just above this line. D and µ.8) This analysis is not unique and there can be several other possibilities for selecting dimensionless parameters which are “legitimately” correct for this approach. The first term L is the described by D with the units of [L]. [M ]. In the table contains two additional physical/basic units that appear in . The time. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS terms of the physical units. 9. The third method is by using dimensional matrix which is used mostly by mathematicians and is less useful for engineering purposes. This requirement is logical since it is a building block. this material will be introduced for completeness sake with examples and several terms associated with this technique.288 CHAPTER 9. ∆P . There are roughly three categories of methods for obtaining the dimensionless parameters. some referred to as the building blocks method. This method is simple and useful for a small number of parameters. Thus. The main point that the building block unit has to contain at least the basic or fundamental unit.

in the new system the force it will be defined as M L t−2 . There many physical units which are dimensionless by their original definition. Quantities used in engineering can be reduced to six basic dimensions which are presented in Table 9. kg/m3 and English system it slug/f t3 . for example. The last two are not commonly used in fluid mechanics and temperature is only used sometimes. The actual basic units used can be S. Thus. units are M ass/Length3 and in the new system the density will be expressed as M/L3 while in S.1. Many common quantities are presented in the following Table 9.” Standard System Name Area Volume Angular velocity Acceleration Angular acceleration Force Density Letter L2 L3 1 t L t2 1 t2 ML t2 M L3 Units [m2 ] [m3 ] 1 sec m sec2 1 sec2 kg m sec2 kg m3 Old System Name Area Volume Angular velocity Acceleration Angular acceleration Mass Density Letter L2 L3 1 t L t2 1 t2 F t2 L Unis [m2 ] [m3 ] 1 sec m sec2 1 sec2 Ns m kg m3 F t2 L4 Continued on next page .3. ratio of specific heats. There are many parameters that contains force which is the source reason why the old (or alternative) system use the force instead the mass.2. A common unit used in Fluid Mechanics is the Force. L. seconds and Kelvins/Celsius or English system or any other system.I.t and θ. which expressed in SI as Newton [N ]. Table -9. L . meters. The Newton defined as a force which causes a certain acceleration of a specific mass. M . Strain is a ratio of the change of length by the length thus has no units. Physical units for two common systems. strains. and θ or the old system relieves the discussion from using particular system measurements. The angle represented by a ratio of two sides of a triangle and therefor has no units nor dimensions. k. Examples to “naturally” being dimensionless are the angle. such as kilograms. BUCKINGHAM–π–THEOREM 289 magnetohydrodynamics (not commonly use in fluid mechanics).3. Many (almost all) of the engineering dimensions used in fluid mechanics can be defined in terms of the four basic physical dimensions M . friction coefficient. t. The density.I. In using basic new basic physical units.9. f and ratio of lengths. Note the second (time) in large size units appear as “s” while in small units as “sec.

290 CHAPTER 9. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS Table -9. Basic Units of Two Common System (continue) Standard System Name Momentum Angular Momentum Torque Absolute Viscosity Kinematic Viscosity Volume flow rate Mass flow rate Pressure Surface Tension Work or Energy Power Thermal Conductivity Specific Heat Entropy Specific Entropy Letter ML t M L2 t M L2 t2 M L1 t1 L2 t1 L3 t1 M t1 M L t2 M t2 M L2 t2 M L2 t3 M L2 t3 θ L2 θ 2 t2 M L2 t2 θ L2 t2 θ Units kg m sec Old System Name Momentum Angular Momentum Torque Absolute Viscosity Kinematic Viscosity Volume flow rate Mass flow rate Pressure Surface Tension Work or Energy Power Thermal Conductivity Specific Heat Entropy Specific Entropy Letter Ft LF t LF tF L2 L2 t L3 t1 Ft L1 F L2 F L FL FL t1 F tT L2 T 2 t2 F L2 T L2 t2 T Unis [N sec] [m N s] [m N ] Ns m2 m3 sec m3 sec Ns m N m2 N m [ kg m ] sec kg m sec2 kg ms m2 sec 2 [sec] kg sec kg m sec kg sec2 kg m2 sec2 kg m2 sec3 kg m2 s2 K m2 s2 K kg m2 s2 K m2 s2 K [N m] Nm sec N mK m2 s2 K kg m2 s2 K m2 s2 K Continued on next page .3.

3.3 9. Resistance of infinite variables. R = f (r. the solution is obtained by assigning the powers to the affecting variables.2. and the absolute viscosity µ.9.3. ρ.IV. Several examples are presented to demonstrate this method.a) .4: An infinite cylinder is submerged and exposed to an external viscous flow. The reR searcher intuition suggests that the resistance to flow. Basic Units of Two Common System (continue) 291 Standard System Name Molar Specific Entropy Enthalpy Specific Enthalpy Letter L2 t2 θ M L2 t2 M2 t2 Units kg m2 s2 K mol Old System Name Molar Specific Entropy Enthalpy Specific Enthalpy Letter L2 T t2 FL L2 t2 Unis kg m2 s2 K mol kg m2 sec2 m2 sec2 kg m sec2 mol mol sec kg m2 sec2 [N m] m2 sec2 m2 sec2 mol sec ThermodynamicM L t2 M Force Catalytic Activity heat transfer rate M t M L2 t3 Thermodynamic N M Force Catalytic Activity heat transfer rate M t LF t mN sec 9. Example 9.2. The results are used to compare the powers on both sides of the equation.3. µ) (9. that is cylinder. ρ. the density.1 Implementation of Construction of Dimensionless Parameters One Shot Method: Constructing Dimensionless Parameters In this method. U.2. BUCKINGHAM–π–THEOREM Table -9. Based on this limited information construct a relationship of the Fig. R is a function of the radius r. the velocity U . -9.

g) is related to the two dimensionless parameters.g) can be represented as R µ = Constant f (9. . M length.IV.3.IV.IV. equation (9. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS R = f ra U b ρc µd (9.g) The relationship between the two sides in equation (9.e) into equation (9.c) (9.b) results in R   L  M  M  ML      = Constant  L    t   L3   L t  2 t From equation (9.292 Solution The functionality should be in a form of CHAPTER 9.c) there are three equations and 4 unknowns.IV.IV.IV.h) 2 r2 ρU ρU r where the power of d can be eliminated. Hence.c) the following requirements can be obtained time.b) The units of the parameters are provided in Table 9.IV.IV.IV.IV.c) results in R = Constant r2−d U 2−d ρ1−d µd = Constant ρ U 2 r2 Or rearranging equation yields R = Constant ρ U 2 r2 µ ρU r d µ ρU r d (9.IV. L −2 1 1 = = = −b − d c+d a + b − 3c − d r a  U b  ρ c  µ d (9. t mass.e) Substituting equation (9.IV. In dimensional analysis the functionality is not clearly defined by but rather the function of the parameters.f) (9.IV. Thus substituting the data from the table into equation (9. Expressing all the three variables in term of d to obtain a = b = c = 2−d 2−d 1−d (9.IV.d) In equations (9. a simple way.

The thrust. Mass. . This table is referred in the literature as the Dimensional matrix. M Length. relative velocity of the ship to the water.V. find the functionality of these parameters and the thrust. Dimensional matrix T M L t 1 1 -2 r 0 1 0 ρ 1 -3 0 U 0 1 -1 N 0 0 -1 µ 1 -1 -1 Using the matrix results in M Lt−2 = La (Lt) b M L−3 c t−t d M L−1 t−t e (9. U .V. and fluid viscosity. L time. Solution The general solution under these assumptions leads to solution of T = C r a ρb U c N d µ e (9.V. r.2. Assume that no other parameter affects the thrust.b) This matrix leads to three equations. rpm or N .5: The modern ship today is equipped with a propeller as the main propulsion mechanism. rotation speed.4. Example 9. the fluid density. T is known to be a function of the radius. BUCKINGHAM–π–THEOREM End Solution 293 An example of a ship6 is be a typical example were more than one dimensionless is to constructed. µ.9. ρ.c) 6 This author who worked as ship engineer during his twenties likes to present material related to ships. t 1= 1= −2 = c+e a + b + −3c − e −c − d − e (9.a) It is convenient to arrange the dimensions and basic units in table. Also introduction of dimensional matrix is presented. Table -9.

d) Substituting the solution (9.d) into equation (9. Estimate the new speed of the disturbance.V.294 The solution of this system is a= b= c= CHAPTER 9.V. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS 2+d−e 2−d−e 1−e (9. Note the rpm or N refers to the rotation in radian per second even though rpm refers to revolution per minute. λ) (9.e) provides T = C ρ U 2 r2 ρU r µ d (9. Technician by mistake releases a chemical which reduces the surface tension by half. density. In this example. The time control of this certain process is critical because the chemical kinetics. σ.” In practical purposes the thrust is a function of Reynolds number and several other parameters. End Solution Example 9.V. a limited information is provided on which only Reynolds number with a additional dimensionless parameter is mentioned above.6: The surface wave is a small disturbance propagating in a liquid surface.a) .f) From dimensional analysis point of view the units under the power d and e are dimensionless. The flow–in to the chamber or the opening of gate is creating a disturbance.VI. Solution In the problem the functional analysis was defined as U = f (σ.e) rN U e (9. Hence.V.g) where f and g are arbitrary functions to be determined in experiments. It has to be mentioned that these experiments have to constructed in such way that the initial conditions and the boundary conditions are somehow “eliminated.a) yields T = C r(2+d−e) ρ(2−d−e) U (1−e) N d µf Rearranging equation (9. Assume that this speed for a certain geometry is a function of the surface tension. in general it can be written that T =f ρ U 2 r2 ρU r µ g rN U (9.V. The calibration of the process was done with satisfactory results. and the wave length of the disturbance (or frequency of the disturbance). ρ.V. ρ. The knowledge when this disturbance is important and is detected by with the time it traveled.V.

a linear velocity. What is the physical interpretation it could have? Flow is achieved steady state for a very long two dimensional channel where the upper surface is moving at speed.b) Mass.9.2. could be constructed as µ Diss = dU d ρ U2 U Show that this number is dimensionless.d) Hence reduction of the surface tension by half will reduce the disturbance velocity by √ 1/ 2.7: Eckert number represent the amount of dissipation.a) leads to three equations as  λ c M  M  L = 2   2   L  L   t  t U ρ σ 295 a  b  (9.VI.VII. and lower is fix. Uup .VI. Alternative number represents the dissipation. Developed an expression for dissipation number using the information provided. BUCKINGHAM–π–THEOREM Equation (9. End Solution Example 9.a) ( dU ) d 2 ρ U3 & & M & L2 M & L3 L  = & 3 3 2 L2 & L L & t t t & M M = 3 t3 t (9. µ 2 µ = dU d ρ U3 2 (9. t a+b= −2a + c = −2b = 0 1 −1 (9.c) The solution of equation set (9. M Length.VII. L time. Solution The nominator and denominator have to have the same units.VI. The flow is pure Couette flow i.e.VI.c) results in U= σ λρ (9.VI.b) .

Discuss the physical meaning of these numbers.296 CHAPTER 9. this technique allows one to find a single or several dimensionless parameters without going for the whole calculations of the dimensionless parameters.c) The results show that Dissipation number is not a function of the velocity. Discuss which of these dimensionless parameters can be neglected as it is known reasonably. For simplicity .VII. BT . Solution The functionality can be written as 0 = f (D. There are nine (9) parameters thus the number of dimensionless parameters is 9 − 3 = 6. The averaged velocity is U/2 and the velocity derivative is dU/d = constant = U/ . End Solution 9.a) The three basic parameters to be used are D [L]. the energy lost is a function of the velocity square E ∝ Diss µ U . .8: Assume that the parameters that effects the centrifugal pumps are Q D BT Pump Flow rate rotor diameter Liquid Bulk modulus typical roughness of pump surface ∆P Pressure pump created by the rpm or N ρ µ g angular rotation speed liquid density (assuming liquid phase) liquid viscosity gravity force (body force) Construct the functional relationship between the variables. as opposed to the previous method. Yet. Q.2. With these value of the Diss number is µ Diss = U U ρ 8 3 2 = 4µ ρ U (9. N. and N [t].3. ∆P ) (9. µ. Example 9. g.VIII.2 Building Blocks Method: Constructing Dimensional Parameters Note. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS The averaged velocity could be a represented (there are better methods or choices) of the energy flowing in the channel. ρ. ρ [M].

c) For the second term BT it follows BT  M   1  M  = L   3   L   t  L t2      D a  ρ b  N c (9. BUCKINGHAM–π–THEOREM 297 the RP M will be denoted as N .i) . M Length. L time.VIII. ρ.9.VIII. M Length. L time. M Length. L time. µ. b= 1 a − 3b = −c =  −1    −1  a  ρ N 2 D2 µ (9. t b= a − 3b = −c = (9.2. t a − 3b = b= −c = 3 0    −1  Q N D3 (9.f) Mass.b) Length.VIII. t The next term. The first set is to be worked on is Q. D.d) Mass. L Mass.VIII. t The next term. M time. .g) M   1   L = L   3   L   t    0    1  =⇒ π4 = D   0  D ρ b  N c (9.VIII.VIII. N as Q  M   1  L3  = L   3   L   t  t      =⇒ π1 = D a  ρ b  N c (9. µ b= a − 3b = −c =  1 BT −1  =⇒ π2 = ρ N 2 D2   −2  a  ρ (9.VIII.e) b  M   1  M  = L   3   L   t  Lt      =⇒ π3 = D N c (9.h) Mass.VIII.

.VIII.VIII. t b= a − 3b = −c = 1 ∆P −1  =⇒ π6 = ρ N 2 D2   −2  (9. M Length. Potto Project. ∆P .VIII.l) Mass. The second number represents the importance of the compressibility of the liquid in the pump. A pump is a device that intends to increase the pressure. g. L time.VIII. change order of the flow and “ideal flow” loss. In cases where the compressibility of the liquid can be neglected or the pressure increase is relatively insignificant.). The fifth dimensionless parameter is related to the ratio of the body forces to gravity forces. This energy is divided to a useful energy ( pressure increase) and to overcome the losses in the system.298 The next term. The third parameter is similar to Reynolds number since the combination N D can be interpreted as velocity. if completely different size of pumps are compared then this number must be considered. L time. the roughness is similar to similar size pump and can be neglected. the second dimensionless parameter can be neglected. Some argue that this parameter is similar to Mach number (speed of disturbance to speed of sound. g CHAPTER 9. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS  a  ρ b  M   1  L  = L   3   L   t  2 t          =⇒ π5 = D N c (9. 1999 to learn more. M Length. The increase of the pressure involves energy inserted to to system. If this physical phenomenon is accepted 7 The modern production is made by die casting process. The most dominate loss in pump is loss of order.j) Mass. (similar to BT ) ∆P  M   1  L  = L   3   L   t  2 t      D a ρ b  N c (9. These losses has several components which includes the friction in the system.k) The next term. t b= 0 a − 3b = 1 −c = −2  g D N2 (9. In practice.” Genick Bar–Meir. However. also know as turbulence (not covered yet this book. The reader is referred to “Fundamentals of die casting design. The last number represent the “effectiveness” of pump or can be viewed as dimensionless pressure obtained from the pump.m) The first dimensionless parameter π1 represents the dimensionless flow rate. The fourth number represents the production quality (mostly mode by some casting process7 ).

Assume that water is used to transport uniform grains of gold. For this analysis it is assumed that grains of gold grains are uniformly distributed. However.2.3.3 Mathematical Method: Constructing Dimensional Parameters Advance material can be skipped under construction please ignore for time being In the progression of the development of the technique the new evolution is the mathematical method. The total amount grains of gold is to be determined per unit length. D2 End Solution Q N D3 (9. Accordingly.n) 9. This fact is the source to improve the previous method. The following parameters and their dimensions are considered: Table -9. Actually.5.VIII. it has to be cautioned that this technique is overkill in most cases. the dimensional matrix can be constructed as .2. BUCKINGHAM–π–THEOREM 299 than the resistance is neglected and the fourth parameter is removed. In that case the functional relationship can be written as ∆P =f N 2 .9. It can be noticed that in the previous technique the same matrix was constructed with different vector solution (the right hand side of the equation). In the following hypothetical example demonstrates the reason for the reduction of variables. Units and Parameters of gold grains Parameters grains amount cross section area grains per volume grain weight Units q A gr e Dimension M/L L2 grains/L 3 Remarks total grains per unit length pipe cross section count of grain per V count of grain per V M/grain Notice that grains and grain are the same units for this discussion. this author is not aware for any case this technique has any advantage over the “building block” technique.

Ironically.4 Similarity and Similitude One of dimensional analysis is the key point is the concept that the solution can be obtained by conducting experiments on similar but not identical systems. sometimes or even often. constructing experiments of the situation where the same dimensionless parameters obtains could. Nusselt’s method.6. End ignore section End Advance material 9. Hence. gold grain dimensional matrix q M L grain 1 1 0 A 0 2 0 gr 0 3 1 e 1 0 -1 In this case the total number variables are 4 and number basic units are 3. 9 Because this book intend to help students to pass their exams. this conclusion is based on Nusselt’s method which calls for the same dimensionless boundary conditions. in theory. This logical conclusion is an add– on and this author is not aware of any proof to this requirement based on Buckingham’s methods. knowing what are dimensionless parameters should provide the knowledge of constructing the experiments.2. yield a solution to problem at hand. there is discussion how similar the model is to the prototype. In Nusselt’s method this differentiation is less important. The analysis here suggests and demonstrates8 that the solution is based on several dimensionless numbers. In this section deals with these similarities which in the literature some refer as analogy or similitude. Thus. and dynamic. Again. has merit especially when applying Buckingham’s method. . It is common to differentiate between three kinds of similarities: geometric. It has to be recognized that the results are as good as the guessing which in most cases is poor. requires similarity because the requirements to the boundary conditions. 8 This statement is too strong. Thus. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS Table -9. this book present what most instructors required. It well established that this over–strict requirement and under Nusselt’s method it can be overcome. Here9 this postulated idea is adapted.300 CHAPTER 9. the total of one dimensional parameter. It is hard to obtain complete similarity. some times. Hence. kinetics. Geometric Similarity One of the logical part of dimensional analysis is how the experiences should be similar to actual body they are supposed to represent. This characterization started because historical reasons and it.

For example. BUCKINGHAM–π–THEOREM Under this idea the prototype area has to be square of the actual model or Ap = Am 1 prototype 1 model 2 301 = 2p 2m 2 (9. It follows.11) p a g (9. In that case. In some cases the minimum velocity can be Umin = τw /ρ. In some situations. For example. It is common in the literature. Here this term refers to similarity of the forces. there is no way achieve low Reynolds number with thin film flow. the solution is to sacrifice the geometric similarity to minimize the undesirable effects. that this requires that similarity in the accelerations and masses between the model and prototype. Dynamics Similarity The dynamic similarity has many confusing and conflicting definitions in the literature. to discuss the situations there the model and prototype are similar but the velocities are different by a different scaling factor.9) where 1 and 2 are the typical dimensions in two different directions and subscript p refers to the prototype and m to the model. the model faces inability to match two or more dimensionless parameters.10) p It can be noticed that t ∼ /U thus equation (9. The geometrical similarity aside the shapes and counters of the object it also can requires surface roughness and erosion of surfaces of mobile surfaces or sedimentation of particles surface tensions. Kinematic Similarity The perfect kinetics similarity is obtained when there are geometrical similarity and the motions of the fluid above the objects are the same. It was shown that the solution is a function of several typical dimensionless parameters. then the desire to achieve a motion “picture” which is characterized by ratios of corresponding velocities and accelerations is the same throughout the actual flow field. The solution for the model and the prototype are the same. If this similarity is not possible. Under the same argument the volumes change with the cubes of lengths. based on Newton’s second law. river modeling requires to distort vertical scales to eliminate the influence of surface tension or bed roughness or sedimentation. since both cases have the same Froude number. Hence it can be written that U2 g = m U2 g (9. One of such dimensionless parameter is the Froude number. These impose demands require a minimum on the friction velocity.2.12) p .10) can be written as U gt and noticing that a ∝ U/t a g = m = m U gt (9.9.

The above analysis was dealing with the forces related to gravity. fluid density. radius. the surface tension is 146 milli-Newtons/meter. While in Buckingham’s methods these hand waiving are not precise. the diameter is 0. The Reynolds numbers is a common part of Navier–Stokes equations and if the solution of the prototype and for model to be same. While this explanation is a poor practice for the real world. it common to provide questions in exams and other tests on this issue. Example 9. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS hence a = F/ρ 3 . the Navier–Stokes equations are not linear and hence this assumption is excessive and this assumption can produce another source of inaccuracy. Assume that this height is a function of the body force (gravity. However. In experimental with a diameter 0. it is assumed that a linear relationship exist. σ is h. . In this analysis/discussion. g). it was shown that the ratio of the forces in the model and forces in the prototype is related to ratio of the dimensions and the density of the same systems. and the contact angle θ.302 and a ∝ F/m and m = ρ yields F ρ 3 3 CHAPTER 9.16) Noticing that U/t is the acceleration and ρ is the mass thus the forces on the right hand side are proportional if the Re number are the same. This section is provide to this purpose. Rem = Rep =⇒ ρU µ = m ρU µ (9.02 [m] and the contact angle and density remain the same.001 [m] and surface tension of 73 milliNewtons/meter and contact angle of 75◦ a height is 0. Estimate the height.01 [m] was obtained. In another situation. Substituting into equation (9.12) = m F ρ 3 p ρ 3 p Fp =⇒ = Fm (ρ 3 )m (9.14) p Utilizing the relationship U ∝ /t transforms equation (9.15) p multiplying by the length on both side of the fraction by U as ρ 3U µt U = m ρ 3U µt U =⇒ p ρ (ρ 3 3 U/t m (µ U )m = U/t)p (µ U )p (9. A discussion about force related the viscous forces is similar and is presented for the completeness. Using Buckingham’s theorem develop the relationship of the parameters. r.9: The liquid height rises in a tube due to the surface tension.14) into ρ 2 µt = m ρ 2 µt (9. the Reynolds numbers have to be same. ρ.13) In this manipulation. the fact remains that there is a strong correlation between these forces.

a) There are 6 parameters in the problem and the 3 basic parameters [L. g. For the surface tension. Five parameters are left to form the next two dimensionless groups.IX. θ.IX. σ it becomes ρ a −3 r g b ML [ L ] c σ 1 Lt −2 M t−2 = M 0 L0 t0 (9.θ ρ r2 g (9.b) leads to three equations which are Mass. M. The ρ r2 g −3a + b + c = 0 c = −1 Thus the dimensionless group is third group obtained under the same procedure to be h/r.001 End Solution (9.IX. Hence. t].d) which leads to the same angle and the same dimensional number.θ ρ r5 g (9. In this case. h2 = h1 d2 0.IX. L. From the above analysis the functional dependency can be written as h =f d σ . Thus the number of dimensionless groups is (6-3=3).e) Since the dimensionless parameters remain the same. g for time [t]. the ratio of height and radius must be remain the same. r) 303 (9. L time. One technique that was suggested is the possibility to use three parameters which contain the basic parameters [M. ρ. t] and with them form a new group with each of the left over parameters.01 × 0.002 = = 0.002 d1 0. ρ for [M] and d for [L] and gravity. BUCKINGHAM–π–THEOREM Solution It was given that the height is a function of several parameters such h = f (σ. t the solution is a = −1 b = −2 a+1= −2c − 2 = 0 (9.IX.IX. In Buckingham’s methods it is either that the angle isn’t considered or the angle is dimensionless group by itself. M Length.f) . density. In the second part the calculations for the estimated of height based on the new ratios.2.IX.c) 0 σ . h1 h2 = =f d1 d2 σ .b) Equation (9. Hence.9.

the density. and liquid velocity.304 CHAPTER 9. Example 9. The parameters that results from this process are the dimensional parameters which control the problems. The potential parameters are the angle of inclination. You furthermore are to assume that the flow is stable. Those groups (or the work on the groups creation) further can be reduced the because angle θ is dimensionless.7. For comparison reasons Buckingham’s method presented and later the results are compared with the results from Nusselt’s method. This point can be illustrated by example of flow over inclined plane. A common mistake is to ignore the boundary conditions or initial conditions. g. in that the governing equations with the boundary and initial conditions are used to determine the dimensionless parameters.3 and summarized in the following table. Units of the Pendulum Parameters Parameter ν m ˙ Units L t 2 −1 Parameter g θ Units L t−2 none 1 Parameter U ρ Units L1 t−1 M L3 M t−1 L−1 . ρ. Develop the relationship between the flow to the other parameters.3 Nusselt’s Technique The Nusselt’s method is a bit more labor intensive. U . the height of the liquid. h. liquid viscosity. the governing equations. In this method.10: Utilize the Buckingham’s method to analyze a two dimensional flow in incline plane. θ. gravity. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS 9. Solution Under the assumptions in the example presentation leads to following m = f (θ. The units of parameters can be obtained in Table 9. σ. initial condition and boundary conditions are normalized resulting in a creation of dimensionless parameters which govern the solution. the boundary conditions together with the governing equations are taken into account as opposed to Buckingham’s method. It is recommended. ρ. g. Assume that the flow infinitely long and thus flow can be analyzed per width which is a function of several parameters. when the reader is out in the real world to simply abandon Buckingham’s method all together. Assume that the flow is not affected by the surface tension (liquid). ν. In this method. An example comparing the Buckingham’s method with Nusselt’s method is presented.17) The number of basic units is three while the number of the parameters is six thus the difference is 6 − 3 = 3. Table -9. ν. U ) ˙ (9.

b) a  g b  U c (9. this analysis misses.X. t a= −3a + b + c = −2b − c = 0 2 −1          =⇒ π2 = νg U3 (9.X. Nusselt’s analysis requires that the governing equations along with the boundary and initial conditions to be written. U . M Length. the parameters that effect the problem are the focus of this discussion. Hence. ρ. .a) M   L   L  M  = 3   2   L   t   t  tL The equations obtained from equation (9. L time. End Solution A small note. These equations along with the energy. While the analytical solution for this situation exist.3. mass or the chemical species of the system.X.X. the issue of the combination of the angle gravity.X. it is well established that the combination of angle gravity or effective body force is significant to the results.c) M   L   L  L2  = 3   2   L   t   t  t The equations obtained from equation (9. for the mass. t ν mg ˙ −3a + b + c = −1  =⇒ π1 = ρ U 3   −2b − c = −1   ρ a= 1      (9.θ ρ U3 U3 (9. L time.a) are Mass. NUSSELT’S TECHNIQUE 305 The basic units are chosen as for the time. at the very least.X. and second laws governed almost all cases in thermo–fluid mechanics. M Length.e) The conclusion from this analysis are that the number of controlling parameters totaled in three and that the initial conditions and boundaries are irrelevant.9.X. In Chapter 8. Utilizing the building blocks technique provides m ˙  ρ a  g b  U c (9.d) Thus governing equation and adding the angle can be written as 0=f mg ν g ˙ . and for the length g. This author is not aware of a compelling .a) are Mass. the Navier–Stokes equations were developed.

In that case. there are no governing equations established for the field nor there is necessarily concept of conservation of something. The two dimensional NS equation can obtained from equation (8. The boundary conditions have typical velocities which can be used.18) + ρg sin θ ∂P − +µ ∂x and ρ ∂Uy + ∂t Ux ∂ 2 Ux ∂ 2 Ux ∂ 2 Ux + + ∂x2 ∂y 2 ∂z 2 ∂Uy ∂Uy ∂Uy + Uy + Uz ∂x ∂y ∂z = (9. in the y direction. writing the governing equations will yield dimensionless parameters as good as the initial guess. Any function can be presented by this form. However. The velocity is selected according to the situation or the needed velocity.a) as ρ ∂Ux + ∂t Ux ∂Ux ∂Ux ∂Ux + Uy + Uz ∂x ∂y ∂z = (9. if the effect of the initial condition is under investigation than the characteristic of that velocity should be used. The only exception is that the y component of the velocity vanished on the boundary. no assumption is made or required about whether or not the velocity. .19) + ρg sin θ ∂P − +µ ∂x With boundary conditions ∂ 2 Uy ∂ 2 Uy ∂ 2 Uy + + 2 2 ∂x ∂y ∂z 2 Ux (y = 0) = U0x f (x) ∂Ux (y = h) = τ0 f (x) ∂x (9.21) need to be converted to dimensionless equations. For example. Otherwise the velocity at the bottom should be used.306 CHAPTER 9. No assumption is required about the acceleration or the pressure gradient etc. and the initial condition of Ux (x = 0) = U0y f (y) (9. However. It can be noticed that the boundary and initial conditions are provided in a special form were the representative velocity multiply a function.21) where U0y is characteristic initial velocity. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS reason that this fact10 should be used in this chapter. These sets of equations (9. respectively. In the process of transforming the equations into a dimensionless form associated with some intelligent guess work.20) The value U0 x and τ0 are the characteristic and maximum values of the velocity or the shear stress.VIII. the 10 In economics and several other areas.18)–(9.

U0 to Umax ? (9.24) as ∂Ux τ0 U0x (y = 1) = g (x) ∂x hµ Where new dimensionless parameter. It can be noticed that because the units consistency.22) (9.11: Non–dimensionalize the following boundary condition. NUSSELT’S TECHNIQUE boundary conditions are Ux (y = 0) = f (x) U0x ∂Ux µ (y = h) = τ0 g(x) ∂x Now it is very convenient to define several new variables: U= where : x= x h y = y h Ux (x) U0x 307 (9.23) The length h is chosen as the characteristic length since no other length is provided.27) Example 9.a) Ux (y = h) = U0 a x2 + b exp(x) .11).26) With the new definition equation (9.24) h µ ∂Ux (y = 1) = τ0 g (x) U0x ∂x It commonly suggested to arrange the second part of equation (9. x.XI.3. What are the units of the coefficient in front of the variables.25) (9. Using these definitions the boundary and initial conditions becomes Ux (y=0) U0x = f (x) (9.25) transformed into ∂Ux (y = 1) = τ0 g (x) ∂x (9.9. What are relationship of the typical velocity. the characteristic length can be used for “normalization” (see Example 9. the shear stress number is defined as τ0 = τ0 U0x hµ (9.

28) Notice the new dimensionless group of the velocity ratio as results of the boundary condition. the derivative with respect to time is Ux U0x U0x 2 ∂Ux ∂Ux ∂ Ux U0x = = ∂t h ∂t ∂ t Uh 0x t U0x h (9. The dimensionless time is defined as t = t U0x /h.c) (9.308 Solution CHAPTER 9. End Solution After the boundary conditions the initial condition can undergo the non–dimensional process. The initial condition (9.XI. This dimensionless number was and cannot be obtained using the Buckingham’s technique.21) utilizing the previous definitions transformed into U0y Ux (x = 0) = f (y) U0x U0x (9.XI. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS The coefficients a and b multiply different terms and therefore must have different units.e) Where a and b are the transformed coefficients in the dimensionless presentation. The exponent appears a bit more complicated as L0 = b exp h Hence defining b= x x = b exp (h) exp = b exp (h) exp (x) h h 1 exp h (9. The main part of the analysis if conversion of the governing equation into a dimensionless form uses previous definition with additional definitions.XI.29) . Thus.XI. This definition based on the characteristic time of h/U0x . The physical significance of this number is an indication to the “penetration” of the initial (condition) velocity.b) From equation (9. The results must be unitless thus a x2 L0 = a L2 =⇒ a = 1 L2 (9.XI.d) With the new coefficients for both terms and noticing that y = h −→ y = 1 now can be written as a Ux (y = 1) = a h2 x2 + b exp (h) exp (x) = a x2 + b exp x U0 b (9.b) it clear the conversion of the first term is Ux = a h2 x.

34) Defining “initial” dimensionless parameters as Re = U0x h ρ µ U0x Fr = √ gh Eu = P0 − P∞ U0x 2 ρ (9.9.31) (9. The second term ∂Ux ∂ Ux U0x U0x 2 ∂Ux = Ux U0x = Ux ∂x ∂ x h h ∂x x h Ux U0x Ux U0x 309 Ux (9.32) The last term is the gravity g which is left for the later stage. ρ result in U0x 2 h ∂Ux + ∂t Ux − ∂Ux ∂Ux ∂Ux + Uy + Uz ∂x ∂y ∂z = ρg + ¡ sin θ ρ ¡ (9.35) into equation (9.30) The pressure is normalized by the same initial pressure or the static pressure as (P − P∞ ) / (P0 − P∞ ) and hence P −P∞ P0 −P∞ ∂P ∂ P (P0 − P∞ ) ∂P = (P0 − P∞ ) = ∂x ∂xh h ∂x The second derivative of velocity looks like ∂ 2 Ux ∂ ∂ Ux U0x U0x ∂ 2 Ux = = 2 ∂x2 ∂ (xh) ∂ (xh) h ∂x2 (9. NUSSELT’S TECHNIQUE Notice that the coefficient has units of acceleration.36) 1 ∂P + −Eu ∂x Re ∂ 2 Ux ∂ 2 Ux ∂ 2 Ux + + 2 2 ∂x ∂y ∂z 2 .3.35) Substituting definition of equation (9.33) P0 − P∞ ∂P U0x µ + 2 hρ ∂x h ρ ∂ 2 Ux ∂ 2 Ux ∂ 2 Ux + + ∂x2 ∂y 2 ∂z 2 Dividing equation (9.33) by U0x 2 /h yields ∂Ux + ∂t Ux − ∂Ux ∂Ux ∂Ux + Uy + Uz ∂x ∂y ∂z = + gh U0x 2 P0 − P∞ ∂P µ + 2 ∂x U0x h ρ U0x ρ ∂ 2 Ux ∂ 2 Ux ∂ 2 Ux + + ∂x2 ∂y 2 ∂z 2 sin θ (9. Substituting all terms and dividing by density.36) yields ∂Ux + ∂t Ux ∂Ux ∂Ux ∂Ux + Uy + Uz ∂x ∂y ∂z = 1 + sin θ F r2 (9.

x) as ∂ ∂U = ∂x U0 ∂ U U0 x = ∂U U0 ∂x (9. one of the general nondimensionalization of the Navier–Stokes and energy equations will be discussed at end of this chapter. U0y U0x (9. there are numerous examples in the literature that showing people doing experiments based on Buckingham’s methods. This is a very significant difference between the two methods. fu . and complex conditions. the results of the non dimensional transformation depends on the selection of what and how is nondimensionalization carried. It recognized that not all the possibilities can presented in the example shown above. In fact. This author is not aware of a collection of this kind of transforms. The solution of the governing equation is a function of all the parameters present in that equation and boundaries condition as well the initial condition. Common Transformations Fluid mechanics in particular and Thermo–Fluid field in general have several common transformations that appear in boundary conditions. τ0 . The significance of the large and small value of the dimensionless parameters will be discuss later in the book. The first and second categories were discussed to some degree earlier and will be expanded later. Several common boundary conditions which were not discussed in the above example are presented below. the number of parameters obtained was only three (3) while Nusselt’s method yields 12 dimensionless parameters.310 CHAPTER 9. The third and fourth categories were not discussed previously. 12 The mathematicians like to call Dirichlet conditions . In these experiments. Thus. θ.36) show one common possibility of a dimensionless presentation of governing equation. Thus. given derivative (Neumann b. Without actually solving the problem.g. y depend on h and hence the value of h is an important parameter. this process involve dividing the function by a typical value and the same for length variable (e. fτ .37) The values of x. Boundary conditions are divided into several categories such as a given value to the function12 . Nusselt’s method provides several more parameters that were not obtained by the block method. initial conditions and equations11 . It can be noticed with Buckingham’s method. mixed condition.). The second category involves the nondimensionalization of the derivative. The non–dimensionalization of the boundary conditions of the first category requires finding and diving the boundary conditions by a typical or a characteristic value. F r. y. the solution is Ux = f x.38) 11 Many of these tricks spread in many places and fields. major parameters are ignored rendering these experiments useless in many cases and deceiving. Re. As an initial matter. In general. This section of these parameters depends on what is investigated.c. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS Equation (9. Eu.

. The surface geometry (or the radii) is determined by several factors which include the liquid movement 13 This author aware of fifth order partial differential governing equations in some cases. This category includes combination of the function with its derivative.39) The third kind of boundary condition is the mix condition. NUSSELT’S TECHNIQUE 311 In the Thermo–Fluid field and others.40) This kind of boundary condition. It can be noticed that the degree of the derivative boundary condition cannot exceed the derivative degree of the governing equation (e. The last category is dealing with some non–linear conditions of the function with its derivative. Thus. For example a typical heat balance at liquid solid interface reads h(T0 − T ) = −k ∂T ∂x (9.). and. ∆P ≈ σ 1 1 + r1 r2 = σ r1 + r2 r1 r2 (9. For example. the highest derivative can be fifth order derivative.3. is the surface tension between the gas (or liquid) and the other phase. translated to T0 − T T0 − Tmax @ −∂ (T0 − Tmax k @@@@@) T − T0 T0 − Tmax x ∂ @ h @@@@@) (T0 − Tmax or =− (9.g. σ.41) T0 − T T0 − Tmax k = h ∂ T − T0 T0 − Tmax x ∂ =⇒ Θ = 1 ∂Θ N u ∂x (9.42) Where Nusselt Number and the dimensionless temperature are defined as Nu = h k Θ= T − T0 T0 − Tmax (9.44) Where r1 and r2 are the typical principal radii of the free surface curvature. the governing equation can be of higher order than second order13 .43) and Tmax is the maximum or reference temperature of the system.9. since derivative of constant is zero. second order equation has at most the second order differential boundary condition. In general “nth” order differential equation leads to U0 ∂ ∂nU = n ∂xn ∂ n U U0 x n = U0 ∂ n U n ∂xn (9.

The governing equation is non–linear and this example provides opportunity to study nondimensionalizing of this kind of equation. Example 9. The diameter of cylinder as a typical length. velocity.” It is common assumption. to initially assume. There are several situations where the characteristic length. The characteristic velocity can determined from U0 = 2P0 /ρ.12: One idea of renewable energy is to use and to utilize the high concentration of of brine water such as in the Salt Lake and the Salt Sea (in Israel). The Avi number represents the geometrical characteristics combined with the material properties. In that case.45) can be rearranged to be ∆P r1 r1 + r2 r1 + r2 ≈ =⇒ Av ≈ σ r2 r2 (9.45) can be transferred into ∆P r1 = Av σ (9.48) The power n depends on the gas properties. This process requires analysis the mass transfer process.a) .XII. This boundary condition (9. are determined by the physical properties of the fluid(s). The boundary condition (9. a new dimensionless parameters is introduced as the ratio of the density to a reference density as ρ= ρ ρ0 (9.312 CHAPTER 9. If greater accuracy is needed than this assumption is removed.g. for example.47) In case of ideal gas model with isentropic flow this assumption becomes ρ= ¯ ρ = ρ0 P0 P 1 n (9.45) Where Av is Avi number . Characteristics Values Normally. The characteristic length can be determined from ratio of = ∆P/σ. One of advantage of Nusselt’s method is the Object–Oriented nature which allows one to add additional dimensionless parameters for addition “degree of freedom. The conversion of the species yields a governing nonlinear equation14 for such process is U0 ∂CA ∂ DAB ∂CA = ∂x ∂y (1 − XA ) ∂y (9. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS instabilities etc chapters of the problem at hand. that liquid is incompressible. the characteristics values are determined by physical values e.46) Where ∆P is the pressure difference between the two phases (normally between the liquid and gas phase).

c) Select dimensionless parameters so that the governing equation and boundary and initial condition can be presented in a dimensionless form.e) It can be noticed that X is unitless parameter because two same quantities are divided. Thesis Tel-Aviv Univ. In addition to that. the number of moles per volume.” However. equation (9. (Israel). DAB is defined as penetration of species A into the material.S.e.b) (9. dimensionless parameters are presented as ratio of two quantities. There is no need to discuss the physical significance of the problem.9. Typically.f) Hence the units of diffusion coefficient are typically given by m2 /sec (it also can be observed that based on Fick’s laws of diffusion it has the same units). The potential of possibilities of dimensionless parameter is large. What are the units of the diffusivity coefficient? The boundary conditions of this partial differential equation are given by ∂CA (y = ∞) = 0 ∂y CA (y = 0) = Ce Where Ce is the equilibrium concentration. Solution This governing equation requires to work with dimension associated with mass transfer and chemical reactions. XA is defined as the molar fraction of species A divide by the total amount of material (in moles). . The initial condition is CA (x = 0) = C0 (9.d) (9. The diffusivity coefficient.XII. in heat and mass transfer (also in pressure driven flow etc. this unit will be canceled.) the relative or reference to certain point has to accounted for.XII. CA is defended as the molar density i. Hence.a) can be written (when the concentration is simply ignored) as U ∂C ∂x ∂ ∂y DAB (1−X) ∂C ∂y L t C C 1 DAB     = L L 1 L (9.XII. 1 1 L2 = 2 DAB =⇒ DAB = t L t (9. The molar fraction. the units should not cause confusion or fear since it appear on both sides of the governing equation. the “mole. Genick “Hygroscopic absorption to falling films: The effects of the concentration level” M.3. The boundary and initial conditions here provides 14 More information how this equation was derived can be found in Bar–Meir (Meyerson).XII. Now the units are compared to make sure that diffusion coefficient is kept the units on both sides the same. From units point of view. NUSSELT’S TECHNIQUE 313 Where the concentration.XII. of Fluid Mechanics and Heat Transfer 12/1991. Dept.XII.

h) Hence the derivative of Φ with respect to time is ∂Φ = ∂x ∂ 0 CA − C0 & b ∂ CA − & C0 Ce − C0 = x Ce − C0 ∂x ∂ = ∂CA Ce − C0 ∂x (9.j) Equation (9. However. while is dimensionless. End Solution 9. Hence.314 CHAPTER 9.g) Φ= Ce − C0 With almost “standard” transformation x x= y y= (9. Ce −C0 was not expected and it represent ratio of the driving force to the C height of the concentration which was not possible to attend by Buckingham’s method. the potential definition is CA − C0 (9. Using the definition of XA it can be written as XA = CA CA − C0 1 = (Ce − C0 ) C Ce − C0 C (9.XII. Yet.XII.a) transformed into $ (C$$ ∂Φ U0 $e −C0 ) ∂x U0 ∂Φ ∂x $ ∂ DAB $$− C0 ) ∂Φ (Ce $$ ∂y (1 − XA ) ∂y 1 ∂ DAB ∂Φ = 2 ∂y (1 − XA ) ∂y = 1 (9.XII.l) another unexpected dimensionless parameter as Ce − C0 (9.j) like non–dimensionalized and proper version. equation (9.k) Thus the transformation in equation (9.XII. the term XA .l) XA = Φ C Thus number. XA has to be converted or presented by Φ.XII. this term. is not proper. . Hence.XII.XII.XII.i) In general a derivative with respect to x or y leave yields multiplication of . DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS the potential of the “driving force” for the mass flow or mass transfer.XII.4 Summary of Dimensionless Numbers This section summarizes all the major dimensionless parameters which are commonly used in the fluid mechanics field. Hence. XA is a function of Φ because it contains CA .

Common Dimensionless Parameters of Thermo–Fluid in the Field 315 Name Symbol g Equation 3 Interpretation buoyancy forces viscous force buoyancy forces “penetration” force gravity forces surface tension force heat dissipation heat conduction viscous force surface tension force inertia force elastic force pressure difference inertia energy wave distance Typical Distance inertia forces viscous deviation forces stress relaxation time observation time drag force inertia effects inertia effects thermal effects Application in nature and force convection in stability of liquid layer a over b RayleighTaylor instability etc. SUMMARY OF DIMENSIONLESS NUMBERS Table -9. hydrodynamics. Archimedes Ar Number Atwood Number Bond Number Brinkman Number Capillary Number Cauchy Number A ρf (ρ − ρf ) µ2 (ρa − ρb ) ρa + ρb ρg σ 2 Bo in open channel flow. note this coefficient has many definitions during dissipation problems Cavitation σ Number Courant Number Dean Number Deborah Number15 Drag Coefficient Eckert Number Co D De CD Ec Continued on next page .4. thin film flow Br Ca Cau µU 2 k ∆T µU σ ρ U2 E Pl − Pv 1 2 2 ρU ∆t U ∆x Re R/h tc tp D 1 2 2 ρU A U2 Cp ∆T during dissipation problems For small Re and surface tension involve problem For large Re and surface tension involve problem pressure difference to vapor pressure to the potential of phase change (mostly to gas) A requirement in numerical schematic to achieve stability) related to radius of channel with width h stability the ratio of the fluidity of material primary used in rheology Aerodynamics.8.9.

DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS Table -9.8. Common Dimensionless Parameters of Fluid Mechanics (continue) Standard System Name Ekman Number Euler Number Froude Number Galileo Number Grashof Number Knudsen Number Laplace Constant Lift Coefficient Mach Number Symbol Ek Ec Equation ν 2 2 Interpretation viscous forces Coriolis forces pressure potential Application geophysical flow like atmospheric flow potential of resistance problems ω P0 − P∞ Cp ∆T U √ g ρg 3 µ2 β ∆T g µ2 λ 3 effects inertia effects Fr Ga Gr Kn inertia effects gravitational effects gravitational effects viscous effects ρ2 buoyancy effects viscous effects LMFP characteristic length surface force gravity effects lift force inertia effects velocity sound speed “thermal” surface tension open channel flow and two phase flow open channel flow and two phase flow natural convection length of mean free path. economy La 2σ g(ρ1 − ρ2 ) L 1 ρ U2 A 2 U c − dσ ∆T dT να gµ4 ∆ρ c ρ2 σ 3 c CD 2 Pmax ρ Qmax 2 A CL M Marangoni Ma Number Morton Number Ozer Number Mo Oz viscous force viscous force surface tension force “maximum” supply “maximum” demand ( ) Continued on next page . surface tension problem.316 CHAPTER 9. LMFP. also ref:Capillary constant Aerodynamics. note this coefficient has many definitions compressibility and propagation of disturbances surface tension caused by thermal gradient bubble and drop flow supply and demand analysis such pump & pipe system. to characteristic length liquid raise. hydrodynamics.

9. The typical body force is the gravity g which has a direction to center of Earth.3051374. . in the study of the physical situations often people refers to local Re number and the global Re number.1063/1. (1964). M. a civil engineer who is considered the father of Rheology. “The Deborah Number”. Physics Today 17 (1): 62. The 15 This number is named by Reiner. named this parameter because theological reasons perhaps since he was living in Israel. doi:10.4. The elasticity E in case of liquid phase is BT .8 are the characteristics of the system.8. Keeping this point in mind. In fact. Common Dimensionless Parameters of Fluid Mechanics (continue) 317 Standard System Name Prandtl Number Reynolds Number Rossby Number Shear Number Stokes Number Symbol Pr Equation ν α ρU µ U ω 0 τc c µc Uc tp tK Interpretation viscous diffusion rate thermal diffusion rate inertia forces viscous forces inertia forces Coriolis forces actual shear “potential” shear time Kolmogorov time particle relaxation Application Prandtl is fluid property important in flow due to thermal forces In most fluid mechanics issues Re Ro Sn Stk In rotating fluids shear flow In aerosol dealing penetration particles flow with of Strouhal Number St ω U “unsteady” effects inertia effect The effects of natural or forced frequency in all the field that is how much the “unsteadiness” of the flow is Stability of rotating cylinders Notice has special definition For large Re and surface tension involve problem Taylor Number Weber Number Ta ρ2 ωi 2 µ4 ρ U2 σ 4 centrifugal forces viscous forces inertia force surface tension force We The dimensional parameters that were used in the construction of the dimensionless parameters in Table 9. SUMMARY OF DIMENSIONLESS NUMBERS Table -9. in case of solid phase is Young modulus. Therefore there are several definition of Reynolds number. there several typical dimensions which need to be mentioned. The typical length is denoted as and in many cases it is referred to as the diameter or the radius. Reiner.

Example 9. The value of the viscosity. -9.Vortex Street. flow around cylinder at first looks like symmetrical situation. Solution 16 This is an example where the more unsteady the situation becomes the situation can be analyzed as a steady state because averages have a significant importance. For example. vortexes are created in an infinite parade and this phenomenon is called Von Karman vortex street (see Figure 9. the physics itself instores or forces periodic instability. The area. c is the speed of sound of the fluid at rest or characteristic value. This number determines. In other situations. 17 This example is based on Bird. 9.4.4. A in drag and lift coefficients is referred normally to projected area. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS density. When Reynolds num.13: Eckert number17 determines whether the role of the momentum energy is transferred to thermal energy is significant to affect the flow. Historically. ber increases. these vortexes are mixed and the flow becomes turbulent which. can be considered a steady state16 . The pressure P is the pressure at infinity or when the velocity is at rest.1 The Significance of these Dimensionless Numbers Reynolds number. Oscillating Von Karman create an unsteady situation. And indeed in a low Reynolds number it is a steady state. in many cases. This effect is important in situations where high speed is involved. The inability to define a fix value leads also to new dimensionless numbers which represent the deviations of these properties. The frequency ω or f is referred to as the “unsteadiness” of the system. this number was one of the first numbers to be introduced to fluid mechanics.4) which named after Von Karman. the periodic effect is enforced by the boundary conditions or the initial conditions. µ is typically some kind averaged value. Generally. ρ is referred to the characteristic density or density at infinity. However after a certain value of Reynolds number. These vortexes are created in a non–symmetrical way and hence Fig. Determine this relationship and under what circumstances this relationship is true.318 CHAPTER 9. the flow regime. This fact suggests that Eckert number is related to Mach number. . named in the honor of Reynolds. represents the ratio of the momentum forces to the viscous forces. Lightfoot and Stuart “Transport Phenomena”.

supersonic flow in rocket mechanics creating large heat effect in the head due to large velocity (in many place it is a combination of Eckert number with Brinkman number.4.potto. The Mach number is based on different equations depending on the property of the medium in which pressure disturbance moves through.14: For historical reason some fields prefer to use certain numbers and not other ones.XIII. While in some instances this combination is justified. Example 9.org/gasDynamics/node70.8 Mach and Eckert numbers are defined as Ec = U2 Cp ∆T M= U P ρ 319 (9. the reference temperature used to be equal to zero.8 We = 18 See ρ U2 σ Re = ρU µ Ca = µU U = σ σ µ (9. other cases it is arbitrary.XIII.a) The material which obeys the ideal flow model18 (P/ρ = R T and P = C1 ρk ) can be written that P U (9. Show what the relationship between these dimensionless numbers. Cauchy number and Mach number are related as well and see Example 9.b) M =U =√ ρ kRT For the comparison.c) T k−1 Cp The Eckert number and Mach number are related under ideal gas model and isentropic relationship. For example in Mechanical engineers prefer to use the combination Re and W e number while Chemical engineers prefers to use the combination of Re and the Capillary number. SUMMARY OF DIMENSIONLESS NUMBERS In Table 9. Solution The definitions of these number in Table 9. End Solution Brinkman number measures of the importance of the viscous heating relative the conductive heat transfer.XIV. This number is important in cases when a large velocity change occurs over short distances such as lubricant.15 for explanation.9.XIII.a) for more details http://www. Thus Eckert number can be written as √ √ √ U U k − 1U Ec = = = √ = k − 1M Cp T kRT Rk (9.html .

In the solid phase equation (9. This difference from dimensional analysis is minimal. Euler number is referred to as the pressure coefficient. as first approximation.15: Explained under what conditions and what are relationship between the Mach number and Cauchy number? Solution Cauchy number is defined as Cau = The square root of Cauchy number is √ Cau = U E ρ (9.49) Thus the square root of Cau is equal to Mach number in the liquid phase.XV. However.c) is less accurate and speed of sound depends on the direction of the grains.320 CHAPTER 9. Cp .b) End Solution Euler number is named after Leonhard Euler (1707 1783).a) into √ Cau = U =M c (9.a) In the liquid phase the speed of sound is approximated as c= E ρ (9.b) transforms equation (9. Furthermore. Eulers number and Cavitation number are essentially the same with the exception that these numbers represent different driving pressure differences. this analysis can be applied also to the solid phase.XV. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS Dividing Weber number by Reynolds number yields ρ U2 We = σ ρU Re µ U = σ = Ca µ (9.XV. End Solution . This confusion arises in dimensional analysis because historical reasons and the main focus area.XIV.b) ρU2 E (9.XV.c) Using equation (9. The cavitation number is used in the study of cavitation phenomena while Euler number is mainly used in calculation of resistances. a German Physicist who pioneered so many fields that it is hard to say what and where are his greatest contributions.XV. Example 9.XV.

a) Defined Oh in term of W e and Re numbers. What are the relation between these numbers? Example 9. . In addition to the above confusion. Weber number and Laplace number. For example.2 Relationship Between Dimensionless Numbers The Dimensionless numbers since many of them have formulated in a certain field tend to be duplicated. Mach number and Eckert Number under certain circumstances are same. For example. many dimensional numbers expressed the same things under certain conditions.XIX. Example 9.XVII. SUMMARY OF DIMENSIONLESS NUMBERS 321 9.19: Ohnesorge Number is another dimensionless parameter that deals with surface tension and is similar to Capillary number and it is defined as Oh = √ µ ρσ (9.XVIII.a) What is the relationship between two Froude numbers? Example 9. This number is defined as F rR = ω2 g (9.9.4.18: The Rotating Froude Number is a somewhat a similar number to the regular Froude number. Example 9.4.16: Galileo Number is a dimensionless number which represents the ratio of gravitational forces and viscous forces in the system as Ga = ρ2 g µ2 3 (9.a) The definition of Reynolds number has viscous forces and the definition of Froude number has gravitational forces.17: Laplace Number is another dimensionless number that appears in fluid mechanics which related to Capillary number.XVI. the Bond number is referred in Europe as Eotvos number. The Laplace number definition is La = ρσ µ2 (9.a) Show what are the relationships between Reynolds number.

4.20: The similarity of pumps is determined by comparing several dimensional numbers among them are Reynolds number.XX.25 × 43 = 16 m3 sec (9. Q.XX. pressure increase. Rossby number etc. Euler number. Due to increase of demand. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS 9. What is the new estimated flow rate. and power consumption? Solution It provided that the Reynolds number controls the situation.XX.a) It can be noticed that initial situation is considered as the model and while the new pump is the prototype. depends on the ratio of the area and velocity as Qp Ap Up Ap Up Dp 2 Up = =⇒ Qp = Qm = Qm Qm Am Um Am U m Dm 2 Um Thus the prototype flow rate is Qp = Qm Dp Dm 3 (9.a) ∆Pp = ∆Pm The power can be obtained from the following F ˙ = F U = P AU W = t (9. The density and viscosity remains the same and hence Rem = Rep =⇒ Um Dm = Up Dp =⇒ Up = Dm Um DP (9. The new flow rate.g) Dp Dm 2 ∆P 1 2 2ρ U p = ∆P 1 2 2ρ U m (9.XX.XX. it is suggested to replace the pump with a 4 times larger pump.e) (9.d) = ρ U2 p U2 p ¡ = (ρ U 2 )m (U 2 )m ¡ (9.d) provides (∆P )p (∆P )m Utilizing equation (9.3 Examples for Dimensional Analysis Example 9.25 [m3 /sec] and pressure increase for this flow rate is 2 [Bar] with 2500 [kw].b) = 0. The flow rate of the imaginary pump is 0.c) The new pressure is obtain by comparing the Euler number as Eup = Eum =⇒ Rearranging equation (9.XX. Assume that the only numbers which affect the flow are Reynolds and Euler number.XX.f) .XX.322 CHAPTER 9.XX.

).21: The flow resistance to flow of the water in a pipe is to be simulated by flow of air.c) ρm Um ∆Pm = ∆Pp ρp U p (9.9. This kind of study appears in the industry in which the compressibility of the air is ignored. Hence.h) = ˙m (P A U )m W Utilizing equations above in this ratio leads to Pp /Pm Ap /Am 2 Up /Um 2 ˙ Wp = ˙ Wm Dp Dm Dp Dm Dp Dm = Dp Dm 5 (9. Eu = f (Re) (9. it is assumed that pressure is uniform in the cross section. This assumption is appropriate because only the secondary flows in the radial direction (to be discussed in this book section on pumps.e) .XXI.4.c) yields ∆Pm = ∆Pp p m 2 µm µp 2 ρp ρm (9. Estimate the pressure loss ratio if Reynolds number remains constant. SUMMARY OF DIMENSIONLESS NUMBERS 323 In this analysis.XX. Water is a substance that can be considered incompressible flow for relatively small pressure change.i) End Solution Example 9.a) Thus. the Reynolds number is the single controlling parameter which affects the pressure loss. However. Thus it can be written that the Euler number is function of the Reynolds number.XX. Um = Up and for Euler number p m Eum = Eup ρ µp ρm µm (9.XXI. the ratio of power between the two pump can be written as ˙ (P A U )p Wp (9.XXI. Rep = Rem Hence. to have a similar situation the Reynolds and Euler have to be same.XXI. Solution For the first part. Estimate the error using the averaged properties of the air. the air is a compressible substance that flows the ideal gas model.XXI.XXI.b) (9.d) and utilizing equation (9.

f) It can be noticed that the density of the air changes considerably hence the calculations produce a considerable error which can render the calculations useless (a typical problem of Buckingham’s method). to be continue End Solution Example 9.XXII. air density variation. .b) m dividing equation (9.d) m If the body force19 .XXI.a) by equation (9. However as a first approximation.XXII.b) results in U ν or / p U √ g √ g ν = p U ν √ g ν / m U √ g (9. the air properties are calculated based on the averaged values between the entrance and exit values. Solution The requirement is that Reynolds Rem = Rp =⇒ The Froude needs to be similar so F rm = F rp =⇒ U √ g = p U ν = p U ν (9.XXII. If the pressure reduction is a function of pressure reduction (iterative process). Assuming a new variable that effect the problem.XXII. The kinematic viscosity ratio is then νp = νm 19 The m p 3/2 = (1/20) 3/2 (9.c) m = p (9.e) body force does not necessarily have to be the gravity. If that variable is introduced into problem. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS ∆Pm = 1 × 1000× ∆Pp (9. What should be ratio of kinematic viscosity between the model and prototype so that Froude and Reynolds numbers remain the same.22: A device operating on a surface of a liquid to study using a model with a ratio 1:20.XXII.a) m U ν (9. Assume that body force remains the same and velocity is reduced by half.XXII.324 Inserting the numerical values results in CHAPTER 9. air can be used to simulate water flow. g.XXII.

It can be shown that these two techniques in some situations provide almost similar solution. Nusselt’s approach provides an heavy duties approach to examine what dimensionless parameters effect the problem. First. In other cases. 9.5 Summary The two dimensional analysis methods or approaches were presented in this chapter.6 Appendix summary of Dimensionless Form of Navier– Stokes Equations In a vector form Navier–Stokes equations can be written and later can be transformed into dimensionless form which will yield dimensionless parameters. The dimensional analysis technique provides a way to simplify models (solving the governing equation by experimental means) and to predict effecting parameters. End Solution 9. SUMMARY 325 It can be noticed that this can be achieved using Ohnesorge Number like this presentation. these technique proves different and even conflicting results.5.9.50) ˜ =h . Buckingham’s π technique is a quick “fix approach” which allow rough estimates and relationship between model and prototype. the typical or characteristics values of scaling parameters has to be presented and appear in the following table Parameter Symbol h U0 f ρ0 Pmax − P∞ Parameter Description characteristic length characteristic velocity characteristic frequency characteristic density maximum pressure drive Units [L] L t 1 t M L3 M L t2 Basic non–dimensional form of the parameters ˜ t = ft ˜ P = P − P∞ Pmax − P∞ ˜ r= r h U ˜ U = U0 ˜ ρ= ρ ρ0 (9.

If the .17) for non–compressible substance can be transformed into 0 ! ¡ ∂ρ ¡ + ∂t ¡ · (˜ U ) = 0 ρ (9.326 CHAPTER 9.” This parameter is important in unsteady. Supplemental Problems 1. In some places F r is defined as the square of F r = U 2 /g h. every additive term has primary dimensions m1 L−2 t−2 . Using these equations developed new dimensionless equations so the new “Froude number” will contain or “swallow” by the new acceleration. To non nondimensionalization.111) results in ˜ f h ∂U ˜ ˜ + U· ˜ U =− ˜ U0 ∂ t Pmax − P∞ ˜ ρU ˜ ˜ ˜ P + 1 fg + 1 ˜ 2U ˜ ˜2 ρU h U µ gh (9. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS For the Continuity Equation (8.53) The definition of Froude number is not consistent in the literature. What is the air velocity for a 1:20 scale model to achieve dynamic similarity between model and prototype? Assume that in the model the air has the same pressure and temperature as that in prototype. who used this parameter in his study of “singing wires.51) For the N-S equation.a) Suggest a dimensionless parameter that will take this change into account. Measurement has shown that the acceleration to be constant with small sinusoidal on top the constant such away as a =B + sin f 2π (9. The Strouhal number is named after Vincenz Strouhal (1850 1922). so that the dimensions cancel. which has primary dimensions m−1 L2 t2 . An airplane wing of chord length 3 [m] moves through still air at 15◦ Cand 1 [Bar] and at at a speed of 15 [m/sec].52) Or after using the definition of the dimensionless parameters as St ˜ 1 ∂U 1 ˜2˜ ˜ ˜ ˜ + U · ˜ U = −Eu ˜ P + fg + U ˜ F r2 Re ∂t (9.23: A device is accelerated linearly by a constant value B . we multiply every term by L/(V 2 ). Example 9. oscillating flow problems in which the frequency of the oscillation is important. Using these definitions equation (8. Write a new N–S and continuity equations for incompressible substance in the a coordinate system attached to the body.XXIII.

6. State your assumptions.5[bar] and temperature 20◦ C? What is the required velocity of the air in the model test when the medium is made of water to keep the dynamic similarity? 2. what velocity is required for pressure is 1. An airplane 100[m] long is tested by 1 [m] model.9. The pipe is 0. APPENDIX SUMMARY OF DIMENSIONLESS FORM OF NAVIER–STOKES EQUATIONS327 air is considered as compressible. If the airplane velocity is 120 [m] and velocity at the wind–tunnel is 60 [m]. The pressure drop for water flowing at 1 [m/sec] in a pipe was measured to be 1 [Bar]. What is the pipe diameter for oil flowing at speed of 1[m/sec] to obtain dynamic similarity with a pipe for water flowing at 3 [m/sec] in a 0. You can assume that both model and prototype working conditions are the same (1[Bar] and 60◦ C). 3. 4.02[m] pipe. calculate the model and the airplane Reynolds numbers. What should be velocity of Castor oil to get the same Reynolds number? What would be pressure drop in that case? .05 [m] diameter and 100 [m] in length.

DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS .328 CHAPTER 9.

fluid mechanics.. in German. (On the o history of the pi theorem. ZAMM 55. [3] Buckingham. 263-296 (1915). A micro-biography of Edgar Buckingham Edgar Buckingham (18671940) was educated at Harvard and Leipzig. Phys. or NIST) 1905–1937. 3-8 (1975). gas properties. E. Langhaar (John Wiley & Sons. and worked at the (US) National Bureau of Standards (now the National Institute of Standards and Technology. H. ). 345-376 (1914). A. acoustics. E.S.BIBLIOGRAPHY [1] Buckingham. but also apparently Krieger Publishing Co. Nature 96.M. On physically similar systems.. 1980. 37. E. 396-397 (1915). The principle of similitude. [2] Buckingham. Inc. His fields of expertise included soil physics. Model experiments and the forms of empirical equations. Rev. Zur Geschichte des pi-Theorems. illustrations of the use of dimensional equations.) [5] Dimensional Analysis and Theory of Models by Henry L. 329 . [4] G¨rtler. Trans. 4. and black–body radiation. 1951.E.

330 BIBLIOGRAPHY .

this class will be the only opportunity to be exposed to this topic. As result. Additionally. his analysis is in the twilight zone not in the real world. In the past. books on multiphase flow were written more as a literature review or heavy on the mathematics. 10. it is believed that the interactions/calculations requires a full year class and hence. Here. 331 . For many engineers. This book attempts to describe these issues as a fundamentals of physical aspects and less as a literature review.2 History The study of multi–phase flow started for practical purposes after World War II. working for the government who analyzed filing cavity with liquid metal (aluminum). only the trends and simple calculations are described. in many books the representations is by writing the whole set governing equations.1 Introduction Traditionally.there are two possibilities (1) the fluids/materials are flowing in well homogeneous mixed (where the main problem 1 An example. the topic of multi–phase flow is ignored in an introductory class on fluid mechanics. In fact. For simple models.CHAPTER 10 Multi–Phase Flow 10. The knowledge in this topic without any doubts. The author believes that the trends and effects of multiphase flow could and should be introduced and considered by engineers. there was a Ph. Initially the models were using simple assumptions. the nature of multiphase flow requires solving many equations. This chapter provides information that is more or less in consensus2 . Thus. is required for many engineering problems. 2 Or when the scientific principles simply dictate. It is recognized that multiphase flow is still evolving.D. who did not consider the flow as two–phase flow and ignoring the air. Calculations of many kinds of flow deals with more than one phase or material flow1 . there is not a consensus to the exact map of many flow regimes.

3 What to Expect From This Chapter As oppose to the tradition of the other chapters in this book and all other Potto project books. . Which leads to the concept of flow regime maps. and importance to real world. MULTI–PHASE FLOW to find the viscosity). When it became apparent that specific models were needed for different situations. the concept of flow regimes. This chapter will provide: a category of combination of phases. For example. Taitle–Duckler’s map is not applicable for microgravity. 10. However. will know and understand the trends. and more importantly. flow parameters effects on the flow regimes. multi–phase flow parameters definitions. and calculation of pressure drop of simple homogeneous model. Taitle and Duckler suggested a map based on five non-dimensional groups which are considered as the most useful today. It is an attempt to explain and convince all the readers that the multi–phase flow must be included in introductory class on fluid mechanics3 . phase change or transfer processes during flow. The flow patterns or regimes were not considered. this chapter will explain the core concepts of the multiphase flow and their relationship. Hence. However. Under this assumption the total is not linear and experimental correlation was made. this chapter will not provide a discussion of transient problems.332 CHAPTER 10. partial discussion on speed of sound of different regimes. double choking phenomenon (hopefully). Also the researchers looked at the situation when the different regimes are applicable. a description of what to expect in this chapter is provided. (2) the fluids/materials are flowing separately where the actual total loss pressure can be correlated based on the separate pressure loss of each of the material. This was suggested by Lockhart and Martinelli who use a model where the flow of the two fluids are independent of each other. researchers started to look for different flow regimes and provided different models. Researchers that followed Lockhart and Martinelli looked for a different map for different combination of phases. It turned out this idea provides a good crude results in some cases. Taitle and Duckler’s map is not universal and it is only applied to certain liquid–gas conditions. They postulate that there is a relationship between the pressure loss of a single phase and combine phases pressure loss as a function of the pressure loss of the other phase. If the pressure loss was linear then the total loss will be the summation of the two pressure losses (of the lighter liquid (gas) and the heavy liquid). and actual calculation of pressure of the different regimes. This chapter will introduce these concepts so that the engineer not only be able to understand a conversation on multi-phase but also.

KIND OF MULTI-PHASE FLOW Gas Liquid Liquid Solid Gas Liquid Liquid Liquid Liquid 333 Gas Solid soid Liquid Solid Solid Soid Fig. .1. nonetheless it exists.000 in about two and half years. or a large acceleration. -10. Different fields of multi phase flow.10. there are situations when air flow has to be considered as multiphase flow and this effect has to be taken into account.” 4 Different concentration of oxygen as a function of the height. Hence. the homogeneous assumption is enough and suitable. For example. consider air flow that was discussed and presented earlier as a single phase flow. This fact is due to the shear number of the downloaded Potto books. many proprieties of air are calculated as if the air is made of well mixed gases of Nitrogen and Oxygen. In our calculation. The number of the downloads of the book on Fundamental of compressible flow has exceed more than 100. The results of the calculations of a mixture do not change much if it is assumed that the air flow as stratified flow 4 of many concentration layers (thus. The discussion in the previous chapters is only as approximation when multiphase can be “reduced” into a single phase flow. However. It also provides an opportunity to bring the latest advances in the fields since this author does not need to “sell” the book to a publisher or convince a “committee. this assumption will not be appropriate when the air is stratified because of large body forces.4 Kind of Multi-Phase Flow All the flows are a form of multiphase flow. In fact. The creation 3 This author feels that he is in an unique position to influence many in the field of fluid mechanics. While the difference of the concentration between the top to button is insignificant. Adopting this assumption might lead to a larger error. Air is not a pure material but a mixture of many gases. many layers (infinite) of different materials). Practically for many cases. it is assumed that air is made of only gases.4. 10.

The body inhales solid particle with breathing air. The engineering accuracy is enough to totally ignore it.5 Classification of Liquid-Liquid Flow Regimes The general discussion on liquid–liquid will be provided and the gas–liquid flow will be discussed as a special case. they can be solid–liquid. This category should include any distinction of phase/material. is only an extreme case of liquid-gas flow and is a sub category of the multiphase flow. mud flow etc. 1887). The “average” viscosity is meaningless since in many cases the water follows around the oil. rain. Jr. fluidized bed. For example. the density is a strong function of the temperature and pressure. The water flow is the source of the friction. This flow is used by engineers to reduce the cost of moving crude oil through a long pipes system. This flow also appears in any industrial process that are involved in solidification (for example die casting) and in moving solid particles. 360070 issued to George Westinghouse. paint spray. solid propellant rocket. Many natural phenomenon are multiphase flow. March 29. Open Channel flow is. Since there are three phases. The multiphase can be found in nature. The multiphase is an important part of many processes. In the past. and river flow. In a four (4) miles long train. there are situations where cleanness of the air can affect the flow. In almost all situations. This notion eliminates many other flow categories that can and should be included in multiphase flow.. For the gas. When the . hydraulic with two or more kind of liquids. the breaks in long trains were activated by reduction of the compressed line (a patent no. the flow of oil and water in one pipe is a multiphase flow. it is more common to categorize the flow by the distinct phases that flow in the tube. there are two possibilities for two different materials to flow (it is also correct for solid–liquid and any other combination). Generally. Many industrial process also include liquid-liquid such as painting. although important. Yet. For example. the cleanness of the air or the fact that air is a mixture is ignored. for an example.334 CHAPTER 10. in nature can be blood flow. The category of liquid–gas should be really viewed as the extreme case of liquid-liquid where the density ratio is extremely large. Gas–solid can be found in sand storms. plasma and river flow with live creatures (small organisms to large fish) flow of ice berg. The liquid–solid. MULTI–PHASE FLOW of clean room is a proof that air contains small particles. Many industries are involved with this flow category such as dust collection. for example. a 10% change of the speed of sound due to dust particles in air could reduce the stopping time by 2 seconds (50 meter difference in stopping) and can cause an accident. sand and grain (which are “solids”) flow with rocks and is referred to solid–solid flow. and avalanches. Liquid–liquid flow is probably the most common flow in the nature. The same can be said for gas–gas flow. solid–gas. However. and industries. Thus. the cleanness of air can reduce the speed of sound. One way to categorize the multiphase is by the materials flows. spray casting. living bodies (bio–fluids). There are many more categories. Flow of air is actually the flow of several light liquids (gases). liquid–gas and solid–liquid–gas flow. The materials can flow in the same direction and it is referred as co–current flow. the breaks would started to work after about 20 seconds in the last wagon. 10.

-10.5. CLASSIFICATION OF LIQUID-LIQUID FLOW REGIMES 335 materials flow in the opposite direction. two liquids can have three main categories: vertical. the co-current is the more common.2.1. The flow in inclined angle (that not covered by the word “near”) exhibits flow regimes not much different from the other two. Light Liquid and non open channel flow).5. plug flow. Generally. and annular flow. 10. For example. When the flow rate of the lighter liquid is almost zero.1 Horizontal Flow The typical regimes for horizontal flow are stratified flow (open channel flow. 10. The other characteristic that is different between the gas flow and the liquid flow is the variation of the density. horizontal. This kind of flow regime is referred to as horizontal flow. There is no exact meaning to the word “near vertical” or “near horizontal” and there is no consensus on the limiting angles (not to mention to have limits as a function with any parameter that determine the limiting angle). Yet.5.2. 5 With the exception of the extremely smaller diameter where Rayleigh–Taylor instability is an important issue. the flow of gas–liquid can have several flow regimes in one situation while the flow of liquid–liquid will (probably) have only one flow regime. The vertical configuration has two cases. and what ever between them. The geometries (even the boundaries) of open channel flow are very diverse. a reduction of the pressure by half will double the gas volumetric flow rate while the change in the liquid is negligible.1 Co–Current Flow In Co–Current flow. For example. The channel flow will be discussed in a greater detail in Open Channel Flow chapter. In general. . For low velocity (low flow rate) of the two liquids. 5 top as depicted in Figure 10. The main difference between the liquid–liquid flow to gas-liquid flow is that gas density is extremely lighter than the liquid density. dispersed Heavy Liquid bubble flow. the counter–current flow must have special configurations of long length of flow. The flow regimes are referred to the arrangement of the fluids. Stratified flow in horizontal tubes bottom and lighter liquid flows on the when the liquids flow is very slow.10. the flow is referred to as open channel flow. the counter–current flow has a limited length window of possibility in a vertical flow in conduits with the exception of magnetohydrodynamics. This definition (open channel flow) continues for small amount of lighter liquid as long as the heavier flow can be calculated as open channel flow (ignoring the lighter liquid). Additionally. the limits between the flow regimes are considerably different. Thus. It is common to differentiate between the vertical (and near vertical) and horizontal (and near horizontal). This issue of incline flow will not be covered in this chapter. water and air flow as oppose to water and oil flow. it is referred as counter–current. Open channel flow appears in many nature (river) as well in industrial process such as the die casting process where liquid metal is injected into a cylinder (tube) shape. up or down. the heavy liquid flows on the Fig.

Fig. then the wave cannot reach to the crown and the shape is deformed to the point that all the heavier liquid is around the periphery. As the lighter liquid velocity increases two things can happen (1) wave size increase and (2) the shape of cross section continue to deform. Thus. Further increase of the lighter liquid flow rate move the flow regime into annular flow. choking occurs relatively Fig. For liquid which the density is a strong and primary function of the pressure. Choking occurs in compressible Light Liquid flow when the flow rate is above a certain point.4). and other physical properties of the fluids but also on the material of the conduit. . the possibility to go through slug flow regime depends on if there is enough liquid flow rate. Thus. the friction between the phases increase. when the lighter liquid flow increases. This friction is one of the cause for the instability which manifested itself as waves and changing the surface from straight line to a different configuration (see Figure 10. The superficial velocity is referred to as the velocity that any phase will have if the other phase was not exist. all the two phase flow are categorized by wavy flow which will proven later.4. Kind of Stratified flow in There are two paths that can occur on the heavier horizontal tubes. thus it is arbitrary definition. the flow that starts the liquids flow is faster. All liquids are compressible Heavy Liquid to some degree.3. The wave shape is created to keep the gas and the liquid velocity equal and at the same time to have shear stress to be balance by surface tension. MULTI–PHASE FLOW As the lighter liquid (or the gas phase) flow rate increases (superficial velocity). In fact. This kind of flow regime is referred to as annular flow. The configuration of the cross section not only depend on the surface tension. the flow pattern is referred to as slug flow or plug flow. The plugs are flowing in a succession (see Figure 10. Plug flow in horizontal tubes when closer/sooner. all the flow is wavy. the heavier liquid wave reaches to the crown of the pipe. These plugs are separated by large “chunks” that almost fill the entire tube. The slug flow cannot be assumed to be as homogeneous flow nor it can exhibit some average viscosity. If the heavier flow rate is small. If the heavier liquid flow rate is larger6 than the distance. as a stratified flow will turned into a slug flow or stratified wavy7 flow after a certain distance depends on the heavy flow rate (if 6 The 7 Well. -10. liquid level is higher. for the wave to reach the conduit crown is smaller. Light Liquid Light Liquid Some referred to this regime as wavy stratified flow Heavy Liquid Heavy Liquid but this definition is not accepted by all as a category by itself. At some point. Plug flow is characterized by regions of lighter liquid filled with drops of the heavier liquid with Plug (or Slug) of the heavier liquid (with bubble of the lighter liquid).3). The pressure drop of this kind of regime is significantly larger than the stratified flow. -10. At this stage. The “average” viscosity depends on the flow and thus making it as insignificant way to do the calculations. liquid flow rate.336 CHAPTER 10.

This phenomenon is refer to as hysteresis.5. After a certain distance. This maximum is known as double choking phenomenon.5. For example.” Dispersed Bubble Liquid Superficial Velocity Elongated Bubble Slug Flow Annular Flow Stratified Flow Wavy Stratified Open Channel Flow Gas Superficial Velocity Fig. The choking can occur before the annular flow regime is obtained depending on the velocity and compressibility of the lighter liquid. the return path is not move the exact same way. weak to strong surface tension effects (air/water in “normal” gravity). 10. However. The reverse way is referred to the process where the starting point is high flow rate and the flow rate is decreasing. The angle decreases with the length of the pipe. the “near” angle depends on the length of the pipe. The buoyancy . -10. Modified Mandhane map for flow regime in horizontal tubes. the flow become annular or the flow will choke. There is even a possibility to return on different flow regime.1.g.5. this map is only characteristics of the “normal” conditions.10. other parameters can affect the “near. etc. liquid–liquid flow has a maximum combined of the flow rate (both phases). Besides the length.2 Vertical Flow The vertical flow has two possibilities. In engineering application.5. CLASSIFICATION OF LIQUID-LIQUID FLOW REGIMES 337 this category is accepted). As many things in multiphase. flow that had slug flow in its path can be returned as stratified wavy flow. there is no consensus how far is the “near” means. Flow that is under small angle from the horizontal will be similar to the horizontal flow. with the gravity or against it. Qualitatively. As in many fluid mechanics and magnetic fields. in normal gravitation. The results of the above discussion are depicted in Figure 10. as in compressible flow. Hence. the vertical flow against the gravity is more common used. There is a difference between flowing with the gravity and flowing against the gravity. e.

see Figure 10. the different mechanism in creating the plug flow in horizontal flow compared to the vertical flow. For the flow against gravity. Flow of near vertical against the gravity in two–phase does not deviate from vertical. the flow starts as a bubble flow. Gas and liquid in Flow in verstical tube against the gravity. they create a large bubble and the flow is referred to as slug flow or plug flow (see Figure 10. Notice. The increase of the lighter liquid flow rate will increase the number of bubbles until some bubbles start to collide. The choking can occur at any point depends on the fluids and temperature and pressure. the lighter liquid has a buoyancy that acts as an “extra force” to move it faster and this effect is opposite for the heavier liquid. MULTI–PHASE FLOW Bubble Flow Slug or Plug Flow Churn Flow Annular Flow Dispersed Flow Fig. is acting in two different directions for these two flow regimes. After additional increase of “super slug” . The flow is less stable as more turbulent flow and several “super slug” or churn flow appears in more chaotic way. there are different flow regimes for these two situations. -10.6). the flow regime is referred as elongated bubble flow. it can be noted the difference in the mechanism that create annular flow for vertical and horizontal flow. Thus.6. The opposite is for the flow with gravity. Further increase of lighter liquid flow rate will increase the slug size as more bubbles collide to create “super slug”. all these “elongated slug” unite to become an annular flow. The heavier liquid has to occupy almost the entire cross section before it can flow because of the gravity forces. the flow cannot start as a stratified flow. . Flow Against Gravity For vertical flow against gravity. Any further increase transforms the outer liquid layer into bubbles in the inner liquid. When many bubbles collide. Thus.338 CHAPTER 10.6. The main reason that causes the difference is that the heavier liquid is more dominated by gravity (body forces) while the lighter liquid is dominated by the pressure driving forces. Again.

it must be possible to construct a model that connects this configuration with the stratified flow where the transitions will be dependent on the angle of inclinations. the regime liquid fills the entire void and the gas is in small bubble and this flow referred to as bubbly flow. In the literature. While this author is not aware of an actual model. In the medium range of the flow rate of gas and liquid. Here.10. the points where these transitions occur are different from the horizontal flow. The interaction between the phases is minimal and can be Fig.7).5. the flow continues in a stratified configuration. both will be united in this discussion. When the flow rate of the gas increases further. As the gas flow increases. -10. However. At a higher rate of liquid flow and a low flow rate of gas. Since the heavy liquid can be supplied from the “wrong” point/side.1. Figure 10. and Weber numbers. respectively. However. The ordinate is a combination of flow rate ratio and density ratio.6.Reynolds. all the gas phase change into tiny drops of liquid and this kind of regime referred to as mist flow. Pulsing For example. After the flow has settled. The initial part for this flow is more significant. the vertical configuration.6 Multi–Phase Flow Variables Definitions Since the gas–liquid system is a specific case of the liquid–liquid system. Flow With The Gravity As opposed to the flow against gravity. this flow can starts with stratified flow. A dimensional vertical flow map considered as the “open channel flow” of under very low gravity against the gravity. The liquid flows through Gas Flow Rage a trickle or channeled flow that only partially wets part of the tube. for the convenience of the terms “gas and liquid” will be used to signify the lighter and heavier liquid. it is presented in a dimension form to explain the trends (see Figure 10. the initial part has a larger section compared to the flow against the gravity flow. The flow starts as disTrickling persed bubble (some call it as “gas conFlow Spray or tinuous”) because the gas phase occupies Mist Flow most of column. The common map is based on dimensionless parameters.7. there is pulse flow in which liquid is moving in frequent pulses.3 Vertical Flow Under Micro Gravity 339 The above discussion mostly explained the Dispersed Dispersed flow in a vertical configuration when the Bubble Bubble surface tension can be neglected. out in space between gas and liquid (large density difference) the situaPulsing & Bubbling tion is different. In cases where the surface tension is very important. A good example for this flow regime is a water fall. The abscissa is a function of combination of Froude . Liquid Flow Rate 10. The liquid–liquid (also . MULTI–PHASE FLOW VARIABLES DEFINITIONS 10.7 presented in dimensionless coordinates. the liquid becomes more turbulent and some parts enter into the gas phase as drops. The transitions between the flow regimes is similar to stratified flow.

To simplify the descriptions of the problem and yet to retain the important features of the flow. and with time. The volumetric flow rate is not constant (since the density is not constant) along the flow rate and it is defined as QG = and for the liquid QL = GL ρL (10. over its cross section.4) mL ˙ A (10. the only serious missing point in this discussion is the change of the flow along the distance of the tube. The liquid mass velocity is GL = The mass flow of the tube is then G= m ˙ A (10.5) For liquid with very high bulk modulus (almost constant density). It has to be noted that this mass velocity does not exist in reality. the volumetric flow rate can be considered as constant.340 CHAPTER 10. The total volumetric volume vary along the tube length and is Q = QL + QG (10.6) GG = UsG ρG (10.2) Where A is the entire area of the tube. This method is the most common and important to analyze two-phase flow pressure drop and other parameters.1) It is common to define the mass velocity instead of the regular velocity because the “regular” velocity changes along the length of the pipe. some variables are defined so that the flow can be described as a one-dimensional flow.7) .3) It has to be emphasized that this mass velocity is the actual velocity.6. 10. The gas mass velocity is GG = mG ˙ A (10.1 Multi–Phase Averaged Variables Definitions The total mass flow rate through the tube is the sum of the mass flow rates of the two phases m = mG + mL ˙ ˙ ˙ (10. MULTI–PHASE FLOW gas–liquid) flow is an extremely complex three–dimensional transient problem since the flow conditions in a pipe may vary along its length. Perhaps.

11) Since UsL = QL and similarly for the gas then Um = UsG + UsL (10. it can be noted that the slip velocity is not constant along the tube. Thus. the value of (1 − X) is referred to as the “wetness fraction. The average superficial velocity of the gas and liquid are different.6. Thus. the ratio of these velocities is referred to as the slip velocity and is defined as the following SLP = UG UL (10.10. MULTI–PHASE FLOW VARIABLES DEFINITIONS 341 Ratio of the gas flow rate to the total flow rate is called the ’quality’ or the “dryness fraction” and is given by X= GG mG ˙ = m ˙ G (10. LH is not constant for the same reasons the void fraction is not constant.8) In a similar fashion. The gas superficial velocity is therefore defined as UsG = The liquid superficial velocity is UsL = GL (1 − X) m ˙ = = QL ρL ρL A (10.” The last two factions remain constant along the tube length as long the gas and liquid masses remain constant. .12) GG Xm ˙ = = QG ρG ρG A (10.13) Where Um is the averaged velocity. The actual velocities depend on the other phase since the actual cross section the phase flows is dependent on the other phase.10) It must be noted that Liquid holdup. Also.9) This fraction is vary along tube length since the gas density is not constant along the tube length.14) Slip ratio is usually greater than unity. The liquid fraction or liquid holdup is LH = 1 − α = AL A (10. The ratio of the gas flow cross sectional area to the total cross sectional area is referred as the void fraction and defined as α= AG A (10. a superficial velocity is commonly defined in which if only one phase is using the entire tube. It can be noticed that Um is not constant along the tube.

MULTI–PHASE FLOW For the same velocity of phases (SLP = 1).19) The relationship between X and α is AG X= mG ˙ ρG UG A α ρG UG α = = (10. Substituting equations (10.16) results in mG ˙ mL ˙ ρaverage = ˙ X m + (1 − X) m ˙ ˙ X m + (1 − X) m ˙ = ˙ X m (1 − X) m ˙ QG + QL + ρG ρL QG QL (10. The average density of the material flowing in the tube can be evaluated by looking at the definition of density.18) vaverage = 1 ρaverage = X (1 − X) + = X vG + (1 − X) vL ρG ρL (10.20) mG + mL ˙ ˙ ρL UL A(1 − α) +ρG UG A α ρL UL (1 − α) + ρG UG α AL If the slip is one SLP = 1.342 CHAPTER 10. The density of any material is defined as ρ = m/V and thus. the mixture density is defined as ρm = α ρG + (1 − α) ρL (10.7) into equation (10.15) This density represents the density taken at the “frozen” cross section (assume the volume is the cross section times infinitesimal thickness of dx). thus equation (10.17) Equation (10.1) and (10.20) becomes X= ρG α ρL (1 − α) + ρG α (10. for the flowing material it is ρ= m ˙ Q (10.16) Where Q is the volumetric flow rate.17) can be simplified by canceling the m and noticing the (1−X)+X = 1 ˙ to become + (1−X) ρL The average specific volume of the flow is then X ρG ρaverage = 1 (10.21) .

it is worthwhile to appreciate the complexity of the flow. and the flow is continuous only in many chunks (small segments).24) or modifying equation (10.25) The energy equation can be approximated as dw d dq − =m ˙ dx dx dx hm + Um 2 + g x sin θ 2 (10. Thus.1: Under what conditions equation (10.10. Furthermore. The single phase was studied earlier in this book and there is a considerable amount of information about it.26) .24) as − dP S m dUm ˙ = − τw − + ρm g sin θ dx A A dx (10. it was assumed that the different flow regimes can be neglected at least for the pressure loss (not correct for the heat transfer). these segments are not defined but results of the conditions imposed on the flow. the different flow regimes are examples of typical configuration of segments of continuous flow. this assumption has to be broken. it was assumed that the flow is continuous.23) is correct? Solution Under construction End Solution The governing momentum equation can be approximated as m ˙ dUm dP = −A − S τw − A ρm g sin θ dx dx (10.23) Example 10. In fact. Initially. Now.13)) is Um = QL + QG = UsL + UsG = Um A (10. the simplest is to used it for approximation.7 Homogeneous Models Before discussing the homogeneous models.22) It can be noted that the continuity equation is satisfied as m = ρm Um A ˙ (10. HOMOGENEOUS MODELS 343 10. The average velocity (see also equation (10.7. For the construction of fluid basic equations.

1 Pressure Loss Components In a tube flowing upward in incline angle θ. the experimental data that was developed and measured for single flow is used. For calculating the frictional pressure loss in the pipe is − dP dx = f 4 τw D (10. the gravitation pressure loss reduce the pressure and thus the density must change and hence.27) dx dx f dx a dx g Every part of the total pressure loss will be discussed in the following section. These losses are non-linear and depend on each other. acceleration. Yet. from equation (10.344 CHAPTER 10. However.7. For turbulent flow C = 0. MULTI–PHASE FLOW 10. For laminar flow C = 16 and n = 1.30) The friction factor is measured for a single phase flow where the average velocity is directly related to the wall shear stress. In that case. since there isn’t anything better.25. For example.28) Where S is the perimeter of the fluid. There is not available experimental data for the relationship of the averaged velocity of the two (or more) phases and wall shear stress. In fact. 10.31) Where C and n are constants which depend on the flow regimes (turbulent or laminar flow). this friction factor was not measured for the “averaged” viscosity of the two phase flow. The friction factor is obtained by using the correlation f =C ρm Um D µm −n (10. .079 and n = 0.29) The wall shear stress can be estimated by τw = f ρm Um 2 2 (10.7.1. this dependency can be neglected.1 Friction Pressure Loss The frictional pressure loss for a conduit can be calculated as − dP dx = f S τw A (10. acceleration must occur. and body force(gravitation).25). for small distances (dx) and some situations. the pressure loss is affected by friction loss. the total pressure loss can be written as f riction acceleration gravity dP dP dP dP + + = (10.

10. For the last point.7. the friction loss can be estimated.36) becomes   pressure loss due to pressure loss due to  density change   area change 2   =m  ˙  1   1 d 1 dA + 2 dx A dx ρm ρm A − dP dx (10.32) Duckler linear formula does not provide always good approximation and Cichilli suggest similar to equation (10.1.18) average viscosity as µaverage = 1 X µG (1−X) µL + (10.35) The acceleration pressure loss (can be positive or negative) results from change of density and the change of cross section. 10.35) can be written as − dP dx =m ˙ a d dx m ˙ A ρm (10.33) Or simply make the average viscosity depends on the mass fraction as µm = X µG + (1 − X) µL Using this formula. The third special case is for constant density of one phase only. dρL / dx = 0. the private case is where densities are constant for both phases.2 Acceleration Pressure Loss (10. For example. Duckler suggest the following µm = µG QG µL QL + QG + QL QG + QL (10. HOMOGENEOUS MODELS 345 There are several suggestions for the average viscosity. dX/ dx = 0. . The first case where the cross section is constant. Equation (10.7. In second case is where the mass flow rates of gas and liquid is constant in which the derivative of X is zero. dA/ dx = 0.37) a There are several special cases.34) The acceleration pressure loss can be estimated by − dP dx =m ˙ a dUm dx (10.36) Or in an explicit way equation (10.

39) and therefore f riction acceleration gravity ∆Pab = ∆Pab f + ∆Pab a + ∆Pab g (10.41) SG f TP Where the T P denotes the two phases and SG denotes the pressure loss for the single gas phase. Lockhart Martinelli parameters are defined as the ratio of the pressure loss of two phases and pressure of a single phase. MULTI–PHASE FLOW Gravity was discussed in Chapter 4 and is dP dx = g ρm sin θ g (10.7.7.38) is the density without the “movement” (the “static” density). φG = dP dx dP dx (10. (a and b) can be calculated with integration as b ∆Pab = a dP dx dx (10.2 Lockhart Martinelli Model The second method is by assumption that every phase flow separately One such popular model by Lockhart and Martinelli8 . 10. private communication with Y..7.346 10.42) SL f TP Where the SL denotes the pressure loss for the single liquid phase.4 Total Pressure Loss The total pressure between two points.1. Lockhart and Martinelli built model based on the assumption that the separated pressure loss are independent from each other.1. 8 This method was considered a military secret.38) The density change during the flow can be represented as a function of density.3 Gravity Pressure Loss CHAPTER 10. Thus. there are two parameters as shown below. The density in equation (10. Taitle . Equivalent definition for the liquid side is φL = dP dx dP dx (10.40) 10.

SOLID–LIQUID FLOW 347 The ratio of the pressure loss for a single liquid phase and the pressure loss for a single gas phase is Ξ= dP dx dP dx (10.there will be a discussion about different particle size and different geometry (round. it is assumed that the surface tension is insignificant compared to the gravity forces. the pressure loss is dP dx = G 2 fG UG 2 ρl DG (10. 10. The word “solid” is not really mean solid but a combination of many solid particles. In that case there are four possibilities for vertical flow: 1. the effect of the surface tension are very minimal and can be ignored. The flow with the gravity and heavier density solid particles.43) SG f SL where Ξ is Martinelli parameter. etc). In solid–liquid. in this discussion. For example. The flow against the gravity and lighter density solid particles. The density of the solid can be above or below the liquid. cubic. 2. 3.45) For the gas phase.” Therefor. It is also assumed that the “liquids” density does not change significantly and it is far from the choking point. dP dx = SG dP dx (10. To insert the Diagram. Different combination of solid particle creates different “liquid.10.46) Simplified model is when there is no interaction between the two phases.44) SL The pressure loss for the liquid phase is dP dx = L 2 fL UL 2 ρl DL (10.8. analysis of small coal particles in water is different from large coal particles in water. The flow with the gravity and lighter density solid particles. . The uniformity is categorizing the particle sizes. Thus. and geometry. distribution. Consider the case where the solid is heavier than the liquid phase. It is assumed that the pressure loss for both phases are equal.8 Solid–Liquid Flow Solid–liquid system is simpler to analyze than the liquid-liquid system.

CD ∞ is complicated function of the Reynolds number. A particle in a middle of the vertical liquid flow experience several forces.48) Inserting equating (10. However. CD ∞ .47) Where CD ∞ is the drag coefficient and is a function of Reynolds number.52) . The discussion here is about the last case (4) because very little is known about the other cases. When the liquid velocity is very small.49) Equation (10.49) relates the liquid velocity that needed to maintain the particle “floating” to the liquid and particles properties. The drag coefficient.48) into equation (10. and D is the equivalent radius of the particles. 1 and 4 and the second set is 2 and 3. Re.1 Solid Particles with Heavier Density ρS > ρL Solid–liquid flow has several combination flow regimes.8. it can be approximated for several regimes. 10. the Newton’s Law region. The first set is similar because the solid particles are moving faster than the liquid velocity and vice versa for the second set (slower than the liquid).44 (10. However. The flow against the gravity and heavier density solid particles.51) 24 Re (10. The Reynolds number defined as Re = UL D ρL µL (10.348 CHAPTER 10. The first regime is for Re < 1 where Stokes’ Law can be approximated as CD ∞ = In transitional region 1 < Re < 1000 CD ∞ = 24 Re 1+ 1 Re2/3 6 (10.47) become CD ∞ (UL ) f (Re) UL 2 = 4 D g (ρS − ρL ) 3 ρL (10.50) For larger Reynolds numbers. The force balance of spherical particle in field viscous fluid (creeping flow) is gravity and buoyancy forces π D g (ρS − ρL ) 6 3 drag forces = CD ∞ π D2 ρL UL 2 8 (10. there are two sets of similar characteristics. MULTI–PHASE FLOW 4. All these possibilities are different. possibility. the liquid cannot carry the solid particles because there is not enough resistance to lift up the solid particles. is nearly constant as CD ∞ = 0.

the case of liquid. Thus.53) When the subscript α is indicating the void. When the velocity of liquid is higher than the minimum velocity many particles will be floating. The terminal velocity that left the is referred to as fully fluidized bed. additional increase create “tunnels” of empty almost from solid particles. If the velocity is larger. For small gas/liquid velocity. Minimum velocity is the velocity when the particle is “floating”. When the velocity is lower. the particle will sink into the liquid. partialy Fully the discussion will be focus on the fluid solid fluidized velocity. When there are more than one particle in the cross section. the only velocity that can be applied is Trasiton the fluid velocity. In very large range (especially for gas) the choking might be approached. in many cases the middle region is applicable. In that case. the solid particles Packed can be supplied at different rate. Thus. Consequently. This slug flow is when slug shape (domes) are almost empty of the solid particle. For solid particles. In the literature there are many functions for various conditions. As the solid particles are not pushed by a pump but moved by the forces the fluid applies to them. the sparse solid particles are dispersed all over.9). the particle will drift with the liquid. For the case of gas. Further increase of the fluid flow increases the empty spots to the whole flow. Additional increase of the fluid velocity will move all the particles and this Fig. US|avarge . Thus. So far the discussion was about single particle. further increase will create a slug flow. the velocity is small to lift the particle unless the density difference is very small (that very small force can lift the particles). particles flow the particles are what some call fixed fluidized bed. SOLID–LIQUID FLOW 349 In most cases of solid-liquid system. the Reynolds number is in the second range9 .8. the minimum velocity is a range of velocity rather than a sharp transition point. It has to remember that not all the particle are uniform in size or shape. Yet. then the actual velocity that every particle experience depends on the void fraction. The simplest assumption that the change of the cross section of the fluid create a parameter that multiply the single particle as CD ∞ |α = CD ∞ f (α) (10. Additional increase in the fluid velocity causes large turbulence and the ordinary domes are replaced by churn type flow or large bubbles that are almost empty of the solid particles.10. For the first region. 9 It be wonderful if flow was in the last range? The critical velocity could be found immediately. This regimes is referred to as Pneumatic conveying (see Figure 10.8. Increasing the fluid velocity beyond a minimum will move the parti∆Ptube cles and it is referred to as mix fluidized bed. the function f (α) is not a linear function. -10.

350

CHAPTER 10. MULTI–PHASE FLOW

Fixed Bed

Mixed Bed

Slug or Plug Flow

Turbulent Regimes

Fast Fluidization

Pneumatic Conveying

Fig. -10.9. The flow patterns in solid-liquid flow.

One of the main difference between the liquid and gas flow in this category is the speed of sound. In the gas phase, the speed of sound is reduced dramatically with increase of the solid particles concentration (further reading Fundamentals of Compressible Flow” chapter on Fanno Flow by this author is recommended). Thus, the velocity √ of gas is limited when reaching the Mach somewhere between 1/ k and 1 since the gas will be choked (neglecting the double choking phenomenon). Hence, the length of conduit is very limited. The speed of sound of the liquid does not change much. Hence, this limitation does not (effectively) exist for most cases of solid–liquid flow.

10.8.2

Solid With Lighter Density ρS < ρ and With Gravity

This situation is minimal and very few cases exist. However, it must be pointed out that even in solid–gas, the fluid density can be higher than the solid (especially with micro gravity). There was very little investigations and known about the solid–liquid flowing down (with the gravity). Furthermore, there is very little knowledge about the solid–liquid when the solid density is smaller than the liquid density. There is no known flow map for this kind of flow that this author is aware of. Nevertheless, several conclusions and/or expectations can be drawn. The issue of minimum terminal velocity is not exist and therefor there is no fixed or mixed fluidized bed. The flow is fully fluidized for any liquid flow rate. The flow can have slug flow but more likely will be in fast Fluidization regime. The forces that act on the spherical particle are the buoyancy force and drag force. The buoyancy is accelerating the particle

10.9. COUNTER–CURRENT FLOW and drag force are reducing the speed as
2

351

π D3 g(ρS − ρL ) CD ∞ π D2 ρL (US − UL ) = (10.54) 6 8 From equation 10.54, it can observed that increase of the liquid velocity will increase the solid particle velocity at the same amount. Thus, for large velocity of the fluid it can be observed that UL /US → 1. However, for a small fluid velocity the velocity ratio is very large, UL /US → 0. The affective body force “seems” by the particles can be in some cases larger than the gravity. The flow regimes will be similar but the transition will be in different points. The solid–liquid horizontal flow has some similarity to horizontal gas–liquid flow. Initially the solid particles will be carried by the liquid to the top. When the liquid velocity increase and became turbulent, some of the particles enter into the liquid core. Further increase of the liquid velocity appear as somewhat similar to slug flow. However, this author have not seen any evidence that show the annular flow does not appear in solid–liquid flow.

10.9 Counter–Current Flow
This discussion will be only on liquid–liquid systems (which also includes liquid-gas systems). This kind of flow is probably the most common to be realized by the masses. For example, opening a can of milk or juice. Typically if only one hole is opened on the top of the can, the liquid will flow in pulse regime. Most people know that two holes are needed to empty the can easily and continuously. Otherwise, the flow will be in a pulse regime. In most cases, the possibility to have counter–current flow is limited to having short length of tubes. In only certain configurations of the infinite long pipes the counter–current flow can exist. Annular Extented Flow In that case, the pressure difference and Open Channel gravity (body forces) dominates the flow. Flow The inertia components of the flow, for Pulse Flow Inpossible long tubes, cannot compensate for the Flow pressure gradient. In short tube, the or Dripping Flow pressure difference in one phase can be f (D/L, physical properties) positive while the pressure difference in the other phase can be negative. The pressure difference in the interface must Fig. -10.10. Counter–flow in vertical tubes map. be finite. Hence, the counter–current flow can have opposite pressure gradient for short conduit. But in most cases, the heavy phase (liquid) is pushed by the gravity and lighter phase (gas) is driven by the pressure difference. The counter-current flow occurs, for example, when cavity is filled or emptied with a liquid. The two phase regimes “occurs” mainly in entrance to the cavity. For example,
Liquid Body Foreces

352

CHAPTER 10. MULTI–PHASE FLOW

Fig. -10.11. Counter–current flow in a can (the left figure) has only one hole thus pulse flow and a flow with two holes (right picture).

Figure 10.11 depicts emptying of can filled with liquid. The air is “attempting” to enter the cavity to fill the vacuum created thus forcing pulse flow. If there are two holes, in some cases, liquid flows through one hole and the air through the second hole and the flow will be continuous. It also can be noticed that if there is one hole (orifice) and a long and narrow tube, the liquid will stay in the cavity (neglecting other phenomena such as dripping flow.).

Fig. -10.12. Picture of Counter-current flow in liquid–gas and solid–gas configurations. The container is made of two compartments. The upper compartment is filled with the heavy phase (liquid, water solution, or small wood particles) by rotating the container. Even though the solid–gas ratio is smaller, it can be noticed that the solid–gas is faster than the liquid–gas flow.

There are three flow regimes10 that have been observed. The first flow pattern is pulse flow regime. In this flow regime, the phases flow turns into different direction (see Figure 10.12). The name pulse flow is used to signify that the flow is flowing in pulses that occurs in a certain frequency. This is opposed to counter–current solid–gas flow when almost no pulse was observed. Initially, due to the gravity, the heavy liquid is leaving the can. Then the pressure in the can is reduced compared to the outside and some lighter liquid (gas)entered into the can. Then, the pressure in the can increase,
10 Caution! this statement should be considered as “so far found”. There must be other flow regimes that were not observed or defined. For example, elongated pulse flow was observed but measured. This field hasn’t been well explored. There are more things to be examined and to be studied.

10.9. COUNTER–CURRENT FLOW

353

and some heavy liquid will starts to flow. This process continue until almost the liquid is evacuated (some liquid stay due the surface tension). In many situations, the volume flow rate of the two phase is almost equal. The duration the cycle depends on several factors. The cycle duration can be replaced by frequency. The analysis of the frequency is much more complex issue and will not be dealt here. Annular Flow in Counter–current flow The other flow regime is annular flow in which the heavier phase is on the periphery of Water the conduit (In the literature, there are someFlow one who claims that heavy liquid will be inside). The analysis is provided, but somehow it contradicts with the experimental evidence. Probably, one or more of the assumptions that the analysis based is erroneous). In very small Steam Flow diameters of tubes the counter–current flow is not possible because of the surface tension (see section 4.7). The ratio of the diameter to the Fig. -10.13. Flood in vertical pipe. length with some combinations of the physical properties (surface tension etc) determines the point where the counter flow can start. At this point, the pulsing flow will start and larger diameter will increase the flow and turn the flow into annular flow. Additional increase of the diameter will change the flow regime into extended open channel flow. Extended open channel flow retains the characteristic of open channel that the lighter liquid (almost) does not effect the heavier liquid flow. Example of such flow in the nature is water falls in which water flows down and air (wind) flows up. The driving force is the second parameter which effects the flow existence. When the driving (body) force is very small, no counter–current flow is possible. Consider the can in zero gravity field, no counter–current flow possible. However, if the can was on the sun (ignoring the heat transfer issue), the flow regime in the can moves from pulse to annular flow. Further increase of the body force will move the flow to be in the extended “open channel flow.” In the vertical co–current flow there are two possibilities, flow with gravity or against it. As opposed to the co–current flow, the counter–current flow has no possibility for these two cases. The heavy liquid will flow with the body forces (gravity). Thus it should be considered as non existent flow.

10.9.1

Horizontal Counter–Current Flow

Up to this point, the discussion was focused on the vertical tubes. In horizontal tubes, there is an additional flow regime which is stratified . Horizontal flow is different from vertical flow from the stability issues. A heavier liquid layer can flow above a lighter liquid. This situation is unstable for large diameter but as in static (see section (4.7) page 137) it can be considered stable for small diameters. A flow in a very narrow tube with heavy fluid above the lighter fluid should be considered as a separate issue.

354

CHAPTER 10. MULTI–PHASE FLOW
Single phase Flow or Dripping Flow

When the flow rate of both fluids is very small, the flow will be stratified counter–current flow. The flow will change to pulse flow when the heavy liquid flow rate increases. Further increase of the flow will result in a single phase flow regime. Thus, closing the window of this kind of flow. Thus, this increase terminates the two phase flow possibility. The flow map of the horizontal flow is different f (D/L, physical properties) from the vertical flow and is shown in Figure 10.14. A flow in an angle of inclination is closer to verti- Fig. -10.14. A flow map to explain the cal flow unless the angle of inclination is very small. horizontal counter–current flow. The stratified counter flow has a lower pressure loss (for the liquid side). The change to pulse flow increases the pressure loss dramatically.
Liquid Flow Rate Pulse Flow Straitified Flow

10.9.2

Flooding and Reversal Flow

The limits of one kind the counter–current flow regimes, that is stratified flow are discussed here. This problem appears in nuclear engineering (or boiler engineering) where there is a need to make sure that liquid (water) inserted into the pipe reaching the heating zone. When there is no water (in liquid phase), the fire could melt or damage the boiler. In some situations, the fire can be too large or/and the water supply failed below a critical value the water turn into steam. The steam will flow in the opposite direction. To analyze this situation consider a two dimensional conduit with a liquid inserted in the left side as depicted in Figure 10.13. The liquid velocity at very low gas velocity is constant but not uniform. Further increase of the gas velocity will reduce the average liquid velocity. Additional increase of the gas velocity will bring it to a point where the liquid will flow in a reverse direction and/or disappear (dried out). A simplified model for this situation is for a two dimensional configuration where the liquid is D flowing down and the gas is flowing up as shown h in Figure 10.15. It is assumed that both fluids are W ξ x y flowing in a laminar regime and steady state. Additionally, it is assumed that the entrance effects L can be neglected. The liquid flow rate, QL , is unknown. However, the pressure difference in the (x direction) is known and equal to zero. The boundLiquid Gas Flow ary conditions for the liquid is that velocity at the Flow wall is zero and the velocity at the interface is the same for both phases UG = UL or τi |G = τi |L . Fig. -10.15. A diagram to explain the As it will be shown later, both conditions cannot flood in a two dimension geometry. coexist. The model can be improved by considering turbulence, mass transfer, wavy interface, etc11 .
11 The circular configuration is under construction and will be appeared as a separated article momentarily.

10.9. COUNTER–CURRENT FLOW

355

This model is presented to exhibits the trends and the special features of counter-current flow. Assuming the pressure difference in the flow direction for the gas is constant and uniform. It is assumed that the last assumption does not contribute or change significantly the results. The underline rational for this assumption is that gas density does not change significantly for short pipes (for more information look for the book “Fundamentals of Compressible Flow” in Potto book series in the Fanno flow chapter.). The liquid film thickness is unknown and can be expressed as a function of the above boundary conditions. Thus, the liquid flow rate is a function of the boundary conditions. On the liquid side, the gravitational force has to be balanced by the shear forces as dτxy = ρL g dx The integration of equation (10.55) results in τxy = ρL g x + C1 (10.56) (10.55)

The integration constant, C1 , can be found from the boundary condition where τxy (x = h) = τi . Hence, τi = ρL g h + C1 The integration constant is then Ci = τi − ρL g h which leads to τxy = ρL g (x − h) + τi (10.58) (10.57)

Substituting the newtonian fluid relationship into equation (10.58) to obtained µL or in a simplified form as dUy ρL g (x − h) τi = + dx µL µL Equation (10.60) can be integrate to yield Uy = ρL g µL x2 τi x − hx + + C2 2 µL (10.61) (10.60) dUy = ρL g (x − h) + τi dx (10.59)

The liquid velocity at the wall, [U (x = 0) = 0], is zero and the integration coefficient can be found to be C2 = 0 The liquid velocity profile is then ρL g µL x2 τi x − hx + 2 µL (10.62)

Uy =

(10.63)

356 The velocity at the liquid–gas interface is Uy (x = h) =

CHAPTER 10. MULTI–PHASE FLOW

τi h ρL g h2 − µL 2 µL

(10.64)

The velocity can vanish (zero) inside the film in another point which can be obtained from 0= ρL g µL x2 τi x − hx + 2 µL (10.65)

The solution for equation (10.65) is x|@UL =0 = 2 h − 2 τi µL g ρL (10.66)

The maximum x value is limited by the liquid film thickness, h. The minimum shear stress that start to create reversible velocity is obtained when x = h which is 0= ρL g µL h2 τi h − hh + 2 µL h g ρL → τi0 = 2 (10.67)

If the shear stress is below this critical shear stress τi 0 then no part of the liquid will have a reversed velocity. The notation of τi0 denotes the special value at which a starting shear stress value is obtained to have reversed flow. The point where the liquid flow rate is zero is important and it is referred to as initial flashing point. The flow rate can be calculated by integrating the velocity across the entire liquid thickness of the film. Q = w
h h

Uy dx =
0 0

ρL g µL

x2 τi x − hx + dx 2 µL

(10.68)

Where w is the thickness of the conduit (see Figure 10.15). (10.68) results in Q h2 (3 τi − 2 g h ρL ) = w 6 µL

Integration equation

(10.69)

It is interesting to find the point where the liquid mass flow rate is zero. This point can be obtained when equation (10.69) is equated to zero. There are three solutions for equation (10.69). The first two solutions are identical in which the film height is h = 0 and the liquid flow rate is zero. But, also, the flow rate is zero when 3 τi = 2 g h ρL . This request is identical to the demand in which 2 g h ρL 3

τi

critical

=

(10.70)

10.9. COUNTER–CURRENT FLOW

357

This critical shear stress, for a given film thickness, reduces the flow rate to zero or effectively “drying” the liquid (which is different then equation (10.67)). For this shear stress, the critical upward interface velocity is

(2−1) 3 2 1 ρL g h2 (10.71) 6 µL The wall shear stress is the last thing that will be done on the liquid side. The wall shear stress is   τi Ucritical |interf ace = τL |@wall = µL dU dx
x=0

 ρL g 2 g h ρL 1  B0  = µL  2¨ x  µL ¨ − h + 3 µL 
x=0 12

(10.72)

Simplifying equation (10.72) the direction)

becomes (notice the change of the sign accounting for g h ρL 3

τL |@wall =

(10.73)

Again, the gas is assumed to be in a laminar flow as well. The shear stress on gas side is balanced by the pressure gradient in the y direction. The momentum balance on element in the gas side is dτxy G dP = dx dy (10.74)

The pressure gradient is a function of the gas compressibility. For simplicity, it is assumed that pressure gradient is linear. This assumption means or implies that the gas is incompressible flow. If the gas was compressible with an ideal gas equation of state then the pressure gradient is logarithmic. Here, for simplicity reasons, the linear equation is used. In reality the logarithmic equation should be used ( a discussion can be found in “Fundamentals of Compressible Flow” a Potto project book). Thus, equation (10.74) can be rewritten as dτxy G ∆P ∆P = = dx ∆y L (10.75)

Where ∆y = L is the entire length of the flow and ∆P is the pressure difference of the entire length. Utilizing the Newtonian relationship, the differential equation is ∆P d2 UG = dx2 µG L
12 Also

(10.76)

noticing that equation (10.70) has to be equal g h ρL to support the weight of the liquid.

358

CHAPTER 10. MULTI–PHASE FLOW

Equation (10.76) can be integrated twice to yield UG = ∆P 2 x + C1 x + C2 µG L (10.77)

This velocity profile must satisfy zero velocity at the right wall. The velocity at the interface is the same as the liquid phase velocity or the shear stress are equal. Mathematically these boundary conditions are UG (x = D) = 0 and UG (x = h) = UL (x = h) τG (x = h) = τL (x = h) Applying B.C. (10.78) into equation (10.77) results in UG = 0 = ∆P D2 + C1 D + C2 µG L ∆P → C2 = − D 2 + C1 D µG L (10.80) (a) (b) or (10.79) (10.78)

Which leads to UG = ∆P x2 − D2 + C1 (x − D) µG L (10.81)

At the other boundary condition, equation (10.79)(a), becomes ρL g h2 ∆P = h2 − D2 + C1 (h − D) 6 µL µG L The last integration constant, C1 can be evaluated as C1 = ρL g h 2 ∆P (h + D) − 6 µL (h − D) µG L (10.83) (10.82)

With the integration constants evaluated, the gas velocity profile is UG = ∆P ρL g h2 (x − D) ∆P (h + D) (x − D) x2 − D2 + − µG L 6 µL (h − D) µG L (10.84)

The velocity in Equation (10.84) is equal to the velocity equation (10.64) when (x = h). However, in that case, it is easy to show that the gas shear stress is not equal to the liquid shear stress at the interface (when the velocities are assumed to be the equal). The difference in shear stresses at the interface due to this assumption, of the equal velocities, cause this assumption to be not physical.

The velocity at interface can have a “slip” in very low density and for short distances.79)(b). the integration constant is C1 = The gas velocity profile is then UG = ∆P x2 − D2 + µG L 2 g h ρL 2 h ∆P − 3 µG µG L (x − D) 2 g h ρL 2 h ∆P − 3 µG µG L (10. different thing(s) must happen. condition (10. The shear stress at the interface must be equal.88) The gas velocity at the interface is then UG |@x=h = ∆P h2 − D 2 + µG L 2 g h ρL 2 h ∆P − 3 µG µG L (h − D) (10.9. Then if the interface becomes wavy.91) The Required Pressure Difference . This condition requires that µG dUG dUL = µL dx dx (10. Since there no possibility to have both the shear stress and velocity on both sides of the interface. if no special effects occurs.10.87) (10. It was assumed that the interface is straight but is impossible. COUNTER–CURRENT FLOW 359 The second choice is to use the equal shear stresses at the interface.86) (10. the two conditions can co–exist.90) x=D or in a simplified form as τG |@wall = 2 ∆P (D − h) 2 g h ρL + L 3 (10.85) The expressions for the derivatives are gas side liquid side 2 h ∆P 2 g h ρL + µG C1 = L 3 As result. The wall shear stress is τG |@wall = µG dUG dx = µG x=D ∆P 2 x + µG L 2 g h ρL 2 h ∆P − 3 µG µG L (10.89) This gas interface velocity is different than the velocity of the liquid side.

be between these two assumptions but not must be between them. To calculate the required pressure that cause the liquid to dry. The estimation of the pressure difference under the assumption of equal shear stress can be applied. The control volume include the gas and liquid volumes. General forces diagram to calculated the in The actual pressure difference can a two dimension geometry. This model and its assumptions are too simplistic and the actual pressure difference is larger.94) Simplifying equation (10. However. the total balance is needed.96) (10. Figure 10.93) result in ρgLh + L 2 ∆P (D − h) 2 g h ρL + L 3 =L D ∆P (10.95) . MULTI–PHASE FLOW The pressure difference to D create the flooding (drying) has to take into account the fact that h W x y the surface is wavy.16) A/w G A/w L f orce due to pressure FgL + L τw = L τw + Substituting the different terms into (10. The gravity force on the gas can be neglected in most cases. Fig. The gravity force on the liquid is the liquid volume times the liquid volume as V olme/w FgL = ρ g hL (10. However.92) The total momentum balance is (see Figure 10.93) g h ρL + D ∆P 3 (10. -10.94) results in 4ρgLh = (2 h − D) ∆P 3 or ∆P = 4ρgLh 3 (2 h − D) (10. In D ∆P the same fashion the pressure difference under the assumption the equal velocity can be calculated. as ρgLh L first estimate the waviness of the Lτw |L Lτw |G surface can be neglected. There are two forces that act against the gravity and two forces with the gravity. this explanation is to show magnitudes and trends and hence it provided here.16 describes the general forces that acts on the control volume.16.360 CHAPTER 10.

. There are several points that should be noticed in this chapter. Unless the derivations or assumptions are wrong. MULTI–PHASE CONCLUSION 361 This analysis shows far more reaching conclusion that initial anticipation expected. In other case where more accurate measurement are needed a specific model is required. The homogeneous models or combined models like Lockhart–Martinelli can be employed in some cases.10. 10.10. Perhaps as a side conclusion but important.96) indicates that when D > 2 h is a special case (extend open channel flow). the assumption of straight line is not appropriate when two liquid with different viscosity are flowing. the appropriate model for the flow regime should be employed. The interface between the two liquid flowing together is wavy.10 Multi–Phase Conclusion For the first time multi–phase is included in a standard introductory textbook on fluid mechanics. this analysis equation (10. In that case. There are many flow regimes in multi–phase flow that “regular” fluid cannot be used to solve it such as flooding.

362 CHAPTER 10. MULTI–PHASE FLOW .

this book on fluid mechanics issues could be read by most readers. Uy is the vector component in the y direction. A. Hence without additional reading. These topics are present so that one with some minimal background could deal with the mathematics that encompass within basic fluid mechanics. There is very minimal original material which appears without proofs.1 where Ux is the vector component in the x direction. and Uz is the vector component in the z direction.APPENDIX A The Mathematics Backgrounds for Fluid Mechanics In this appendix a review of selected topics in mathematics related to fluid mechanics is presented. The length of the vector in Cartesian coordinates (the coordinates system is relevant) is U = Ux 2 + Uy 2 + Uz 2 (A. the 363 Fig. some of the material appears in specialty books such as third order differential equations (and thus it is expected that the student is not familiar with this material. The material is not presented in “educational” order but in importance order.1 Vectors Vector is a quantity with direction as oppose to scalar. Furthermore.1) z U Ux Uy y Uz x Vector can be normalized and in Cartesian coordi. This appendix condenses material that spread in many various textbooks some of which are advance.dinates system. -A. Vector in Cartesian coor- . Thus. nates depicted in Figure A.1.).

1 Vector Algebra Vectors obey several standard mathematical operations which are applicable to scalars. h2 . Then the following can be said U U V 1. and h3 ) as angle U V U U × V = |U | · |V | sin (∠(U . The right hand rule. U + V = V + U 3. V .1. a (U + V ) = a U + a V 6. a (b U ) = a b U The multiplications and the divisions have somewhat different meaning in a scalar operations. U ·V = U V U |U | · |V | cos (∠(U . MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS U Ux ˆ Uy ˆ Uz ˆ = i+ j+ k U U U U U = (A. The “cross” product is defined in an orthogonal coordinate (h1 .4) The second multiplication is the “cross” product which in vector as opposed to a scalar as in the “dot” product. Additive inverse U − U = 0 U 5. The following are vectors. A. regular scalar multiplication angle between vectors W V U Fig. There are two kinds of multiplications for vectors. Zero vector is such that U + 0 = U 4. (U + V ) + W = (U + V + W ) = U + (V + W ) 2.364 unit vector is APPENDIX A. The first multiplication is the “dot” product which is defined by equation (A. U .2) and general orthogonal coordinates U = U U1 U2 U3 = h1 + h2 + h3 U U U U (A.2. V )) n (A. The results of this multiplication is scalar but has no negative value as in regular scalar multiplication. and W and for in this discussion a and b are scalars.5) . multiplication of U × V results in W . -A.3) Vectors have some what similar rules to scalars which will be discussed in the next section.4). V )) (A.

A.10) (A.8) 2 2 2 2 2 2 (A. these above four combinations are not the only possibilities (not including the left hand system). Multiplication combinations shows that there are at least four possibilities of combining the angle with scalar and vector. However. For example.6) (A. The reason that these current combinations. the result of the division can be a scalar combined or associated with the angle (with cos or sin). The multiplication in vector world have two definition one which results in a scalar and one which results in a vector. In right hand orthogonal coordinate system h1 × h2 = h3 h2 × h3 = h1 h3 × h1 = h2 The “cross” product can be written as U × V = (U2 V3 − U3 V2 ) h1 + (U3 V1 − U1 V3 ) h2 + (U1 V2 − U2 V1 ) h3 Equation (A. Note that U and V are not necessarily orthogonal. or vector with the angle.1. One of the consequence of this definitions in Cartesian coordinates is i =j =k =0 In general for orthogonal coordinates this condition is written as h1 × h1 = h1 = h2 = h3 = 0 where hi is the unit vector in the orthogonal system. etc. The previous experience is that help to define multiplication help to definition the division. that is scalar associated with cos θ vectors is associated with sin θ. Additionally note that order of multiplication is significant. The number of the possible combinations of the division is very large. and n is a unit vector perpendicular to both U and V which obeys the right hand rule. is that these combinations have physical meaning.9) h2 × h1 = −h3 h3 × h2 = −h1 h1 × h3 = −h2 (A.7) The most complex of all these algebraic operations is the division. VECTORS 365 where θ is the angle between U and V . The right hand rule is referred to the direction of resulting vector. It turn out that these combinations have very little1 1 This author did find any physical meaning these combinations but there could be and those the word “little” is used. This multiplication has a negative value which means that it is a change of the direction. .9) in matrix form as   h1  U × V =  U2  V2 h2 U2 V2  h3   U3   V3 (A.

12) ˆ Where ˆ ˆ and k are denoting unit vectors in the x. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS physical meaning. in Cartesian coordinates the operation is =ˆ i ∂ ∂ ˆ ∂ +ˆ j +k ∂x ∂y ∂z (A. For example. divergence. derivatives of different directions can represented as a vector or vector function. There at least are two possibilities how to treat these elements.” This operator is a differential vector. For example.y. the curl. In multivariate calculus. A scalar function is a function that provide a valued based on the coordinates (in Cartesian coordinates x.” Also note the multiplying matrices and inverse matrix are also available operation to these tensors. A compact presentation is a common way to handle the mathematics which simplify the calculations and explanations. Many of the operations of vector world. =ˆ i ∂T ˆ ∂T ˆ ∂T +j +k ∂x ∂y ∂z (A. The following combination is commonly suggested   U1 U2 U3    V V1 V1   1    U  U1 U2 U3  = (A. respectively. Gradient This operation acts on a scalar function and results in a vector whose components are derivatives in the principle directions of a coordinate system. One of these operations is nabla operator sometimes also called the “del operator. j. This tenser or the matrix can undergo regular linear algebra operations such as finding the eigenvalue values and the eigen “vectors. the temperature of the domain might be expressed as a scalar field. the gradient.z). More differential operations can on scalar function can results in vector or vector function.11)   V2 V V2 V2      U2 U3   U1 V3 V3 V3 One such example of this division is the pressure which the explanation is commonality avoided or eliminated from the fluid mechanics books including the direct approach in this book. y. It turned out that combination of three vectors has a physical meaning. i.13) . The three vectors have a need for additional notation such of vector of vector which is referred to as a tensor.366 APPENDIX A. Additional possibility is that every combination of one vector element is divided by the other vector element. and z directions. such as. A. and the Laplacian are based or could be constructed from this single operator.2 Differential Operators of Vectors Differential operations can act on scalar functions as well on vector and vector functions. Since every vector element has three possible elements the total combination is 9 = 3 × 3.1.

and it defined as 2 = 2 − 1 ∂2 c2 ∂ 2 t (A. y. y. z)ˆ + Ny (x.1. VECTORS 367 Divergence The same idea that was discussed in vector section there are two kinds of multiplication in the vector world and two will be for the differential operators. for Cartesian coordinates is ˆ N (x. Curl Similar to the “cross product” a similar operation can be defined for the nabla (note the “right hand rule” notation) for Cartesian coordinate as curl N = ×N = ∂Nz ∂Ny − ∂y ∂z ∂Nx ∂Nz − ∂z ∂x ˆ i+ ˆ+ j ∂Ny ∂Nx − ∂x ∂y ˆ k (A. This operator also referred as the Laplacian operator. Applying a divergence on the result creates a scalar field again. Laplacian The new operation can be constructed from “dot” multiplication of the nabla.17) This combination is commonality denoted as 2 .15) (A. This combined operations is known as the “div grad” which is given in Cartesian coordinates by · = ∂2 ∂2 ∂2 + 2+ 2 2 ∂x ∂y ∂z (A. in honor of Pierre-Simon Laplace (23 March 1749 – 5 March 1827).A. z)ˆ + Nz (x.18) . in Cartesian coordinate is results in div N = ·N= ∂Nx ∂Ny ∂Nz + + ∂x ∂y ∂z (A.14) The divergence results in a scalar function which similar to the concept of the vectors multiplication of the vectors magnitude by the cosine of the angle between the vectors. N . z) = Nx (x. A vector domain (function) assigns a vector to each point such as velocity for example. A gradient acting on a scalar field creates a vector field. d‘Alembertian As a super–set for four coordinates (very minimal used in fluid mechanics) and it reffed to as d’Alembertian or the wave operator. z)k i j The dot product of these two vectors. The divergence is the similar to “dot” product which results in scalar.16) Note that the result is a vector. y. y.

1. In Gauss notation it is written as ( V · N ) dV = A N · n dA (A. x3 . The basic of these relationships is explored. Thus.368 APPENDIX A. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS Divergence Theorem Mathematicians call to or refer to a subset of The Reynolds Transport Theorem as the Divergence Theorem. x2 . This results reduces equation. x2 . x3 .fullerton. If N is a gradient of a scalar field Π(x. · · · )e2 + f3 (x1 . the harmonic functions can be added or subtracted because inside the volume these functions contributions is eliminated throughout the volume. y. · · · )e3 + · · · (A. normally for steady state.22) where e i is the unit vector in the i direction.3 Differentiation of the Vector Operations The vector operation sometime fell under (time or other) derivative. x3 . to a balance of the fluxes through the surface. The cross and dot products when the come under differentiation can be look as scalar.19) In Gauss-Ostrogradsky Theorem (Mikhail Vasilievich Ostrogradsky (September 24. or called it Gauss’ Theorem (Carl Friedrich Gauss 30 April 1777 23 February 1855). the dot product of operation 2 for more information http://math. Special case of equation (A. · · · )e1 + f2 (x1 . A vector is made of the several scalar functions such as R = f1 (x1 .21) for harmonic function (solutions Laplace equation see2 Harminic functions) then the left side vanishes which is useful identity for ideal flow analysis. z) then it can insert into identity to produce ( V · ( Φ)) dV = V 2 Φ dV = A Φ · n dA (A.20) V Note the strange notation of “Σ” which refers to the area. This subset can further produces several interesting identities. x2 .edu/mathews/c2003/HarmonicFunctionMod. Many engineering class present this theorem as a theorem on its merit without realizing that it is a subset of Reynolds Transport Theorem. 1862). A.html .21) Since the definition of Φ = N . This theorem is applicable for a fix control volume and the derivative can enters into the integral. For example. The notation is a bit different from Gauss and it is written in Ostrogradsky notation as ∂Q ∂R ∂P + + ∂x ∂y ∂z dx dy dz = Σ (P p + Qq + Rr) dΣ (A. 1801 – January 1.

the chain role is applicable. the most interesting is U d dU R (R × U ) = U × U + R × dt dt (A. Yet.1 Orthogonal Coordinates These vectors operations can appear in different orthogonal coordinates system. Similarly.25) (A.24) (A. As in operation on scalar time derivative of dot or cross of constant velocity is zero. The results of operations of two vectors is similar to regular multiplication since the vectors operation obey “regular” addition and multiplication roles.A. The second part is zero because Newton law (acceleration is along the path of R). A. Parabolic cylindrical coordinates Paraboloidal coordinates.23) The first part is zero because the cross product with itself is zero. Hence the chain role apply for dot operation. Spherical coordinates. it can done for the cross product. Oblate spheroidal coordinates. Parabolic coordinates. VECTORS R · S = (xˆ + y 2 ˆ · (sin xˆ + exp(y)ˆ can be written as i j) i j) R d (R · S ) d = dt dt It can be noticed that d x sin x + y 2 exp(y) R d (R · S ) = = dt dt dx d sin x d y 2 d y2 sin x + + exp(y) + exp(y) dt dt dt dt xˆ + y 2 ˆ · sin xˆ + exp(y)ˆ i j i j 369 It can be noticed that the manipulation of the simple above example obeys the regular chain role. Elliptic . Prolate spheroidal coordinates.3. Cylindrical coordinates.1. R S d dR dS R (R · S ) = ·S + ·R dt dt dt And the the chain role for the cross operation is R S d dR dS R (R × S ) = ×S + ×R dt dt dt It follows that derivative (notice the similarity to scalar operations) of d dR R (R · R ) = 2 R dt at There are several identities that related to location. velocity.1. There are several orthogonal coordinates which appears in fluid mechanics operation which include this list: Cartesian coordinates. Ellipsoidal coordinates. and acceleration.

x these coordinate were introduced for geometrical problems about 2000 years ago3 . Three common systems typical to fluid mechanics will be presented and followed by a table and methods to present all the above equations.28) The gradient in cylindrical coordinates is given by =r ∂ 1 ∂ ∂ +θ +z ∂r r ∂θ ∂z (A.uk/Extras/Coolidge Polars.27) The line element and volume element are ds = dr2 + (r dθ) + dz 2 2 dr r dθ dz (A. These three different rs are some what similar to any of the Cartesian coordinate. Because there are so many coordinates system is reasonable to develop these operations for any for any coordinates system. and z. because probθ x lem is reduced a two dimensions. The meaning of − r and r are different. Cylindrical Coordinates The cylindrical coordinates are commonz ality used in situations where there is line of e1 symmetry or kind of symmetry. The second coordinate θ has unite coordinate θ. The conversion between the Cartesian coordinate and the Cylindrical is r= x2 + y 2 θ = arctan y x y z=z (A. The cylindrical coordinates are shown in Figure A. the figure shows that the coordinates are r. These coordinates rer θ r duced the work. Flat-ring cyclide coordinates. Bi-cyclide coordinates and Cap-cyclide coordinates. Bispherical coordinates. Bipolar cylindrical coordinates Conical coordinates. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS cylindrical coordinates. θ. Cylindrical Coordinate System. In Fig.st-and.html. θ.29) 3 Coolidge. Historically. r. The coordinate θ is angle.3.mcs. . http://www-history. Conversation of the angel to units of length is done by length factor which is. This kind sity uations occur in pipe flow even if the pipe is not exactly symmetrical.3. -A. The first one represents the vector that is the direction of r while the second is the unit vector in the direction of the coordinate r.ac.370 APPENDIX A. American Mathematical Monthly 59: 7885. Toroidal coordinates. Note that unite coordinates are denoted as r.26) The reverse transformation is x = r cos θ y = r sin θ z=z (A. in most cases. → and z. Note the advantage of cylindrical (polar) coordinates in description of geometry or location relative to a center point. The new concept here is the length factor. Flat-disk cyclide coordinates. ”The Origin of Polar Coordinates”. Julian (1952). In this book the dimensional chapter shows that in physics that derivatives have to have same units in order to compare them or use them. in this case.

boom explosion.4.37) .35) The gradient is =r ∂ ∂ ˆ1 ∂ + φ 1 +θ ∂r r ∂θ r sin θ ∂φ (A. The conversion between Cartesian coordinates to Spherical coordinates x = r sin φ cos θ The reversed transformation is r= x2 + y 2 + z 2 φ = arccos z r (A.36) The divergence in spherical coordinate is ·N = 1 ∂ r2 Nr 1 ∂ (Nθ sin θ) 1 ∂Nφ + + r2 ∂r r sin θ ∂θ r sin θ ∂φ (A.A. sound wave propagax tion etc. A location is represented by a radius and two angles.1. The second angle is between the positive y–axis and the vector as shown in Figure A.33) Line element and element volume are ds = dr2 + (r cos θ dθ) + (r sin θ dφ) 2 2 dV = r2 sin θ dr dθ dφ (A. -A. 0 < θ < 2 π while the second angle (colatitude) is only 0 < φ < π. In fluid y mechanics such situations exist in bubble dynamics. Note that the first angle (azimuth or longitude) θ range is between Fig.31) (A.4.30) (A. The radius is the distance between the origin and the location. VECTORS The curl is written ×N = 1 ∂Nz ∂Nθ − r ∂θ ∂z 1 r The Laplacian is defined by · = 1 ∂ r ∂r r ∂ ∂r + 1 ∂2 ∂2 + 2 2 ∂θ 2 r ∂z r+ ∂Nr ∂Nz − ∂z ∂r ∂ (r Nθ ) ∂Nθ − ∂r ∂θ θ+ z 371 (A. The first angle between projection on x − y plane and the positive x–axis. Spherical system used for z y x θ cases where spherical symmetry exist. Spherical Coordinate System.34) y = r sin φ sin θ z = r cos φ (A.32) Spherical Coordinates z The spherical coordinates system is a φ r three-dimensional coordinates which is imθ provement or further modifications of the cylinφ r drical coordinates.

40) The nabla operator in general orthogonal coordinates is = e1 ∂ e2 ∂ e3 ∂ + + 1 2 h1 ∂q h2 ∂q h3 ∂q 3 (A. The units r and z are units ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ with length. The length of d d 2 = i=1 hk dq k 2 (A. and z . the proper notation for these coefficients. However. Since it is engineering book the h is adapted. -A.2.372 APPENDIX A. The general Orthogonal is r. The derivative quantity will be denoted by q superscript. While the θ is the same the meaning is different and different notations need.5.41) Gradient The gradient in general coordinate for a scalar function T is the nabla operator in general orthogonal coordinates as T = T T T e1 ∂T e2 ∂T e3 ∂T + + h1 ∂q 1 h2 ∂q 2 h3 ∂q 3 (A. the unit vectors are: r. θ is lengthens unit vector and the coordinate distance coefficient in this case Fig.39) General Orthogonal Coordinates There are several orthogonal system and general form is needed. The coordinates distance coefficient is in ase cre in e2 the change the differential to the actual distance. there is dispute what with unit vectors.42) . Also note that the derivative of the coordinate in the case of cylindrical coordinate is ∂θ and unit ˆ vector is θ. For example in cylindrical coordinates.38) ˆ φ The Laplacian in spherical coordinates is 2 = r2 + sin θ + (A. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS The curl in spherical coordinates is ×N = 1 r sin θ 1 r 1 ∂ r2 ∂r ∂ (Nφ sin θ) ∂Nθ − ∂θ ∂φ 1 ∂Nr ∂ (rNφ ) − sin θ ∂φ ∂r ∂ ∂r 1 ∂ 2 sin θ ∂θ r r+ ˆ 1 ˆ θ + r ∂ ∂θ ∂ (rNθ ) ∂Nr − ∂r ∂θ 1 ∂2 r2 sin2 θ ∂φ2 (A. θ. As in almost all cases.3. The notation for the presentation is required general notation of the units vectors is ei and coordinates distance coefficient is hi where 1 e1 q i is 1. In mathematics it is denoted as q while in engineering is denotes h.

6. 2 φ= + + Fig.43) For general orthogonal coordinate system the curl is ∂ e1 ∂ (h3 N3 ) − 3 (h2 N2 ) + 2 h2 h3 ∂q ∂q ∂ ∂ e3 ∂ ∂ (h1 N1 ) − 1 (h3 N3 ) + (h2 N2 ) − 2 (h1 N1 ) 3 1 ∂q ∂q h1 h2 ∂q ∂q ×N = e2 h3 h1 (A. Parabolic coordinates by user WillowW using Blender.44) The Laplacian of a scalar equals 1 ∂ h1 h2 h3 ∂q 1 h2 h3 ∂φ h1 ∂q 1 ∂ ∂q 2 h3 h1 ∂φ h2 ∂q 2 ∂ ∂q 3 h1 h2 ∂φ h3 ∂q 3 (A. 1 h1 h2 h3 ∂q ∂q ∂q 373 (A.45) The following table showing the different values for selected orthogonal system. . -A.1. VECTORS The divergence of a vector equals ·N = 1 ∂ ∂ ∂ (N1 h2 h3 ) + 2 (N2 h3 h1 ) + 3 (N3 h1 h2 ) .A.

there is no physical meaning to such a product according to this author believe.1.47) 4 Note that mathematically. Or this dt dy2 operation on y2 is dt + y2 and the summation of operation the sum operation of +y L(y1 + y2 ) = y1dt 2 + y1 + y2 .g.2 Ordinary Differential Equations (ODE) In this section a brief summary of ODE is presented. However.t dt =0 (A.374 APPENDIX A. It is not intent to be a replacement to a standard textbook but as a quick reference.46) d An example of such linear operation L = dt + 1 acting on y is dy1 + y1 . . The most general form is f u.1 First Order Differential Equations As expect. du . The first order equations have several forms and there is no one solution fit all but families of solutions. A. the first ODEs are easier to solve and they are the base for equations of higher order equation. If the highest derivative is first order the equation is referred as first order differential equation etc. It is suggested that the reader interested in depth information should read “Differential Equations and Boundary Value Problems” by Boyce de–Prima or any other book in this area. second derivative etc4 . it is possible to define fraction of derivative. Note that the derivatives are integers e. ODE are categorized into linear and non-linear equations. Ordinary differential equations are defined by the order of the highest derivative. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS Table -A. The meaning of linear equation is that the operation is such that a L (u1 ) + b L (u2 ) = L (a u1 + b u2 ) (A. first derivative. Orthogonal coordinates systems (under construction please ignore) Orthogonal coordinates systems name Cartesian Cylindrical Spherical Paraboloidal Ellipsoidal Remarks 1 standard common common ? ? √ 1 1 1 u2 + v 2 √ h 2 1 r r u2 + v 2 3 1 1 r cos θ uv 1 x r r u λ q 2 y θ θ v µ 3 z z ϕ θ ν A.2.

2. (1.50) The limits of the integral is (are) the initial condition(s). Example A. In that case it is said that F is spreadable and then equation (A.I.c) can be transferred to u = c et For the initial condition of u(0) = u0 then u = u0 et End Solution 2 2 (1.I.I. u) = X(t) U (u). ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (ODE) Sometimes equation (A.b) becomes du = u t dt =⇒ ln (u) + ln (c) = t2 2 (1.2 Variables Separation or Segregation In some cases equation (A.I.49) Equation can be integrated either analytically or numerically and the solution is du = U (u) X(t)dt (A.a) Solution The solution can be obtained by the variable separation method.47) can be simplified to the first form as du = F (t. The separation yields du = t dt u The integration of equation (1. The name initial condition is used because the values are given commonly at initial time. The initial condition is the value the function has at some points.I.c) (1.1: Solve the following equation du = ut dt with the initial condition u(t = 0) = u0 .48) A.2.I.b) Equation (1.I.d) (1. u) dt 375 (A.48) can be written as du = X(t)dt U (u) (A.e) .A.48) can be written as F (t.

Thus equation (A.59) N (x) A special case of g(t) = constant is shown next.376 A.57) e R g(x)dx (A. .52) (A.54) is integrated to be ln (N (x)) = g(x)dx =⇒ N (x) = e g(x)dx (A.56) which indeed satisfy equation (A.2.52) becomes d [N (x) g(x) y] = N (x) m(x) dx Multiplying equation (A.51) by unknown function N (x) transformed it to N (x) dy + N (x) g(x) y = N (x)m(x) dx (A. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS The Integral Factor Equations Another method is referred to as integration factor which deals with a limited but very important class of equations. This family is part of a linear equations.51) What is needed from N (x) is to provide a full differential such as N (x) dy d [N (x) g(x) y] + N (x) g(x) y = dx dx (A.2.1 APPENDIX A. The general form of the equation is dy + g(x) y = m(x) dx Multiplying equation (A.55) (A.53).53) This condition (note that the previous methods is employed here) requires that d N (x) d N (x) = N (x) g(x) =⇒ = g(x) dx dx N (x) Equation (A.58) (A.57) by dx and integrating results in N (x) g(x) y = The solution is then N (x) m(x) dx y= g(x) N (x) m(x) dx (A.54) Using the differentiation chain rule provides dv du du dx d N (x) =e dx g(x)dx g(x) (A.

A. This equation is non–linear part du + m(t)u = n(t) dt up (A. Many non linear equations can be transformed into linear equations and then solved with the linear equation techniques.3 Non–Linear Equations Non-Linear equations are equations that the power of the function or the function derivative is not equal to one or their combination.62) Example A. One such equation family is referred in the literature as the Bernoulli Equations5 .2: Find the solution for a typical problem in fluid mechanics (the problem of Stoke flow or the parachute problem) of dy +y =1 dx Solution Substituting m(x) = 1 and g(x) = 1 into equation (A. The actual solution is obtained by reversed equation which transferred solution to u = v (p−1) (A.61) The linearized equation can be solved using the linear methods.3: Solve the following Bernoulli equation du + t2 u = sin(t) u3 dt 5 Not (1.59) provides y = e−x (ex + c) = 1 + c e−x End Solution A. ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (ODE) 377 Example A. .60) into a linear equation which is dv + (1 − p) m(t) v = (1 − p) n(t) dt (A.a) to be confused with the Bernoulli equation without the s that referred to the energy equation.2.III.2.60) The transformation v = u1−p turns equation (A.

III.1 Homogeneous Equations Homogeneous function is given as du = f (u.IV.63) into t dv + v = f (1. v) dt (A. For this case.e) private solution u= e e  t3   3 sin (t) dt +c End Solution A.65) Example A.4: Solve the equation du u = sin + dt t u4 − t4 t4 (1.c) (1.III. The solution is then ln |t| = dv +c f (1.III. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS v = u2 (1.378 Solution The transformation is APPENDIX A. a t) dt (A.a) .c) is u(t) = ce And the general solution is  t3  − 3   −t3 3 1−p 1−p (1.b) Using the definition (1. t) = f (a u.d)  (1.III.63) for any real positive a.a) becomes dv −2 t2 v = −2 sin(t) dt The homogeneous solution of equation (1.III.III. v) − v (A.III.2.b) equation (1.3.64) In another words if the substitution u = v t is inserted the function f become a function of only v it is homogeneous function. the transformation of u = v t transforms equation (A. Example of such case u = u3 − t3 /t3 becomes u = v 3 + 1 .

d) (1.e) A. End Solution (1.V. In fact.5: Solve the following ODE du = −u2 t2 dt (1.2 Variables Separable Equations In fluid mechanics and many other fields there are differential equations that referred to variables separable equations. ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (ODE) Solution Substituting u = v T yields du = sin (v) + v 4 − 1 dt 379 (1.67) g(u) Example A. this kind of class of equations appears all over this book.66) The main point is that f (t) and be segregated from g(u).IV.IV.d) results in dv t2 = +c sin (v) + v 4 − 1 − v 2 The initial condition can be inserted via the boundary of the integral.IV. The solution of this kind of equation is du = f (t) dt (A.b) (1.c) or dv dv + v = sin (v) + v 4 − 1 =⇒ t = sin (v) + v 4 − 1 − v dt dt Now equation (1.a) Solution Segregating the variables to be du = u2 t2 dt (1.IV.IV. For this sort equations.2.2.V. it can be written that du = f (t)g(u) dt (A.b) .c) can be solved by variable separation as t dv = t dt sin (v) + v 4 − 1 − v Integrating equation (1.IV.3.A.

3 Other Equations There are equations or methods that were not covered by the above methods.4 Second Order Differential Equations The general idea of solving second order ODE is by converting them into first order ODE.V. and perturbation methods.c) becomes u= t3 −3 +c (1.69) If b2 > 4 a c then there are two unique solutions for the quadratic equation and the general solution form is u = c1 es1 t + c2 es2 t For the case of b2 = 4 a c the general solution is u = c1 es1 t + c2 t es1 t (A. A.380 APPENDIX A.d) End Solution A.V.68) In a way. Many of these methods will be eventually covered by this appendix. Practically. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS Integrating equation (1. the solution of the quadratic equation is a complex number which means that the solution has exponential and trigonometric functions as u = c1 eα t cos(βt) + c2 eα t sin(βt) (A.70) In the case of b2 > 4 a c. variable substitutions. the second order ODE is transferred to first order by substituting the one linear operator to two first linear operators.2. it is done by substituting est where s is characteristic constant and results in the quadratic equation a s2 + b s + s = 0 (A. transformation (like Laplace transform).71) (A.V. One such case is the second order ODE with constant coefficients.c) Rearranging equation (1.V.3. The simplest equations are with constant coefficients such as a d2 u du +b + cu = 0 dt2 dt (A.b) transformed into − 1 t3 = + c1 u 3 (1.2.72) . There are additional methods such numerical analysis.

the solution is u = k1 e−2 t + k2 e−5 t End Solution (1.VI.1 Non–Homogeneous Second ODE Homogeneous equation are equations that equal to zero.75) +b + c u = l(x) dt2 dt The solution of the homogeneous equation is zero that is the operation L(uh ) = 0. ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (ODE) Where the real part is α= and the imaginary number is β= √ −b 2a 381 (A. .76) Where the solution uh is the solution of the homogeneous solution and up is the solution of the particular function l(x).b) are −2.VI. and −5.c) A.VI. The additional solution of L(up ) is the total solution as a =0 L (utotal ) = L (uh ) +L (up ) =⇒ utotal = uh + up (A.2.VI. Equations that not equal to zero in this form d2 u du (A. where L is Linear operator. This fact can be used to solve non-homogeneous equation.74) Example A.a) Solution The characteristic equation is s2 + 7 s + 10 = 0 The solution of equation (1.4.6: Solve the following ODE d2 u du +7 + 10 u = 0 dt2 dt (1. Thus.A.77) The linearity of the operation creates the possibility of adding the solutions. If the function on the right hand side is polynomial than the solution is will n utotal = uh + i=1 up i (A.2.73) 4 a c − b2 2a (A.b) (1.

VII. Hence.VII.7: Solve the non-homogeneous equation d2 u du −5 + 6 u = t + t2 dt2 dt Solution The homogeneous solution is u(t) = c1 e2 t + c1 e3 t the particular solution for t is u(t) = and the particular solution of the t2 is u(t) = The total solution is u(t) = c1 e2 t + c1 e3 t + End Solution (1. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS Example A.c) (1.a) (1. A. u.VII. u) = 0 ˙ ¨ can be written or presented in the form f1 (u)u = f2 (u) u ˙ ˙ ¨ (A.d) A.5.b) 6t + 5 36 18 t2 + 30 t + 19 108 9 t2 + 24 t + 17 54 (1. ˙ ˙ ¨ equation (A.79) .382 APPENDIX A.78) can be integrated u u ˙ v f1 (u)u = ˙ u0 u0 ˙ f2 (u) u = ˙ ¨ v0 f2 (u) v ˙ (A.2.5 Non–Linear Second Order Equations Some of the techniques that were discussed in the previous section (first order ODE) can be used for the second order ODE such as the variable separation.78) then the equation (A.1 Segregation of Derivatives If the second order equation f (u.78) is referred to as a separable equation (some called it segregated equations). The derivative of u can be treated as a new function v and v = u.2.VII.

b) After the integration equation (1. first with initial integration and second with the second integration.a) du dt du dt d2 u =0 dt2 (t = 0) = 0 What happen to the extra Thus the extra dt is disappeared and equation (1.80) Using the first order separation method yields dt = 0 u0 du     2 3 3 arcsin  u0 2 −u 2  + cos (v0 ) 3 =0 =1 (A. Note that the derivative initial condition is used once.d) can be rearranged as du = arcsin dt t u 3 3 2 u0 2 − u 2 + cos (v0 ) 3 (A. The physical reason is that the equation represents a strong effect of the function at a certain point such surface tension problems.VIII.VIII. 6 This . Example A.d) Equation (1.8: Solve the equation √ du u − sin dt With the initial condition of u(0) = 0 and “dt”? Solution Rearranging the ODE to be √ du u = sin dt & √ and transformation to v is √ u du = sin (v) dv (1. The papers are still his drawer and waiting to a spare time.81) author worked (better word toyed) in (with) this area during his master but to his shame he did not produce any papers on this issue.2.VIII.a) becomes u du = sin d (1. It can be noticed that the function initial condition is used twice. ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (ODE) 383 The integration results in a first order differential equation which should be dealt with the previous methods.VIII.c) du dt d dt & du dt du dt du dt (1.VIII. This equation family is not well discussed in mathematical textbooks6 .A.VIII.c) becomes 3 3 2 u 2 − u0 2 3 = cos (v0 ) − cos (v) = cos du0 dt − cos du dt (1.VIII.

5. u d2 u d t2 + du dt 2 =0 (A. d dt u du dt =0 (A. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS The solution (A.86) A.87) It can be noticed that that c2 is actually two different constants because the plus minus signs.384 APPENDIX A.85) + c2 (A.84) which can be solved with the previous methods.83) results in 1 dv dt =v =⇒ = v dv a dt a (A.2.3 Energy Equation ODE It is non–linear because the second derivative is square and the function multiply the second derivative.2.81) shows that initial condition of the function is used twice while the initial of the derivative is used only once.2 Full Derivative Case Equations Another example of special case or families of second order differential equations which is results of the energy integral equation derivations as u − au du dt d2u d t2 =0 (A.88) . End Solution A. One solution is u = k1 and the second solution is obtained by solving 1 = a The transform of v = du dt du dt d2u d t2 (A.5.82) where a is constant. Bifurcation to two solutions leads t 1 du + c = v 2 =⇒ =± a 2 dt which can be integrated as u= ± a 2t + c1 dt = ± a 3 2t + c1 a 3 2 2t + c1 a (A.

The solution to constant coefficients is relatively simple and will be presented here. the general solution is depend on the solution of third order polonium.IX. The general form for constant coefficient is d3 u d2 u du +a 2 +b + cu = 0 3 dt dt dt (A. This kind of differential equation has been studied in the last 30 years to some degree.2.c) A.6 Third Order Differential Equation There are situations where fluid mechanics7 leads to third order differential equation. 1999.b) (1.A. Solution to more complicate linear equations with non constant coefficient (function of t) can be solved sometimes by Laplace transform or reduction of the equation to second order Olivier Vallee8 . Thus. ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (ODE) after integration u du = k1 dt 385 (A. Example A.89) Further rearrangement and integration leads to the solution which is u2 = t + k2 2 k1 For non–homogeneous equation they can be integrated as well.IX.91) The solution is assumed to be of the form of est which general third order polonium.a) √ 3 u √ du 3 k1 − u3 √ = t + k2 2 u √ du 3 k − u3 √1 = t + k2 2 (1.2.9: Show that the solution of u is − √ 3 d2 u d t2 + du dt 2 (A. Third unsteady energy equation in accelerated coordinate leads to a third order differential equation.90) +u=0 (1. the linear third-order differential equation” Springer Berlin Heidelberg.IX. Solving Third Order Linear Differential Equations in Terms of Second Order Equations Mark van Hoeij 8 “On 7 The .

100) Only three roots can exist for the Mach angle.97) D = Q3 + R 2 and where the definitions of Q and R are Q= and R= 9a1 a2 − 27a3 − 2a1 3 54 3a2 − a1 2 9 (A.95) R+ √ D.101) . if D > 0. For the case D = 0.94) (A. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS order polonium has always one real solution. s3 + a1 s2 + a2 s + a3 = 0 The solution is 1 s1 = − a1 + (S + T ) 3 1 1 1 √ s2 = − a1 − (S + T ) + i 3(S − T ) 3 2 2 and 1 1 √ 1 s3 = − a1 − (S + T ) − i 3(S − T ) 3 2 2 Where S= 3 (A. From a mathematical point of view. θ. Thus.92) (A. (A.99) (A.93) (A.98) (A. When the characteristic equation solution has three different real roots the solution of the differential equation is u = c1 es1 t + c2 es2 t + c3 es3 t (A. derivation of the leading equation (results of the ode) is reduced into quadratic equation and thus the same situation exist. all the roots are real and unequal.96) T = and where the D is defined as 3 R− √ D (A. one root is real and two roots are complex. all the roots are real and at least two are identical. In the last case where D < 0.386 APPENDIX A.

Inserting es t into the ODE an u(n) + an−1 u(n−1) + an−2 u(n−2) + · · · + a1 u + a0 u = 0 yields characteristic equation an sn + an−1 sn−1 + an−2 sn−2 + · · · + a1 s + a0 = 0 (A.A.107) (A.109) (A.106) are the solutions of (A.107) was discussed earlier.106) and equation (A.105) d4 −1 u=0 dt4 (A. The solution of equation (A. Sometimes the ODE is fourth order or higher the general solution is based in idea that equation is reduced into a lower order.2.102) Similarly derivations for the case of three identical real roots.108) . A. the equation d4 u − u = 0 =⇒ dt4 can be written as combination of d2 −1 dt2 d2 +1 u=0 dt2 or d2 +1 dt2 d2 −1 u=0 dt2 (A. The general procedure is based on the above concept but is some what simpler. for constant coefficients ODE can be transformed into multiplication of smaller order linear operations. For example. For the case of only one real root.105).104) The order of operation is irrelevant as shown in equation (A. Generally. ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (ODE) In the case the solution to the characteristic has two identical real roots u = (c1 + c2 t) es1 t + c3 es2 t 387 (A. the solution is u = (c1 sin b1 + c2 cos b1 ) ea1 t + c3 es3 t (A.104).7 Forth and Higher Order ODE The ODE and partial differential equations (PDE) can be of any integer order.103) Where a1 is the real part of the complex root and b1 imaginary part of the root. Thus the solution of d2 +1 u=0 dt2 with the solution of d2 −1 u=0 dt2 (A.2.

388

APPENDIX A. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS If The Solution of Characteristic Equation all roots are real and different e.g. s1 = s2 = s3 = s4 · · · = sn all roots are real but some are identical e.g. s1 = s2 = · · · = sk and some different e.g. sk+1 = sk+2 = sk+3 · · · = sn k/2 roots, are pairs of conjugate complex numbers of si = ai ± bi and some real and different e.g. sk+1 = sk+2 = sk+3 · · · = sn k/2 roots, are pairs of conjugate complex numbers of si = ai ± bi , roots are similar and some real and different e.g. sk+1 = sk+2 = sk+3 · · · = sn The Solution of Differential Equation Is u = c1 es1 t + c2 es2 t + · · · + cn esn t u = c1 + c2 t + · · · + ck tk−1 es1 t + ck+1 esk+1 t + ck+2 esk+2 t + · · · + cn esn t u = (cos(b1 t) + sin(b1 t)) ea1 t + · · · + (cos(bi t) + sin(bi t)) eai t + · · · + (cos(bk t) + sin(bk t)) eak t + ck+1 esk+1 t + ck+2 esk+2 t + · · · + cn esn t u = (cos(b1 t) + sin(b1 t)) ea1 t + · · · + (cos(bi t) + sin(bi t)) eai t + · · · + (cos(bk t) + sin(bk t)) eak t + ck+1 + ck+2 t + · · · + ck+ t −1 esk+1 t + ck+2 esk+2 t + ck+3 esk+3 t + · · · + cn esn t

Example A.10: Solve the fifth order ODE d5 u d4 u d3 u d2 u du − 11 4 + 57 3 − 149 2 + 192 − 90 u = 0 5 dt dt dt dt dt Solution The characteristic equation is s5 − 11 s4 + 57 s3 − 149 s2 + 192 s − 90 = 0

(1.X.a)

(1.X.b)

With the roots of the equation (1.X.b) (these roots can be found using numerical methods or Descartes’ Rule) are s1,2 s3,4 s5 = = = 3 ± 3i 2±i 1 (1.X.c)

The roots are two pairs of complex numbers and one real number. Thus the solution is u = c1 et + e2 t (c2 sin (t) + c3 cos (t)) + e3 t (c4 sin (3 t) + c5 cos (3 t))
End Solution

(1.X.d)

A.3. PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

389

A.2.8

A general Form of the Homogeneous Equation
dn u dn−1 u du + k1 tn−1 n−1 + · · · + kn−1 t + kn u = a x dtn dt dt

The homogeneous equation can be generalized to k0 tn (A.110)

To be continue

A.3 Partial Differential Equations
Partial Differential Equations (PDE) are differential equations which include function includes the partial derivatives of two or more variables. Example of such equation is F (ut , ux , . . .) = 0 (A.111)

Where subscripts refers to derivative based on it. For example, ux = ∂u . Note that ∂x partial derivative also include mix of derivatives such as ux y. As one might expect PDE are harder to solve. Many situations in fluid mechanics can be described by PDE equations. Generally, the PDE solution is done by transforming the PDE to one or more ODE. Partial differential equations are categorized by the order of highest derivative. The nature of the solution is based whether the equation is elliptic parabolic and hyperbolic. Normally, this characterization is done for for second order. However, sometimes similar definition can be applied for other order. The physical meaning of the these definition is that these equations have different characterizations. The solution of elliptic equations depends on the boundary conditions The solution of parabolic equations depends on the boundary conditions but as well on the initial conditions. The hyperbolic equations are associated with method of characteristics because physical situations depends only on the initial conditions. The meaning for initial conditions is that of solution depends on some early points of the flow (the solution). The general second-order PDE in two independent variables has the form axx uxx + 2axy uxy + ayy uyy + · · · = 0 (A.112)

The coefficients axx , axy , ayy might depend upon ”x” and ”y”. Equation (A.112) is similar to the equations for a conic geometry: axx x2 + axy x y + ayy y 2 + · · · = 0 (A.113)

In the same manner that conic geometry equations are classified are based on the discriminant a2 − 4 axx ayy , the same can be done for a second-order PDE. The disxy criminant can be function of the x and y and thus can change sign and thus the characteristic of the equation. Generally, when the discriminant is zero the equation are called parabolic. One example of such equation is heat equation. When the discriminant

390

APPENDIX A. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS

is larger then zero the equation is referred as hyperbolic equations. In fluid mechanics this kind equation appear in supersonic flow or in supper critical flow in open channel flow. The equations that not mentioned above are elliptic which appear in ideal flow and subsonic flow and sub critical open channel flow.

A.3.1

First-order equations

First order equation can be written as u = ax ∂u ∂u + ay + ... ∂x ∂x (A.114)

The interpretation the equation characteristic is complicated. However, the physics dictates this character and will be used in the book. An example of first order equation is ∂u ∂u + =0 ∂x ∂y (A.115)

The solution is assume to be u = Y (y) X(x) and substitute into the (A.115) results in Y (y) ∂X(x) ∂Y (y) + X(x) =0 ∂x ∂y (A.116)

Rearranging equation (A.116) yields 1 ∂X(x) 1 ∂Y (y) + =0 X(x) ∂x Y (y) ∂y (A.117)

A possible way the equation (A.117) can exist is that these two term equal to a constant. Is it possible that these terms not equal to a constant? The answer is no if the assumption of the solution is correct. If it turned that assumption is wrong the ratio is not constant. Hence, the constant is denoted as λ and with this definition the PDE is reduced into two ODE. The first equation is X function 1 ∂X(x) =λ X(x) ∂x The second ODE is for Y 1 ∂Y (y) = −λ Y (y) ∂y (A.119) (A.118)

Equations (A.119) and (A.118) are ODE that can be solved with the methods described before for certain boundary condition.

A.4. TRIGONOMETRY

391

A.4 Trigonometry
These trigonometrical identities were set up by Keone Hon with slight modification 1. sin(α + β) = sin α cos β + sin β cos α 2. sin(α − β) = sin α cos β − sin β cos α 3. cos(α + β) = cos α cos β − sin α sin β 4. cos(α − β) = cos α cos β + sin α sin β 5. tan(α + β) = 6. tan(α − β) = tan α + tan β 1 − tan α tan β

tan α − tan β 1 + tan α tan β 1. sin 2α = 2 sin α cos α 2. cos 2α = cos2 x − sin2 x = 2 cos2 x − 1 = 1 − 2 sin2 x 2 tan α 3. tan 2α = 1 − tan2 α 4. sin α 1 − cos α =± (determine whether it is + or - by finding the quadrant 2 2 α that lies in) 2

α 1 + cos α =± (same as above) 2 2 α 1 − cos α sin α 6. tan = = 2 sin α 1 + cos α for formulas 3-6, consider the triangle with sides of length a, b, and c, and opposite angles α, β, and γ, respectively 5. cos 1 − 2 cos(2α) 2 1 + 2 cos(2α) 2. cos2 α = 2 sin α sin β sin γ 3. = = (Law of Sines) a b c 1. sin2 α = 4. c2 = a2 + b2 − 2 a b cos γ (Law of Cosines) 5. Area of triangle = 1 a b sin γ 2 6. Area of triangle = s(s − a)(s − b)(s − c), a+b+c (Heron’s Formula) where s = 2

β a c

γ b

α

Fig. -A.7. The tringle angles sides.

392

APPENDIX A. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS

SUBJECTS INDEX

393

Subjects Index
Symbols
π–theory, 279 buoyant force, 87, 125

A
absolute viscosity, 7, 8, 12 Accelerated system, 92 Acceleration direct derivative, 244 Acceleration, angular, 94 Add Force, 232 Add mass, 190, 232 Add momentum, 190 Aeronautics, 4 Arc shape, 111 Archimedes, 3 Archimedes number, 315 Area direction, 5 Atmospheric pressure, 77 Atwood number, 315 Averaged kinetic energy, 207 Averaged momentum energy, 207 Averaged momentum velocity, 179 Averaged velocity concentric cylinders, 270 Correction factor, 207 Integral Analysis, 190 Integral analysis, 192 Avi number, 312

C
Capillary number, 319 Capillary numbers, 315 Cauchy number, 315 Cavitation number, 315 Co–current flow, 335 Compressibility factor, 81, 91 Concentrating surfaces raise, 37 Conduction, 202 Conservative force, 217 Convection, 202 Convective acceleration, 245 Correction factor, 86 Counter–current Pulse flow, 352 Counter–current flow, 335, 351 Annular flow, 353 Extended Open channel flow, 353 Courant number, 315 Cut–out shapes, 109 Cylindrical Coordinates, 233

D
D’Alembert paradox, 4 d‘Alembertian Operator, 367 Dean number, 315 Deborah number, 315 Deformable control volume, 148 Density, 6 definition, 6 Density ratio, 86, 129 Differential analysis, 231 dilettante, 11 Dimension matrix, 299 Dimensional analysis, 279 Basic units, 281 Parameters, 283 Typical parameters, 314 Dimensional matrix, 293 Dimensionless

B
Basic units, 288 Bernoulli’s equation, 213, 222 Bingham’s model, 11 Body force, 71, 72, 74, 87, 89 effective, 73 Bond number, 315 Boundary Layer, 161 Brinkman number, 315 Buckingham’s theorem, 286 Bulk modulus, 317 bulk modulus, 24, 26 Bulk modulus of mixtures, 31 buoyancy, 3, 115, 117

394

APPENDIX A. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS Gas dynamics, 4 Gas–gas flow, 334 Gauss-Ostrogradsky Theorem, 368 Geometric similarity, 300 Grashof number, 316 Gravity varying Ideal gas, 89 Real gas, 90

Naturally, 289 Divergence Theorem, 368 Double choking phenomenon, 337 Drag coefficient, 315 Dynamics similarity, 301

E
Eckert number, 315 Ekman number, 316 Energy conservation, 201 Energy Equation Linear accelerate System, 217 Rotating Coordinate System, 219 Accelerated System, 217 Energy equation Frictionless Flow, 216 Simplified equations, 220 Steady State, 215 Euler equations, 231 Euler number, 316, 320 External forces, 176

H
Harmonic function, 368 horizontal counter–current flow, 353 Horizontal flow, 335 Hydraulics, 4 Hydraulics system, 33 Hydrodynamics, 4 Hydrostatic pressure, 71, 112

I
Ideal gas, 81 Inclined manometer, 80 Indexical form, 285 Initial condition, 375 Integral analysis big picture, 166 small picture, 166 Integral equation, 29 Interfacial instability, 232 Inverted manometer, 81 Isotropic viscosity, 252

F
First Law of Thermodynamics, 201 Fixed fluidized bed, 349 Flow first mode, 268 Flow out tank, 204 Flow rate concentric cylinders, 270 Flow regime map, 332 Flow regimes in one pipe, 336 Fluid Statics Geological system, 96 Fluids kinds gas, liquid, 5 Forces Curved surfaces, 108 Fourier law, 202 Free expansion, 87–89 Froude number, 316 rotating, 321 Fully fluidized bed, 349

K
Kinematic, 3 Kinematic boundary condition, 261 Kinematic similarity, 301 kinematic viscosity, 11 Kolmogorov time, 317

L
Laplace Constant, 316 Laplace number, 321 Lapse rate, 89 Leibniz integral rule, 158 Lift coefficient, 316 Limitation of the integral approach, 214

G
Galileo number, 316, 321

SUBJECTS INDEX Linear acceleration, 92 Linear operations, 374 Liquid phase, 83 Liquid–Liquid Regimes, 334 Local acceleration, 245 Lockhart martinelli model, 346

395

O
Ohnesorge number, 321 Open channel flow, 335 Orthogonal Coordinates, 369 Oscillating manometer, 214 Ozer number, 316

M
Mach number, 316 “Magnification factor”, 80 Marangoni number, 316 Mass velocity, 340 Metacentric point, 127 Micro fluids, 258 Minimum velocity solid–liquid flow, 348 Mixed fluidized bed, 349 Momentum Conservation, 175 Momentum conservation, 245 Momentum equation Accelerated system, 177 index notation, 250 Morton number, 316 Moving boundary, 261 Moving surface Free surface, 261 Moving surface, constant of integration, 262 Multi–phase flow, 331 Multiphase flow against the gravity, 338

P
Pendulum action, 136 Pendulum problem, 284 Piezometric pressure, 74 Pneumatic conveying, 349 Poiseuille flow, 267 Concentric cylinders, 268 Polynomial function, 113 Prandtl number, 317 Pressure center, 104, 105 pseudoplastic, 11 Pulse flow, 352 purely viscous fluids, 11 Pushka equaiton expantion, 96 Pushka equation, 27, 91, 98

R
Radiation, 202 Rayleigh–Taylor instability, 137, 335 Real gas, 81 Return path for flow regimes, 337 Reynolds number, 317, 318 Reynolds Transport Theorem, 158 Divergence Theorem, 368 Rocket mechanics, 186 Rossby number, 317

N
Navier Stokes equations solution, 4 Navier–Stokes equations, 231, 302 Neutral moment Zero moment, 125 Neutral stable, 89, 125, 138, 139 Newtonian fluids, 1, 8 No–slip condition, 260 Non–deformable control volume, 148 Non–Linear Equations, 377 Normal stress, 253 Nusselt number, 311 Nusselt’s dimensionless technique, 304

S
Scalar function, 72, 108 Second Law of Thermodynamics, 216 Second viscosity coefficient, 257 Segregated equations, 382 Shear number, 317 Shear stress initial definition, 7 shear stress, 6 Similitude, 281, 300

396

APPENDIX A. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS

Slip condition range, 260 Solid–fluid flow Gas dynamics aspects, 350 Solid–fluid flow, 347 Solid–liquid flow, 347 Solid–solid flow, 334 Spherical coordinates, 91 Spherical volume, 123 Stability analysis, 87 stability analysis, 88, 115 cubic, 125 Stability in counter–current flow, 353 Stable condition, 87, 135 Stokes number, 317 stratified flow, 335 Stress tensor, 246 Cartesian coordinates, 246 symmetry, 246, 249 transformation, 246 Strouhal number, 317 substantial derivative, 244 Superficial velocity, 336 Sutherland’s equation, 12

U
Unstable condition, 87 Unsteady State Momentum, 185

V
Vapor pressure, 77 Variables Separation 1st equation, 379 Vectors, 363 Vectors Algebra, 364 Vertical counter–current flow, 352 Vertical flow, 335 Viscosity, 9 von Karman vortex street, 318

W
Watson’s method, 19 Wave Operator, 367 Weber number, 317, 319 Westinghouse patent, 334

Y
Young modulus, 317

T
Tank emptying parameters, 211 Taylor number, 317 Terminal velocity, 348 Thermal pressure, 258 Thermodynamical pressure, 257 thixotropic, 11 Torricelli’s equation, 213 Total moment, 99 Transformation matrix, 246 Transition to continuous, 175 Triangle shape, 111, 118 Turbomachinary, 193 Two–Phase Gas superficial velocity, 341 Liquid holdup, 341 Quality of dryness, 341 Reversal flow, 354 Slip velocity, 341 Void Fraction, 341 Wetness fraction, 341

267 Poisseuille. 4 Rayleigh. 4 Martinelli. 368 R Rankine. J. 4 Brahms. 385 P Pierre-Simon Laplace. 345 Dupuit. 4 Poisson. 317 Reynolds. 4 H Hagen. 4 L La Grange. 4 Helmholtz. 158 Lockhart. 345 Coulomb. 213 O Olivier Vallee. 280 . 4 Nusselt. 368 Poiseuille. 4 S Schmidt. 332. 4 Kutta-Joukowski. 4 Helmhoitz. 280 Meye. 280 Reiner. 332 Maxwell. 281 Kirchhoff. 271. 280.AUTHORS INDEX 397 Authors Index B Bhuckingham. 320 Evangelista Torricelli. Jean Louis. Carl Friedrich. 281 E Euler.. 4 Mikhail Vasilievich Ostrogradsky. 4 Duckler. 281 Riabouchunsky. 280 G Ganguillet.. Leonahard. 4 Buckingham. 280 Nikuradse. 4 Cichilli. 279 Smeaton. 4 Darcy. Osborne. 158. Simon-Denis. 4 K Kelvin. 4 N Navier. John. 279. 231 Newton. 4 Fourier Jean B. 4 Euler. 4. 4 Fanning. 137. 4 Blasiu. 4 Blasius. M. 4. Hermann von. 4 de Saint Venant. 281 Rose. Barr´. Claude–Louis. 279. 280 Froude. 231 Prandtl. 231 e Dubuat. Ernst Kraft Wilhelm. William. 332 C Chezy. 4 Bossut. 4 Gauss. 4 M Manning. 368 D d’Aubisson. 4 Leibniz. 4 F Fabre.

Vincenz.. 4 W Weisbach. Evangelista.I. 326 T Taitle. 4 Stokes. 231 Strouhal. 280 e Von Karman. George Gabriel. 332 Taylor. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS Stanton. 318 von Karman. 4 Westinghouse.398 APPENDIX A. 213 V Vaschy. 334 . G. 137 Torricelli.Aim´em.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful